A Mandarin Primer (1911)

A
MANDARIN PRIMER
BY
W.
F.
BALLER
PREPARED FOR THE USE OF JUNIOR MEMBERS OF THE CHINA INLAND MISSION
EIGHTH
EDITION
Revised and Enlarged
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THE CHINA INLAND MISSION
LONDON, PHILADELPHIA, TORONTO, MELBOURNE, SHANGHAI
MORGAN & SCOTT,
LTD.,
12
PATERNOSTER BUILDINGS, LONDON,
vSHANGHAI
CHINA INLAND MISSION AND PRESBYTERIAN MISSION PRESS
:
191
E. C.
AUG
'
PL
1964
yi83Gl
im
PREFACE TO EIGHTH EDITION.
SINCE the
great
first
edition of this
book was printed
changes have taken place in China.
in 1878,
The
old
system of education has been discarded and Western standards have been adopted in
large
number
made
it
of
new
its
place.
This has brought a
expressions into existence and has
who study Chinese

new and enlarged vocabulary. With a view
necessary for foreigners
acquire a
meet these fresh requirements the book has been

and the Lessons
re-cast.
to
to
re- written
Full details are given in the
Introduction, to which the reader
is
referred.
INTRODUCTION.
PLAN AND SCOPE.
book
Tin-
vanced,
addition
and
explained
idioms- are dealt
with,, in
illustrated,
and
phrases,
relating to various- subjects arc given.
In Part
I.,
end
Part
in
in
of each Lesson, the
The Lesson thus
are added.
tions of
at the
Elementary, AdIll Part I.

simple
vi/.,
III. these are
Part
and
\vords
of
Parts,
and Miscellaneous.
Supplementary
are
idioms
four
divided into
is
II.
more
difficult
supplemented by the
Part
IV. vocabularies
words " See Lesson
referred to contains further illustra-
many words and phrases already given.
By
this arrange-
ment the beginner is not bewildered in the early stages of his studies
with matter of which lie can make no use, but is put ill possession
of
much
by
it.
useful
material at a time
when he
is
in a position to profit
Reading Lessons follow every Exercise and Vocabulary.
These
arc intended to help to a good style in speaking and to make the

study of the language more interesting. Idiom needs to be absorbed
The subjects treated of in these Reading Lessons cover
hij reading*
a
wide range, and
in
in
many
cases have been treated in a light vein
order to create and sustain interest.
Some
expressions used in
them arc not in the nature of the case everywhere current; the
bonk could not be written that would meet local
requirements
in whole
But it should not be difficult
Mandarin-speaking area.
any teacher of average intelligence to give the local equivalent
Foot notes have been added to elucidate
any given expression.
difficult idioms, and words that occur later in the
book have been
for
of
make
inserted to
Sii.-l,
t<-ll
the sense complete, or to secure a better sentence.
words are followed

L.' or
by
V./ which refer to the
'M or
in
which they occur.
As it is impossible to
Vocabulary
a
rtory without words new ones have been introduced and
<
defined
x\-l,
-e
'
''"'
>ll< "'
tlie
/
-
'
:{
n<>1
<]
"t
'I"
large vocabulary of useful words ha,wider range of

subjects made possible.
Lessons
which form a Reader students
necessary.
tlm> been
secured, and a
I>)V
<
only acquire a good idiom, but be also helped to judge

v<rd> and to see how sentences are connected.
They
IV
INTRODUCTION.
should be read and re-read, and in part committed to memory, till
a faulty sentence grates on the ear like a discord in the midst of
harmony.
teacher,
The Chinese titles have been added for the benefit of the
and the student should leave them severely alone till
he has finished Part III.
A Review
Xo
Kxercise
translation of the
is
added
Examples
is
at
the end of every five Lessons.
given, as
it
should not be
difficult
for the student, with the aid of his teacher, to judge of the accuracy
of his
work.
Writing Exercise
conviction that
is
that
it is
to
will be a great benefit to
it
Chinese as well as to read

order of Strokes
appended
"
to be able to write
many
Such should read " Writing with
it.
on page xxv.
from the
Lesson
each
'
R. following a character indicates
a Radical.
The Tones
are
edition
tins
in
marked
as
in
Author's
the
American PresAnalytical Chinese-English Dictionary (Shanghai

is in the fifth tone or
\Yhere
a
word
Press.)
JJ, it is
byterian
:
'h' in the spelling, and the Peking

the
side
of
the character also.
The figures 1,
placed by
stand for _ 2p,
and
)f|, respectively.
Zp, j^ ;fj,
indicated
by
final
tone
is
o,
4,
2,
of the New Literature, names of persons

a single line at the side, names of places
Following the usage

have been marked
witli
with a double one.

Parts
I., II.
and
III. are also printed as a separate
volume on
Chinese paper and published as a companion volume.

This is done
to furnish the student with a needfid but inexpensive copy for the
use of his teacher.
The Lessons have been
divided into
headings for convenience of reference
end
of the book.
By
this
and a
under subIndex added at the
paragraphsfull
means any idiom or construction may be
referred to with ease.
The
Exercises for Translation, and Key to them, are intended

material for translation from English into Chinese and
rci-xa.
Translate the English to the teacher in Chinese and
to furnish
rice
him correct it by the Key then reverse the

process, and by
means of the Key, test the accuracy of the translation into English.
let
This will give
facility in
words and idioms
aright.
translation
and develop the power
to use
NT KOI) MOTION.
imaginary Dialogue with a visitor 011 Christianity

introduced, from which it is hoped the student may cull
Aii
is
also
few
In this and in all other parts of the

useful colloquial phrases.
hook the Kditor is alone responsible for all doctrinal statements.
The
small
refer to the
following
figures
numbers
the words in the
Vocabularies
of the
corresponding Xnmerary Adjuncts, of

which those more commonly in use are printed on pages 2Sl^<Si^
and also for greater convenience separately on a card.
This
arrangement enables the student

at
Xnmerary Adjunct
to see the meaning of any given

and precludes the possibility of
which it belongs.
Where two sets of
glance,
mistaking it for the word to

figures occur opposite the same
Adjuncts referred to
On
page
a H'lection of
may
word, either
be used with it.
under the Head of
J)4(5^
'
The
the
of
N itinerary
Study,' will be found

to enable the
words and sentences which are intended
Such sentences
as are most commonly needed, should be committed to memory
this will enable teacher and pupil to begin to understand each other.
student to communicate with his teacher at once.
will be as well also to call the attention of

It
" Instructions for Chinese Teachers " on
p. xxvii.
The whole work,

blessing of
of helping
in its
enlarged form,
is
the
afresh
teacher
commended
to
to
Almighty God, that He may graciously use it as a means

His servants to preach the Gospel of our Lord and only
Saviour Jesus Christ.
CHEFOO, May,
11)11.
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION
Plan and Scope
...
iv
..
...
...
Aspirates ...
Table of Aspirated and Unaspirated Sounds ...
...
...
vii
viii
Tones
viii
...
...
Exercises on the Tones...
Combinations of
...
The Romanized System

Initials and Finals
LESSONS I
to
List of
Selection of
I.
TI.
Form
of
xii
xiii
Finals
...
...
...
...
xvi
xix
Table of Radicals
Chinese Characters
... xxiii
...
Writing, with Order of Strokes, xxv
Instructions for Chinese Teacher, xxvii
1-278
for Exercise in Composition
Nnmerary Adjuncts
...
Moral and Religious Terms
...
274-280
...
...
281 2S2
Moral
28;")
Theological
Prayer
The Books
xiv
and
Initials
XXX
Words
Additional
Notes on the Table of Initials

and Finals
of the
...
...
...
...
...
...
290
...
...
...
...
...
...
298
Old Testament
299
...
New
300
Buddhism
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
301
Taoism
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
303
Dialogue with an Enquirer
...
...
...
...
...
305
Education
...
...
...
...
...
319
...
...
324
...
...
331
...
340
...
...
Some Expressions Used in Chinese Composition

The Essentials of Etiquette ...
...
...
Government
...
...
...
...
...
Commerce
...
...
...
...
...
...
The Study
The Kitchen
...
...
...
...
...
...
tt
349
...
...
...
...
...
355
...
...
...
...
...
357
...
...
...
...
...
359
...
...
...
361
...
...
...
303
340
Bedroom and Nursery

Reception
Room
...
Household Expressions
Houses and Building ...
Clothing and Colours...
Travelling
330
305
MANDARIN' PIUMER.
Hank and
...
Relationships
Some Expressions Csed

The Person
in
...
...
...
Lepd and OHieial Documents
...
309
...
371
370
Materia Medica
379
Ceoirraphical Notes
3S:>
Chief Cities of China
3S4
Chief Rivers of China
389
Tlie (Jrand Canal
The Lakes
Names
of
of
China
Some
391
392
...
of the Principal Places in
Analysis of Lessons
...
Syllable .Index to Characters
...
...
and Phrases
Index to Translation of English Sentences
China and the East.
393
...
...
...
39.">
...
...
...
403
...
ASPIRATES.
Two
once impress the student as he begins to

They differ entirely from
Aspirates and Tones.
peculiarities at
study Chinese, vi/.,

the same things in \Vestern languages, where they may be local
or may merely express surprise, horror, or any other
peculiarities,
but
have no special meaning and do not form an essential
emotion,
In Chinese, an Aspirate is a sort of explosive

part of the language.
be
heard in the case of a person who stutters
such
as
sound,
may
"
Or it may be such a
pudding, please."
sound as should be given to ( ch' in the word 'loch.'
But it must
be heard to be understood and acquired.
when be
tries
to
say
The presence or absence of an Aspirate makes as much difference to the meaning of a word, as a difference of spelling in words
of similar
sound
in English, as for instance,
the omission of an
<
h' in gay
'
<
<
air.
'
team
'
and
teem
'
or
The
kair,
Chinese, strange
the words used by foreign students to
express it (To send forth breath [ij ^J) being coined to supply the
There is nothing in the formation of a Chinese character
deficiency.
to denote whether it is aspirated or not, but in expressing its sound
to say,
in
is
have no name for
Roman
letters
it
an inverted comma usually indicates
followed throughout, thus
t'fto,
p'ing,
'/,
it.
This rule
eft'/, etc.
Since Chinese teachers have not had to teach pupils who were
a little at sea when they
ignorant of aspirates, they are naturally
the
student
should keep his ears
Hence
come to teach foreigners.
open, reproduce all the aspirates he hears, faithfully imitating his
When a teacher shakes his head and repeats a word, it is
teacher.
clear that his pupil has failed to reproduce the sound of the word
with perfect accuracy, and it will be found in most cases that the
In order to educate the ear, the following

aspirate has been omitted.
table has been drawn up.
It should be gone over again and again,
till the ear can readily distinguish between a word that is
aspirated
and one that
is
not.
vn
Table of Aspirated and Unaspirated Sounds.
eh'ang
5,
en
.
<
a.
too
TONES.
The second peculiarity of the Chinese language is the Tones.
These form a sort of rythmical chime which is not unpleasing to the
ear and which may be acquired by closely following the pronunciation of the teacher.
are an integral part of the language' and should be learnt

no sentence should be committed to memory without them.
To know them and use them aright is of great value. They give
r/m/Y/r/r/- to
speech and sharply differentiate a speaker who uses
them from one who neglects them.
A foreigner who ignores them
does not speak like a Chinese who naturally employs them all the
A preacher who has no Tones is apt to be an offence or an
time.
infliction to his
audience, who at once relegate him to the rank of a
poor speaker.
Thoroughly to know them is also of great value in
They
a> .-ucli
vm
ToNKS.
For example, the first

having to change one's dialect.
in Nanking, is
from
the same tone as
different
quite
heard in Hankow.
Hut if the student has lea nit the tones as part
of the words, he will have little difficulty, for he wilj rightly
conclude that if one word is sounded in a certain way, all me otjier
words in that tone will be sounded in the same way.
Any time
therefore given to acquiring a thorough knowledge of them will be
the event
of
tone as heard
amply repaid
later on.
The following Tables should

distinguish one tone from another
over
be read
and recognize
the
till
ear
when heard
it
can
alone.
The Tables
are of two kinds, one of which may be called

it is
since
meaningless,
simply a repetition of the same sound in
different tones ; the other, which may be called significant, is made
up of intelligible sentences. These latter should be committed to

memory, as it will then be easy to recall them and the tones at the
And the fact that they are not without significance will
same time.
make their study less monotonous than droning over a Table of
Sounds devoid of meaning.
When the tones can be reproduced
accurately, the Sound Table should be left and the study of the
Lessons begun
the various Heading Lessons are intended to furnish
exercises on the tones as well as on the study of Idiom.
There are
theoretically the
follows
five
tones
-
1.
'2.
in
same number
Upper even
Lower even
--
Southern,
in \i estern
x/td
Ascending
4.
Departing tone, or
5.
Entering tone, or
Northern,
n</-j!>
K ^p
'i
n(/
^'
f
*l
hia-p ing
H
tone, or
o.
and
These are as
in
i*~
tone, or
tone, or
four
Mandarin.
Chinese teachers mark them by small circles at the corner of

the characters, but they are marked in this
at the top right hand corner of the character,
book by
^&
figures placed
3
c.y.,
jjjjj*
etc.
In reading with'Ahe teacher raise the voice slightly

conversational pitch and avoid excessive emphasis.
Too
above
much
emphasis makes jerky Chinese* and if misplaced is apt to alter the

meaning of a sentence. Try and catch the cadence produced by the
succession of tones and by clear enunciation reproduce it
distinctly.
Discard all muttering and follow the intonation,
imitating the
teacher in all respects.
As
progress
will be easy to
reproduce phrases
degree of naturalness.
it
IX
made, and fluency acquired,

and sentences with a greater
is
Exercises on the Tones
TAIILE
I.
/;
5
;/,
Wi>'"
itfl
t'i
/y/o
y/<o
Hill
TAHI.K
SKNTKM
i-;s
11.
OF FIVE
diAHAm
us.
$ fr
Tlie cart runs in the appointed track
To have
the heart at rest
The signboard may
He
'1
$$(
great blessing fo Zp
be varnislied
fjj
hey have clieated Lao Cheilg-luh
fflj.
n]"
i|^
iljfj
complacently thought of going to the
Alas
The
Jn
/^
'fj
the water has burst the water-gate
regulation.- \\ere
fine \\cather rain

i>
'iaylight,
drawn
i>
ii|>
feast
[$
jjjg.
j[^.
T$C
^/c j
PjJ 7]^ fjj
with a purpose
scarce JH^ ]^
j^.
travelled about in live large countries JJ -^ fa
He
It
is
JJtljft
$[.
betake \oui>elf early to study JJ
PJj
J|l
EXKIJClsK.s
ox
Till-:
SKNTKXCKS OF FOUR
There
He
is
an inn to the south of the
\l\
f-
seat fjj|
f^ |f
surface of large and small rivers J
Transplant the willow tree
Yainen runners make trouble
He
hill
greatly disliked to purchase goods
Shut the door and take
The
(Î
shewed great
First chat about
Listen to them
Where
|Jp
3jr
partiality for Lao-ri

filial
piety 5g
making
a noise *g
people are of the
XI
g;.
^.
^pj
7^
"Jj.
y.
^^
{j|
"T.
jg.
same mind
^
g
j$.
^/||
^\
-ffi
$;
PjP
it is
HJ.
easy to act
THE ROMANIZED SYSTEM.
It
in
formly
of great value to be able to express Chinese
is
Roman
sounds uni-
by no means an easy task to form

once accurate and consistent.
Up till
but
letters,
is
it
system which shall be at

now no one system lias satisfied
the fact that the same character
requirements, partly owing to

pronounced with varying shades
all
is
Mandarin-speaking area, and
of difference in different parts of the
partly because vowel sounds are pronounced differently, not only by

people of different nationality, but by people who reside in different
parts of the same country. And there are certain sounds that perhaps
cannot be expressed perfectly by any combination of English letters.
" \o combinations of
As Mateer well says
English letters can
:
completely
represent all
much
those of
less
the minor distinctions of even one dialect,

of dialects.
certain margin or
number
suppleness must be given to the spelling of each syllable, especially

for the many minor modifications made by change of tone.
In every
sounds which
dialect also there are occasional stray
as accidental
variations,
and need not be provided
may
be regarded
for in a
syllabary
of the dialect?'
A few yea rs ago the Chinese government appointed a commission

names of Chinese
This it did with a measure of success, but if it had gone a
cities.
step
to evolve order out of chaos in the spelling of the
further,
sounds,
and constructed
it
and have brought

Ucgiimcrs
gy
ifin
of
to
using
it,
of students of Chinese,
book are recommended
this
in
nx
it,
but meanwhile
they can write
Nta-ml*.
it
will be of great
it
to acquire the
Later on thev may
advantage to them
down
uniform system.
several
system for expressing Chinese
scientific
an end the Babel of existing svstems.
rom mixed used
improve on
if
would have earned the gratitude
different
the Chinese sounds they learn

according to a
Kailing this, they will write the same sound in
ways, owing to the
fact that their ears are not

between sounds that arc nearly, but not
quite,
alike: they should also bear in mind the fact that /r/frvx are not
trained to distinguish
lx,
but only symbols

representing sounds.
The system adopted
i>
that
of
the
iii
this
late
and other China Inland
Uev.
XII
.}
11.
Mission
Taylor, founder of the
INITIALS
AND FINALS.
is
It
an adaptation of a Chinese method of expressing
Mission.
sounds, called j<tn rh'ieh fc -{jJJ, and is analogous to the system
adopted in teaching young children by many eminent teachers in the
West.
It
consists in dividing
combining them
ample, a child
'
<a,'
<r/
or by
cat.
to
into
Initials
and Finals and

For ex-
'
'
raf
by separate
letters
cf
'
making <r' the initial and 'at' the final sound

The latter method it is believed is the one best
'hinese sounds, and is accordingly adopted in books pub-
't,
lished
be taught to spell
may
</'
adapted
words
produce the full sound of the word.
to
by the China Inland Mission.
In the following Tables the Initials and Finals are first given
alone, then combined, the combination giving the sounds of the
These should be read over with the

following them.
teacher and the value of the letters acquired.
This will be of great
characters
value in obtaining a fuller knowledge both of aspii-ates and tones, as

well as of sounds.
The
best
given sound
is
way
to acquire the
mentally to divide
power
it
to express accurately
into initial
and
final,
hs-iao=hsiao
/-eny=(<'tt(/
=tNH<ni, and so on with other sounds.
INITIALS
AND FINALS.
INITIALS.
c.h
ch<
f
h
sh
4
t
ffl
Mil
thus
an
MAN PAR IN PRIM EH.

FINALS.
01
..;
Ill
Ik
Ut'll
oh
(!))(/
ioh
/('!!</
uh
\ltintj
tn>
JL
hih
III
uh
Notes on the Table of Initials and Finals.
INITIALS.
(
not as
not as
1i
in
<j
'I
pronounced as
is
in
game;
done;
/>
and
h, as in
t-h
as in park, not as h in
how
'
one like the ordinary sound given to
it
in
the other a rougher sound which occurs before
and should be acquired from a teacher.

When h occurs
it
with
is
sounded
beginning
n,
something like wh in
before a final
1
which/ or
a.-
mark
,s'A
is
'
is
used
in this
system at the end of a word
pronounced with the teeth
closed, and does not occur

Ax on the
contrary is pronounced with the
only occurs before / or ii.
before the finals

teeth apart
//
whirl.'
of the fifth tone or /'/// X/H-IU/.
and
The value
holding that
it
/'
or
/'/
that should be attached to/-
has
sound, others
xiv
is
debatable point
some
combination of both./ and
/-.
NUTKS ON THK TAI5LK
AM) FINALS.
INITIALS
<>K
FINALS.
.1
'
pronounced as
is
in
'tar;'
'far,'
like "
something
Of
in
'
c as in
vertebrjc' with a slightly broader sound
her/ 'perch ; <ti
in
'aisle;' <"> as on in 'loud;' n as in
go,' 'so;' ci as in
'
'
as
'
weight;' a as in
'
in
machine
'
'
rule' or oo in 'goose;
n or /*//
'chin' or 'pin.'
(W, which stands alone,
which is used in combination only.
The sound represented by

alone.
It follows r/,
c/i', *, .sA,
fx,
As',
it
and
ii
shortened as
as
in
cannot be pronounced
intended to represent
is
the partly hissing, p.irtly grinding sound that

7
syllable of 'scissors/ 'ship' or the xx in 'hiss.
intended to represent a sound that
is
similar in sound to ui,
is
the letter
as the French
ii
when followed by
'
heard
is
When
in
the
joined to
first
/
it
produced by turning the

tongue back upon itself and pronouncing er it must however be
acquired from the living voice.
is
is
One sound
not
represented by wj
The
given
/,
in
letters
is
that usually
//
and
ir
are not employed, since their values are

and d ; thus
the vowels / and a,
coalescence of
the
a=ya
provided for in this system

It occurs before vowels.
initial.
<t=?r,
etc.
Moreover the omission
of these
two
letters
avoids the inconsistency of writing yao alone and chiao in combination, or yen, pien, and so on.
few characters are printed in hollow type.
This
is
done
to
them does not represent

the language do represent the
indicate that the combination of letters before

their full sound.
sound needed
the
sound
found that
of
if
to
Xo
characters in
form the
final syllable of certain
some characters
this
is
therefore taken
be joined to an
but
it
will
For example,
ce
joined to ch
equals C/KK, the sound of the character jg u-i joined to t equals

the sound of the character jj ; and so oil with any of the others.
;
xv
be
the combination will give
initial,
the full sound of suitable characters.
words; a part of
tui,
COMBINATIONS OF INITIALS AND FINALS.
huen
FCt
Jgi
>>*[
%i\
11x1/1
oktia
hx'xi
[V
r//vV/A
Jg'
3
|jt
'/"'
".y
hsiartg
ch'ai
Ax/V/o
did
hsie
uh'an
M. ft
Ax///
uhao
Ax/////
ch*ao
r/K'/l
ch'eh
clien
4
(7< f//
'.-lien'/
cheo
r/r, o
k'ai
lean
chi
k'an
<//,
kany
r/r I
k'any
xvi
^Q>
COMBINATIONS OF INITIALS AND
kuei
IdHfJ
lao
leh
*
9
le-ny
leo
li
lit
lleh
flat
tin
liu
lo
long
lu
M
luan
MANJ)AiIlN
Mi
I
tni
tx'e/i
fcen
to
to/i
t'o
teeny
t'oh
t8*en
two
()!)(/
t'oity
t&eo
fti
txo/i
tx'o
tx'oh
turn
t$ony
t'uen-
teu
As////
ts'u/i
its'
nan
txuen
tsan
tx'ui
xvin
Its'
ao
TABLE OF RADICALS.
A
in
<
radical
the key by
of radicals
the characters
to
is
Chinese dictionaries.
knowledge
are
'
It
means
we may
means
of
which characters are found
forms a part of every character, hence a

a
learn.
knowledge
of the principal part of all
The number
numbered consecutively, and are divided

the number of the strokes they contain.
more frequently than others

definition of their
them
of
into
is
214.
groups according
Some
are used
these are indicated in this table
meaning being printed
that are rarely used are indicated
by
They
in a larger type.
much
by the
Those
Their sound, tone,
brackets.
meaning and number should be learnt, beginning with those most

For the convenience of students who may find it
frequently used.
easier to learn them from larger characters, they have been
printed
in larger
type and published in pamphlet form.*
\/
1
MANDAKIN
PRIME!?,
4 Strokes.
3 Strokes.
:;o
;>1
A'*AY/
MOrTH.
hud-
HEART.
inclosure.
<>2 k<>
T/
;\-2
;'>;>
:U
x/
EARTH.
//r
;<>*
to strike.
evening.
literature; elegant,
a bushel.
c>8
t<(
great.
c//
-
;'>s
A'# 8
WOMAX.
:>li
fx'r
son.
,
,
<)<)
44
4.")
f(.i
s<
1</
an inch.
'
73
wf/i
74
iieh*
ir.
to stop,
sprout.]
vicious,
a n streams.
a labourer; skill.
^r
self.
79
80
//-
82
//mo-
to kill,
to deny,
to
" ;'
49
I:
'"'
"'^
rt)
^p
,^
/.
.">!
/.vo/
ft
.">.")
.")(')
T7
p^ m
>
ca p-
immature.
a covering.
/Y//
::
")
n;i
8:J *fa
84
a shield; to oppose.
::
.">:'
,V2 /V/o
4*
ten4 to owe.
IS koiu/
SUN DAY.
to speak.
tiie moon; a month.
N//.LVAMOIIXTAIX.
'Jt'ti
without.]
WOOD.
a opi-pse.
4
to
///
kont/'
/-o////
on.
Jbands joined.
a
[/A
move
uare.
72 7?7J^?
small.
cJi
'
5C?C 71 ["
//x
an axe a weight
of lift.
lame,
,1
S.
"ft
MIKX- A ROOE.
41 tx'acn 4
42
a branch.]
[(7/z
07
=r
40
or>
moving slowly.]
[xf//
dart.]
surname.
breath.
surr WATER.
8C,
7/0-
,J|^;tt87
ohdo
FIRE.
1
claws.
'
88 J'H
89 [Ax/W2 crosswise.]
90 eh'uang^ a couch.
^j
a !>ow.
compare,
hair,
7Ky8f>
'
91
y>'/Y/<
92
/Vr
father.
a splinter; a slice.
a tooth.
an ox
pluniage.
r//';//
;i
cattle.
A ixx;.
(',()
window.
a door;
A IIAX1>.
to follow.]
[I'ltf
//x
37
a scholar.
;>.")
/uc
r>:;
a spear.
step.
\.\
TAl'.U-:
OF RADICALS.
4
5 Strokes.
from
<'i
'"'''"
GEM.
134
Jj
||*
fl
melon
encumbe
^g-
tile.
x//f7/-
13(>
[cA-*wan* opposing.]
a boat.
^fij:
sweet.
1>7 fV/fo
the tongue.
.Jjj.
100
to
produce
$j 101
to use.
102 to'm2
/E 108 p'ih*
104 ^7*
a field.
7t 105
back
born;
[life.
a roll of
loth
106yW/-
107 y/r
J^ 13S
139
/f^
ff-R-
perverse; obstinate.
colour ; vice.
/;r//'
4
,sv//'
40 7'S'yl O 8 GRASS; H ER P>S.
a tiger.
j^ 141 fur'
INSECTS.
142
CH
OX(i'i
4
hsiieh
blood.
JJL 143
to do; to walk.
ft 144 hxhiy(MX)THES.
45 7
f
[_/>o/^*
to
back.]
white; in vain'.
skin ; bark.
JH 108 miny*
a dish.
gtm 101) J77-7^
THE EYE.
>//ro-
sh'i*
a dart.
x//?7/-
stone.
west.
Bfj,
lance.
7 Strokes.
to see; perceive.
TO EEVEAL.
113 AST// 4
1
a mortar.
135
112
/"'
>
A"
self.
sombre.]
t''*
97
9S
99
to arrive.
hi*
14
a footprint.
iir>
&EAIN.
110
a cave.
11 7
to set up.
148
ioh? a
149/#A72 WORDS;TO SPEAK

150
fi
6 Strokes.
S
horn; a corner.
!'">!
a valley,
beans,
152
a pig.
153 chai*
C'//r7/fBAMBO().
reptiles,
'
T|^
119 w/ 3
**120N/'
fa 121/fo
rice.
1X4; j)ei
SILK.
1 55
sheep; goats.
15(S
x/ieii
feathers,
159
old
12r,
rr
and
and
the foot; enough.

the body.
faith1
CH'AWAIW
1()0
yet.
wealth.
to walk.
/W
venerable,
cA^/^naked; flesh coloured.

tsecP
pottery.
.22 idiiuf'H net.
124
precious
156
157
:{
123
/w
101 vb'nr
bitter,
time.
a plough.
12S >r
129 inh 4
the ear.
a city,
104
.a pencil.
-m 8
new
wine,
FLESH.
1(>5 ;>/>
to separate.
a statesman.
icm />
XXI
'hinese mile.
M AND AKIN PRIMER.

11 Strokes.
8 Strokes.
(
IC.7
METAL,
t
a door.
169 men
170 FK<P A MOUND.
4
171
[/"/
\~'2
chui
mf green.
wrong
179
ISO
m
a
181
raw
178
//"
not.
salt lanfl ]
in<i-
a deer.
4
wheat.
hemp.
201 huang2
202 [shu*
204
/^/*
wind.
to fly.
millet.]
black.
4
embroidery.]
[c/i'i
205 [wwn 3
206 [//H// 3
gj 207 [kn*
a frog.]
a tripod.]
.jffJ
a drum.]
leeks.]
183 /r/
.;
184 */////
yeijow.
M 2 PL
leaf of a
X//W
98 Juh
'
B1RD8.
13 Strokes.
hide.
IS-J/o/;/
18")
fg 200
a sound.
/W/
^
^ 203
[('/>
in
['"
inch
leather.
)
1*)^
the face.
T
eh
N1AW
12 Strokes.
9 Strokes.
177 k
FISH.
196
rain.
is 176 w/>
|g 199
to reach to.]
174^'|
17^/ef
r;
short-tailed birds.
173w3
w
#
rk
,r,
"
rat,]
book.
14 Strokes.
TO EAT.
209 [^>r
W> 210
the head.
the nose.]
2
/
>
even
equal.
/.s-
ISC)
h#M,ng incense; fragrant,
15 Strokes.
10
MA>
A HOKSK.
iSS
/;///r
a bone.
189
k<io
1ST
.)0
jti<io
1
h'o
192
[rh'dnf/*
MM
[//7/
//"
cA'i 3
front
teetli.
16 Strokes.
high.
I'M
11KJ
211
'jUJ
the hair.
H! 212
to
(jiitirrel.
211)
fragrant herbs.]
a
2
/o>igr
1
[A*^/
dragon.
a tortoise.]
17 Strokes.
vase.]
a spirit
demon.
^ 214
XXII
[/o/i
flute.]
CHINESE CHARACTERS.
STIMVTl UK,
TIIKIi:
HOW TO FIND THKIK RADICALS, AM) HOW
TO FIND TH KM IN A DK TIONA \l V.
1.
Chinese character, which
is
not
itself
Radical, consists
two parts the Radical and the Phonetic, or when it does not give
The Radical is one from
the sound of the character, the Primitive.
the list of 214 Radicals, the Phonetic is the other half of the character,
of
and, strange to say, the Chinese language contains no name for it.
but more
It is sometimes itself another Radical, as in
fg, JJg J|,
J
frequently a compound character formed of

Phonetic, as in Jg ^| jj|.
another
and
Radical
Speaking very generally, for the rule is frequently broken, it

would seem as if Chinese characters were constructed on the follow-
The Radical should give a clue to the meaning of a

Thus ftff in, oil, conies
character, the Phonetic a clue to its sound.
from [Jj in as phonetic, and the iratcr radical indicating a liquid ;
ing principle:
T$
god t>r
j^ vhia,
X/R'/J,
radical
radical
/,
gj|
to
from ^ //?//, as phonetic, and the omen

ride, from #p chia, as phonetic, and the Aow
discuss, from j|j| /, as phonetic, and the iron!*
spirit,
to
radical.
The beginner
new
often h'ud a
will
new
character to
phonetic, or sometimes merely a

of a familial* radical with a familiar phonetic.
radical with a
be an
old
new combination
A good deal of difficulty will be found at first, in knowing

what radical to look for any particular character, and
unfortunately some of the commonest characters are the hardest
to find.
However, no one need be discouraged, for a few months'
steady practice will work wonders in removing the difficulties.
2.
under
The
radical
left,
in |g
as
as
;
on the right, as
the middle of it, as p
in $fo
or in
It may
part of the character.
or at the bottom, as JJJ in fg ; on the
may occupy any
be at the top, as ff in
[5
in
in :jjr, or |
in jg, or
in fgj ;
p*J
two, enclosing the phonetic, as ft in
Sometimes
as
\-\
in
>.
it is
7g, or
a.
mixed up
in
$,
in a
or
in
ffi
surrounding
it,
as
partially surrounding it,

or the radical may be split in
j^J
jgj,
or
in
|g,
or
in
Jft.
general sort of way with the phonetic,

in |J, or p in
^.
Consider whether the character
is
a radical itself.
f*R*M!l?T*lftSft are themselves

xxiii
radicals.
Thus
MANDARIN tBlM&.
is not a radical, the first step is to break it
In
cases out of three there will be one part on
two
into two parts.
the right hand and another on the left in which case it is easy to
b*fc the character up. Thus :-|8ftil] (tf& ^Bjl ^T>!g^*f^
Or the division may be horizontal, one half being above, the other
It.
the character
If
beneath, and in this case the division
* # ff S
ft IP
S JN*^
is
not quite so simple; as, ^.

ma y enclose the
()r olle llalf
other on two or more sides, as

$g Jfj fe Jg fc Jg |gj
are in addition other forms which are harder to divide.
@.
There
one of the two parts is a radical and the other is not,

we
must look for it under that part which /x a radical as
obviously
for instance,
ff; fe ,fr
|j jjfg $f & ft, which come from
<.
If
f\
ff*
respectively^
(I.
the other halves not being radicals.
where both
But
halves of
character
radicals,
the
hand and a
left
are
following rules must be applied:
Where
I.
hand
JP
character
of a
consists
is
right
the radical
as, for
instance, fg
consists of two
Kax-h of these examples

ft#0 ft '14 fi
but the one on the LEFT HAND is that under which one
4 $|
radicals
the
THE LEFT HAND HALF
half,
must look
for
it.
The
radicals
% % ft
>
ft R (163) [5
the
,%, are generally found on the right side of
regular]
character, but in these cases the left side is seldom a radical.
.
170
is
The
rule that the
radical also holds in
2.
of the character
where the radical extends
For instance
:~
J^ fa JJ gi
is
the
to
two or more
$*
$j| fyj
@.
Where
the character consists of an upper and lower half,

radicals, the LOWER HALF is the radical.
As, for
being
instam-e
LKFT HAND portion
cases
sides of the character.
both
J]
itx
character
-||-
The following
fck
These rides
'
radicals are placed at the top of the

-5- ^-*
DU ]^ 7a.
[two very large groups]
will dispose of nineteen-twentieths of the characters
Chinese; though, alas! many exceptions will be found to them,

such as +P from g instead of /fc j|4; from -^ instead of -^(
Jg from
of Jf
but it will often be
;
^j from P instead of
5^ instead
found that the meaning gives a reason why the rule was broken.
in
A balance remains
of eccentric characters tor which no rules

For example J'J from j^ fjfjf from j}^ JS. from
and many others, for which
||[ from g
^{ from j|
can be made.
fg from J
see Lists of Difficult Characters in dictionaries.
WRITING, WITH ORDER OF THE STROKES.

There are
forms of Chinese
six
handwriting,
four
of
which
Old English, German text, and other styles of

letters.
The
fancy
remaining two forms are somewhat akin to round
hand and running hand; the latter, known as the grass character'
in legibility, as in English, according to the
j^f j, varying
penmanship
of the writer.
A beginner who looks upon this for the first time is
apt to be discouraged, but he may draw consolation from the fact
that the same characters printed, or written in ordinary
script by his
The best cure for such
teacher, are much more easily recognised.
discouragement is to learn to write.
Naturally the printed form
roughly correspond
to
of the character is learnt first, but this done, it is a good tiling to

learn to write the characters so learnt.
Chinese school bovs trace a
set
copy
them by the
This doubtless
teacher.
is
the best way, but
as to whether every student of Chinese who comes to this

country
over twenty or thirty years of age should do likewise, is a moot
good deal depends on the student himself his capacity,

to use a pen or pencil, his future work, and so on.
A
shorter cut is to write with a soft pencil and give more attention to
point.
his
power
accuracy than to style in penmanship.

AVith a view to aid the beginner, a writing Kxercise has been
appended to each Lesson in the first three Parts of this book. These
exercises are composed generally of such characters as have already
occurred, and which are most commonly met with during the first
few years of study.
They should be written out from copies set by
the teacher rather than from the printed forms, since they are freer
in form and are more easily recognised in other connections.
In
writing, it is a good thing to notice the points of similarity and difference of form, and to differentiate between the Phonetic or Primitive
and the Radical.*
When a sufficient number of characters has been
learnt to make it possible to write sentences, write them and get the
teacher to correct them.
By this means the power to write idiomatically will be acquired, and not merely the power to form letters
and words.
Later on, wider flights will be possible, when
it
will be
compose descriptions of places, things, etc., and

these gradually pass on to subjects of a more abstract character.
he best way to learn where to begin in writing a character is
a helpful exercise to
from
'1
watch
a teacher.
It will be noticed that he begins and
goes on in
A
regular order, usually starting from the top or left hand side.
few characters are appended, from which the general order may be
to
a
New Testament, Price

Presbyterian Mission Press, and China
*\See the Author's Analytical Vocabulary of the
two dollars and
a half.
Shanghai
Inland Mission.
XXV
MANDARIN PRIMER.
full character is first printed at the side; the order of
Let
indicated by the figures at the head of the Table.
the teacher write these characters, and while he is writing; compare
The
learned.
the strokes
is
the order he observes with the order here given.
If
2
34
1
1
1
123 45
Jfil
ft
n,
'
"
II
v,
INSTRUCTIONS FOR CHINESE TEACHER
Jlfc
fit
-^-ZSte
gill
BX
-*-*!
i ^M
E^
l~t
J 1 4
7T
-3-
TJT*
y-^
tffi
ffii
ifc
II
f?5
li/s
rffi^P^M^W^^
II
PO
"rrcj
-+*.
ffl
3*
il
A A
a
it
Jt
rfn
^^
MAW
a
^
i!
Am
mmm
xxvn
M A N DA KJ N
'
3*
$P
jlfc
1'lllM
EH.
'3
2#
21
*ffi
fcl
/4V
IJ
</T
til
W
-4-tl
1 .1-1
JU
flS
*ft
tt
ffii
ifri
rffi
Jit
rfii
flfi
^
^
II
IT
tffi
*n
^H
itfc
efe
tffi
A*^ a
ii
^( il ^
'far
J
I
Hp
ft
P3
J
'H
|J
31 3
1C
A
rffi
"ft
Jttl
XXVlll
Pt U
I.NSTIM VTIONS
Ill
& II
:zr ill
FOK CHINKS!-; TEACHElt.
IB
!J ill
ifc
f-
pf
M
^
Hi 5l
ifti
0B
A
W'
W
Itlf
IIE
*|
ifc
ifn AiJ
us
Mz
pn
-fa
is
m m.
JE
N^w
^
m
st
m -i
^P
m
3
(i
ffii
fKi
i&
IB
XXIX
MAXDAftiX
Tp
i^
ip
,11
pjni /K^
.
PftlMEft.
iiT
-**-
/fc
_
#
t
ffi
w*t
jtwmVE
XXX
MANDARIN PRIMER
PART
ELEMENTARY
MANDAEIN PRIMER.
LESSON
A
/x>
character;
I.
i'i
word.
i
'
no
t
>
me.
*/'
)ntside; foreign. Kxtra.
'
mo
/
He; she; her; him;
To
inexperienced.
born.
beirel
;
To want to wish.
To <lo to make. To
;
it.
Raw
^
"
act as.
IT
<>i
tin dittVrcnccs in in<M)ds and tenses.
plural numbers
characters undergo no clianii'e to ex])ress tliese differences.
inflexion or
helps to make clear in Western
%
conjugation
is
indicated in Chinese either
of the
word
in
the sentence.
Table of Pronouns
"g If.
l>v
languages,
words, or by the position
illustrated in the
following
auxiliary
This
is
Chinese
All that
,\
ERRATA.
read tf 4
18, line 6, sixth character from top |jg Interrogative particle
Also,
line 11, eleventh character from top
read
for
Miscellaneous
last
t'hiy.
tiny
29,
line,
Examples,
Page
1,
for *
37, line 31, for hsiang-tsi read hsiany-tsi.
,,
3S, Miscellaneous Examples, line 4, for
ti
read
tih.
Miscellaneous Examples, line 5, for t'a read

4
3
346, lines 13, IS, 20, 32, for to read /x?
-")_',
i.
NOTE.
together in
over the
To avoid needless repetition, aspirated words bracketed

the Vocabularies, have the sign of the aspirate printed
first
spelling only
e.y.,
p.
I
ts
MANDARIN PEIMER.
LFSSON
A
I.
character; a word.
Outside ; foreign. Kxtra.
Kaw
lo
inexperienced.
born.
beget
To
me.
To want to wish.
To do to make. To
;
thee.
k4
r.v
""
used
Sign of plural
in speaking of 'persons only.
her; him;
le; she;
flfe
it.
9*4
j
IH
S^
//*
"//
////
\.o
Adjectival particle.
Pencil
X. A.
pen.
read
Not
6ft
To
men
to chant.
a negative.
little;
of
some.
Sign
'omparative.
Who?
? shui
"
Paper.
to
'
Hook
\
;
comprehend.
writings.
xh<'ri-inn
What?
This.
,;i
That.
The verb to be
Things;
tides.
Yes.
'V
M oney
1
/
wealth
nese
teacher.
cash;
V of
s ii-; Mr.,
(Chi-
OlllK'C.
Personal Pronouns.
between European and
distinctions
the principal
1. One of
Chinese woixls, is the abse.ice in the latter of such changes as take
place in KnoTish to indicate the differences between the singular and
plural numbers; or the differences in moods and tenses.
characters undergo no change to express these differences.
inflexion
or conjugation helps to
make
clear in
Chinese
All that
Western languages,
indicated in Chinese either bv auxiliary words, or by the position

of the word in the sentence.
'This is illustrated in the following
is
Table of Pronouns:
MANDARIN PKIMER.
1.
SINGULAR
MANDAIilN
\ierb
form
negatives the
)>n/i
Is
<
7/
<
not
N/I
^j>j/ //
this
?
J^f
Note that
own
i>til>
this
a very
is
spoken
Jg.
to
which
/>/'//
,s7>/_is
~~*
jg.
i\ft-i]i^ko
to
fpfj.
or_//^g
common
preferences for certain forms,
f@
pre-
*//>'
^c
added
is
<",
or
make
to
construction.
f./y.,
Jft
.s7m/
West, each has

is
Southern and Western; shnilarlv

is used in the North, and 51$
f@ $j na~dh-ko-tih in
Whose ?
,
,^^
^^
ffg as Sign of Plural.
$1$
is
.-JjV
-^ flf ft5 /}> ;64 /!
Jc^J^^^-^"'
a
statement, either
fjositive
(>H/I
North, South and
in
it
added
'ftjj
xlii
fy
Jfj
a-tih
/P TE;
sentences
made;
is
Jo.
these
in
them interrogative:
While Mandarin
its
cha^hj.
mo
-f i/>
first
is
negative,
his".'
f4;it<'in<Mi<.s
a negative iiiterro
This is his <////' */// Iî-Uli
word
of (he
meaning
AHer, ,ôme Mnirmative
fixed.
I'K'IMKl;.
Nortliern,
|||
tlie
(tfj
and
.s7m/-//A
South for
'
Men
5. In English 'them/ and

'they/ are
applied indiscrimiIn ( liinese there is no 3rd
nately to both persons and things.
personal pronoim neuter ; then\ as applied to things is either included
in the verb, or the name of the articles in question must be given.
'
'
The
mcu fl'J given above, is used in speaking of

and may be added to either pronouns or proper nouns e.y.
Teachers, /mien-wiy men ^fc *& ft?Titles folknvi th^n;ime,s of persons, and do not, as in English,
precede them; f.</., Mr. C'V/V/f ; Ch'icn hsien-seng
-fa tfc.
In an enumeration of things or people, 'and' is used sparingly
sign of the plural,
persons,
-jtj^
in conversation a slight
it.
NOTES.
'To beget/
pause does duty for
a. Hxieii-seny Jfc
irom^hsien 'First/ and ^-sv/?//,
the equivalent of 'gentleman/ and is used as a title of
is
respect.
/;.
Puh, xhi
also has tlie
Jj|
meaning
of
something that
not quite right, and
is
may be translated, 'fault/ 'error/ etc.

c. In
many places .s7w, or xh<i.-txi is used as the equivalent of
there appears to be no diameter to express it.
shen-mo
Lcxxon XXIJ\
^^
[tiee
KXAMIVLKS.
What
f What
^TJ
Jjl
does he want? nothing n a iao s/ien-mo ; I' a puh iao shen-mo.

character is this? chcc sh'i shen-iuo tsi.
book
chcc sh'i shu fs'i.
vf Tli is is the character
V Whose things are these ? chcc sfri (sjini-tih\na-ko-tihtong-hsi.
(,1s this his or not ? chtv sh'i puh sm t'a-ti/r.
7No, it is mine, it is not his puh sh'i ; sh'i o-tih, buh shl t'a-tih.
\ What is he doing?
t+*i(-i*-j*-^
fa-Jsp sheu-i)io^ffDcLVou want to read ? ;// tan nien puh -ftc^-nicn.
nl want to read e^tao nien.
i^Vhat money is this? cha* shi shcn-iuo ch'ien.
/^The book is yours, the money is mine shu shi ni-tih ch'ieu shi o-tih.
i4,He does not want anything t'a 'frith iatffshen-ino.
;
'
'
/s
Is this his
chv shi
a-tih
" uio
,'
1,
The
money belongs
Translate:
the
they not?
stand XI r.
MANDAKIS
books, paper and pencils belong to Mr. 6%'i'en ;

These things are his, are
to those gentlemen.
Xo, those things belong

1
to
Do you
Mr. Ch'icn.
That
under-
not his paper, it is mine.

Does he want money ? No, he -wants Mr. Ch (ien} s pencil and your
Yes.
They do not underpaperf Does he want those things".'
do not want to read these books
what books do
I
stand
do.
l
h icn
'?
understand.
is
What things do they want?

you want to read ?
do they not? Are these yours?
Xo. He is
Does lie want to read ? Does he not understand
They want money

right,
am
wrong.
This, and all other translation work should be done first

Do not consult the Key at
unassisted, and then with the teacher.
X.l>.
the end of the book
till
you have done your best independently
of
it.
Writing Exercise.
liefore
this
beginning
it
will
be as well
to
read the
section
on
"Writing with Order of the Strokes," in the Introduction. The

Radical and its
letter R. and the figures following refer to the
number.
To extend
root
pen
100.
READING LESSON
I.
Sundry* Sentences.
1.
CAi-/<w
2.
Note the order
ftl
it
To know. ],. 4.
The
character, not the character
'
MANDAIMN
1.
2.
>^
ft
j-o say
Ch<c-chang
4.
5.
says.
A^V?;/
To
it
ft:
mm
&
$r%.
Iv
3.
}g
Ml^ This sheet of paper.
indicates sequence.
L. 4.
C////^ gt Then
Slicn-ino '^ JUj here means,
4
*,^ ^
clii
3.
5fc
IMMMKI!
see
see
'
anything.'
L. 4.
whether
MANDAUIN
2.
Lesson
)ne
whole.
As
soon
II
To buy
nifti
'The
an.
I'ULMKtt.
as.
To
for
be
acquainted
To
with.
Two.
to cost.
distin-
guish.
'
Three,
Teaj_jin_ infusion.
'
hour.
To
write.
Man;
pei'son; people.
.Basin
cup.
Have had
(A
Seven.
,
1--
Af- pan
.
ch
Jl *(*
*^"
|L
3
i)
cn(j-hi
r^riend.
To
Ten.
How.nM|!v?
few;
An
Two.
ounce.
" tael."
;
._*.!
^^
^>i%2
.,
If
ili-rhH'it
Jj^
./-
garment.
^W^ ^'
xhftnf/
source.
**
To
recognise.
acknowledge
recognise
as characters,
or peo];'e.
SO
To
aspi-
rate; aspirated.
Koot
To
Qch'uh-ch'i
X4
Mlfine
Meaning thought;
opinion.
Eight.
.
has.
.
.
''-'".
chair.
to
confess.
table.
Numerary Adjuncts.
1.
Jk fore some nouns

j
special word, as,

t'.fCjtfion
as crcn/
iii
////.s-
in English, idiom demands the use of a

I>ut the
music; a plot of ground, A:c.
in AV///.s7>, /.s /Ar /;//<" hi Chinese, inasmuch
a jn'ccc of
-nxttlci
noun takes some word corresponding
to jticcc
and
jt/ot in
the
And .sv/r//. wo/v/x <ov <ttu'<ii/N joined to numbers

above examples.
in both Knglish and Chinese.
If, for instance, we say, A piece of
one
we
mean
or, That plot
music;
piece; if, This plot of ground
this (one) plot
of ground; we leave the word one to be understood
This is made clear if we try to speak of any number
of ground.
greater than one, for we cannot say Two music;' we must say,
'Two ftirirx .of music.' So in questions we say, JIow many j
;
'
MANDARIN
IMir.MF.i:.
2.
How many music? or, Which y>/Vrr.s of music?

not,
Which music?
We sec therefore that such words are
with hoir m ,u/ f and
used with niunhcrK
and with M/x, and Unit
music?
of
ami
not,
trhich
are called
They
in this l>ook
Niimerary Adjuncts (referred

to hereafter as X. A.) because they are joined to numbers and added
to nouns.
They are of two kinds, one of which we might call
and the
meaningless, because they do not lieed to be translated
other significant, because they do.
There are ahriut fifty in common
use; all of which are printed at the end of these Lessons and
'.
The numbers opposite the sounds, of the characters in

the Vocabularies correspond to these numbers; e.g.; Less. I, .s7/<r.
numbered*.
The commonest X. A.
and
j@ ko, which
is
is
also frequently used with

better and more accurate
made
often.
numerals
do duty
to
for
Three, ^ flJJ
to use the X. A. which
It is
san-ko.
belongs to any given noun, as a correct X. A. is a great help to a
Ko flg is constantly used
poor speaker and also to a bad listener.
7
with cine -JJ an,d -tift JfjJ for the general
this one'; 'that one
when some other X. A. would be more correct.
Following the order given above, let us notice that Xumerary
Adjuncts are used
others,
is
as,
'
a.
AVith definit
Ten cash xhih-ko ch'ien

f@ MWith M/.w, andj/m(; e.g.,
Tins money is mine cJtce-ko cJi'ieii
;
b.
That garment
c.
>y
his; na-chien
is
AVithjrA /</?? and
cA/
f|
xh'i
o-tlh
i-dmny
xh'i
many'! when the
7to?r
How many
These are
words? chi-ko
txi
latter is
my
'
'
c.
cJu/.'
things;
o-tih
.s/</
j?
represented
covers something else
ch'j
JjJ
tony-hxi \J
distaince.;
^
as
5S
^J
'
iffi-
^^
'
pounds
'
Buy thi'ee ounces;

When something
X. A.,
fr?f-
f^ ^c
?^.
fgj
|f (see Lesson I, 3.)

^ \ypio-li^ jii^pnsiim and
6. In
_s|)eaki'ng
r miles
ounces
feet
inches
'
JHS
e.g.,
AVhich three sheets of paper? iut san-chang

They are not used
"a. Before indefinite numbers; e.g.,
^ ^ $J
Jj f@
t'a-tih
/y^// wry*
//Vo<//
etc., e.g.,
^2
M-
partly fills, or covers, or pajitly

in such a case the first noun become* the!
tills,
or
e.g.,
A
A
table covered with b ooks

ih choh-tm *7it(
-J* f>
cup of tea //* nan c'h'd
J^g ~j^.
The noun which accompanies a X. A. is often understood.
This is specially the case in answer to questions where it has been
already expressed.
many chairs have
to the question, How

'Eight,' but in Chinese we
In replying in English
you? we should say
MANDARIN
2.
{HI/I fid
fr
'
should not say

;
PJ1IMKK.
'
*^
only, ^M_t ailijjhe
eight
j>"
anil sav
ffij
/\
C.</.,
How inanv tables has he? live;

7- s. ?
foti'm 5R.
How many pencils does lie want?
in
t'a
ehi-ch<tngehoh*48i; u-
'/'".'/
,,!!,
iao
t'a
mn^hi.
g tt
fa
he wants three, fa
ft II
'
i<n> chi-ch'i
ft-
Which thing? we leave the word")

asking, \\hich person?
Which (one) person? Which (one) thing;? V
one,' to be understood
one
but we insert all numbers above
four books?
as, Which
In
'
The corresponding Chinese idiom

numbers
be
to
stated
requires 'One,' as well as all other

and
to be followed by the \. A.
full,
in
<".//.,
belonging to the person or thing asked about
Which two goijigs_do_you want ? /// iao na Hang-pen
;
fft
1 #"
5J- J[5
"
Numeration.
/
Chinese
2.
and
Kui-opean numeration agree in some respects

They agree in the numbers 'one' to 'ten,' and
an<l
differ in others..
3
But
having a separate word |or^hundred, and for_jjliousand.'
Chinese differs in the way in which it combines units. In Knglish we
arrange all numbers between eleven and twenty, (with the exception
of 'eleven') by putting the lower number first and then adding
as 'twelve' which =two and ten; 'thirteen' which=three
ten
Chinese reverses this order, putting the 'ten first and
and ten etc.
in
'
'
adding the unit c./y.,

Eleven *//?'/*-/// -p
;
Twelve;
xliilt-ri
-f* f~l
ten;
-f-
in
So
etc.
;
the
in
same
numbers between
way;
ri-sliih-ih
Chinese;
-f-
but
'
thirty
it
Kighteen
-f-
ili-x/iih-jta/i
.vz
Thirteen or fourteen
Note that
fourteen'
sixty or seventy
means
'
x>
~-~
-f-
n
;'
x>
-f-
/////
îxt-seven.'
it
throughout, as
it
/\.
as in Knglish
<'.(/.,
.\7////
xA>7/
//
while the
xlrih
Twenty-one, =twenty-f one; and so in

-.
Hut frequently in Chinese //>
-f'ten,' xh'ih -f-, 'eleven,' being 'one ten one'
This may be omitted in all numbers up to
is
or fifty
times
<'.</.,
Alternative numbers do not need 'or'

Three or four; *<t>i
|7C|.
l-'oi'ty
'three
thirty, mni-xlnh
these multiples of ten are added
/v-s7/?//
well, for the beginner to use

minimises the risk of being misunderstood.
niii -teen
numeration agree.
of
~".
before
is
prefixed
ih-shth-ih
is
Chinese, twenty,
All
etc.
to nineteen.
ii|>
Kuglish=two times ten;~
in
'twenty,'
etc.,
of ten, both systems
In forming multiples
Thus
ten
di'i/i
*<fii
(jg
'
is
[JT,
.v>
-f-
5l
(5I-
J. -p.
stated
it
is
xlnh /^
first
in,
sav,
'
thirteen or
necessarily stated last in, say,

as lull xluh <'lt i/i -f^ ~^>
^+
2.
Indefinite
1
let
ween
ten
numbers mav be spoken

:ind
This
etc.
twenty,
done
repeating the whole numbers, or by adding $|

as,
of as,
is
l)et\\'een ten
ZI
or,
Chinese ly either
to a whole number
r/ii
and twenty -p $!*///// ''/// or

!'<>
Somethiiig under a hundred */'/ xli'ih
/////
cash
let ween sixty and
x//>/;
seventy
<'.</.,
Ten odd,
few,
in
~f~*
'/'
/'/
f@.
-f*
r/i'icn
///"7,V>
*/////.
-f-
H.
mere numeration
In
Fortv-two
Two
N>
tables
___
is
//,
nsed
commonly
but
always stands alone, and takes
refers to things, almost

.N'A?//
i'i
-f-
J7Q
liunf/Jmnf/
fg li<tn</
N. A., r.r/..
_"""..
clioli-ts'i
^ iji
-^f
Prepositional Verbs.
Verbs
in the
fy
it
in
Chinese often contain the preposition

this is indicated
a dash between the verb and the preposition
;
Vocabularies by
nmi includes the preposition

What did you give for that
'for,' e.g.,
//m/ n
pencil
c/ij
</<*/<//
NOTE. When 'this'; or 'that' follows a possessive pronoun,

as,
usually omits tih &
These things of mine ; o cfwe-ko-tong-hsi
fg Tjj[ "g".
That child of his; fa na-Jco Jtni-f.^ ffc ^' f@ J -?
;
y,
chi-k^
/>/'//
[See
Ijcxxrni
XXTI.~\
MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES,
Are these two characters aspirated? chce liang-ko
Whose basin is that? na s/ri shui-tih nan?
Whose money
tsi
._.
fa]
$fc
ch iih-ch
puh
cfrnh-4;h*i f
^njfij^
this? c/ur-ko drier? shi na-ih-ko-tih /

? /"tf^rrw* mai chi Hang f
What does this mean? chce shi shcn-nio i-si ?
Tea is aspirated, 'pencil is not ch'a tsi ch'nh-ch'-i, pih tsi puh ch'uh-ch'i.
How much mone}- have you? three or four cash ni in chi-ko ch'ien? san
How many
'
is
ounces does he want to buy

'
'
si.
ko c/rien.
How many
garments has he? three t'a in chi-chien i-shang ? iu san-chieti.

character do you want me to write ? the character tong
ni iao o hsie
na-ih-ko tsi / hsie tong fsi.
These two basins are not mine chtr liang-ko upn puh shi o-tih.
I do not understand your meaning
o puh tong^ni-tih i-si.
How many meanings has this character? chce-ko tsi iu chi-ko i-si/
Can you read? no ;// shih tsi puh shih tsi? puh shih tsi.
;
Which
'
'
Translate:
Whose
is
Do you know Mr. Chanjx?
that chair?
Is
it
yours?
It
is
No,
not mine.
know Mr.
Ch'ien.
These two uar7
ments and that table are not theirs. Is this character 'chi aspirated?
No.
want to write: which character do you want to write? This
man has seventy odd cash I have seventeen or eighteen. They bought
two cups and two cups of tea.
I know the character
iiutij (but) I
do not know the two characters
.s7/r n-m o.'
Those twentv-four
I
'
MANHAIMN
2.
PIUMK1I.
lie has seventy-eight or

these cash are yours.
pencils arc mine;
seventy-nine sheets of paper; how many sheets do yon want to buy?
Will yon buy or not? Xo.
I
want to buy nine.
cup of tea costs
are
three
Which
six or seven cash.
yours? These three are
pencils
mine.
\Vritiiur Kxercise
jjg
pfg
READING LESSON
J|
II.
K.
''
Odds aridÊnds.
i. Note difference between this and Kiij^lish idiom

}-, ft*, $T, the three
the three characters j, Ê, f<^.
'J'lu- srinu- order obtains in
ch ir;i<
t,
'iot, tlie three gentlemen, Brown, Jones and Robinson,
ennni
but Brown, Jones and Robinson the three gentlemen.
'
10
2.
A m
V
^fc\ *a,
fito
mm^
ifi
A'
m
,ffl
ie>-
ti
ii
I.
AZ/^Î.A
kiin.l.
L,.
-t-
A
SU ifc
V:-ttt
10.
11
-f
~f~
MAX DAI! IN PKIMKR.
3.
LESSON
III.
Hie middle.
n.
'\
To
Opposite.
A kingdom
o/i
try
empha-
voice;
sound.
ts+J
shoh-kua
All
conn-
a nation.
iA^Yône
shcno-'in
j
10,000.
d Used iu address= *to.
To
To
speak.
eat
rice;
tic particle.
A fragment
a frac-
Abroad;
tion.
for-
were.
cltoiuj-Kueh C'hina.
To return to or from.
A time. Moham-
liiH'i
medan.
/^/o
JT|
i!
knife;
ri-txi*
h#icw-teh
To know.
y^H'*-
sword.
There
//
To
<'/>
^^^,
invite
to
re-
son.
is
was
are
wei'e not.
ft**V\f
To come.
To ask for
(fti
ih-cnu-hua,
_^+
after ;to
sentence;
.
enquire.
To
.?
ol^
To
on.
in
sit
.'
*^
,.
T3
tr<>.
Siii'n
,.
tect
tts(ti-n<i-/i
There.
Where?
u,ei-shen-mo
of
'
liao
Here.
tsai-c/ujti-li
travel bV.
To
an
expression.
past
mCense.
\Vhv?
Numeration. (Continued.)
.Numbers ending with a cipher over 100, 1,000 and 10,000
strted absolutely, i.e., with no noun or N. A. following, leave the
1.
1^0
1
ih-jtch ri
Ih-ch'ini
,<)()();
l:>,000
lull
The
/A
/v y>rA
last
;
UI-IHIH win
Over 100; /7/-/W;

More than 1,000
r>ei\vecii
H.
"5
r///
^.
!El'
^^
jg|.
/A-rA'/r,/ rhi
10,000 ;ind
three
^
7^5
j!0 ?
000
examples could
an<l so on.
See Lesson
^-
-f-
/A-/'r/,^
also
11,
"2.
^.
rA/
$f g|.
be expressed
by
3.
All
hv
numbers
need
\'2~>
ili-jH'/i
1,())>7;
1
">.
171
do not end with
that
mum
to
be stated
/v-.s-A///
full
in
.
ii
^ -p
"g"
5..
ih-ch'it'H /H/I-JH'/I xait-xlii/i rh'ih

-fu r//'/Y// x>-y><7/ cli'ili-x/uli *>
i/i-ii(in
0llM men ih-jx-li n-^hth-u-jc^ren

10 and 1'JO take
between
;
Niiinl)(M>
1
The
are ^f
IS
i/i-x/i'i/i
"g
jxi/i
and J|
jf<n/
Eliglish, eleven hundred
1)0,000;
1,00.0,000
JQ
"5
ih
2EL (IS
/'.//.,
/\..
It
respectively.
HH
is
incorrect to say, as in
;
r.t/.
H-
Jl
]g ||.
i/,-j,<'h-n<t,i
^.
-p
Jj
JJ. -f-
f- -*.
1,100; ih-clt' icii I It

21,000; i'i-ufin i/i
r/ihi-Hfin
-p
or twenty-one thousand
~J
numbers over 1,000 and 10,000
units of multiplication for all

r//'/V>/
ff
one
^ "g
'
ih-fH'/i
or thai are followed
a_ci_plier,
f.f/.,
a quarter; or, A half, or Three

quarters of a million, are not stated as a vulgar fraction, as
}
million; etc., but as a decimal, l.'J-~> million; etc., as below.
Larjre
whole numbers often dispense with the X. A.; c.y.,
Such sums
as,
One
and
million
Two
million and a quarter;
i'j-jt<'h.
ri-8&ih-u
nnn HI TJ ^H
Tliree million and a half; x<in-j)<'h u-sfiih uan jr. "5

Four million and three quarters m-peh L'h'ih-xlrih-ii
55.
>'f'n
-}-
^.
pg
+Sixzm-
thousand people; luh-ch'ien rcn -^ ^f- Anumbers under 1,000 and 10,000 follow the
rule as similar numbers under 100 see Lesson II, '2 <'.>/.,
"g".
Something under 1,000; chi jtc/i
A few thousands; chi ch'ien
^f*.
Less than 100,000 clii nan
^.
Ludefiuite
"g"
same
The
is
omission of one or more ciphers in the midst
indicated in Chinese
10.")
i/1-jn-Jt
1,001)
10,001)
1'iHy
fi'/i
r/////
///-//<(//
l/i-iuni Ihxj IL-^C/I
J.-
^ ^ ^.
full
jtfili-iKin full <'h icn liny
()0,.")00
/H/I-H.HH lilK/
The word To
To speak and
M^
r.r/.,
86,040;
^L.
/<//</ *'//>
"5
^ H-
and hundreds follow the omission
they must be expressed in
numbers
of
'-'.l-i
"^
//</
>
"g
Infinitive
N//O//,
- -
ii
In cases where tens
2.
by
Ini(j
/A-r/t'/ot /iiiy
10,r>0;
diît,
^
^
II
pdl
~/^
*j-xh'ih
"Jl
x\ ^f
of
the
j5. "g".
Mood formed by Verb and Noun.

speak,
jj'j
|}
'
//"^,
jj'J-
xhoh-hu(i
4*
Words,' a verb
is
composed of gjf
and a noun the latter
;
MANDARIN
3.
IMUMKIi.
But it is not uncommon to find such

being I he Object of |j xhnli.
combinations used as the equivalent of the Infinitive Mood
r.y.,
;
g^
A.svV-/.s7
(|l' cA'fA, To eat;

In such cases the noun is
eat'
it
precede
He
He
to
To
'
nicH-x/ut,
4
read'; |l; fg 'To

Food '; cooked rice').
fR /"/,
defining word, and
qualifying words
all
r.r/.,
writes Chinese
h
eats foreign food
Such
^
drink
'To write'; fe
combinations
(& Jg
uui-kucLJan
t'd c-h'ih
indicated
are
txj
(.'liony^kuch
the
in
B ?
\fo P
[H |R-
%\*
Vocabularies
an
by
asterisk.
Potential
The word 'To know,'
3.
in
Mood
indicated
|g|
the South than in the Xorth
by
is
^J.
which
lisiao-teh
of
composed
is
jg|
more
used
'Clear;
also an
/wV/o,.
This latter is
understand;' and
teh, 'To obtain.'
auxiliary verb, and is largely used in forming the Potential Mood.
is indicalcdut
\Vhen permissjo_n_or prohibition ('may'; 'may not
stamls alone after the verb or the negative when ability or inability
('can
'cannot') is spoken of, it is followed by some-Aîrd suitable
to
'
comiection and sanctioned by usag-e
to the
ayTTe go?
&
i *
n.
No;
^x
puh-lai
I'd ch'ii
tcfi
ch ( u pith tch'
^ es
Can they drink Chinese
is
tc/i /
ch'ii
aijt&o imfiTai?
ehce-ko
fxi
t'nli
tso \teh
ni
hsie puh-lqi j. fB
/w
to
write this ^woixl ?
ie
/-.//.,
tch
n-
an vou do it?
tso
Yes;
tch l<d
f&ong-kueh ch'u t'd-m

fl"J pg ^-
^g^J|
stated as in the last
two sentences
it
con ies
h'rst in tlie senteiiiê. -yoc
Note that the interi-f^ntivf is furiMfd by iid/lin^ the negative

form to the positjye .st.ntement a^Jn Jêsson I, 4j_a nd n ^hgjoll w n g
i
( >
Section,.
lu
4.
in Interrogative Statements.
_(questions
^la_ny
relating _tu posseseiee

or |g ô ; r.r/.,
rt^^--a^ked-4)y
in,
foll<>M4Ll_L> v__S- ^ff tnuh-iti
Hasjigjuijwnioney
8. %,
&
r*
No
anybody there?
s
^' ^.
Have you any pencils? ^
Is
'
&
there
Â
^q
-hi
No;
af
cs
14
jj\dcji__nwji
/'//,
//(
><;/<
tuqi-na-ti
/>/'//
hi? niah
///o.
/<(
(>^
in
fy
muh in!
^^
)||,
mn/i
>f.
MANDAIJIN
:
5.
than
The verb
in
They
is
werejmi
much more
used
not used often bet
is
It
3.
sparingly in Chinese
a noun or a pronoun
ween
nor befoTe prepositions and adverbs oTplaee:

writing, t<(t Jittie. tw fll 5ffi ^.
is
Where
Note
JjJ;
English.
am) a verb
He
N/ri
I'lMMKlI.
are
my
things? o-tih tnmj-hxi f^n-nc-f/
c.</..
ffi $fy )j| ]
are here, tMti-chce-ti % Jg j.

tlie last example that no word
jf
is used for
they/
In
understood, or is included in the
vej'b r or the names of the tilings in question must be repeated
f.r/.,
Whose are these\ things 7 theyare mine c/m *//? */mi-f//t font/-
in
such sentences 'they'
<
either
is
/,/
/,>
and
p_
6.
In ^Lesson
II
tx'i
J rl added to Nouns.
was added
to both
^g choh and
>fg.
/.
^yery~commoniy ad(Ied_to nouns, especially in the Sonthîii the

When IfJJ r'i is preyortJPijj. r'i is largely Used as Jtsêqnjvalent.
'
c '
'
cedecTby a word ending in n the n is almost merged in the 3
r'i
as in
vh'u'n-i'i, which" is colloquially pronounced c/i </>/.
It is
MH,
'
Here' ana
and
there
are often altered to
Adverbs
^ JJ
fajxfii-chct'-r'j,
^^
7. Adverbs denoting jmijit oi tiine, or /////r ////

as, I will go
to-morrow, ((^ne^^J2^-- th^ verb: those denoting <liuiulwji of tiiiic
ft
tune
1
stayed there two days, come <(fter the verb.
/lou'lony, as,
Section (>, foi- further illustrations.
See~Tjes5oTTv
Whv does he not come? T'<t
I
\\1iy
did
he use that expression?
Lino
8.
The
past tense
iiri-x/ieii-mu tshn/t
mi-
as sign of Past Tense.
much more
is
T'fi
loosely defined in Chinese than
If, in the nature of the case, the act must have been in
English.
the past, the tense sign is often omitted ; the context making the
meaning obvious. On the other hand there are certain forms and
in
connections which
demand *~f Ho these must be learned by pracduo is frequently abbreviated to l<> or loh
;
In colloquial, ~f
at the end of a sentence
tice.
Have you
e.y.,
finished writing?
Yes;2
hsic-Jifiomith
ju~r ? hftic-Iido
V *
^, t*
^J-^^
the basin ? Yes; inai-liao
15
'
nan mo? mat
la
IB!
jJjJ
MANPARJN
JJ^
XOTKS.
the Xortli
In
a.
before verbs, instead of
n-H
<'.</.
In some connections
h.
<.
id
/flk
:H: 33$
In colhxjiiial,
fati
is
fc
""-/'
*/"'
JE A)^'
as a substitute for
inuh
Jg
a knife.'
c.
is
here
is
he
a native of ?
<///.
g|
;
it
cannot be
t& ko /r^
ri-xhjJi
often used for
'
use<l
alone;
H+^
f@ A-
sword
'
t<io-txi
J]
<'.//.,
for
-^-^^L/
>iv^
In the North, tch
pronounced /a in the .Xorth when it

Unlike ^Î'i, it must be jotneTT
lai is
More than twenty men

7ô 7J alone
used alone
constantly
^mitted from
r( '"
tcnsome other number or denomination,
</.
is
niuh-iu.
/oh
"f and ohong-Ioh
do"
the ecpiivaleutjivt^/rimtj^'ill
rî
" All
right," etc.
are used as
~J*
\
ISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES.
Do you understand
\
hna
this sentence? chcc-chit
->n
tong puh long ?
He is drinking tea t a ch'ih ch'a.

What did he say to you? t'a tui ni shoh shcn-mo ?
What is he saying? t'a shoh sh en-mo hna /
There are several hundred men there in chi peh(f$re)i
l
tsai-iia-ti.
\ Ask him for twenty cash ncu /'a iao r'i-sh'ih-ko cJi'ifn, 7
Please take a seat cfring tso.
\kXSWhy does he not come? /' iiei-shen-ino piiM lai / ^ /
f
*L**^*-*^
/'a
lai
14&&.*He cannot come ;
/
pnh
'
^^
n^
'
/)
tl
Has he arrived? No t'a lai I iao )iutli in ? jiiuh-in /?S,,There are two basins here in liang-ko mw^ tsai-chcc-li. JOfV^
Have ou taken our food? yes c/ri/i /iao fan muh-iu ? ch'ih
&*->
40,:JO().
4 '2:5 or 424. 4 ."),()()().
-ir>()or4()0.
Ti'<in*l<ite.
-4, 1)00.
l)(,or)0.
4r
C)(),S<)0.
)?
2,S()().
Four
>r) ()20.
liOS,704.
or five thousand.
1(),000,000.
S,400,000.
He
7,()n4.
million.
S9,(>()().
S(),S<)().
1 'million.
\\r*\(
)(;:>.
Between 1,:>00 and 1,400.

Between one and two million,
I
cannot,
speak rhinese?
this food be eaten? Jt may
acters? \o.
4-
1,012.
0(;i.
ty.
l,r,0(->.
760,819.
1),
0(10,000.
(an you
can speak a foreign language.

May
Can you write these three charnot.
writes Chinese,;
write foreign characters.
Why
do not know.
1
he not speak that sentence?
What tone is
this? I do not know; ask .)// C/t'icn. How many sons has he here?
lave you any sons
Xo. Mr. ( IKUK/
le has three here and two there.
There are live Chinese garments here, and three foreign
has four.
Foreigners eat foreign food, Chinese eat Chinese
garments there.
Can you eat Chinese food?
Yes.
He has drunk three cups
food.
What is he drinking? He is drinking a cup of Chinese tea.
of tea.
will
Writing Kxercise
gj
~~f
'(
^
16
"g
^.
MANDARIN
READING LESSON
IMIIMKU.
III.
Desultory Talk.
&&m
ft
X
^-ww
iK*
ffik'3
m,
15
Iff
%
A
te
m
ii
HL
ft
ft
ift
iSL
ft
>
2.
C/z/A^For.
Uen t'a iao fS]
Iv
ftfe
5.
3*
Ask him
for..
17
v\i
MANDARIN PRIMER.
3.
S,ffl
A,W
^
A
if
-
^>^*m\j
a
a T
ft!
1.
Chains' iin
2.
Kuang %^
3.
^j\
flfj
Only.
Ts'o-liaoffi*
Ma}
I/.
ask.
will
10.
T 3 Wrong. L.
18
you kindl
kindly
tell
me
MANDAlilN I'lUMEK.
ch'iunir/
]
t|
JlL
eh
Lesson IV.
;>
A
To
bed
a couch.
to
|>er-
To
inter-
see;
kimiit
S
i/i
Si o-n of tlie
-!i
tessiou
Jf
An
K
1
twin
'"
Good;
tt4
Kead
etc.
nif/-(',/K(/i
k^' n-Men
Until.
to.
Into
To
be
va-cli'u
Saw
;.
seen.
To
bring
To
take away.
to.
'
v^
Below.
on,
On; in; above. To

go or c'(jnie uj) ;
xhany
heard.
To know.
Az-too
to reach.
of.
At,; in
To thread.
To hear;
.,.
(
>u
excellent; well;
fond
matters.
At once; soon. Used
bony
wear.
lied.
hfto
series.
to indicate sequence.
To arrive at
To motion
'
To
chapter.
L.
Pm
ohang
^
ate
sect.
order;
Affairs
ch'uan
passive.
'
A CustomA suburb.
view.
'
house.
*-*-
'
&
Toshllt
ceive.
(":
4.
/r.
tsai-sJiang-pien
On the top ;
'
above.
"
Great; large. Eldest.
ta
7 //-//-^ro
/.s
Inside.
.
'
)(
Small. Youngest.
'
Outside.
To
finish; finished.
To escort. To give
To take to or from.
sony
to.
Adjectives
box.
Position and Use.
When
Adjectives 'may _ejthfii^~p^Geiig__Qr_ follow the noun.
they precede, they may be said to be used distinctively^ pointing out
something that distinguishes the noun ; when they follow the noun,
1.
are
used predicatively^
*J f * *
He
is
a good
This thing
05
it
may. be noticed,
small basin; ih-ko hfiiao nun
That small basin
"""
thia,
J.^f'-.-s
is
man
as
it
is in.
f@
>]>
^. ^V^
yu A>)
good iw-ko hsiao van ban

JQ >]^ ^g ^j
t'a xhi ko hao rat fe
f@ if Achce-ko tony-Jisi shi howj-tih JJ f|
"gf
;
is
wrl
Unacquainted with
is
t^C^ S^Jt-ff.,
the second.
19
the first time,
familiar with
MANDARIN PRIMER.
4.
From
these examples
No
when
that
and
tili^
will be seeii that
it
may
xh'i
jg;
may
or
rule can be laid "clown about this, save

the adjective follows JJ^JJM it almost hmuiabhiJakes ftfo
if ever,, when it follows the N. A. as in the third
not_be used.
definite
rarely,
example.
conAdjectives may ha^ve ffij tih joined to them, tih ffj in this
nection havmgtheTOTÎIall^
according to the
context
e.g.,
He
has two goqd_one^ ; t'a in 'liang-ko hao tilt fjjl

I don't want small ones, I want large ones; o
tih,
The
hong
is
ft
his, the small one
fa
fi!j
>J,
fl(j,
tfj
is
till
&^
>\*
fgj '$f ($
iaoTusiap
if
||(j,
sh'i t'a-tih,
tajih-
"
fifj.
one large, one small
gC
ffi
mine
ih-k'co ta tih, ih-k'eo hsiao tih
*M^
#f, fij
j%.
o i<to inaTliao
>],
has two red boxes
hsiang-ts'i
4g
good ones;
large one
8/n o-tih
tjh.
He
?,
o iao ta tih JJ
I want to buy
[*
puh
t'-a
^^
in liang-k'eo
pg
ifX ffi
fKj-
Numeral Adjectives.
Numeral
prefixing
One
adjectives are
ti
as.
one
from cardinal
changed
*
first
by
e._f/.,
chang ~ ^.
chang
Which cliapter? y^/-/A chdng ffi
-//i
chapter;
First chapter
ordinal
to
ti-ih
Which chapter
in
order
//
T|L.
order or superiority
Note that vjiaug g; takes no^N. A.
First, either in
Pa
^.
chi clwnci
;
ti-ih
^^
fg
J|;.
.
Position and Use.
The word
one of its most common uses, does not

2.
j
j^'?
need to be translated, but simply introduces the Direct Object of the
Xerk e.g.,
Bring thÛ thing here; pa na-ko tong-hsi na-lai Jg gft f@ *$,
;
w&%.
Take
away tin's cup pa chce-ko nan na-ch'il Jg JJ

i%^
In these examples the Object is in its simplest form
'thing',
All enlargements may be added while keeping the same
<cup.
.
fj
construction
e.g.,
Take away
fc
that large tiling
B 4 * x v* $
pa
na-ko
ta
tong-hsi
na-ch'ii
o-tih ta, nai-kuch hsiangJiring my large iorcign box here; />

na-l,n ft
ft ft ft gj ft J.
jjj.
J>ring two cups of Clunese tea; pa Hanr/ nan Chong-kueh ch'dP
na-lai ft
tii
&
*+*$*#.
ing,
between
it
begin with the verb

tlmt^follows jg
and the "verb is its simple or enlarged (
pa
)b]ect.
20
all
MAM)AliIN
PHI.\1KR.
4-.
Adverbs and Prepositions
The same word may,
3.
adverb or a proposition
He
English or Chinese, be either an
in
c.y. y
outside; t'a txai-uai-fco ft

#|> i(f!.
lie is outside the door; fa teaijQ&Qi Hai-fco fy '/[ ft] ffa gS.
I n the first sentence no change is made in
Ê ^h SJ[ txai-Hdi-Veo
is
the second
in
into
it
t\yo piiri^-uuxl_JJieliimin^^()V('rns js
jssplit
The same; eonstnietion .is followed when
insertetl between thenu
the noun or pronoun has qualifying words preceding it; c.y.
lie is outside the front door t <i txai ta_ m<'L( nai fy %
f^ $h9
fa
In the
Mr. Chang's frontdoor;
are outside
They
men
nai-t'eo
sentence ^g
first
fy
t'eo
many connections, where
in
a-incn. faa}
{["j
omitted
is
this miikcs a better sf.ylp

quite accurate to use the
would be
it
full form.
lu speaking of placets, fa twii alone

ft tsai and J^ xlutny are used c.</.
He has a son in China t'd- in ko r'i-txi
;
Si
ffi
used
is
(x<t I (..'hoity-kueli.
^?*
sentence; this
That
digur/
ts'i
^L |$ -f Jl-
pu.h txai shu
x/utiif/
For the"*sake*ol euphony,
iî
fe ^f f@
4-
The cup is on the table u<ni ixni choh-tsi

The word 'six' is not in the book; hih
first
otherwise both
is a
is
very
sôod thing; tia
3$ an(^-S!^5i-
4. Both
xh'.i
omitted before
fgj
/-o
in
the
]f[
1^.
c.y.,
ko boo tony-hsi
J|)
f@ jj
Priacipa* an ^ Auxiliary Verbs.
^s a ^
and -^
is
///
common
are used as principal and auxiliary

\-iljimgs_ they may be used with a large number O?
verbs, ô^v^vm^ -the idea of motion, and may either be joined to
<
them, as dp! 2fv na-lai, where ^JL**na, meaning To ^take to take
hold of,' is the principal verb ; or may be separated by the Object,
^___/[f/
As
verbs.
r/.'/j't
MII
with or without enlargements
e.g.,
Take this to somebody pu- cJtoe-fyj ftonq-ch'-u ffl JJ fg Jg ^.

Take thisjoreign garment to Mr. Ch'ien pa chn -chieir iitfi;
kueJi
i-shgny
In
~xor\g_
'
motion to
idiom being,
na-Ii ch'ii j
Ch'iep hsien-seny
'
%, m
>
tfo
as Fliat of the last sentence, JiJ

direction/ takes the place of % tsai
Mr. Ch'ien there ô.
The followng
'
arrived ?
Yes
tao,
;
the
Avill
;
t
a tao-liao
muh
'I
tao-liao
ffe JlJ
T J^
j-
Where
n
take to
illustrate this use of JlJ tao
Has he
JJ
construction
sifctl
indicating
tab
are
you going
Over there
tao ',w pien ck'u

'
21
ni tao (or J^ shang) na-li
'
MANDARIN PRIMER.
4.
Mood
Potential
indicated
by
tefi ;}.
teh was explained;

In Lesson III, Section 3, one use of
k'an-chien and gg j^ tingwas said there applies to both
jfa
k'an To see/ and |j| /?i# 'To
r/ricn, which are composed of
5.
\vliat
hear/ joined to
<7>jY:
|j[
'
e.g.,
Can you see? Xo .feign fe/& (chienj k'an puhjrftienj^ k'an

_
Yes ffi/y fc/*. IphienJ t'iny_puh chicii ? t'iug
Can you hear
;
'?
di
a IB T>
^ look
IS-
May
Yon
The
He
completion of
come
m When an action
&;
puh
~f indicating Completion.
"j*
^^
completed and
is
followed by another,
ffi _(*4/M
and may
when lie had -finished his food; t'a ch^jh na n-lut o fan
gg gt ^-t^*'
pg
hen he had finished spejiking he Nvent outside the door
'rc
left
chin ch'ii
A\
in
indu-ntas the &e([iience.

It thus denotes the order of time,
often be translated by 'when' ; 'thereupon' ; etc. ; e.g.,
He
htio-liao,
e.g.,
hue uan-Uao.fy
"f.
na-pa i-txi t'a tso hao-liao muh
fai
Ta
is
Vh\y
after the verb
finished the chair ?
jmh
an action js. indicated by jj
has finished writing;
Has he
tong-hsi o k'(in teh k'an
expression.:
and Uan-liao
%{ ~f
teh
1chce-fco
S S It S ^ W, S ^ ft* that
na-chit-hua ni
ffl
uwnJia-Qj which
^-T
Xo
nûstn't listen to
Hao-tia<>
6.
at this
teh? k'ajijuh teh
or
%J
ffc
vhoh ugji-Jiao
hu.(t,
<-hhi.
men
tao
ch'u
iini
ife
^^T
IS St
S'i
PI
Tie
read Chinese books as soon as he arrived
men Qhong-kueh shu fy
7.
In the North, J^ shang

in the
West
""
ffij
ft ft 'H
NOTE.
t'a ih lai
as Auxiliaries.
used as an Auxiliary after
is
chiu
^.
many
e.g
fill
V?tr/ j
f^ || J^ (or JlJ
Jia^chien i-tsliang t'a ch'uan-shang
7-
In such words as ^t %\* \M teai-uai-t'eo Southern and

t'eo
while in the North ^picn. commonly
i]JT
Central dialects prefer

replaces
JiJ
*Uioîs_frfiqiientJLy
useiLjiistead
'
)or
Shut tlie
/a*c?
He has put on thatfgarnient
< 1 (
fe $*
and Tao
Shang
verbs
%$. ffi
it.
XXIII.-]
22
MANDARIN PRIMER.
MISCELLANEOUS KXAMPLKS.
When
came
China
to
4*.
/
frj
$|
engaged a teacher \j^tao-liao Chons^kueh chiu^ck'ing
hsien-scng.
are here with
mo ni-tih to^^-hî ii--p c/ia'-li.

be here directly t'd chi ujai.
Yonr book is not here, it is outside ni-tih shuj>nh Uai-chcc-l^ tsai-uai-têo.
"
That sentence does not sound well na-tfiii^/uu^îi^hi^
o tso hao-lido~chiu (7i 'it.
I will go when I have finished
I cannot shut this door
c/HZ-koMcu o k nan puh shamr.
Your things
He
will
Do you know where my box
is? JNo
Q-tihJ
ch^tcw ? puhjhi-tcw.
o f-ing-chien shoh.
heaTcfTTsaid They say
His eldest son is abroad tfa-tih ta r'i-tsi tsai m
Have you seen my box? No a-tLhJisiang-ts'i m-k'an-chien muJi_hi ? muh in.
Cannot tell unable to say sfwh puh shan?.
This is a large one, I want a small one dice^s/ii ta tih,L_ojLao hsiao tih\
I
I heard that younger son of his speak

Translate:
Chinese;
where did you hear him ? I heard him outside the door. This
garment is small, I cannot wear it can you ? No. Take these two
Bring that book here ; which one ? the large
foreign cups away.
one.
What did he take away ? I did not see. He accompanied
me outside the door. That thing is above ; it is not below. The
small one is in the large box ; you go and see.
I cannot hear
what you say
can you hear what I say ? Yes.
I will read
;
kindly listen. Which chapter do you want to read ?

Take this thing
brought that article when he had bought it.
I Avill not accompany you.
Who is
outside; I do not want it.
below ? Mr. Chang's eldest son.
the
first
chapter
He
Writing Exercise
%fc
fo
$J,
fify
READING LESSON
fpj
R. 37
IV.
Speech in the Making
i.
4
;
To
place, to put.
V.
23
>J>
R. 42.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
1. Hao Jf is constantly used as an expression of approval, and may be

'all right,' etc.
translated by very good
'If you want it'
2. Ni iao $jt 3
supposition is often contained in the
construction of the sentence and needs no special word.
3. Ih tao
ilj As soon as he arrived at.
L. 8.
4. Tan \\\ But.
verbs are often repeated, sometimes for emphasis, some5. 7*s0 tso
times for the sake of euphony.
'
'
^^
6.
The hand. V. I.
Choh #* an auxiliary verb na-choh
Ta tih ih ko peng-in ^ fiU B8
Ko 4 Sign of perfect tense.
4
Sheo
7.
8.
9.
;ff-
10. /<?
3
ill
11.
Hij,an
12.
J?'o-i
13.
A'W
Also,
S
"tij*
1
^fl
ill
*&
More;
To
.{{
ft
still.
&
L.
as well.
open. L. 6.
',
May
'carrying.' L. u.
one of his friends.
have you not read it
I,. 7.
$5 ueither have we seen it.
;
-ftfe
L.
5.
24
L.
5.
MANDARIN
I.
Chûh-lai
2.
In
&%
I'UIMKIi.
5.
To come out used as auxiliary to

To have an engagement to bo engaged.
si.fi 1$
L. 7.
x2^k^*~A^- juJU^J**
'
(L
LESSON
Evening
late.
v.
The beginning
the
junior.
2
eh'
?f
Formerly before
;
To
^!
in front of.
Sharp.
soon
nen
3
about
To
to.
Age.
year.
f'/ao
v
\
To
carry on the
shoulder with a
pole.
iieh
call
The moon
To
;
To
de-
aux-
cross over ; to
no
n pass by. Sign of
per-
and past
fect
~BJ
Important.
k'o-i
May
tut t.o-gji'en
Morning.
J[/j
verse
day.
a joint.
Holiday
festival.
can.
Evening
tenses.
iao-chin
Sky heaven weather.
call
tell.
Transgression; fault.
iliary verb.
;
to
To
choose.
An
scend.
To
<
a month.
Below.
to.
Half.
Previous.
Ago.
1
allow.
out.
Early.
JrL
For;
Quick
;
to
To^
to.
give
let
at
first.
night.
2
r*"i
ch'
Hts
)
'
_.
e
"
Day
before
yesterday.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
S'
tsoh-tfien
Now
x
at
"
m'my-nicn Next year.
present.
Time.
shi-heo
This year.
ehin-nien
Yesterday.
Hip
J^
-9
ts'ong-eh'ien Formerly.
"
1
chin-tficn
in
ing-tfien
Last year.
eh'ii-nten
To-day.
To-morrow.
...
(
en ten-men
Year
before
last.
Time.
Tfflejge^rally._without rejerence_ to any definite pgrj
shi-heo ; e.g.,
sppken_oLas J|^
'What time? When? sh^mo shMico^ jgjft fg.
1.
At
At
that time; ngjil&Jizo
time ; chn^sJt'i-heo
indefinite past is indicated
The_
tsao corresponding to ' ago/ ;
He
this
formerly had a box
*#*
He came some
gnen
by
Va ^s'onc/jch'ien
or
iu hsiany-ts'i
time ago.; t f a tsao lai-luio -jjfj ^.

^J*.
The present time is denoted, by |g Ê hsien-tsai, which answers
*
At this time at present/ etc. ; e.g.,
to,
;
He
He
eating just now; t'a hfsien-teai ch'jh fan

will not go at present ; fa hxieu-tscd puh ci
is
The
future, without reference to any specified time, is usually

!g iao, or \){ k'uai, or at times by the two together
they
generally indicate a proximate future rather than a distant
denoted by
more
Often the mention of some definite future time dispenses with

the need of any special word ; e.g.,
He will be here soon t'a k'uai iao lai fy
|jj 3jj.
He says he will go ; t l a sholi iao ch-ii |jjir
^.
one.
^
^^
He
will
go to-morrow;
tfa
ming-t'ien
cJi'ii
-j^ 0JJ
r^,
\)
^.
Order of Time.
English idiom, in speaking of the order of time, usually

with the lowest denomination; as hours, days, weeks, etc.
ChiijLse_jdiom on_the contrary begins with the highest j_ as years,
months, days.
Years_take no N. A. unless they are precedecTby an adjective.
a lower denomination followsla higher
3
Hny is i4*ed.
He had no money during those years na-hsie nien tfa muh iu
2.
WhW
"fnl
If one does i\ot /oni vjyoY//, what

do irli en old ?
26
trill
one
* A5L^>^
Five or six years
Two
years and
n Inh.
six
iiicn.
months;
"
Js.
nicn, ling luh-ko
y'z
5.
iieli
Four years ago twin xi /m'^JpL

:.
Months take the N. A. jg) /v> when spoken of by number, as
Two months '; etc.;Hi)ut omit both it and fg ti when
One_uiiOith
;
'
<
spokeiLnLiiL-order ; o/.,
He has been here two months
TmmxHe
come
says he will
in
fat lai-fino liancj-ko u^'h
the third
mouth;
dio/i,
t v,
fy
Jjfc
weh.
.sYt/t
Three months and a half; xan-ko (jan ileh ji |H -^ J3In speaking of them from the
Days, like years, take no N. A.
1st to the 10th of the month inclusive %J ts'u, must be prefixed both
in positive and interrogative forms
e.g.,
;
HS
Three or ftmr days san u t'ien,

5^J^
Ten odd days; drill clii t'ien
|| ^.
He went on the 8th of this month fat. cluh iieh
;
"
of the 3rd
month
last
H Jl U *
What
is
hiq*
%'Vft.
What
is
xliih chi
What
the day of the
-^
ri-shih chi
the day of the
Zl
the 6th
is
3.
deriuite
nan
iieli
1st to 1-Oth
Wu cliiu
c-hiii-t'ien
month?
from 10th
to
20th; chin-t'ien
month?
from 20th
to
oOth
^\-
chin-Vien ts'u
period
tisao t
JJL
from
ts'u j'/i uh'ii
chiti-t'ien
^.
Time
denoted by
mouth
ch'ii-nien
f|.
the day of the
is
-^
To-day
-f*
year
>
The ^th
^^^ ^^
lull
5c
Past and Future.

time
of
'
'early
regarded
as
as yet to come,
having
by
passed,
to pass
'
ko,
is
J
e.g.,
Two months
He was here
*
=*>
ro in
ago tsao liany-ko ueh QjjbfiRjjl

a few days ago t'a tsao ofu lien tsai-chiv-li
;
a month from
How many
now ^
years ago
ko ih-ko
iieh
tsao chi nien
*ji
'
ch'u 3$
|j|
f@ ft
-fib,
^.
4.
Periods of time are divided into ' last or next by the words
7
7i*/a ; they form
upper j^ shang and lower
part o| the
stream of time, the earlier being the upper reach, the later the
'
lower;
'
'
e.g.,
Forenoon
sjuuig (or t'eo) paii^t'ien
27
j^,
(or
2
jjjfi
5^.
MANDARIN
5.
Afternoon
hsia
pan
t'ien
~f
PK1MEJK.
5^.
First half of year; shany (or t'co) pan uicn J^ (or J|j) ffi
x
Last half of year; hsia pan nicn ~f
*
,.'
jj[^ 4*-**"
Last month; xhuny
lick
ft.
uSj-^^jf
v^-*^^
J
Next month hsia iieh ~f ft "*^-*^
The years of a monarch's reign do not take g* tl ; c.y.,
yV'The 2nd year of Hsucn-t'ony ; Jhiicn-t'ony n nicn 3J $i;
^The 4th day of the 8th month of the 2nd year of llsiien-t'ony
f
H&iien-t'ony n nicn pah itch ts'u si Jg jjfa
M $J 13
^
H^
'
'Each',
every' as applied to Time.
4. 'Each/ 'every', as applied to time is expressed by repeating

?
'
the noun twice.
Morning ', evening follow the name of the day to
'
which they belong
He
He
He
?.//.,
conies every day
t'c t'icn
goes every month t'd.

goes there everv year;
;
icn kti
This evening; chin-t'ien uan-shang
To-morrow morning
He
fy J^
5c
B^,
Jl-
fff
Will
The
of
K'o-i
pj
JI^.
abrupt use of an Imperative is often modified by the

It is oft CM
the eauivalent jpf, 'That will do';
jy k'o-i.
i
You may go ni 1^4 ch'ii. (^

You had better call him; A*'o-/
it
do
Yes
idiomatic
arrive at', ;p
In
f jf
6.
fy
ming-fcien teao-th'en 0)j ^C ^l j^.

reads every morning ; t ( a t'ien t'icn teao-Bh'en nicn-tshu
Tlie
5.
^f..
fj^
The Imperative as modified by the Use

use of
ft ft ^.
f-a nicn nicn tan na-li ch'il
iich tich ch-'il
less
JiJ
puh
"pj"
5^.
r/^rt cA/r(o /V(
pj
jy -^ pf
k'jMjtuJjtA'o-i ? k'o-i pf iU
pj
7
way of expressing 'Less than
;
tao
than a year
is,
-(jjj.
pt jy.
'not to
; e.y.,
jow/t tao ih
nicn
/J\
JlJ
1
NOTES.
h.
It
is
</.
Tsao-shang
JEjL
J_;
is
also used for 'morning'.

f^; ni, as it has
advisable to avoid the excessive use of
a tendency to indicate disrespect.

c.
\Vill vou kindlv;
etc.
Ch'ing |j| answers to 'Please'
discriminating use of it is of great value, especially in speaking to
educated people.
l
d.
man
in
<':
'
T'iao
is used
only of a load carried on a pole by one
Chinese fashion.
(liido yfy is used of the cries of most animals, and the
singing of birds.
[.Sec
Let*on
28
XXIV.]
MANDARIN
IMiLMKR.
5.
KxAMI'LKS.
'pj
the 8lh of April

shl nai-kitf/i .w uc '/i
u-f) a/
To-day
'** *
This is unimportant chic-ko pnh
c5U>
When did you come? Last year. >iisfu'n-io sh'i-hco lai till / ojh'u-nicn lai Lih.
Tell him to come and carry it away to-morrow chiao t'a ming-Pien lai
*
is
*^
'
ch-u.
He was here last year t'a ch'ii-nien Isai-cJnr-li.

He says he will come and see you to-morro
;
You cannot
cross
kosfa&zl&i.
had not seen him before"
~fco
t^^
saw him to-day

*
o ts'ong-ch'icn inuhjhicn t'a

T*
chin-ticn chicn-liao ta.
^*,j
o chin-ticn puh ih'u
I will not go to-day; youliad better come to-moirow
fi~**J
/
k'o-i ming-fricn lai.
He wants a half I wantt a naif t'a iao ill-pan, o iao ih-pan.
I
û .^
;
gaye him the larger

l
Call her; trtf*v t

Tell him to come
I
'
halj
a lai. CA
now
chiao raVisn-n-
heard him say he would/go next yes?^ a'ting

Tfdiixldte:
Three*years ago
t'a
shoh laaining-picn
was abroad;
now
am
in
in a year's time I do not know where I shall go.

lie said
yesterday that he woidd carry ($[; t'ido) that large red box here today ; he has not brought it ; why is this ? he is now outside the door ;
China;
tell
him to bring it along. At that time

him 20,000; Avill this do;' Yes.
I give
I gave
him
r>0r>
cash
It does not matter
now
whether
He
he goes or not; (if) he goes to-morrow morning it will do.
comes and sits with me here every evening; he is now below; you
had better invite him to come up. Five years, four months and three
Yon had better go
days ago he gave me this excellent garment.
and ask him for that large tea cup he is not there now how will it
do to go to-morrow morning ?
In three years and a half I will go
and see his eldest son is he abroad now ? Xo, he is in China.
;
Writing Exercise
~f
(ty '|&
READING LESSON
i.
Kuang-hsii
^fc
fr
^J H. 74.
V.
Visit from a Friend
IX* Title of
Emperor who reigned from
29
1875 to 1909.
MANDAK1X P1MMEE.
5.
/;/-/.
>
//j/
.
Ch'uau
4.
v
*
56.
L. 9.
-f Silver.
letter.
L. 10.
4
f
Â
ship
ir
IVl
Hen
^jj.
L. 12.
Circumstances
L.
Very.
position.
8.
To follow to study under a teacher. L. 17.

T.*Hsioh '* To study; to learn. L. 16.
8. Fang-hsioh fa ^ To let loose from study to finish lessons.
3
To lead to take
as to .see something.
9. /./;/;>
10. Tseo tseo -fc* >]> 3 To walk about to go from one place to another.
;
'
fiEl
the
11.
Ko
12.
New
13.
14.
'
nicn, ko chieh
J
<z/i
w^//
^^
A ^
^/VA
fi'i!
ffff
At
New Year and
holidays.
Year, and a holiday in the 5th and 8th months.
ChiaZp Home.
Kan-fruai ^?
fy*
L.'8.
Without delay. L. 24.

Not in 'dead.
15. Pu/i tsai liao

fe J
f To
16. lu-i {\
purpose.
L.
23, 24.
The Chinese have three national holidays
'
1^.
26.
30
MANDARIN PRIM HI!.
&
rf
Infill
ft
&
T $ ate**
,
id
A
T
fit
fll
T
i'J
IB]
th'nh-lai is here an auxiliary verb joined to

to place the Object of the principal verb between
the parts of the auxiliary, as here fft f ft jg| #T. $$ being the Object of it.
2. Hao-i ffi ;^; A kind
thought.
and also.'
Even Lesson 9. Here
3. Chiu-shl gjfc
1.
no.
It is a
ch uh..Jai
/,t.
J{$
common idiom
'
31
MANDARIN PRIMER.
5.
NYORDS FOR EXERCISE IN COMPOSITION.
The Vocabulary given below is intended to furnish the student

with material for composing sentences of his own.
Taking any of
the words, or any of the thoughts *suggested by them, let him comof the facts and principles laid down in the
pose sentences by the aid
them with his teacher. The sentences
over
and
lessons
go
foregoing
already given will furnish models, according to which he may
In this way he will acquire a power of speaking
construct others.
that can be obtained in no other way ; and will at the same time
have material with which to interest his teacher and make him talk.
Mis own thoughts will thus shape themselves according to the forms
and idioms peculiar to the language the true secret of speaking it
well.
VOCABULARY
C/
fp
To
record.
sign.
>
man
'
iffii
*hen
Deep
profound.
High
lofty.
r&j*
W/'/i
I.
Tight
Slow
strict.
kao
4
slowly.
Long. Read
^**^
To
tai
bring
Broad
shop
an
as a person
wide.
inn.
>
Face character.
A head chief first.
An end. N. A.
Narrow, confined.
.,
J%v
I
pot
To walk
To place
to
To loose.
To talk to
a jug.
Water
put.
to travel
to go.
fluid.
cA
preach.
An
opening ; a
mouth. N. A.
,4
tsoli
cA
k
(
;i
.
'
kan
i
make.
,
1 o save
to deliver.
trifling.
Young.
p'u-ts'i
Dry.
Shop.
Elder brother.
ty"^
choirr/\
to
rr
A*
Light;
To do
oh ^.
\hu
Heavy; weighty.
brother.
Cold,
Hot.
,3
To
The
hand a " hand."
heat.
32
MANDAltIN IMMMKIt.
4H
To
la
/, ..
To
strike.
5.
IHIY.
H.ves.
to cleanse.
-k
To wash
V*'
gp
uang-chiTo
<*MJ? 7
7chi-leh
,
XOTKS.
lo remember.
/,/>>/
<7.
ih-shuang
forget.
rp
jf.
pair of shoes.
ineludes the idea of reputation, any one
JJft
does not want faee
street.
|g
/V/o //>//, is
y>/j
JJg
who
regarded as iiulifVerent
to his character.
b.
c.
In the North -^
i^
7*.v/^/.
usually omitted after
Ch'j 1& is not used alone; hut only wlien one of a pair
is
s])okeii of.
);
7 '/.'-/.s>'
<1.
is used more
^()j -^f
extensively in the North than in
the South'; jj" tien being applied to an inn in the North.
( Ireat
c.
difference of opinion exists among teachers as to the
twh and
use of f
{$
tso
Northern teachers prefer
REVIEW: LESSONS
1.
XX T.]
Lt'xxrw
[,SVr
twh.
I-V.
Who? Whose?
Give different forms for
two ways
State
What
of asking questions, and give two

examples.
?
the function' of
give two examples.
is
How
are N. A's. used? give three examples.

When are they omitted ? give two examples.
What
How
(jive
How
is
^ used
two
is
and
does
-'VP
precedes and
give an example.
la
of the use of
from
use
differ in
gve an
-j^-^-y
the
is
when read
2j
fj*
give two examples.
meanings and two examples
example.
What
the difference in the use of
difference
when
it
the
in
follows a noun
use
?
of
give
an
adjective
two examples,
in two sentences. Illustrate the use of }

(jive two examples of adverbs used as
prepositions.
Shew the use of
and
as principal and as auxiliary verbs.
?
is
sgjLJrf-6****^,
give two
jgj used
How
How
is
examples.
the
examples.
of an action
completion
^^
****
"
u**~
expressed?
^^^^ ^^5Jtfo'
different uses of J^.

ft^v^- 1
SI iew the use of
in
two
^ *$*~*^~
sentences.
fjfj
(Jive
two
In speaking of time,
(Jive
two examples
give
when
is
the N. A. omitted
of the use of
'
^)J.
"*'
two
MANDARIN PRIMER.
6.
How is each/ every indicated in reference

Translate Reading Lesson f>.
tea.
Chinese character
2. Write in
He will not go. He bought two ounces. He
Will they go
No. The small one and the large
him to go quickly.
He has no tea. Give him
i
'
My
he bought
3.
No.
My
300
sheets
of
characters.
4,000
conies
every
his.
day.
Tell
four copies.
Has
one are
paper).
Correct the following, where necessary, and state reasons for
correction
4.
it ?
to time ?
Give sound, tone and meaning of the following characters
IT
{ft
ft A:
IS:
LESSON
Good manners;
ness
-h ft
VI.
polite-
Summer.
Jixi(t
<-h<
)
'
worship.
To
kill
to
to destroy
murder.
add up.
(.Jinif/
Upright
1
chcny
moon.
ch'uai Spring.
Autumn.
r
\\ inter.
To
ery.
Read
The 1st
The
llth
month.
just.
*y
ceremony;
L.
season.
The 12th month.

Night.
6.
To
between
carry
two or more
peo;
ajj_inie.r-
ple.
To open
to begin
to start.
Few
Read
A
A
Boiling.
less; less than.
.s7mo'.
Young.
clock.
To punclittle. To
point.
tuate.
light,
as a
lamp.
li-ndi
**^
in?
To
worship.
"V
To count; to check.
To move to begin
x/HDtg-n.
Xoon.
to start.
rili
>
*
K
k'eh
dav.
In an-
A (|uarter of an hour.
cient times.
To
1
Jen
engrave.
minute.
i/i-txo
To
c/i'citg.
city.
divide.
Share.
Duty.
letter.
The Four Seasons.

The
Four
Seasons
are spoken of as
c/ii
wlien they
1.
are simply enumerated, as Spring, Summer, Autumn, Winter, they
.s->
h**i(t
ch'uai
\\lien spoken of as
ffi rh'in
tony,
distinct periods they are usually followed by ~-fc t'ien, which roughly
'
'
'
'
corresponds to time in Summer-time ; e.g.,
stand alone,
'
In the winter of last year; ch'ti-nicn tongf-t'ien -^ 'E 3

In the summer of this year; clihi-iticii hxid-t'icn p $.
Xext spring;
'iiiln(j-nien
Chi en
ch'uen-t'ien
^J
OJ]
J^.
JJ.
^.
as applied to Time.
References to the length which time continues, as expressed

in Knglish by
during ', is spoken of as <a space' ; 'an interval ;' fa]
This is principally conh'ned
cfticn, affixed to the noun in <juestion.
2.
to
months and years e.g.,

During the reign of A^ning-hm
;
During the Sth month îli

He came during the night;
;
iic/i
t'<i
Kuang-hsu
r/iicn
nien C/HCD
^^
ie chicn,
(or li)lai
(or
II)*tS
t& _?i
/)o
afraid of going slowly, but of

still.
oo
fi
^y
(l
MA \D
Names
Months.
of
Section 2, the months of the

As mentioned
~ Y, n nc/i 'third'
known as 'second/
J3 WH fk'/i
ft
The 1st and 12th months form an exception, both having
Lesson
in
year are
etc.
special
though
names; the llth month also sometimes takes a

more commonly follows the above rule o/.,
it
name,
iich
% (or +
ft
foreigners has given rise to a term for

the fact that the first day of the period is devoted
This is jjjf 3$ H-p<ri, and so many weeks are spoken of
'weeks/ based
J>>
Week.
of the
with
Intercourse
4.
l
special
Days
i^.
First month; cheng^&fh j

Jft.
Eleventh month ; tone/ (or sh'ih-ih)
Twelfth month lah 'ueh $$ /3.
L.
worship.
011
How many weeks? is,

li-jxii.
many
The days of the week are reckoned from
as so
jjjj|
Sunday
/i-pai $
Monday
Tuesday
A week
'
ffi
or
li-pai-ih
jjj|[
li-pal-n
jjjg
ffi
//t^.o li-pai
jjjg
this as follows
^f
[j
and so
ff
f@
jjjg
Two
'^Jlc^
jp
the
/.<?.,
other days rJia'-ko

Last Monday;
/i-pai-i/i
on.
^^^
Monday
,
on.
...
:
-
^.)
and so
weeks; liang-ko li-pai f]|
j^
ffThis week chce-ko li-pai Jg f@ | |^. ^
Jfa
^*v
Lust week
;^rn///)//-^>a/(T| f^.
^^^
Xext week ^js i<i}li-pai "f
f^.
This
(or
jjijj
^
fg)
or fiat
r'i/i
/i-j><ti
Mow many
/.t\, tlie
Monday
Jf f@
jjig
Monday
of this \veek
and so on with
^^ ^
f^--
of last week,
^0**^^
and so ou'Jshana)
^- and so on.
A.m li-pai-ihCf)^
A few weeks ago feo ch-i-ko ii'pal fji ffl/Jfi ^^ ^^
What is the day of the week ? chin-t'ien li-pai cM ? ^^Si^'fM'
In less than a week; pith-tao ih^ko~7^(n ~fc î{
ff.
Xext Monday
fl
jjjjf
^^
In a few weeks' time; ko chi-ko ll-pai

(Q jg f-f.
'Forenoon/ and 'afternoon' follow the* same rule as 'morning'
and evening/ Lesson V, 4. <\r/.,
'
Tuesday afternoon
It-pal-n hsia-pan-t'ien
Last Wednesday morning
5.
Time, as indicated by Watches and Clocks.

Tien Sj 'A ]>oint/ stands for an hour bv the clock
?
hours being so
so
many
Half hours are 'half the

points of the clock.
points/ (inarter hours are the eighth of a Chinese hour, which equals
two KiuJish hours, and minutes are so many 'pails.' Time past
many
or before the hour
is
so
much time
less than, or
36
past;
''.//.,
\Vhaf S o'clock
One
with
the
o'clock
r/// tic,,
'.
or,
J#
jgj
ili-Hcn
<-/ioii(/
$%
tyfo
and so on
other hours.
Half past one;
/'//-/
r/unn/
/Y//-/^//
Five minute.- past one;
$*
rhoiit/
One hour;
i/i-ticn
j|[J
I|2
Jip
rliony ho u
and so
j'cn
jgg
on.
Jijf
-g
Jj.
and so on.
Quarter past one; ///-//<// r//o//// /,-o ///-/;v//

and so on.
Twenty minutes to one ilt-ficii cliont/ *lnn>
^~
.|^j
ri-x/i'ih
ft
"f*
JU1(
so on
Tilt
jg
J^-
J( n
J[|J
-Ijfi
|J
forming Defining Clauses.
W]
6. In Lesson I, Section '2, fj{j //'// was said to have 'a de.-criptive
This applies to its use at the end of clauses,
or defining force/
whether they are adjectival or adverbial f.//.,
;
^ W^
The
things that he bought; f'ft mtii-ti/i lon'j-hxi

B( $fy
the-he-bouo-ht things, fffj //// making all that ôes l>efore
/.c.,
noun
descriptive of
it
the
the neve
in
compare
English,
gotten day.'
This
is
what
lie
lib
.V/LQ/A
ln( JJ
M-
tt
These are the men from abroad
m&^m*
ci'j
He
at a
will
NOTES.
tx<ti-)i<t-/i
t
^^
/>.
T/A
My
the box
rcn
li
f^,
/;o-/i<to liynf/
ni'n
hsiang-Jsi*
ii
fih ch l ien
tify
^--
g^f
is
often omitted
and more especially

;
takes no X. A.
when
pronoun
is
'j
liang-ko rcn
In speaking of things that are difficult

and
are more suitable than
||j| trh-touy
tch-lai.
t^M^ "C<K*<_>
elder brother's child
C%
(Jfafiif/-kueJi
are outside the door, nicn u(d
to
move,
g$
^/<
used
in
the
the case of a double possessive;

o ko-ko-fih luti-txi
in
instead of o-tih ho-ko-tili hai-tei

ft
e.
l<n
tih
l>uh-tong,
possessive,
<:</.,
tih
The two men that

b
M ffl A.
or
^h-ko ih-ko
l
ming-t ien
hen he came i a la I tih sh'i-hco

hen he was in China, d a tsai
85 IliJg- L ^^^^>
The money that is in
^'/,
t'-n
1ft
uai-kueh lal
xh'i
A\
\\
t'a-vtien
time;
come to-morrow;
stayed there two years;
rft<M
A.
They came one
'
f-a
x/n
ch<y
said;
&^^
^^
fffj
tt'-f.
jj^ffil
~<.
^Jf
',
'
MAXDAJUX
g.
7V? -p
<l.
by an
especially
rz/i,
Chinese houses are divided into so many divisions, or [gj

is taken as the unit of measurement in
snegjdng of their
this
^ ^*fy~-~
take the nlace
-
HXf.
Ill
/.
of
/./>;/
Sjjf
When
speaking of time,
<'.//.,
There
r/.
k
Six o'clock
is
"f and chii"^ often

r/>o/><y p^
Ifvu^
//-S/CA
lull
considerable variety
The long form shcu-mo
'
?.
//x/<7
in
In S/echwan for example xh<i (or sha-tit'i)_

while on the lower Yangtze and in the
and mo
haei-r'i
jjj*
^^^-^
the expressions used
xh'i-hco
use everywhere, but local forms take
in
when preceded
adjective.
r.
Men-
sometimes added to
is
'
to*
PHIMEK^y
^
$& jg
J|
$|
is
for
probably
place in many parts.

.s7?'^QJs in constant use;
its
North
to-huci-ri
J are current.
KxAMl'J.KS.
When did he arrive? Two hours ago I a

He went some time ago t'a tsao-i c/rii.
1
p]
to-tsan tat)? tsao
$jfc
Hang
lien c/iong.
It is
cold in the winter
hot in the
summer ioug-t'ien
cJu
-*c^'
;
Icng^ /isia-l icn
rc/i.
good time itian-uian-ti lai.

Bring a pot of hot water at 9 o'clock chin lien chong na ih-hu rch s/nti lai.
He will be here by and by t\i heo lai iao lai.
Where is the clock that he bought yesterday? t'a tsoh-ticn mai tih chong tsaiAll in
na-li /
him
open the door chiao t'a k'ai men.

son with him t'a pa t'a-tih ri-tsi tai lai.
cannot get this shoe on chce-chi hsiai o ch'uan pit/i shaiii?.
o hsia li-pai-san hsiawill come and see you next Wednesday afternoon
Tell
to
He brought his
I
I
He
pan-t'icn iao lai k'an ni.

went during the I2th month
Translate:
to
l~a lah tick ckicn ck'it.
Do you remember
you yesterday?
the Chinese sentence that

spoke
There is a long street outside the city;
there, and afterwards call two men to come
1
I.
Xo.
take this foreign letter

and carry (J t'dfy away this large box. Two men cannot carry it
how will it do (if) I call four men? Very well. This is the money
that he gave me
the pair of shoes that his youngest son brought I
on
the
table.
That place is wet, you must not sit there; this
put
place is dry, you had better sit here.
Bring a jug of hot water this
;
Who is the
quarter to nine; I want to wash my feet.
him? is it not the man that came last Monday?
ancients had neither watches nor clocks; now we have both.
This water is deep, you mustn't cross; that is shallow, you may cross.
evening at
man
The
that struck
character that he engraved last week ? What is the time

Five and twenty minutes to four,
lie does not travel during
It is
the nioht.
be
"1 o'clock.
it
will
soon
past noon;
R. 140; ft K. 72.
Writing Kxercise:
J| JjjJ (g |g. )
Is this the
now
MANDARIN
READING LESSON
1'in.MKK.
VI.
Small Talk.
-a to
1.
Hsien-t'an f&* fK* To chat
2.
Tao
3.
Ts'ai
4.
Tan
^n
5.
Mai
teh
6.
Ts'ong*...tao {&...$]
If
7.
/?<?//
8.
Hud
9.
Chong-fan
IT.
-g
c/i'i.
Uan-fan
ft
-fe
to gossip. L. 19, 21.
Style of reign 1821-1851.

Before H-fY A"fr before there were people (who) brought. L.28.
But. L. 8.
Kuang
# AA
Jfi
Could afford to buy.

From. .. till .. L. 12.
supposing.
Can
ffi
r|i
fi
are able
Iv.
18.
to. Iv. 8.
Midday meal,
Evening meal.
39
J*A^
MANDARIN PRIM Ell.
6.
Â
JL
i
"y^wf
IE $J
IT
**/*
ft
.1
51 Vb
I #;T
0,
fflf
$f
'fft
Hi
P
4ft
^*r
3
nf
it ii
^r^
^3fc
>eti
Jtfc'
.4^
>1
ij
HSk^
>g
T E
4^
iin>i
0*
fl
.1
ii
1.
Kuan
2.
Chin-shi
liao )}ien ^j
gf^ That is
3. \ii-pien
they come
^JR*
from.
I/.
Chin-liao^ J*
'To %,
6.
T^'wi.'-
side;
f[jj
JP]
"^
l";iile<l
I'sed
that...; naineiy.
^1
&
4ft
Shut up the door

jg.
loitered. L. 14.
numerous. L.
To wail
*$
'flj
7.
to wait until.
10
..I,.
fl'
in business.
toexplain what goes before.

where
]->art of the world
their
10.
Manx-
^ That
4.
11
"j*
7.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
gmm
II
1",
if
j.
V ^
i@
it
m
T
u4
T.fll
IB]
,S
id
,
-ffi,
V
,S
s*
m m
1.
Ken,
2.
Ho
<
3.
4.
M
8
5ffl
root
With.
- P
N. A. of belts
V.
i.
L. IT.
7' owg- p]
Together jwith ^11^ p]
Man-man-tih
-\^\
Slo-.vly
flij
41
I will
leisurely.
go with you.
I/,
*T^
-*'/fcX^>*^-^x
MANDARIN PRIMER.
7.
LESSON
Again
id
A
sit
To count
oh
class
To go
ch'uh
;
Fine
rough
Unworthy mean.
nan
Male.
nil
Female.
ao
To
sacred.
create
to
Much many
;
to
make.
more
'
Îso; yet; still;

&* more. Read huatr.
To
ly
eh
.
Black
ei
;
ai
eh
much
how many
to-shao
nien-chi Age.
*
A clan.
ta-fah
To
send.
towel ;
a handkerchief.
sheo-cJwrfi*
dark.
even.; and.
In
White.
-;4 ih-uei Shang-
vain.
ti
Chih
?
?
a great deal.
Yellow.
huang
more;
Cost-
dear.
Surname.
/-I/
than.
How
3
give back.
Honourable.
ex-
to produce.
pi
J5
minute.
Holy
sheng
ts
To
out.
pend
sort.
ts<
owner.
vulgar.
hs
if
f\
Read
wait.
to calculate.
Coarse
Venerable; old.
yeass.
number.
teng
ts'
more.
Very; extremely.
^
Year
To
VII.
$fo
One God.
as Sign of Indirect Object.
1. In Lesson IV, Section 2 }

pa was defined as the sign of
Chih 1{fo in like manner may be regarded as a
the Direct Object.
sign of the Indirect Object, thus partly corresponding to the words
'to,' and 'for' in such sentences as, 'Write two characters for me;' or,
'
Take the book
by
to him.'
'
for,'
Object
following
it
by
Preceding the verb it may be translated

it stands
to
immediately before the
'
'
e.g.,
Buy two
^
if .R
towels for
me
chih o
mai
<&*^
^) sheo-chin
9
liang-t
jfe ffi
K*
ft
y nr Batters are
or matter of purpose.
ffi 5fe
to.
prosper,
it is
simply
*\
MAN DAK IN
I'KLMHK.
%H
Give him the black one y>a /><// lih cliili Iff,
this book to him; i>a r/KC-^.'/i-.s'/m la I
;
Take
fty
1fe-
r./u'h
hn,
JC
Write two characters for me; chih o hsie liang-ko
tsi
jfe ffi
3|
3$
-
B*-'.
me
I will first tell you, and then you may tell

chih ni fine/, ni heo-lai k'o-i chiang chih o t'ing
{fc
*W
ft
o hsiot <'hiarfg
&
jfc j{|
ffo
g marking something Additional.
)&/%& t sal
jg ie
ffi
2. Sentences which speak of sompthintr pvt.ra- usually take jj

Aaz or jfaie or
Both /wt/ jg and ^sa/'
have idiomatic
feaiJI^.
the
in
cases
uses, generally intensifying
meaning
many
they cannot
to and
be translated.
As a rule in this construction, they, with
shao $? precede the verb e.g.,
any more
Is there
Yes
muh
hai iu
iu
hai iu jS
W ix ^&?
jiwHave they any more paper
muh
in
.^
fefljt:f|68*>&
How many pencils has
t'a-men hai iu
No;
^-
he besides
hai iu to-shao plh?
t'a
'
want
still
to
~~~-
1< P9 1&
ask him a question

1*J
S&:
Do you want any more

More than
More than
hundred
a chapter less
I do not
He
/V4
When
b tsai
puh
tab lianrj-ko
% ^ contrasted
is
J|L.
shen-mo
H^
CM ||.
chl
A-
-ffi
Ijfy
/fc
f@.
A-
'
with
IX".
/I"
A.
is
understood or
commonly used
interrogative sentences, save when the

In such cases the N. A.
already expressed.
noun
is
^^
for
How many men
in
In Central and Western China
stands for the noun.

is
^^
^ If %
II, Section 1. When larger numbers are in

to-shao takes the phfjoe of
cA/, but takes no N. A.
when followed by
noun
jp-
!?
fy fo
small numbers are speken of
^^
fi^
îao^
with
commonly used, Lesson

question,
fy
shao yien ih-chang
t'a ie
ih-ch'ien to ren
%. r
To-shao
3.
t'a-tih tonfr-hsi to
want anything more;

wants two
also
a thousand persons
/ao 55
_/JM/I
to
ih-peh
His things are many;
Read
/wu iao
iu?
o hai iao uen t'a ih-chii-hua
muh
c/ti
to-shao
are there
jjfa
chi-to
e.g.,
tsai na-li
iu to-shao ren
How many shoes has he ?

iu to-shao hsiai-ts'i?
How many foreign garments are there ? uai-kueh
'.
t'a-
chien su
Not many
^g
;
muh
^C
iu
^
^^
to-shao
i!?
ft
(or chi-to)
43
i-shang iu
S^C-
j^
^^
*j?
(or
to-
J^J
MANDARIN PEIMEE.
7.
&
Passive Forms indicated by
The
4.
many
shi.
idiomatic use of words in Chinese often takes the place of

grammatical forms in Western languages. The Passive
definite
Voice for instance, is indicated by position as well as by the use of

tih as a
Tense auxiliaries. For example, Jg sh'i used with
correlative may be translated in an active or passive form according
certain
frfjf
to the connection
e.g.,
This money was supplied by him chcv-ko ch'ien sh'i t'a ch'uh
ft ffi ft.
ffl
This was done by his son ; chce sh'i t'a fi-ts'i tso tih
fjj,
j
J
;
tih
&
*$&
Did
you do
this
No
ft
To ask
fid
m tso tih mo
sh'i
bought by him
as the coarse one

ffi
chce
puh
ts'u tih shi t'a
sh'i
J||
mai
J^
fj;
mo ?
tih
jg.
Fame, and Age.

person's name and age
is an essential of good
and ffi o are usually omitted in both question and
In some districts
answer, jj kuei and
pi taking their place.
where manners are not cultivated, both are omitted but it is better
5.
manners
ni
fj;
jjjfc
for a foreigner to use them.

In referring to a person who
<
is not present, he is
spoken of as $J
hsing jj so and so ', and the jj; kuei is dropped.
In asking the age of children JH clu^ not
to-shao, is used.
The following are the most commonly used forms
Your honourable name ? kuei hsiny ? j(; ^_J.
^^
My
vi-'
unworthy name
What is
\.jr
the
That person
What
is
is Chang y(pi)hxinf/
Chang $fr % ^.
of that person ? na ili-uei hshuj shcn-itio
name
is
the
named Pien; na-ko ren hshu/ Pien

name of this gentleman? when asking
presence of the one referred to
That person named Fang

tsoA-na-picn Jft fg
old are
How
"
How
g^
chce ih-uei kuei hsiny

is
old are you
^ v>
asking the age of a child
chin-men
^ p ^.
used in
to ta
the
in
fi ^; ^J.
JJ
na-ko hsing Fany tih
?
fi:j
31
you
over there
fflS
chi sui
nien-chi
am ten years old sh'ih sui (-J- ]^).

am forty years old this year chin-nien s'i-sh'ih ^
He is more than fifty years old t'a u sh'ih to sui fy J.
I
I
-f-.
fr^
vju-'
-f-
^tv
Repetition of Verbs.
6.
Teny
between,
as,
^ and some other verbs

^ -\& en9 ih teny
^
~1
/V
Sfc
are often repeated with

Sfc
^^' ?'^ ^', etc.,
'
6.17.,
ih
'
.MANDAKLN LMUMKK.
him
'IVI1
to wait a while
wash
(Jive this a
]>m/
past 4 o'clock
a.
^^^
tcn<j
Jg jg f@
//.s/
/'//
(my
Ten minutes
as,
/jo,
c/u(j.o fat. fait/
c/nt'-ko
lo has waitctl a long time
g
m
Jjj
*~"
^^
Dfe*
~J*
to often replaces
is
b.
joined to pj" Jj[ &<o-i at the end
indicate satisfaction or acquiescence.
In the West
*3E
fo H/U/I,
.s-'j
+#
Ic ^
c.
7.
-O*^
of
fen
(Kj
gj
sentences to
commonly read hwin.
is
[See Lesson
XXVI.]
MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES.
Make a box for tue chili o tso ih-k'co hsiang-ts'i.
What is the name of that young man ? na-ko shao
He is old fra nicn-chi lao-liao.
p]
jj
nieti
ren hsing sheu-mo ?
Wait awhile,
soon be there teng-ih-teng o chin lai^

Pien Pa ta-fah na-ko hsing Piên lih ch'ii.
Old and young, male and female are here tsai-cfus-li iu nan, nil, lao, shao.
Give him 10 cash less shao chih t'a sJnJi-ko ch'ien.
This Bible was bought by me due-pen Sheng-shu sh'i o mat till.
Count and see how many there are su su fcan iu to-shao.
I still have
something else to say o hai iao shoh chi-chil hua.
The yellow one is his, the black one is mine huaug tih sh'i t'a-tih ; hch
He
sent the
I'll
man named
tih
o-tih.
sh'i
The Lord can save men Cliu k-'o-i chin rcn.

The heavens and the earth were created by God
;
eldest brother
Pien
ti sh'i
Shaiig-li tsao tih.
"Who sent that man Chang here? did not

Those basins which I bought for him were not dear
the coarse one cost forty cash, the fine ones eighty cash each
I also
bought a white teapot for him and a black box. That person named
:
I asked him, Will you give me

? I said, The one that was
said,
bought by your younger brother two days ago. I have two black
ones, I still want three white ones, have you them ? Please tell me
the meaning of this character 'fans/'
when you have finished, I will
Fang
more than
is
that long towel
forty years old
He
Which one
how will this do ? The female was under thirty years old,
was between forty and fifty, the girl was twelve years old.
He washed more than 100 garments for me; how many are there
here now ? Not many these four or five, were they not washed by
him ? He was here more than three weeks, one day less than four
weeks he says he will come again on the 1st of the 1st month next
This is Mr. Chang's handwriting
was not
year.
(his characters)
this Chinese letter written
by him ? I asked him to write it for me
when he was writing it I said, When you have finished writing it
I will give you 400 cash.
When was this? On the 10th of
tell
you
the male
month.
Writing Exercise
last
R. 38.
ffi
^^4%%
45
E. 125;
&
K. 106;
MANDARIN PRIMER.
7.
READING LESSON
WK+A K
&m^
VII.
-fc
Confidence Trick.
JL
H^-til J^ it
frit EI
IT
tff# ^ "&
P
ff
_L
waE
s-^w
5*I*S iflwl n
T* * S ft A IK Mf^ m
&m
^m*
ttt-t*
is,
ffi
"^C
East of the barrier
Manchuria.
To add
applied to additions to the family.

Huaii*-hsP
L. 18.
g* Pleased
gratified.
Kad-hsin
lated
gft Elated.
Kad-hsing*
In^-uei* 1*1 j^ Because.
L. 18.
Tlie present was trifling, but the intention was good.
AA
l[!w li
Chih I' a ch'i i)iing
^ Gave him a name.
Uan*-ch uen* Ten thousand perfections from jfc ch'iien Perfect. Iy. 20.
T'i 4 Îj To shave. L. 23.
Ch*eng*-lia(P fa ~? Became it resulted in...L. 19.
Continually. L,. ^4.
A general store a chandler's shop. L. 25.
o*p'u* 91 lit
Ticii*- $f
-fife
46
MANDARIN
A
II
^
-tf
is
wm
-*?
i(i
sl
T,m
From
V.
/// sheti tih
C/iao 3
5.
P*cng<
6.
Teng pith
7.
Iv. 23.
H1J Together.
Ih-tong
Hao-hao-tih
Carefully.
8.
chien*- jf
to shi
L.
--^^
-^
is,
2.
top to toe.
3.
4.
$ty
i|&
ex^
ft
$ The proprietor
Lao*-pan*
7V0*' j& Just. X. 10.
^ To look for.
2.
1.
I'IMMKII.
9.
To meet
^^^ ^
;'to
knock
against.
1^. 16.
In a very short time.
00^
47
MANDARIN PRIMER.
7.
ft
"Sf
ffi
-a
'.
is
&
mn
2.
/feo 1
-fii.
To wrap up.
ih mien
/^ mien^\
L/.
23.
|gf
same time.
3.
cfri
Ch'i*-lai* jg ?K
g below.
4.
KueH-t'ai*
5.
Huan*
&
To
rise up.
ffi
T^The
To change
We
6.
Tsai*-hiiei*
7.
Chnan^ f% A brick.
|f.
-^
Talking and wrapping
Used here
as auxiliary to
it
up
pao &.
at the
So
of
counter.
;
to
will
exchange
meet again
48
#Yz
for.
"
;
"p here
Good-bye."
is
I/.
an auxiliary to
22.
4*-
"
-3
\IA\h\i: IN
LESSON
chcii
True
tiny
The
truly
VIII.
real.
A button
top.
worn on the hat.
Topmost
To
nidi
sell
A tub
very.
for.
f
AW
Too
t'ai
c/i
iff
I:
fo compel.
lonie
family.
--*:;
E*
Wrong
^T
mistaken.
'
Time
Saviour.
labour ;
;
skill.
Leisure.
( 'Jllx'
-I
pinq-tw
biscuits.
cover
very.
/i
Skin; leather; bark;

fur
outer coverTare of
ing.
Ax/
.,
Small box with
...
Sign of Superlative;
-t
much.
bowl.
a casket.
,"*
child
boy.
hn<'i-Ifti
goods.
4
To
tony
keny
back.
To go
back.
hm'i-ch'ii
With
use.
îy^
To come
by.
.<
Itead kerig 1
1 -
-.
i*
14
watch.
filicn
k'eii
s])irit
Willing.
False
* [?
only
A lamp
9
a-.
meet.
procession.
To
assent.
unreal.
To
Able.
But
ray.
stool
form.
a god.
To
plate-;
To
employ.
piece of stone.
ili-finy
cause.
tx'i
Comparison
ni(i(>-
hat.
of Adjectives.
Adjectives are compared by ])refixing or adding certain words

the Positive.
The following precede the adjective
|J ken/;
1.
to
h?n
fli
Jjfting ; while
and ff 'foteh-hen follow
;
That piece
of
stone
hsic
"
5J
or
^^
/////>/
/A ticn-ri
it;
ft-
r-.r/.,
much
is
heavier
im-k'uui
sMM'eo kcny
Tnis
wH
(a
tliino('>
is
the best
-!:<>
fony-n! Jicn (or tiny) hfio
w)
Husbandry and
/V//<rx
-I!)
flu' tiro <///>/'

fn'ttft
MANDARIN
Q.
This
8
*
good, that
is
is
hao, na-ko hao-hsle Jg
fgj
chce-ko p'ctn-txi hi ih-tien Jg (g
cJi<t>-ko
better;
gft
This plate is rather larger
K-
*.,-That form
(
very long; na-4 iao
is
* $ s more
8 a- than
pan4eng eh'ang
teh-hen
'
one thing__js in question, but only

"When_
expressed, the sign of Jhe_Cojnqparatixe_ is rarely used ; e.y.,
This is the better; hat
clnt:-ko hao jj Jg Jg f@ #f
.s-//?'
That
ffi $j|
one
is
wao-tei ch'iany ffi Jf i]]| J- J.

;
is
more
used
in the North, and may be
comnionly
Ôh'iang
Hdo-hxie jf
variously translated according to the connection.
means both Better/ and
good few/ but the context makes clear
which meaning is intended. Hao-chi jff ^, joined to a suitable
the better hat
is
net -tiny
^
c
'
may be translated literally 'A good few;' e.y.,

There are a good few people here; hi hao-chi ko
N. A.,
M
-
jl.fi Afejgll.
liave
'A-tFobd
many
T'ai
*Vl.
A,
7V//
tT^the
v^
*r
come;
]>eople
-fa
in
rcn tsai-chce-
hao-hsie rcn lai-liao 7^ jj
as indicating Excess.
goes a step beyond the Superlative degree and conveys

of 'excessive': it precedes a positive statement, and in
idea
may also precede a negative one ; e.y.,

too long; ntt-ko tong-h#i t'ui ch-'any ]J|) f@
certain connections
That thing
*
is
'
^
'
'
|f
"
.Hkcû
is
person
too l>ad
n<t-l;<>
/</<
t'ui j)u7i-]Hio-li<io
JjJ
f@
7| joined to Verbs_to_form the Passive Partkile.__
is
2. T^/t
joined to the verb to form the Passive Participle,
and may be followed by an adjective, or a negative and an adjective.
tih is used
n the North f}
interchangeably withV^ tc/t in this
fTnrtk)n
e.g.,
This character
That
letter is
is
well written
badly written;
SS^P*.
a
That was
good bargain
lie epeaks
good Chinese;
4-
That
us JE
fflf
diaii-
n ? f^
@
w a ^ *F.
ift
is
-nti-fciiy
latin
na-fco tong-JiM nuu-teJi JKIO

1
a-tih
Chong^kueh-hua
shol^teh^ Jiao
F.
very badlv
made; nu-pu
50
i-ttti
/**o-(//f
//<
.MAN DAI! IN
IMMMKFf.
g.
Ts'o-liao $g ~f added to Verbs.
When f /.x'o is joined to a verb it usually take> ~j" //"o, and

be
translated by 'wrong;
'mistaken/ etc., according to the
may
context e.y.,
Kight or wrong ? Right ; ts'o puh-ts'o ? puli-tx'o ffii /> fq,.xf fa3.
They took the wrong box

in ft
t'a-men
t'ai
te'o-lic
He
mistook his man

You heard wrongly;
He
made
has
t'a
/
mistake
k'an tx'o-fiao rni

t#'o-fi(in fft
/'7>?/7
in that sentence
fl
uses
fg
flfi^jg
"J*
|(j|
na-chil-hua
t'a shorn
of.
To use ', $} /or/ has two

4. Apart from its primary meaning
other important meanings which can be best illustrated by examples.
'
The first is ' To need in the sense of To
To take up/ as
reojiire,'
time or material.
The second is to indicate the instrument with
<
'
'
"""
which something
He
cut it, using (with) a knife/ where

and immediately precedes the name
of the instrument used.
Ii7 the Xorth
slii is
largely used in
place of $} iony in this last sense; while na ha<s^f=: the same usage
in both North and South; e.g.,
done
is
iony corresponds to
'
as,
with
'
It is needless to
go ; puh iony ch'ii /p

Unsuitable for use ; pu.h I an iony (or slii) xf jff
(or
Do not use this thing puh iao iony chcu-ko toruf-hsi
.not take
7
/^**V
many days
ifj
to
J/*'
make a
HP
f--t*
"^
tso
table;
tT~t
*-
^*-
**
It will not take three days '^puh SS^.sro? t'ien

^
(iod created the heaven and the earth in six days";
iony luh t'ien tsao t'ien ^Jl*SJ^7^5c55îfi
Potential
Mood formed by
^hnny-fi
huei.
In Lesson III, Section 3, the Potential Mood was indicated

feh.
When, however, it is wished to convey the idea of
by
proficiency and to shew that the ability to do anything is acquired,
hnei is generally used.
Observation and practice will teach
which is the. best form to use in any given connection; e.y.,
5.
He
He
able to buy (well); t'a hnei mm' fy &r J[.

can wash clothes; t'a huei hsi i-xhmiy
1jr
is
JHuei-lai
6. Huei-lai
[uj
3j$
Qjl
and /niei-ch'H
$fc
well as principal verbs
and
;
huei-ch'ii
e.y..
7)1
gfe
'^C
^-
as Auxiliary Verbs.
HI
-^
are used as auxiliary a?
MANDAIMN
g.
I'lilMKIi
to come back; chiao fa Inici-ltii

to
|uf
pj f
back; no hnei-ch ii
j^, v^
[u| ^-^
He cannot go back
y>//. telTTmewh'u fy /
Bring back that large hat ^n na.-finy to mao-tvi
Tell
him
Take
it
<<y.
NOTES.
some thing
is
[uj
int
AW/-/'' J^ffe when applied to work usually denotes

oi'
manual labour, for which Jl kony by itself
a.
outsiTle
used.
Tan
b.
is
fg,
often used alone for the sake of euphony.

[.sVr
Isx*on
X AT//.]
What you say is quite correct ;// s/w/i tih him ih-ticn pith-ts'o.
am willing to go, but he is not o k'en ch'ii, tan-^hâ puhk^n
*
o hsien-tsai
I have no time now
fl+*JL/&i*'
fyit/i
;
L,
*.
iJ^kong^.
he leisure
Yes
kong-fu mitliîjt?iu kong-fa.

puh iao shoh liucTF'a kûai^***'*
t'a'iiu
"V^xHas
Do not speak too quickly
He is not at home t* a pith tsai chici.
That man is false na-ko ren shi chia
;
ch'u.
^^
*&*'
cannot use this thing

All used up; long nan
tih
jLfa
chtc-ko tong-hsi o long puh faui.
**
liao.
He employed the wrong man t'a ts'o long liao ren.

There is a Saviour iu ih-uei Chiu-chu.
There is a true God in heaven tsai t'ien shang iu ih;
come back to-morrow morning at a

now I will go next
The pencil he bought two days ago is* good,
the pencil I bought yesterday is better, but the pencil Mr. 4 "hang
This lamp is small, the lamp that man Pien uses is
uses is the best.
Translate
Tell
him
I have no time to go
quarter to ten o'clock.

Wednesday afternoon.
much
smaller.
This
to
is
The black box
your mistake.
He
wrote several characters
men have brought is

made much better. He does
those four
well made,
box of mine is
things too
slowly; he went two days ago to see Mr. Fang, and he is not back
Has he finished making that casket ? Not yet he says that he
yet.
wrong.
b
it
this
It will not need much money

will bring it when he has finished it.
This is the better garment that large one is
to buy that small hat.
;
too dear.
Can
that
woman make
clothes^
\o.
Chinese use hot
You should
faces, foreigners use cold water.
use a piece of good paper in writing to a teacher. It is better to give
him two less, lie cannot walk back. The false are numerous, the
water to wash their
true few.
When
the girl had finished eating the cake, she returned

have you not a larger one ?
This plate is too small

Writing Exerciser^
home.
S^
fi
52
"t
ffl
**>
101.
MAMAK1N
READING LESSON
A
,,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
ii.
12.
13.
14.
15
16.
Al
VIII.
3<
Visit to the Cit
PP<
^
'tfc
ft
3e
I *gi
Sengîg A Province. I/. 14.

The province of Shantung.
Ptfrpien* :Jh il Lit- North side the North.
Seng-ch'eng The provincial capital. V. 3.
Chi*-nan* Fu* The capital of Shantung.
L. 12.
L. n.
ft To dwell to live in a place.
In the country. L. 16.
Tsai* hsiang 1 hsia* ~fc $P|>
Li"1 ch'eng* ^|
Distant from the city. L. 12.
Li 3 -lu*
Miles (of) road. Iv. 12.
Meo 3 St A Chinese acre, about ^ of English acre.
Ren-ren
Man-man, i.e., everybody. L. 10. See below rieh uehft
Fu*-ch in l *H
Father. V. 2.
Derrt-i* g|
Willing. L. 24.
7
'?*Vs '^ M
interrogative particle. L. 10.
fine '; beautiful.
Good to see
Hao k'an IffKan*-chiJi*-tih rih-tsi
Market days. These are usual 1
$j B
(TA
M^
\\
'
^^
held every five days in North China
the term
is
not used in the South.

(
53
j^\
MA
Four
L
Si*-fang' TO
Retil-nacfi
4.
t3
5.
T'ien 1 ik l
6.
Cfruan
wore
Hang
tilt
sides
Busy
$&
4"
shi^f.
XDARIN
all
PRIME!?.
quarters.
L. 25.
bustling.
Thanks to thank. L. n.
A full mouth gladly.
;
^
&tj
As soon
^/
///z
as
it
shi H5
was light.
P*J
L. 21.
7.
Hsin l %\ New;
S.
Trti* ^5c
9.
//9/rt
10. Mai-pî-tih
ri.
recent.
L. 14.
wear on the head.

>" here=to go to.
'^
liao
Jt
fl^J
j^
A
T
V.
2.
seller of skins.
V.
4.
^ What he wore
L. 10.
Faid a high price for
it,
\vas
he
IMJIM
Qfe
T &
as
4*
its
3fo
8.
F.I;.
til
4B ft
D9
ft
m
Pl'tl
sMi<fi:t7^
ah #* =*. *to
ift
Jfa
&'m
T
c/ii 3
Tsi*
1.
2. A''fl/
3.
Pa*
7.
Self; himself. L. 18.

ch'ien \jfl X ? Paid the money,
final particle.
$|^ To
%
y*s'a/P
4.
5.
6.
/mo
m n
:
rub
I,. 16.
to wipe
to scour.
Mien* llj Vermicelli. V. 4.

^f* g To love to be fond of. 1^. 10.
//'a ^'6> 4 ">" f The next lesson. L. 21.
vJJ
?i*>
(I
MANDAfelK PRIMER.
9.
LESSON
4-fe
An
To
chao
IX.
account
tsuhrch'ien Full
bill.
to
To owe
find.
01-
J"**
An
tnif/-t#i
"*
pay
calculate
A reckoning
to
instrument:
an abacus.
reckon.
4
To borrow. To
4a
H h
1
4"
2
t'oiif/
Brass
W>//
/
>
oh
corner;
a horn.
dollar.
<>f
repair
IB?
in-tfti-'
bank
The market
Jxnty-xJri
ch (
fa
,.
Silver
<'hijp-1xr
,3-
*^
wealth.
Gold.
AAA*
The bottom.
A monev
ten-hen
eQ&-shi That is
namely
price.
rough draft.
string of cash.
t'ien-
A shop
is.
ih-tiao eh'ien.
sJaop.
foreign money.
down.
;
Dollars
iang-ch'ie'n?
note.
4
ver weighing about

~>0 ounces.
to patch.
hair of an ani-
ticket
//-/.s'z
iicn-j)fw*"Â shoe of sil-
7C
ocean. Foreign.
mal
r>
money.
to
change.
The
The
weights.
chia-ch'ien Price.
exchange
To
Standard
"
X.A.
To
'o
8V
lend.
copper.
TV
eh !<!<>>
ingot of
silver.
balance.
To
ctish.
/>L^-**s
seek
of scales.
sign.
pair
-
The Monetary System.

1.
The monetary system
of
China
is
extremely c$hiplicated,
At
the present time the adoption of a silver coinage and the minting of
new copper coins go side by side with the use of lump silver (known
as 'sycee') and cash '. Jn the larger centres banks are being started
after the foreign order; there is a Bank of China, Ta-eh'ing in-havig
<
Meanwhile the
}H fg fj, iii addition to many private ones.
older hanks continue on the old lines.
The decimal system is used
universally, and calculations are made in ordinary transactions to
two places
of decimals,
i.e.,
to tenths
and hnndredths.
Q.
@JLl
rTftii-j
MANDARIN PRIMER.
9.
Silver Currency.
Silver currency may be classed as uncoined and coined ; the former
<
consisting of shoes' and 'ingots', and spoken of as so many ounces,
or 'taels', and hundredths: the latter c,niHr4ing of dollars and cents
There is no coin at present to

divided into tenths and hundredths.
a
tenth
of
but
five
the
cent, ten cent and twenty cent
tael,
represent
These are called >]* iff. j| hsico la-nfj
dollar pieces are in circulation.
'
vh'icn, or Small foreign money ', and the same name is given to the
as to the coin that represents it ; ;H. 5h 'jf^ Jjt, u fen â?///ih-kioh and
r'i
kioh (or
iJi-nift.o,
ffi
for
5
10
cents,
cents, 20 cents, or for coins of
standing
amount
^ ^
cfcien,
fi-niao)
^ ^
The following examples illustrate some terms used in

*^*^
connection with silver currency
****'*
these values.
'shoe
Â
An
of silver
?
<
of silver
ingot
One ounce
of silver
Fifty tael cents

tael
Fifty-five
)ih-ko iien-pao
ih-ting in-ts'i
ih liany in-ts'i
u-ch'ien
cents
in-ts'i
2L
u-ch'ien
***
fgj
jj
~-
^ ^ -f*
in-ts'i
u-fen
55.
55.
*?.
One
tael
A#iF.
One
and eight cents;
ih lieu if/ ling
dollar; ih-k'uai iany-clrien

Half a dollar Ur-kioh JL
or ^
>
&&
cents
Twenty
Twenty-five
One
dollar
fi-kioh
iaiifj
cents; r'i-kioh
and
five cents
ch'ien
^
)an
pah fen
ft
M^
in-ts'i
$L ^.
faudfbvng-ch'ien
^^
~
^j
-j^:
gj.
u fen
5* j^
iang-ch'ien Zl
ih-k'uai ling u fen iany-ch'ien
.
^.
Jj|
*Sfl-ffS|.
In all these examples it will be seen that, as in English, the denomination in which the amount is expressed, ^dollars or taels, comes last.
In the case of dollars,

the
N.A.
gg,
too,
j^:
iang-ch'ien is frequently omitted ;
k'uai indicating that dollars are in question.
Liang
usually omitted in speaking of large round numbers,
UJJ
is
as,
Thirty thousand taels; san uan
The
stands for dollars

sign
abbreviations for taels and cents.
In-ts'i
'The
tael
Jg ~p and iang-ch'ien
'
'
The
e.g.,
What
does silver change at
What
does the dollar chat
mz'p
;j^
'
dollar';
in-ts'i
IS
while Tls.,
^ "Pcts.,
are the usual
^ are used as the equivalent of

Iman to-shao ch'ien ^ -J
in-ts'i
nc/-cji icn
Jnimi /o-,s7mo ch'ien
MANDARIN PKIMEK.
9.
Copper Currency.
Until a few years ago 'cash' was the only copper coin used
This is strung on strings usually made of
throughout the Empire.
twisted straw.
The amount on each string varies some districts
2.
having 100 cash, (frequently two or three less) on separate strings

while other districts use a number of these amounts strung together
and called a ^ tiao. The value of a
tiao varies according to the
number of strings that compose it, but it forms the unit of calculation
in the exchange of cash, i.e., if the dollar changes for 1/260 cash it is
said to change for
Hi "/^ ih t'iao r ] )C ^ luh ; the word
ch'ien not being used in this connection.
The new copper coinage
'i
has different names in different places, being variously called

it too
3F t'ong koh-ts'i, fpj *f $J t'ony ts'i-ri and tSony-ugi If]
;
reckoned by the
tiao.
jjjjfy
^
is
It
follows
that
Avhen
are
articles
in
for
paid
full
in
small
tiao being short count

amounts, a loss is incurred owing to the
hence a larger or smaller discount must be allowed in reckoning
accounts.
This discount is called Jg J- ti-fa'i or jfg -^ jg ti-ts'i
ch'ien,
be
and the word
fjf pu is employed to indicate that the loss may

Where money is paid in full, i.e., 1)1) | 1100, it is
<
repaired'.
said to be jg,
''Full cash
ixiih di'ien,
I want full cash
o iao
money needs
The amount
to be
ti-fa'i
fj|
36 cash
is
/^\ (HI
be made up
to
made up
H+
e.y.,
fault -I'h'ieii ffi
How much
ch'ien tih
'
JE
?
iao
it-
iao
pu
pu
chi-ko ch'ien
san-shih-luh-ko
I& "?
fr&
Paper Currency.
3. P'iao 3? is used both for cheques and cash notes, jjjj^ ch'ien or JH
in being prefixed to shew the difference. At present they are largely
confined to local use, the
p'iao of one place not being negotiable
elsewhere
cheque for silver; ih-chany in p'iao
Cash notes
Jjj|
ch'ien p'iao
jpL
notes for ' cash ; nu, (t<i.a.n-tei hunti.
;
'
Change
Go and change 'cash'
for notes;
na
eJ>.'if>,n
ch'ien ch'u
3?L
^
^ ^p ^ ^.
huan
p'iao-ts'i
The abacus or reckoning instrument is universally used. To

reckon on it is expressed by JJ to, not ^[ suan, which is used for
To Jj* ^[
accounts.
â suan-p'an is also used in a
general sense,
<
To
calculate
He
'.
cannot use the abacus
nnmCome and
t'a
reckon accounts
puh
lai
58
huei ta suan-p'an
suan-chany
^[
[(g.
4jfo
7[\
MANDARIN
CM*
The word
4.
fgf
I'llIMKR.
9.
fg and its Uses.
meaning both 'to borrow' and
chic,
'
to lend/
and the same applies to JjJ

causes beginners sonic dilliciilty
(7m o)
when used of paying a balance, or receiving one that is due. Practice
is the great thing, but a study of the following
examples may be
;
helpful
He
wants to borrow $o
ta lao chic
&
He cannot
\Yill
t-a
.**
him 300 cash
I lent
k'uai
o c/m> w/<
pdi
ch'ien chili t'a
ffi
o f||
fg
^^
has gone to borrow money ; t'a ch'ii chie ch'ien

fg
still has a balance due to me of $4 ; t'a hal ckao chih o
Men
$ ;1 ft $ ft
& Mil m$t
fgf**"
,
J|J fjj.
borrow money t' clue ./>/< foqtf/i'u'H flh, fg

you lend me a dollar rh'iiu/ chic ih-k'uai ch'ic-n Ghih
He
He
Min-k'uai ch'ien fy
"JJ
^.
s'i-
g|.
I will give yon the balance of

chih ni ft
faYon give me the balance of $1.00
400 cash
;
chao
s'i
ch'ien
peh
ni chao ih-k'uai ch'ien chih o
Defining Power of chiu-shi $t g.

In Lesson I, J xhi was defined as meaning isj.; âre ; etc.
chiu-sh'i fffc -|J, while also having the same meaning, is used in a
:
5.
slightly different manner, usually defining or explaining something

"*
that has gone before ; <y/.,
.
The two
characters
nien-chi Uanfj-ko
ts'i
'nien-vhi*
chiu-sh'i
sui-su tih
mean
i-s'i
the
same as
'
sui-su
^$^ (!3^tfiS
NOTES. a. Puh-hao
jf before a verb, in many districts
indicates anything inadvisable, or difficult in the nature of things.
b. ch'ni-sh'i jy^
chiu-sh'i-liao are also added to
/S or S
^T
sentences to indicate satisfaction or assent, as, 'Very well, give him

(
forty cash; chih t a si-shih ko ch'ien chin shi liao $fc fy
-^ (@
c.
In the
A\êst,
dollars are called in-uen fg ]].
[See Lesson
XXVIL]
What
^]
$j|
the price of silver at present? hsien-tsai in-tsi shen-mo hang-shi ?

I cannot find it
o chao pith tao.
I have found it
o chao tao-liao.
What is the selling price of this? chtz-ko mai shen-mo chia-cfrien?
I will go and look for him
o ch'ii chao t'a.
Cakes are bought with ready money mai ping-tsi iao hsien-ch ien.
is
59
MANDARIX PRIMER.
9.
cannot be bought for 2,000 cash Hang tiao chîcn mai puh tao.
3
clothes c/i u huan i-shang.
Give him $2 more I will give him more than $2 to c.hih t'a liang-k'nai ch icn
It
Go and change your
o iao chih
He
Pa liang-fcuai
to chîen.
reckons accounts with a pencil t a iong pih suan chang.

This is of no account chfc-ko suan puh teh shen-mo.
The 'Ta-fah money shop has closed its doors Ta-fah ch'icn-ticn kuan liao
l
'
men.
There is one God in
ih-nci Chcn-shcn.
Translate:
$102. $30.20. $706.08. $.10. $.15. $.84. $1,060.07.
$20,406.09. $200 or $300. $1 or $2. J of a dollar, f of a dollar. $2f
Tls. 86. Tls. 65. Tls. 104.06. Tls. .10. Tls. .29. Tls. .40. Tls. 100.U1.
Tls. 1 J million, f of a tael. J of a tael. Tls. 1 J. Tls. 2f
Why does he
not repay that Tls. 206.24?
Last month he asked me to lend him
$3.00. I said, When will you repay me? He said, On the 3rd of
next month. I thereupon lent him $3.00. To-day the dollar changes
.
1,260 cash three days ago the tael changed for 1,800 cash.
have a balance due to him of 20 tael cents.
When the account
was reckoned, he went to the street to buy things. Why has he
come to look for me ? Who knows
Who are you looking for ? I
have come to look for a man named Uan to borrow a few hundred
cash of him. I said, You look for him in vain.
thousand cash more
or less does not matter.
The money shop on the main street opened
Have you any cash notes ? Yes, I have two.
its doors to-day.
for
still
Writing Exercise
^gJj&S&B- 167.
READING LESSON
IX.
More Money than Sense.
T/i
m
Wi
I
yAXLA
Mfc
1.
2.
iiisA
a
qc:
S\-
-A
4
In k'uh in ma
^*X 4 !u 4 Both crying and swearing.
Hsi-hsiang
%$ The cou try to the west of the city.
60
L. 17.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
-*A/
I-'J
.^^^
spoken
good
Hao f-ing
A"'7
^'>
Huan
5.
73
|5 There,
to listen to
fcu* p JU- jC>
l/v
'
J^ST.
ifQ
fife
where he was
;
living.
specious. See #f iff- Reading Lesson 8.
Mouth sweet, heart bitter a fair-jlf
[3 ?K Change it and bring it back.

hua uei chen* W
W IS ISIift Accepted
huei-lai
t'a-tik
faith.
-ftfe
L,. 19.
li hsiang*
6.
Hsin
7.
OHZ suan
8.
Puhfei
10.
11.
fain
M' ^
%
mpw m^
/1H4
villain.
4.
9.
SC
Good
Jf,
a
1^=1
,T.^ @:^
â-,
hsiao
si ^\
fo
si
^ ^ Thought to himself.
^ This a mere nothing.
jg |
/J^
is
^ ^ Gives no trouble.
entrust with to
L.
commission.
%* To
Huei puh lai
^\ 2J Could not return.
Paw*
To manage to do. L,. 10.
L. n.
Tôh
[01
17.
L. 22.
his
statement in
.MAXDARIN PBIMEB.
9.
*n
-WL
i.
AS & &TA1 m
,-
ill
:rt
Ru* su 4
chiao 1
1
''/s'
liao hsin
2.
is
ftj it,
v3'
L^
pj
$^
$11
ifr
j*
-fcr
-ffifc
5.
-/gw*45f.
Useless.
Jfl
&
6.
Pihtshi
7.
A' 6* //rw a
It
8. /r s />'0 4
9.
nj
!|
ill ffl
///m shoh tao
L,.
15.
must have been.
Pitiable
Also fear
L. 18.
to be pitied. L. 21. 23.
in all probability.
ch<c-li fg |^
this point. ...

10. SJini* chiacfyfc
/ih
Would hand over the exact amount,

made his mind easy.
i'i^
chang ie
5g & Not a single note.
Cursed both heaven and earth.
/ ;a
JB;
Let his mind go
3. ///
4.
-Wfr
IB*
^l]
s3
When
L. 13.
the conversation had reached
11. Shiii chîen >\
^ To go to sleep to go to bed. L. 15.

^ Water money a tip for bringing hot water,
UJLJU
'
'
etc.
1.
Mutch'inifttil Mother.
2.
Hong 2
Hjt
To deceive
V.
'
to
2.
do.'
Jv.
17.
LESSON X
A
side
7ft
ai
a border.
&f
The sea:
mind.
The heart
The centre.
:;
(.'//'
Vegetables
'0110
To
rise.
herbs.
begin.
pattern.
kind
manner.
All; the whole.

Flesh
To drink. To shout.
To believe-in-on. A
letter
"
news.
[-
Kadi
-"
To
love
Bread;
steamed bread.
be fond
to
meat.
ISJl. ->xvtjU<*~?
iiidn-t'-co
every.
All.
of.
To manage
range.
stand.
GO
to
A
00
tiiiy-tsi
.-
There-
C'litL
JT*
and then.
puh-ko Simply; nothing

more than; but.
isen-nio-iatig
bare
disciple.
The body.
emphatic par
road a way.
Light
A nail. Read
'"
li.
lean against ; to
trust to. Xear to.
Just now.
stage
To
upon
tell
to inform.
To
of
To
to ar-
Ilowr how about? Thus.
only.
Practice make* perfect.

^*N
-
63
MANDARIN PRIMER.
'
All
'
1.
Tu
expressed by tu igfl and tong-tswng jf| f.

The word all is used more freely in Chinese than in English.
follows. the noun and has the special function of summarizing
'
jjffl
a comprehensive form.
may be translated by
'
'
Iffith
preceding a negative it gives a turn to the sentence which
In distinctly idiomatic
'none 7
may be rendered by '110.* "ny
sentences it can scarcely be translated.
After an enumeration it is
that
all
before
goes
in
up
it
gathering
two things have been mentioned
After
it
'
joined to
iu.
f| or similar words, on the other hand, precede.

jfjj
and are also often used when j$ tub follows the use of
Long-tsong
x
'
both words roughly corresponding to ' injdl ; ' thewhole of ; etc

in English.
pi
There are here, in all, 3,000 people ; tsai-chce-li long-Uon</ iu
san-eh'icn ren
=f- Aft
I have not a single cash in the house ; o chia-li ih-ko\ia$ch'ien
'
g#
&
All those clothes are washed
&%na
T-
None
of
He
able to read, write and reckon
is
them
will
p'an, t'a tu h/uei

He has meat,
All the men,
come;
fish
a.
a-men
S *. *T
women and
tu
pnh
;
vo,
hit
fy
f|"j
JJ>
^fS.
nien-shu, hsie-tsi, ta-suan-
* f-
ft ft
il
y
te
<u 9 t'a
children have just gone
tseo liao
tu,
iu |^ f& ^,
nan-ren,
nii-
^ A^C A^^plStoft jfeT-
'Each^, 'Every' how expressed.

words
Such
as 'each',
every', 'different', etc.,
'
vidualize or give a distributive
ways
and vegetables
ren, hai-tsilong-tsonfys'ai
2.
na-hsie i-shang tu hsi-liao
that indi-
meaning may be expressed
in three
&
koh before a noun^.

Where
By__the_jise of
'
it
may be translated by 'own ; ~e.g.,
There is stone of every kind; koh-iang sh'ih-t'eo tu
koh
is
repeated,
P^very
man
has his
own
ideas
A ^ ^ ,S-
b.
koh ren iu koh ren
t,
i-s'i
oLsome nouns e.g.,

Everybody loved him ren ren tu ai t'a AÂ %$
<&
Each house has a lamp ; chia chia tu iu tcny
JS*
%$
By repeating the N. A. of the thing in question e.g.,
Yon must wash each of these garments; chiv-haiv i-sJutng chien
jjy_the repetition
^
^^ ^
c.
tih
iu^ ^
chien tu
'iao hsi
Each
JJ
g^^f
(:
^ ^ ch<c
^ -p gg f| W
f}:
of tlicse ten ca^li notes
piao, chang chang
shi chia tih
gfe.
is
false;
shih cluing ch'ien5fi 5fi
^^
JH 64
MANJ)A1MN
Till
3.
Many words
10.
IMIIMKIi.
as indicating an Agent.
ffy
used in English to indicate 'an agent/ are formed
addition of such suffixes as 'or,' 'er/

In other cases definite names are
by the
'hatter/
as,
etc.;
given to persons
'professor.'
engaged in certain occupations ; such names usually having something
'
distinctive to point out the occupation in question ; as,
paper
The same distinction is made in Chinese ; the word ffi tih
hanger.'
indicating the ngent and taking the place of the suffixes *_er/
etc.
Thusûsejj^Jtg force is that of 'he who/ or,""* they who'.
?
janier
is
'
'
t'iao,
$j(c
formed,
e.g.,
t'iao hsiang-ts'i
were' those
or,'
For
^j^^__tâo^diai tih, i.e., ffj tih, he

The, word some is similarly
carries, -fa shui, water.
Some carried boxes, some tables" /jf $fc ffi "P (Kf ^ u
instance, 'a water,
who,
'
till,
who
$fc
~p 64 iu t'iao choli-tm tih ; i.e., there

there were those who carried tables.
Jj^
carried boxes
immediately precedes the noun ;

t'iao hsiang-tsi
iu
ft IS "? ***
tih
e.g.,
tih
iao
choh-ts'i.
some soldjish
w,
They
?ell
*
are
washermen
the shoemaker to
a-men
is
iu
mai ro
iu
till,
mai u
man
a literary
Ch'i-lai
t'a shi
j|
sh'i
hsi-i-shang-tlh
come to-morrow morning
hsiai-tih^ minrj-t'ien tsao-ch'en lai
He
tih
$\- f
j|| (ft
0^
ko nien-shu-tih fy
Jji
JP5
fjli
chiao
jj^.
2j.
fa
as an Auxiliary Verb.
4. Chi ffi Is used as an auxiliary verb and often denotes the beginMore generally, however, it is joined with 3jjfl*\
ning of an action.
ch'i-lai may be used alone as a principal verb meaning,
whenjgjjjg
To^get up iJojjse. or be joined as an auxiliary to another verb. The
same is true of [i| ch'uh, which may take either 2j fai or ^;- ch'u, as,
To come out,; |f{ 5^ eh'uh-ch'Uj To go out, but which
{ij $$. ch'uh-lai,
in the same auxiliary manner as jjfi
ch'i-lai with
be
used
also
may
another verb e.g.,
'
'
/jsj
lai
Get up
earlier
3?
has
Ifi
^-
to-morrow morning:
minfj-t'icn tsao ih-ticii ch'i-
&*
He
t'a ts'ai ch'uh-ch'ii iill

just gone outj.
t'a
men ch'uh-lai-lm.ojfef
out
have
come
They
;
I,Ie_jcannoâfford to
ch'i 5JI5 J^ Ipg "P fifc
'T*
buy
thatjiat
|j
i.
11
fl ]
[Jj
~f.
na-ting mao-tsi t'a mai
puh
Carry out jthis_
&'
table j pa
chcc-chang choh-tsi
65
t'ai ch'uh-ch'ii jfc
MANDAKiN
Pien
Pien
5.
Put
used to indicate a near or
is
J|$
of.
('.//.,
over here ./wiry twit chce-pien jj ^JL jfl j

in these parts ; ulw-pien ch'uh chin-ts'i
it_dQ-WjQ
is
Idiomatic use
^ chae or
joined to
jj^
a remote locality;
PJRIMEK.
produced
Do you
%jj.
use the abacus in your part of the world ? ni-men na? {fa f|"j J}[S j
$J 3g S$J ;
pien long puh long suan-p'an
IH as indicating Manner.
Jang
of indicating ' mode

It furnishes,/ as jt werp.
One way
6.
ianq.
O
|7JV
',
t.hp
mtl
manner
'
or
'
by the use
is
pattern, according to
of
which
anything should be done.

In N. China jj j|jc ch<:e-mo and gft Jj na-mo are more commonly
used than chw ifmy JJ f|| and -na-i<ii\y Jj)
tsen-mo-iang
may be interrogative or not according to the connection e.r/
This is_the_game C/M' xh'i ih-iany J
Not the sama; puh ih-iany *%

^.
That is different na x/ti Ua/iiy-iany Jf]}
There are all sorts iany iany tu iu
You must do it this way iao chw-iatiy
;
t$o
Not
so
This
is
ws
^g
ehft>-iany
puh
a different idea ; ch<v
sh'i
sfti
^J
liany-iany-tih
s-
.g
ffi
How
about him? f/a teen-mo-iang ni? fljj,

gg.
^g Jg
m?//? z*?t ch fien
if he has no money ?
tsen-mo-iang
But what
^ftftirtf
What did he
*K
say
His child
%?x
i-si yj[
:&
is
only
'
'
â tsen-mo shoh
so, so
ni
t'a-tih hai-ts'i
fifc
^S^
puh
BE-
tsen-mo-iang
jjjj
& m-
N.B. This is the origin

"
fashion "; " that fashion ; "
Uses
of
of
the
pidgin English phrase, "this
what fashion can do
mo
jj
^j
and ni
"
gg.
Section 4, Jjg mo was defined as an Interrogative

Particle
Pjg ?ii is used in a somewhat similar way only as the sign
of an indirect question, and may follow when a question is already
asked.
Income cases it merely adds emphasis ; e.g.,
do you strike me ? ni uei-shen-mo ta o ni ? fo
7.
In Lesson
I,
Why
Why
lai
ni?
does he not come to-day ? t'a chin-t ( ien uei-shen-mo
5C S.^ It ^P * K4 ^ he
over there?
\\'liat
is
doing
66
t'a tsai-na-pien tso
puh
shen-mo ni?
MANDARIN PRIMER.
XOTKS.
a.
Vlsru-wo-gj
is
it
may
also used for
be applied_to the
Chan
c.
ih-chan
In
<
body
takes no N. A.
jjjj
t&
often used before verbs instead of
is
1Q.
'
body
of a
;
',
but unlike shen-t'i J^
sliij), etc*.
e.g.,
One
stage of
journey
J.
[Se
ft $i
^1*
Tliey are all here Pa-wen tu tsai-chce-li.

Those four men are all standing outside the door; na si-ko ren tu chan tsai
;
men
iiai.
Each person manages
He
Each one
He
own
his
affairs
is
of those
men
bad
is
koh ren pan koh ren
has both coarse ones and fine ones
ts'u tih hsi tih
na-hsie ren ko ko tu
Pa
tih si.
tu iu.
puh hao.
Pa
shi ko song-hsin-tih.
an engraver Pa-tih ko-ko shi ko k'eh-ts'i-tih.
a letter carrier
His elder brother is

They cannot carry it out
Pa-men Pai puh c/i'it/i-ch'u

Tell him to stand up chiao Pa chan ch'i-lai.
o kuang iao liang-ko.
I only want two
Have you a <iold coinage where you come from? ni-men na-pien
;
mnh
iu chin-ch'ien
iu f
We must all
The Saviour
trust the Saviour
loves
men
men
tu iao k'ao Chiu-chu.
Chiu-chu ai ren.
He
to you; you must not

is only talking false
ten nails he bought for me a few days ago are
Invite him to come
all good for nothing ; not one is fit for use.
him
that
1
have
a
small
matter
I wish to tell him.
and
to
out,
say
Translate:
believe him.
The
Mr. Fang has two boys and two girls each one of them is good.
I have no ready money
Why will he not drink that cup of tea
in hand I have nothing but a cash note for 2,000 cash.
The baker
That young child cannot
said, Let every man go his own way.
Each of those men who came during the summer of last
get up.
The
year, can speak Chinese, but they do not speak very well.
black garment that the fishmonger wears was given him by the
;
'
butcher the vegetable seller also has six red garments, not one fit
to be seen.
He came back an hour ago, and has just gone out
Where has he gone to ? He told me he was going over to Mr. Fieri' s
to ask him for the loan of $2.00.
I asked him in this way and that,
but he still did not understand my meaning.
The three characters
He has been here two
SS> D8> >fr> are not written in this way.
weeks why does he not go ? He believes and trusts in the Saviour
how about you ? I also believe and trust in Him with all my
heart.
All those who believe and trust in the Lord obtain salvation.
:
Writing Lesson
:-#&&**.&
67
R- 61.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
READING LESSON
X.
Seeing the Sights.
A
n
-T
to
^r
AW
^ 3T^^
ir*
Avffl
^ n;^
g ^r p;
Â,.ffl
i
W- 9.
relhao
2.
^'flw
3.
Liang* mao
4.
Nan
>^'a
nil
^
lao
WW^^
shcio-j^ ^c
15 ia,
%S/a
6^
* ^K
to indicate
ffl
an individual
SI
here
To
see the sights.

cool) hat.
4? Male and female, old
A "summer
i|j^
fl?
.9, tE ft,
added to nouns
i.
Mr. Chang.
T-^
O'
I lji$M
'
-ft
(lit.
and young
i.e.,
people of all kinds.

V. 3.
5. Ching* ch'eng* M ftfi The Metropolis capital of a country.
6. K'eo* in 1 p
Pronunciation. L. 19.
Two characters of similar
7. Lien* mien*
Face, countenance.
meaning are often used together for the sake of euphony.
8. Fang4 kao 1 sheng 1 $t
To speak in a loud voice.
9. Chiang ta hua f$
|g The same meaning as the above entry. The
same thing is often said in two ways to preserve the balance of sentences and
;
&
^ ^
to
make good rhythm.
^^
MANDARIN PRIMER.
-^
m-mt
3JB
9
10
to
na to, to,
31
6>/z
To drink. CA'fA may be applied both to eating and drinking,
1.
but hoh B^ can only be used for drinking.
2. Leng* ch'a* ft 2$ Cool tea.
This is often provided as a work of
merit, and placed in large crock by the road side. To do this is spoken of as
To give away tea. -'
sh(Z ch a $;
. .
3. Keng puh hao k'an tih
^J fl- ftij What was more unsightly.
tt
^
^ ^ H Odds and ends.
^ ^t jg Should I return for it?
"|
4.
Ling*
5.
Huei
sui* tong-hsi
ch
il
na ni
fff
tsen-mo-iang ~ft fa Jg ^| Not up to much.

here does not necessarily mean old in years it is often used as
7. Zâo
a term of respect. Compare English, old fellow.'
ai na-ih-iang
8. Note the idiom
ffi like which kind, mat na ih
$R
iang ^C l!5
It buy which kind; i.e., buy whichever kind you prefer. See
6. /V/A
'
Iy.
21 g.
9. J!f<M ///A rA'z
Lesson
10.
to
K^
Cannot afford
to
buy
it.
See Note
5,
Reading
6.
Huan
make an
t'a tih chia jg
-ffe
fi!j
fjf
Made him an
offer in response to a price asked.
69
offer.
Huan
chia
^^
is
MANDARIN PRIMER.
10.
,
V^ To add
^
/A keo*pen
^* A
'>
Under
step.
to.
f^
Shoh-shu-tih
n&
ji,
^^
tf]
cost price.
story teller.
A popular historical novel

covering a period of Chinese history from the middle of the second to the
middle of the third century A. D.
6. Pai* $| To place
to set up. L. n.
kuch
The three Kingdoms.
7.
8.
7 vz^-^ni 7Mien*-tsi j|f 7-
stall.
A cover
Ch'iien* ffjj To exhort

10. Ko lu tih ren
$$
9-
g^
12.
Mai-shU'tih
Hen* Hi UCH* [$
13.
lu nei* fi
ii.
a surface.
to persuade.
;
^ X Passers-by.
6ij
Hfl
colporteur."
Smelt
Has a flavour
vfc
L.
L.
it.
'
it
L. 28.
smells. _
Afterwards.
T JU ?& after he had gone.
19.
Also in addition. In many cases, as here, it does^not need to
be translated, but merely indicates an additional particular. I/. 14.
14. /* heo* JU
4
15. 7//
16.
Ma-tai
1
17. /fcA /w
,[g
^c
5^M
Matthew.
j(ig
^^
Gospel book.
70
MANDARIN
I'IMMKIJ.
10.
T\
T
O
Printing work
'
1.
/n* kong 1 HP
II"
2.
S/ii 4 fiiai*
ft Tlie world.
3.
A^//
.9//z
]\t
pang
nei
tih
'
the printing.
L. 15.
^ &
fa *%
25.
Kor.iKjUiin^ els\
J
A^J
-
other reason than.
Iw .
-."'
-j
Ami
S^
no
for
->
VOCABULARY
II.
v
Salt
3E"
id n(
sheep
An
chu -
brine.
ox
a pig.
>'
up.
X.A.
Full
ma
A horse.
ch
pin
a chicken.
A mother
Related.
In
to stride.
dam
Relatives.
Intimate.
in
Self
person.
official;
mandarin.
Empty. .Read
Leisure.
female.
a board.
ride an animal
<)or
the whole.
fowl
An
k'oiif/
Iron.
filthy.
plank
'
sing.
To
\\ire.
die; dead.
man
I:
probe.
Tq hang
Dirty
Thread
A needle
:i
twiiiy
^-
l"o
contempt.
To
A hog
''
r//
tat
/;
To wear on
the head
or on the nose.
deficit.
71
MANDAHIK PRIMES.
10.
->#
*fu
Read feng\
To sew.
joint
a seam,
Jfr
.-
+ ^' #B **Â
1
&6?t
cA
)
[
Pure
ill
clean.
/io'^
stream
a river.
timber.
fu-vh h i
Fath er
niu-ch'in
Mother.
'
a mountain.
ih-liang-ch'cv
A cart
Wood;
21
** 4
hill
cross.
**j3*
>TC
..~t^
N.A
root.
^w/
is
kan-o/iing Clean; pure.
Wealth wealthy.
1
i
a carriage.
teo-mai mal
To
trade ; to do business.
^>m
52
A master
lao-pan
an
Hi-p ih
~^3
*
J
employer.
huan-hua The Maiidar
in
NOTES.
ih-cli'cnfj'..
cbiao-ts'i
dialect.
To do
Tso chen-hsien
a.
lii-ts'i
donkey.
sedan chair.
needle thread
'
to sew.
Ch'in ^1 is usually omitted in speaking of father and mother

'
tu puh-tsai-liao ;
-ffy ffi
together; e.g., ^g $g
jfc ~f o-tihju-mu
Both, my father and mother are dead.
b.
READING LESSON
Xa.
Current Chat.
A *A
*,
IT
A
1.
r^ ^
here=who;
ty
M A Chinese,
^ ^ were
crossed the sea to foreign countries,

sentence.
2. /*a 4 ffl To be afraid.
Li 13.
3.
A%
7'<?
X'7/Â
& A
1^3
fiij
who,
not many.
The country of women.
countries, published twenty years ago, abounded in

descriptions of foreigners and foreign countries.
Was inadvisable to go.
4. Puh hao ch'il
^$
72
ilj
2^1
^m %
So in the next
Books about other

the most grotesque
MANDARIN PRIMER.
10
1. /<? 3
Wild
Seng
3.
Kuei*
4.
5^3
5.
T'eo*fah gg
HaHp'a*
7.
/toA l;/ 2
Lai 9 uang*
9.
7io 4
11.
C&'ieri
12.
70A 4
15.
/|\
Hair of the human head.
^ fp J
W To circulate
To dig out the eyes.
^H
li
Iv.
22.
afraid.
ching* T*
^ Medicine.
M it
V.
evil reports.
Iy. 22.
L. 29.
telescope. /
3.
CA'wA ;w^ ffl P^ To travel. L. 17.

CA'uan* chiao* ffi $t To propagate religion.
T^w 1 $L To rent. L. 26.
Z,7 a rAw 1
^ Neighbours. V. 6.
SA0A ifc here==To blame to find fault with.
17.
18. R'ih^ chiu* chten* rcn*
motives
Were
Did not dare to.

To have intercourse with.
gjjr
%$.
v;
18."
iao^-icn^ j^ f^
10. f/^ 1 icn*
16.
liao*
8.
14.
27.
rice.
& A devil. L. 25.

^ JU Therefore. L.
6.
13.
L,.
savage.
& ^ Uncooked
vii 3
2.
may
Asin 1
A.
A A ^ In
tue course of time men'
be seen.
19.
Shuhfan
20.
K'uei l fu* ren*
21.
Chiang
22.
Tao* ch'u* ij
li
Cooked
gj |g
j|
Â
L. 21.
rice.
To take advantage
|$ 3^
Spoke reason
Everywhere.
i.e.,
L. 29.
73
of,
or defraud others.
were reasonable.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
10.
- &
m^fl
a,
1.
Tiw
ir
Teh-seng
ffc
w,
*t
the Rev. J.
Hudson Taylor, founder
of
the
China Inland Mission.

2.
3.
Chchl-chiang*- seng*
Hang
4. Chi*
ffif
cAeo l Fu3 fltiTO
ping* fe
ffi
5.
HcP-ch'i*
6.
Ih-mien ih-mien
5ffl
jj ^ The province of Chehkiang.

Hangchow, the provincial capital of Chehkiang.
Treated diseases.
it Friendly
'
V.
3.
affable.
On
the one hand and on the other hand.
Deh-liang ft ^ The moon. V. 4.

Tai*~iang* fr [^ The sun. V. 4.
Fcng l -suh Ji, i Customs usages.
4
'
7.
8.
9.
74
L. 22.
MAN DA KIN
IV ft
it ft*
I'llIMKK.
<ff'
** ft
ft
1.
^l/rt//
^mz
Every place was

3
j^|
The whole
street
10.
was
full of.
So below man ch'u ^f
full of.
Ê To die of hunger to be very hungry. V. 5.

iu puh kuei tih
Tfj
$j Nothing that was not dear everything was dear. Chinese abounds in negative ways of putting things.
A common phrase for postponing any
4. Tsai-shoh |J S To talk again.
business.
will' meet some other day.
j%
5. Kai* r'ih Isai* chicn* $fc
4
2.
6> -5i
3.
Muh
^^
Q We
REVIEW LESSONS
:
1.
VI-X.
H fj ^ ^
In what order do the Chinese speak of the different divisions

Give two examples.
of time ?
Which
periods of time require the
75
N. A. and which omit
it?
MANDARIN PRIMER.
10.
Give four examples of $
forming Relative Clauses.
meaning and use
Illustrate in three sentences the difference in
between Jg and $g.
What
characters
indicate
something extra
addition of
the
Give three examples.
What
and
the difference in the interrogative use of
$? ?
AVhat difference is observed in asking the age of adults and
is
children ?
How does J|; #J differ in use from $J, jj

|| ?
Give the words used to express the Comparative and Superla-
tive Degrees,
How
is
and
illustrate their use in six sentences.
the
character
of
an
action
expressed
Give two
examples.
Give in three sentences the different meanings of $.

Give two sentences shewing the usage of 'jf
State the different kinds of Chinese currency, and give
.
illustra-
tions of the use of each kind.
Give two sentences shewing the different usages of fg, and two
sentences shewing the different usages of ;fg.
Shew the difference between the use of %$ and
jff
$1
sentences.
Give two examples of the use of
Illustrate in four sentences the use of
Give four sentences shewing as
What
many
ftfy
to denote
uses of
|Jf.
the difference in usage between

and gg
jgc
Translate Reading Lessons VIII and X.
2.
an agent.
is
Give sound, meaning and tone to the following characters
ft
3. Correct,
correction :-j
ft
if
*&
g#
ft
&
necessary, the following,
m
* 5
Jl
x Ki*
and give the reason
41
nPo
for
^
5 ^
i
^^
Zl
?K
MANDARIN PRIMER.
God loves men. This man is

4. AVrite in Chinese character
He has gone out he is not at home
competent to change money.
Tell him to come back quickly.
Get up I want to
at present.
He has all kinds of things. Male and female, old and
return.
:
young, are all willing to go.

Two cash
family has money.
sorts of things.
3,000 cash
less.
He
He
I lent
him 20
tael cents.
Every
than 100.
Last month I had all
made a mistake in the reckoning. Give him
buys things with money. Male and female
less
come every day.
77
MANDARIN PRIMER
PART
II
ADVANCED
MANDARIN PRIMER.
$x
Lesson XI.
To
11
5
to
compare
compare with. Than.
;
To
reach
come up
to
A room
to
road
/V
reach.
^>
Way
lips.
same as.
li
To speak.
Calico
cotton
-(~r
And.
All.
r^''
to
put
As
for
if;
Like; as
/Htn-Jmi<tn(/
to spread out.
compara-
</-/xr
house;
rm
1
^/t
Doctnne
verb.
if.'
hank
y/^ ^
An auxiliary
ex-
'
A move at
to reganl.
Together.
A comparison ;
an illustration; a para-A-û^<__ ,j!-'VX^--v^L^X
,
or
chess.
In4
>
7
>
Like:
ictiu/
similar.
,
A cover.
To, cover.
To
**
ferior.
^^KfSl^^
tXuuÂdM,
dwell
to stop.
verb.
An auxiliary
<^
Persons or things
1.
be compared in three degrees,
may
viz., a.
Kqualit^r; c. Superioritv' ; as, This is not so large as

that ; This is as large as that ; This is lajêjjhaiijhat. These degrees
are expressecrTnÔliiiese^ as follows
Inequality
b.
a.
are
The commonest forms used in this construction

Inequality.
{g ^f muh in, ^ jn l' h " ^ 'R Jîh chili, fc ^
j'i JJH/I
shunt/ or
latter
^ ^
fc
from *g
:i
*-
/:a?i
1t
-
]>l
To
$&
puli
tcli,
follow
>
Ueason; principle;
the
principle; a doc-
a-'
trine.
The mouth
Eiesembljnffj like.
And.
to.
a house
and J|
J^ kan
JJH/I
to drive.
Hurried men lack wisdom.

81
slumy; the
v*
MANDARIN PRIMER.
JJ
This
not so good as that; chce-ko niuh iu na-ko hao
is
a if is
My
Jf|
fljg|
%
cake
is
not so large as yours; o-tih piny-tw pun
^.
#[l ffc (ft fjf
ft ftfj fjf -^
This piece of land is not so good as that piece;
na-k'n
chen-tih
teJt
puh
pi
ni-tifi
ru,
is not equal to that pot; chm-pa fu puh ehih na-pa

'1
5R fc lilt should be noticed that the last sentence has no word to indicate
the point in which i\\e inequality consists, a_s fa chih rarely takes an
Fhis pot
/m
^ R
ft!
**
vt~*>A
faJb_^*'^J*'
^Lêp^+Jls
This is expressed by
b. Equality.
in, -fa ru, |^J tony or fu ho,
the object to be compared
followed
or
by
hao-hsiany Jf fjj|,
iHjk httiany
and
^H ih-iany ; e.y.,
adjective.
'
much monev
lie has as
^rhis door
is
as
t'a
I
;
iu o-tih ch'ien
as high as that one; eJuc-ko
men
to
fl^
^ ft
^fj
na-ko men kqo
in
i^^. ju*'
This basin
ih-iang
f@
You
is
thQâme
tLogaine
W|^W
as that one
cluc-ko
chic-ko
uan
nan
t'onn na-ko
t'ong
uan
nan
p"
8 -.
ese J ni shoh-hua ho Chong-lcueh-ren ih^rMi}
fl.
speak uJ^ ti
fit
(4; ft f^jj)^g
His heart is as deep as the sea
in
JusTlike him; Imang (or
The
negative
difference
form
of
Aero
this
hx/n
t'a-tih
hfdany)
dim
a ih-iang
construction
is
ru hai
$fr
used
(or
to
indicate
e.g.,
This hill is different from that one; ehcv-tao shan ho na-tso shan
ih iany
>m
oj
He rides differently from you; t'a ch'i imt ho ni \tiang-iang)
mm&tfu
fu
i m-
*-
m-^
& Northern
i jg
&*
â^M
^^
'
Mandarin prefers fu ho to [pj ô^ry in this construction.

7ts/e and
c. Superiority.
In Lesson VII, Section 1
fg Ae?i or
]g ting were said to form the simple Comparative and Superlative
The extent or measure of superiority is denoted by
tien,
degrees.
fe/i-to ; e.</.,
hsie, "g
f pel and
jjfjj
g
^ ^ cJuv-ko na-ko knei
keny,
a
This
dearer than that
pi
m m Jt m m * "Th1s~cart
mucTTTarger than that one chce-liang ch'cv pi
ta
liangdi'cekeng
^ |g ^JbJLWSÊ-^
is
little
ih -fieri
is
This
is
three times as heavy

as
'
fliat
na-
ehcv-ko pi na-ko chong san
MANDARIN
His ki Mandarin" is very
Inu, j>i ni-W, hao tch-to lim>
much
Twice
as
o-o()(l
1'UIMKK.
better than yours;
/,'</-////
kuan-
ftfj
/mo Mi Iwmj
ft
jtri
f.
ffi fig
Different degrees of the same thing, especially Time, 'Dimens'ion

and Quantity, are often compared l>y repetition in this idiom (ffl si)
is largely used in many districts and follows the adjective; c.y.
;
Worse every year;

Better every day;
ffl
7J<
is
a;
ru
jtn-h
c
t ten
ih
Hotter every month
This water
uicu
ih
nicn
ih
l
icn
/p
d|
"
^*
'
^C if(j0
hao{si)ih
^
ik-ko ucJt reh ih-ko~ffeh
deeper than that

3B fl ?fc.
chce-ko slud
Mien chih)na-ko
na-mo
Comparison denoted by chce-mo JJ jg and
na-mo
2. In Lesson X, Section H, both j[g ^g chcc-ino and J5
were defined as indicating mode, or manner.
They also denote
EXPRESSIONS OVERLOOKED.
tfh-hen Exceedingly; very.
obtain salvation
*
*f>n n ff, vh-onff, hfria

-'
to be saved.
Good
Double Comparative:
double comparative
adjective and then repeated
3.
The more
^M*tThe
is
4.
how
formed by
inferior.
formed.
'j$
iich,
disciples the better; mcn-i'ii itch in
larger the worse
Some forms
followed by an
c.y.,
ilch
id
Superlative Degree
but
medium
iie!>
pt'h hao
iicli
han f^
^4
Forms used
for.
of the Superlative are used in certain

connections,
their use in others.
Practice and observation
forbids
usage
alone can give proficiency in this matter, and shew where to use one
form and where to use another; but the following examples
may
some
the differences in usage.

(In gf for instance, is
as
an
intensive
with
used
largely
adjectives of time and quantity.
indicate
of
83
MANDARIN PRIMER.
This
muh
not so good as that; chcc-ko
is
na-ko hao
o-tih pmg-W puh ra

not so large as yours
"*1 ffc* 69 ft*
ping-txitu ft fa filf
<T>
This piece of land is not so good as that piece;
cake
My
is
7*
(or toi) /^//
ni-titi
,s/m//</
mt-k
ui U
Into
Jg
Jfe Jfc
^Wsjp
jSJ ^
ol>
/-
SI)
The
false
not ecjnal to the true;
* T>^ *
Ma-tih
pi
puh
teh
ehen-tih
f- >-fr
w-
This pot is not ccpial to that pot; ehce-pa fu puh cln/i na-pa
**
ffl aIB
It should be noticed that the last sentence has no word to indicate
the point in which thp inequality consists, :is" fa chih rarely takes an
is
adjective.
This is ex])ressed by
in, fa ru, [^ inwj or -|u Ao,
Equality.
followed
by the object to be compared
A,s/rn<f/ or hao-Jwang jf fg,
.
fjg
and
jfH ih-ianff ;
This hill
h ian ff
is
differenj
mm
He
tiL
e.g.,
rides differently
,fj
'
U ft
ffi
from that one; chiv-ho shan ho na-tsojhan
m ^
iiiAniB
from you;
/V/
*^ ^
V
cA>/
mil
/to
î^^t
ni \Uang-iany)
uf
Northern Mandarin prefers fu /to to |3 ôwr/ in this construction.

hsie and fg hen or
In Lesson VII, Section 1
c. Superiority.
and Superlative
the
said
form
were
to
Comparative
simple
]K ^n^r
The extent or measure of superiority is denoted by 3$ tien,
degrees.
teh-to ; e.g.,
keny,
hsie,
pel and
This is a little dearer than that cluv-ko pi na-ko knci ih-tien
^
g
m m & ii
~^ThTs~cart
is
Hang ch'^keng
This
is
^^
$
* - itthat one
much
ta
jf
larger than
chce-liang ch'w pi
<ftJLftJMOLE-4.
chce-ko
three times as heavy as that

'
tt
H ft82
pi na-ko chong
na.sv/,n
MANDAKIN
His " Mandarin"
is
very
1MU.MKK.
much
JJ.
better than yours; fat-lih
kuan-
hua jn nl-tih /mo fch-to lino fa ftfj ft jft J-fc {ft (ft
#J}. ^jCTs)
Twice as good; /mo /<// /mw/ yW #J
j$ f. ^J^Vjj^^
Different degrees of the same thing, especially Time, T)imeiision
and (Quantity, are often compared by repetition in this idiom lM\ si )
is largely used in many districts and follows the adjective; r.r/.,
jp
n
4J
Worse every year; ih uicn i>nh ru, ih nicn
p
Better every day
Ih /'/V//
t'ien
5J if (j
hao(^)ih
Hotter every month; ih-ko urn re/i ih-ko~~fieh
;
^-
This water
a fl
?K
is
deeper than that

fi
%R%
chw-ko shui (shen
chili
Comparison denoted by chce-mo JJ jg and
Jna-ko
na-mo
2. In Lesson X, Section 6, both jjg j| vhcc-ino and J(5 g na-mo

were defined as indicating mode, or manner.
They also denote
comparison when some standard of comparison

understood,
this
"
"As
and are the equivalents

... as that " c.y.,
;
Vegetables are not so dear as this;
Thewater
is
not so dee]) as that
so large
fifj
tih
shui
ai rtmh iu vhcv-mo kuci
muh
$f
na-mo shcn 3^
in.
JJ ]g fc
by the addition
into adjeetival phrases
of ihis size
c/ice-mo ta-tih hai-tsi JS
3^c fi^f dK -f
house as high as that; na-mo kao-iih fang-tsi j|$
J^ ffa
;
Double Comparative
double comparative
adjective and then repeated
3.
ts
e.g.,
A_t-hi]d
o lao chte-nio ta
The above may be turned

of
either expressed or
As ... as
is
the English "
of
The more
The
is
how
formed by
formed.
jjyjj
iicli y
followed by an
<'.//.,
disciples the better
larger the worse
iich
mai-t'u
in
Superlative Degree
ileh pu/i,
iich (o
iiclt
/mo
f^J kjfe
j^
hao
Forms used
for.
4. Some forms of the Superlative are used in certain connections,

but usage forbids their use in others.
Practice and observation
alone can give proficiency in this matter, and shew where to use one
form and where to use another; but the following
may
examples
some
(In :g for instance, is

largely used as an intensive with adjectives of time and quantity.
indicate
of
the differences in
83
usage.
J^
n
MANDARIN PKIMEE.
11.
be used before the auxiliaries

m and | mo, as well
most verbs, and also before adjectives and negatives. Xz Ê
is commonly employed in
speaking of such things as are not very
pleasant, and roughly corresponds to a similar usage in colloquial
" Dead tired " " Worried to death " etc. The
English as,
exprestsai muh hi pi denotes something incomparably
sion
J
-J^
good or bad, etc. e.(/T,
He wants 40 cash at the very least fa ch'i shao iao 8'i-sh'ih-ko
Hen
may
;jg
as before
'
% s p m m MMHe only twenty years old

S ^ H 4 It-
ek'ittt
at the
is
fifc
He
most;
t'a
-GJ^*^*
xiu
cJii
to^r'i^sh'ih
(^v^^^^TeJ^Ttir^^r-
very good at riding; fafken huei ch'i v/wjjj^ '$,

$jj% $jj.
That person is very particular about his self-respect ; na-ko ren
hoi mo Hen
fi
ffl
is
'ffj*
AS
$)
They are very wealthy ;

It is very inadvisable to
am
manage
in
hi ch'icn
this
&c
mmm^M_î[
cold
chin-fim
th k'o-i
fa-men hen
to-day
bitterly
way
leny
jjfe
ffj
^ ^ ^.
ehce-lang
liao ffi
si
pan
J^
si
jfy
There
nothing larger than this; tsai
is
Choh
to
3J
hi
pi chcu-ko ta
Use and Force.
Its
muh
the absence of
any conjugation of the verb, it is

forms.
Choh Jf as an auxiliary, in
express participial
some connections denotes continued action, and so approximates to
is
the present participle.
It
used frequently with monosyllabic
5.
Owing
difficult to
and
verbs,
Hai
is
Jig
going on
is
heard more frequently in some districts than in others.

an action is still
also frequently used to indicate that

c.y.,
They two were
tx((i
fa-men lianu-ko
sitting at the door talking;

meflrk'eo tso-choh shoh-hua fe- ffl BJ fO ffi F^
<
He
was
lie
came on horseback; fa
sitting listening;
ffi
j^ tjfr j$
j^ gg J^
.
fa
tso-choh fiiiy-choh/fy
ch'i-choh ma lai fy J
$|
simply dej)cnds on his father for a living; fa kuany
c
chohfu-ch'in ch ihr-fan ^jjj, jfa ^|
p^ jg.
is
He still waiting the7e~;T' hai tsai-na-li ieny-choh
J|
He
^.
k'-ao-
^^^
('ho/i
(see
:\
Is-o
follows boll)
Lesson 111)
any other word

1
cannot use
fni-h -and |
ieh in the Potential
where
certain connections',
in
it
<
'
tits
c.y my
it
o iony
jmh
<-ln>h
$$
ffi
/f,
^.
opposite the d(or; rhciiy htf-^/io/i)me)i J

I have found it ; cJiao-ohoh Hao
ffi
*~f.
,lu^t
8-1
Mood
better than
'^[(jSjf^'
MANDAIMN
XOTKS. ft. (in the Xorth
house 7\but thisîs reversed
omitted after fang J%.
J'UI.MKi:.
IAXXOK
[/NVr
H/I
is
room and
where
the South,
in
\X\'III.\
MlSCKLLANKors
'p
K.Â.Ml'LKS.
VvC
This is not the satne as that chcc-ko ho na-ko piih\^h iangf****4
Tliis is much more important than that chcc-ko pi na-ko kcng rao-chin.
Have you any as large as this? in chtr-ino ta till innh in.'
The slower you speak the better shoh-Jiua iieh man llch /iao. c
--^ -U-*-t
You and he may go ;// ho t'a k o-i cfril. >vc ~fa+
;
<^**-
In the autumn it gets colder every day ch'in-t'ien, ih t*icn Lcng

o innh in na*tiio to lih chîcn.
I haven't as much money as that
;
i/i
shall
have leisure to-morrow o ining-PicH tUK?ong.

want $2.00 at least t'a ch'i shao iao tiang-k'uai
;
He
He
will
All
men
ch'icn.
there writing t'a hai tsai-na-li hsie-tsi.

must die rcn icn tu iao s i.
is still
The Saviour was

shaug
crucified
on the cross
Chiu-cJiit
ting
si tsai shih-tsi-chia
The house that Mr. Feni; lives in, is not so good

Translate:
Mr. Chang's house is three times
as the house Mr. Chang lives in
1
by ? It w^s built bvâ man nameiLJ

Make thr.ee eups of tea and put bread" and ike,s on flietable
when yon have done that you had better light the lamp, and go to
the woman who lives outside the city, and tell her to come tomorrow morning to do needlework. Hang up this garment (if)
"Whom was
as good.
it, built
you put
it
here
will get dirty.

boy of that si/e is not able
not equal to a girl of six years old.
It is not so
it
he is
For instance, there
drink
hot water as it is to drink tea.
good
are two men, one rich, one poor; the rich has wealth, the poor lias
This cloth
none; everybody says, The poor is not equal to the rich.
the cloth he bought yesterday is much
is three times as good as that
wider than the cloth you bought; it is the same as this.
This
is as large as the one you made; a box full of inonev is
box
empty
Who gave her the hat she is now wearing?
heavier than this box.
I low
much did it cost ? It was not so dear as the one you are wearing.
To buy a large pig will cost at least more than two ingots of silver.
to write!
to
I do not believe in
will give him at the most 10,000 odd cash.
F
1 low
the principles he preached.
many sedan chairs do you want?
I want three; tell the chair bearers to bring them along at once,
aixi^not
wait half a day.
I will
go with you.
What
doctrine
is
he
He
says that everybody has sin, but that the Saviour

preaching?
died on the cross.
also said that (iod has opened the rale of
He
heaven for
(iod
is
us,
and now
invites both foreigners
and Chinese
to
go
love.
Writing exercise
||
JlJ
f$ ft
85
R.
Ijll
R. 147.
in.
MANDARIN PBIMEK.
11.
READING LESSON
XI.
-f
Ancient and Modern.
i.
Tang
2.
A/W/J
Ought; should.
"{&
chcc-ko
li J_g
^"
Iv.
17.
IIS
No
3S
such principle; nothing of the
kind.
3.
'Fien-ch'i
5"c
Weather.
10.
To go into detail. 1,. 14.

|ffl $t
Vans; hsi-ch'u shoh
Lih i -ch i 4 j]
Strength vigour.
4
5"At* Jt lî: ?}{ The affairs of the world
ordinary matters.
now. L. 24.
Rip-chin^- #n 'T' The present time
Generation the times.
Shi'-tai*
1
to be ill.
$f To fall sick
Seng ping*
/A-////,*,''*" /
Certainly; surely. vSo with //>/,;'' /i alone, below.
n.
Hsicn*-chin*-
12.
/'//
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
'
IJi:
/.sV<?
^
^
J$l
ch*'ih\
Now-a-days. Iv. 24.

ts'eo* cfruan 1
puh
about food and clothing.

i^. Shuen* jjK Favourable; prosperous.
V. 4.
=f- A wife.
14. C/i'P-tsi*
86
L,.
y
12.
tfc
;**
'^-
Not anxious
MANDARIN
Ri*-nii*
2,
Children
-^c
I'UIMKIl.
11
sons and daughters.
According to one's wishes.

L. 2j.
fa $fe As a matter of course
naturally.
To discuss past and present. L. 13.
Ltten* kn* chin 1 Ufa
the Empire everywhere. I,. 15.
T'ien-hsia 3 7" The world
a defect. In the South used for disease
^" A fault
Afad*-ping*
Ru*-i* #n
Tsi^-ran"1
ii;
Chang
9.
ta liao
H^
T To
be grown up.
Tsong?-shoh |j$, |% Are sure to say.

HsiiKfv* i|^ A daughter-in-law
10.
a/Vyj?( To
fry.
ii.
^/!-m*
Alas
12.
Tsfr-uei*
13. Ih-tien
ItJJ
g^
ffsin l -hsien l
Oh
Flavour
little.
dear
;
I/.
;
28.
a wife.
V.
L. 19
taste.
\/VA-
Fresh, as fruit, meat, etc.

15.
fa Sense of taste; flavour.
16. Pi en* Had3 %? 7*
T Had changed for the worse.
L. 22.
17. Ch'an?* IT To taste.
14.
5.
L. 28.
MANDABIN PRIMER.
11
C\ Ar
WtA
If
9,
MA
-a
fr
#' _h
^ ^ Experience.
^ |^ Is limited.
Chien-shlh
lu-hsien*
2
t/^
ch'ao* ft 1$
Song*
c/i'ao*
Ch ingl-ch*a&
$ft
p-
The Yiian Dynasty, 1260-1341 A.D.

The Song Dynasty, 960-1126 A.D.
|^ The Pure Dynasty the present Dynasty
1583.
Tsai o.k'au
As
I see it
from
my
point of view.
To redeem from sin. L. 17. ^ eS

u seng Jl ^ ^ The province of Kiangsu.
The prefectural city of Yangchow.
Jang* chco FiP
Shuffctsui* If
1
88
began
MANDARIN 1MMMKU.
iff
r
^ ^^ A- A
& * M^
To
11
Jt
ffl
A H
H
-tfi,
So *
tt
*-* ^
3E
-a
-a,
'fl
18
ft
A/
4ft
JS
3.
///-//;/- ////
//^w
-ft-
ft ft
IB
^
2. S/io/i
Jt
ft
1.
-ft
tih
/// //
j//
-//
fifj
- fc ft 3
jl;
moral certaint.
Said the truth
went
3! Is very reasonable.
89
to the point.
ft
MANDARIN PRIMER.
LESSON
East
XII.
eastern.
The
south.
2
The west;
Can; able;
neng
master.
western.
Gh
k
Near
Inen
To
revolve
wheel.
Plums.
About
To
lish mile.
A lane
Fire
oh'ih
Straight ; straight-
h*ing
To do
jff
To
forward; upright.
2
to
Read hang 1
A trade
business.
act.
ch
k
differ.
ch'uan g u
'
Read
ikuah
;
by.
follow.
k
1
y*
u/^^tfe
pcwÂ
cJmang
trav-
customer.
Wind. Usage.
sheo
To
To
blow, as wind.
To
receive^to ga-
To
large river.
To load to pack
To pretend.
;
Direction
To
ler together.
pick up.
sheo-sh'ih
To
Ten.
luggage.
gather to-
gether ; to collect.
To
Distant; remote.
Direction
visitor.
From
JV
/^/fj
boat
perous.
eller.
feng
To
To
A dis-
crepancy.
ch'ai 1
hire; to engage.
through.
Already.
Favourable; pros-
k'eh
leave.
To
flame.
pass
To
go towards.
Formerly; past.
to
ing
row, as
Distant from.
Baggage.
Classic books.
etc.
trees,
spread out
arrange.
Eng-
a street.
2
The North.
J of
ability.
recent.
p'u-kai
how
repair.
Bedding.
indicated.
spoken of in Chinese as in English in its relation

to the points of the compass, but with the difference that intermediate
positions, i.e., positions not directly N. and S. are referred to in reverse
1.
is
In speaking of the
order, as E. N. for N. E., W. N. for N. W., etc.
points of the compass the Chinese usually- begin with the East and
end with the North, the North
inauspicious ; e.g., long }ff hsi
being
y&wr jowrney be
(7
90
in
**
.MANDAIMN
"
)l(l
<
4t-
ffr /"'/'
(\l)j^(
of as the South-side etc.

_7 *
-*-. -ir~
TL
D* ^*
;
_.
-V^
idiom moreover, usually adds
'hinese.
being spoken
i
Iwti
In (lie north
j i
I'KIMKIJ.
j|
...
12.
JU^-i^t^t*
In the south-west
Northerners are straightforward
(sal hxi-iuin /tien
_
rcn
/><7/-/>/V//-//7/
chili
.AJtDirection in relation to an action
iw toward ;"
O
is
he going?
/'" //rry^/
He is going to the North

Go to the South uang nan
;
</-//
//<7
r//'///
ft^tJJ&jlL-i
/>c/i
two jfift^^fe-
uaiiy
Distance: Terms relating

Distance
measured
is
China by
in
word road/ which in English

when we speak of " So many
(
understood, but in Chinese jggcommonly used in the North and
When
either
"
To
distance
||[
to.
but idiom calls for the
//,
For instance,
expressed.
" road " is
word
the
miles/'
(of)
lu or
ti) is added, (^ ti) being
not
is
lu in the South.
Jg.
spoken of in more general terms,
is
chi or
tsco
2.
IUHH/
(iff
r.r/.,
*/
/
Where
indicated by
is
j^J
jgg'
uen
is
used
being prefixed according as the distance
to
is
This idiom ncoîmon^r prefers

regarded as greater or less.
it
may be omitted ; e.g.,
How far ?^ iu to (or chi) uen ? feV 01 SI) *&
Not far; nmh in, to (or chi) uen yj['
/gf[^ (or
Not far from here li ehce-li pnfi uen
JJ J
though
V^\Â^^
'
Shanghai
In
fifty
is
//
from here; Shang-hai
iien^
to In
li
u-sh'ih
Ii|
na-li in
II
li
V^
(or
J|$
(or
^')
tliair
//
distant;
li
chcv-li in
(or ifi-)
How
3.
there^?
J ft;
is
sh'ih
cluv-Ii in
(or
far is
chi)
li
^'fc* 8. X. If from
S> MM T *)
How
T'ai-p'ing
ai-p mg
^5 g|
^
^
/^)( or SI} Sâfc/ciKin
ten
more
^(tn-knan
S^ SI S S ^ + 1. ^ |&
(or
to
Ask
the
Way
to
Place.
the
way to a place it is advisable to use |j^ [flj

I ask/ or some other polite expression ; to omit it
ill
The following expressions
'being set on the wrong road.
inl/this connection
the way to Tfene-chfene ? xhawi Tonu-.h en(j* sh'i ts'ona
y
u
^ _
c5
'J
^HjijD ^'\ji*s VyCo
Basking
u go by wijy'of Chiang-k eo to San-shni ? zltnif/ San-shui 4^

moV J: H^flfe$j (or
(
is
In
(or
the right road to Li-chia Tieii>N/^n/r/ Li-Wiia-tien x/n
tjhis
sJii chw-t'iao
fc
In)
tno ?
.t
.^g
j
'
| K&
v"
7-
^M,
or fi
^li
JH!S
8&)t
MANDARIN PRIMER.
1ft T.
Straight on ; ih-vhih two
This is the nearest way; fsco ckce-ll chin
In going to T'ai-p*ing do not go

west; Slicing T'ai-p'iuQjnili too uanr/
ticlij,seo\
%W
x % & KBr K a H
It should be noted that tlie reply

the same terms as the question itself.
is
a great help to imitate this
^ |JJlb_5*the South-
way
iao
to
go
tpjjJujT!N.,
hsi-Jiarmseo
uany
was in
very common, and it
to the first question
This
is
much
of speaking as
since part of the needed vocabulary is thus provided.

or jg ho is used in speaking of passing
Chine/ |H
the
on
way to another ; as,
place
I passed through Shanghai on
ugh
Shih-li
Kaii
In .Lesson XI. Section

follow.
"By
77
As used
the time
at the time
Tenf/
ing day.'*
the South than in the
sjiall
>8
is
He
fihang
jl jWBEjJl $h
t'a^ts'O'nglSfiih-li-p'u
ln<
Ico
fy
in
"To
applied to time, it denotes,

"
Compare English, The follow-
\vlien
when/'
was defined as meaning
lean
I.,
more
the .same sense, but
North e.g.,
be there by to-morrow
freely
R^-^~1
o-tncn
k<nt
iii(
t
ii(/-t'icn ljfio
o^^^y-yx^^fe
by theQfh$fkamt8'u-ch'i,u
f'o
had beeu gone some time when
tsao-itefo
Kiukiang
ffi
as indicating Time.
used
e cannptiêt there
heo t'a
to
through one
&*
the Xortli
in
my way
ho (or chlw/-ho)
iu^hiangft&om Shgpg-hai
as possible,,
Kap(g\f|
JiJ
1$
&
*7
taolpuh-faitp
arrived; kcni)o tao
ft
u~
ft/i
x/ii-
^ B * ~T-
Travel by Rail and Steamer.

Chinese lends itself very readily to coining new terms and
This is owing to the genius of the language which allows
phrases.
one noun to act as an adjective and modify or define the meaning of
The same idiom obtains in English, only to a
the principal one.
more limited extent, as in such combinations as 'house-maid' ; 'tea4.
The introduction of Western inventions and sciences has

pot ; etc.
caused large numbers of such terms to be coined in this Lesson we
shall confine ourselves to some of them used in .connection with
3 \j^^\.j^
railways and steamers
7
Railways;
t'iehlu,
Trains,; -cars
ff
ho (or ho luen)
c/i'cv
)fc
(or
>fi
||)
j{|.
Railway station vh'cv (or ho-vh'c^ ehan^ji (or

1st, 2nd and 3rd class
t'eo-teny
ri-t&ng*, win;
92
^)
MANDAIMN
IMIIMKR.
I
To
To
To
To
board the train

get out of the train
;
travel
by
rail
rKc
start; JK//
^$
facfho-ch'cB 4
t'ea >Jt
Locomotive; /lo-cli^t*
^/^
A
Steamer; /io-JwerTc&'tWMI ifc jig j|{J.
To travel by steamer; /xo lifc-lucfidi'-iKiii
/|
To embark; skang-eli'ucin j^
To disembark hsia-ch'uci'n f
To set sail /'W c/iîidn
j|j.
4J
>fc
jpjjg
j^.
Jjjji.
|^|j
Capacity to Contain
how
expressed.
5. The words 'Contain', 'hold', are in Knglish applied indisFor instance.

criminately to everything that has capacity to contain.
a hall ' holds', or 'seats', so many people; a cup 'holds' so much
In contrast to this, Chinese idiom demands a special
water; etc.
verb ; according to the nature of the things spoken of; the verbs tj
laso
and
*?
auxiliaries
One
<v/ v
bo* will
will
liao as
~jf
not hold all; ih,-k c<> h*in<j-i*i flnin</

or T)-
ttso
liao
l*su
/c/t-
j'tinf/-t*s'i
J(Sf@--J*^^f^L-f"'Âfifty;
/>"//
puh-h#ia u-xliih-ko rcn
u.
T* JL
A-
IB
hold ninety people; n<i-ko
not hold
V*'^
will
dihi.-xh'ih-ko /-en
hold sixty peo[)le?

Yes; luh-sh'ih-ko rcn /-vo tcJi-visia,'
jpuh-h&ia / f*o fch-hxia >^
f-' ^-S_IE*
f@
rt"^vTO^
Seated to the full it will hold eighty |)eople;
ko rc-)i k'o-i txo fc/i-l
\Vill
tso
hxia or
H?g^T
That house
It
""|
(or h#ia)
fusut,
are of this class, and take
<'hn(tnf/
it
NOTES.
\ktr(r/i,\
as,
a. In some districts j|{J ch'i takes the place

wind has arisen, ch'i liaofaif/ Ê ~~f JT
Will this do ? chee-ko h&ing puh hsing

A
He can talk, but not act t a neng shoh puh -ncn-g hsing.
\^.
He pretends to be a good man f-a cJiuang tso hao ren.
t V\
Cover this over pa chcz-ko kai- slicing. V* Wv^
JCo
is affairs are very
prosperous t'a-tih si hen
^rj^His
.v
Th
There
is a discrepancy of two dollar cents
fen ch'icn.
r/^g
I am inviting company to-morrow
can you come? o vdng-tien cfrin
ni neng lai puh neng lai ?
~v\L*\*L (JMJ HflU-VtJ^ Clu
I am not going anywhere
o piijl^lianj^n^LL c/i'it.
n
This thing is not straight chq^kotonj^hsi piiluMhA
He has just come from home I a Us ôiig) clua^Lis' a i la i. UXiu
Botli wind and water favourable
shuen feng s
I,ay the table and set on food pai choh-tsl pai
l
;-/'
^ ni
'
of
MANDARIN PRIMER.
12.
Translate
Pack
the baggage in the cart.
Yesterday
blew
it
Two foreign
great North-east wincl; to-day there is no wind.
visitors have come in sedan chairs ; the chairbearers did not know the
road and carried them to the North but they have brought them
back now ; they say the luggage will come later on. He said, Cross
the river and go to the South-east, there is a railway station not far
One train starts at 6.30 a.m., another one that travels faster
off.
starts at noon.
What is the price of a 1st class ticket to j p ?
steamer is not so fast as a train. Travellers carry little with them.
He came by way of Shanghai he travelled half a day by rail and
two days by steamer. Each trade has its own line of business.
How far is it from here to the city gate ? Not far, three or four II
at the most ; you will be there by the time the lamps are lighted.
Hire four men to take these things away. He has not repaired this
Now, many travellers travel by steamer many
lam]> very well.
;
more
travel
were
all
Men
rail.
by
created
of
the East, West, North and
South
by God.
Writing Exercise:
& g @ fc
READING LESSON
pj
&, ft.
XII.
Some Travelling Experiences.
1.
2.
Den 3 fang 1 $H -ft A distant place. L. 15.

Ta p'n-kai jj |$ H? To do up bedding.
An -chia l T: ^ To make arrangements for the
to do.
Pan*-li* flft lj| To arrange to manage
l
3.
4.
5.
6.
Top-tans'
McP-Veo*
7.
8.
Hsi
B^
Shari*-hsi (^ gt
family.
1 *
Satisfactorily.
A jetty
a wharf a mart.
of Shensi.
:
L.
18.
The province
^^
^^
the capital of Shensi.

Fu
|^f Sianfu,
1
The Long River, a colloquial
C/i'ang* chiang
Yang-tsze Kiang also called the ta chiang ^c &.
10. HiP-peh ^^b North of the Lake, i.e., the Tong-ting Lake
of Hupeh.
l
-tin l
9.
name
of
the
the province
MA NDAIMN IMMMKIJ.
12.
1. Han*-k e& ^| p The mouth of the Han (river)

Hankow, a large
commercial centre at the junction of the Han and Yaug-tsze rivers.
9
2. Lien ren tai* tong^-Iisi* iiA-iir^C
Including both persons and goods.
Ch'uan*
3.
hang* j$ ft The boat office. L. 25.
Settled the price.
T
4. Chiang*-ting-liao chia f^
l
5. 'Fu
\P To hand over
to
to advance.
^ % ^.
The captain.
follow the course of.
8. Han* lu*
road, i.e., land travel as opposed to travel by water.
1
9. I^-ching Li
Already. L. 16.
10. CA'z 3 han* JE ^k To commence the road journey.
6.
Ch'uan lao-pan
7.
Shuen
IK
Here=to
^ /j$ Dry
11.
Z0 3
fai' if.
^f
12. P'ing*-ti zp
13. Hsiao ch'cc
^
/$*
14.
Hsing* puh k
15.
Chan-kêo
16.
Hsin^-k'ii*
mule.
Level
r^. L.
^ A wl^Wbarrow.
ai l
iff
^\
16.
[jf]
Could make no progress.
p Distance between the

5^^ Wearisome; tiring;
yfa
95
stages of journey
hard.
a stage.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
12.
E
.
ft
ft
&A
ffi
-t&
4ft
Ji^B
ft. Jft
fi
.if
It
"I
D4
5?
E SI
^T
A>A
.
Ch'eng men
leo-tsi
2.
Kiai-tao $j
The
erection over the gate of a Chinese
citv.
3.
'
suburb
Streets
thoroughfares.
kuaii fa $j$ The eastern suburb
confined to the North.
;
Tong
'
is
4.
Huei*-huei*-chia&
5.
Nan*
|fi
/W? ching* 4b
3jC
metropolis of China.
the sense of
L. 20.
^^
An express train
Thick-skin
Home-sick.
$i\
Ttsen-mo-iang fa [I5H! How about it?
K'nai
in
7 t$C JE& To construct a railway.

The northern Coital, the city of Peking, the
Hsiii1 liao t'ieh In {&
7.
c/t'ce
9. Heot-p'i* ff. fc
10. Hsiang 3 chial
11.
%k Mohamnieclanistn.
Difficult.
6.
8.
|fii
Kuan
96
What
shall
we do?
12.
AII
ft
3&SF
fls/n
,T ^/^
JB ft*
-ft
hsiang
i.
KV
'fc
-.
7 P
^ IK
it if
$9 T
Note that there
ffi
is
no
to:
^p
added to hsiang
Nouns taking /^z ^p frequently oniit them when preceded by an

Took no notice of him.
2. Puh li t'a ^ $&
7a
tickets.
^| Bought
/'/00
.
C/i'a tih iien*
Chia-hsiang
6.
//"
ch'ien
. .
Vastly inferior to.

One's native place.
To spend money. L. 17.
i
97
adjective.
MANDABIN PRIMEE.
13.
N. xiii.
chang
measure
feet.
iien
An
inch
J^ of a
To
foot.
Lightning
stick-up-to
to
paste.
elec-
Govern-
rule.
ment.
elder.
Chinese
en
To
ten
of
An
m.
Branch office.
tricity.
uen To
en
instead
Breath
air
an
p'a
Hang
^*
JP
Head
To
of.
steam.
//
liany*.
Fully
;
'
]S?
To
To
stamps.
lj||
to desist.
*^
To
announce.
recompense.
newspaper,
en -hud
Grace
favour.
S
ud-ch'i
As
txi-tien?
JJ^'
far as
to...
dictionary.
office; a shop.
5jo^ fuh
Happiness
perity.
r
l\> receive
Its
tang
}>ros-
ch fihrt8'uen
penaTp(5Bt
Tih
One common
Measure.
to en-
joy-
1.
Happiness;
ftili-cJi'i
foot
felicity.
stop
An
hxht-p'iao
lO.-yT^
~^
of.
rule.
account
quite.
foot ; 10 Chinese
inches.
iili
be to do. Head
on
For
measure.
Enough.
f
^
Late. Secret.
buy, jisi_jrain.
yT
v.
Hidden.
Temper
U, U
To fear. Lest.
To measure. To
Ink.
IIU
^-4
essay. According
to ; *by.
For
An
discuss.
fit}
office.
as denoting Material.
construction
in
Chinese
may
be
denned
as
descriptive ', as it describes things and actions as to their origin.

In reference to material, nouns of material, such as wood, stone,
'
y ou
cannot view
-
t/ie.
n
/>/<uii.
the
mountain
you
MANDAIilN
etc.,
I'KI.MKU.
turned into descriptive adjectives

to the termination 'en
:irc
'
golden
wood
'
;
^> The casket
'
',
is
the addition of
l>y
'
which thus answers

(
]_3.
such words as
in
(Kj
l
////,
gold
',
'
wooden
etc
golden;
tlie
r.r/.,
abacus
is
wooden
lio/i-txi
cliin-
.s7/z
Phrases of Origin.
2. The origin of things with regard to tlie material of which they
are composed, and of people, with regard to the place from whence
they come, is usually indicated by a descriptive phrase denoting
Of
origin; as,
Avhat
is
this
made?
c/i<r
xli?
.s7/.n<-Mo
tong-hsi txo
this is what thing made?

Where is
^J JEL ;g jjji T|f If fgr frf|
he 'from? t'a *hi na-U lai til, ?
^- Tlli s lasi
sentence might either refer to the~~~place trom wlncli he .started,
or the ])lace to which he belonged; the former would be, clear!;
tl/i
^fiJRJt*
indicated
by
t*
made
ony
chw
Where has he come from?
This
He
is
of
gold
The
t'a-
oran
of
starting point
xli'i ;
e.ff .
chin-tvi txo tih
tx'ony na-li /ai-tih
has come from Tong-ch'eng
Beginning and End

3.
in the ]>lace of
t'ct^ts'ony*
Action
an action
is
how
indicated.
indicated
by $
ts'ong,
followed by some adverb or adverbial phrase, and completed by a

verb having j|g ch'i as an auxiliaiy.
The point at which the action
/
^^^-3
terminates is denoted by ^_jû_d-ch'i
e.y.,
*-^/
Begin from here ; ts OHyr*ch(v-Ii ch'i ^ JJ J jg. 5^^
Begin to measure from here ; ts'ony chai-li(lian(/)ch'i)<jjfe J
(
^^
rite as far as to this
Measure from here

âng)ck<i,(liany)tao
hsie taa chce-U mi-clii
^ Jj JS S >S
as far as to the front ctoor
ta-men
uei-ch'i
^ JS J| jg jg ft
flj
jfc-
teong
'cfice-li
^C P^
lh-
Measurement and Weight.

4. In Lesson III. Section 1 ? it was pointed out that the words
'
ten hundred/ or, ( ten thousand/ were taken as units of
indicating
calculation for all numbers exceeding these amounts ; e.y. y 1,300 was
one thousand three hundred not thirteen hundred. 7

The same
principle holds good in measurements; chany T, a measure of ten
Chinese feet, being taken as the unit, whether in a statement or a
Chi ^, to ^, and sometimes to-shaoC^ ->J? ;
question.
Jare used
in
as
Lesson
XII.
2.
In
Hankow
and
the
interrogatively
'
adjacent
99
MANDARIN PRIMER.
region g|
common
How many ?
used for
chi-to is
but such a use
not
is
To ^>
North hao to
J?J> is used in the AVest.
often passes from an interrogation to an exclamation as in English
mo U>med to it e.y.,
when so used in the North it usually has
in the
How
this?
is
long
Not very long;
How
t
ch'ih,
kao
is
that
is
long
c/icf
nui/i
i\to cJi'dny
I
3
da
is
SK H
?
na
"^
iu
jb-
na-ko fancj-t^Triiuh
si
chany,
is
it
to.
(or
c/t/)
4ô.
tony-lisi inu/i hi fb
very heavy; uo-lco

it
V*>*
ft) if.
know how high
not
JC;
J|.
in ili-clt<ni</ chi
three inches long
^for
nojt
^f ,.;> J|.
^%
iuJbQch'ang %&
over ten feet) ? na
feet
forty-five
That thing
$j[
(if
san ts'uen ch'avy jjS ^f 1?9

That house is not very high
Wm?&%
.'
o puli hsiao-teh t\
kao
*?*&*
chong
^&-
AVhat a
looking child
tine
&
as
na-ko
/m/-/,s/
lo[iiio)hao-k'an
ni
Quantity or Measure.
indicating
word by/ in English, is one which

relates to measuring
as, Measure your desires by your fortunes
etc.
The
I engaged him by the day
It was sold by the ounce
a
word laen jfo to discuss/ corresponds to this use of by
on
of
which
in
the
amount
fact
view
of
goes
haggling
significant
when bargains are made c.r/.,
J^ ***^-~~^
This was bought by weight; chat slii(luen fcn-lian(j\nud tih
5.
Among many
'
uses of the
'
That was bought by measure
By
the day
luen t'im J& 5J-
ttl
:
s/ii
Ivcn
cfcihfofu&njpiai
tih
^ ^^
That paper was bought^by Hie

mai tih ft fl ft
Electricity
na
sheet
na-ko
cJii xlii
luen eh any
Expressions relating thereto.
introduction of telegraphy has given rise to a number of

the same plan as those
expressions in common use, formed on
Some of the commonest are
mentioned in Lesson XII. Section 4.
6.
The
the following
tien-uh'i
H ^.
Electricity
Telegraph
office; tien-pao
Telegram
ticn-pao
vhuh 'J $&
^ ^g.
100
JJQ-
MANDAIMN
To
scud
f
telegram
IICH-JMIO ;}J
li<'ii-lixi<'
\J
fj*.
Telegraph wire;
;
Telegraph poles;
FJeetric light
Submarine cable;
Electric
tramway
NOTES.
a.
kmi-fx'i
listen
//>//
ficii-cli'i
*/""'
fan/
',
/'*''<'/<
ag[.
',[
Jg
',
-^l
jjfc.
/,<**o//.
m jt'nto
A' AT///.]
7
p]
KS.
Take
(or
',[
Postage stamps are also called

[,SVr
-f.
>Jg.
lien (or
r//',/
llcn-c/i'i)
13
PRIMER^
$g
Ji
>>^
this letter to the post office pa cluc-fcng hsin song fao luTut this into the letter box pa cfuc-ko fang tsai
li.
h$in-hjiarig
Is there any answer? iu huei-hsin uiu/i iuf
'fyui*^Tell him to wait for an answer chiao f'a ten"' huei-Iisin.
;
Enough or not tkeoûh keo ? ^jo^T 1 U'awt } VA*>

Stick on a threeTentstamp t j.e/i Wo^sai^Jen^ hsin-p'iao.
He has brought a telegram f'a song tien-pao lai.
Ask him for a receipt uen Vajao sheo-t'iao.
Is $2.00 enough ? liangûaTch'ieH keo puJi keo?
4AJ/+'
I
Begin to reckon from here ts^png chcc-li sitan ch'i.
What are you afraid of? Don be afraid"; "Jfli shcn-ino ? paii
Fully three li ;\keo san li iij ^~)^j^t^) ~n*. *i*^j
The Saviour dietl^for us long ago Ch iu-ch u Isao- it iînen si.
,He has gone to heaven to enjoy happiness 7â sliaiig t'icn, hsiang
l
;:
'
fuh di u
l
liao.
How large do you want this made ?* Make it 1 ft.

Translate:
3 iu. high; o ft. long; "2 ft. (> in. wide, as large as that red box of
Iu hiring men, some hire by the mouth, some by the day
mine.
the
by
day 200 cash a day (if) by the month $5.00 a mouth.
(if)
He has sent a telegram to his father's home. Go and buy $1.00
worth of three cent stamps; Si. 00 worth of ten cent stamps ; and
$2.00 worth of five cent stamps do not make a mistake in buying
them.
What is that pair of scales made of? Of brass. The post
more than two li from here ; this is too far
office is in
2Jz street,
away take these letters to the branch office and briug back a
Where has that young girl come from? She has just
receipt.
come from home. Let us read from the second chapter as far as
to the fourth.
What are
.Begin to sing from the second verse.
Some are made of wood, some of iron
foreign ships made of?
these wooden ones are inferior
Those silver ones are the best
Have you brought your foot rule witli yon? No, I forgot to bring it.
Stick up these two sheets of
No.
Is 10 ft. 1 in. long enough ?
The grace of God is deeper than the sea, higher^
Chinese paper.
Those who believe and trust the Saviour will go^
than the heavens.
to heaven and enjoy great felicity.
;
Writing Exercise
fit
101
fi
ft
ffl-
MANDARIN
READING LESSON
1MUME11.
XIII.
Newspapers and Telegraphs.
,*
1.
kit i-lai
Ts'ong
c/iiao* fa
2.
Ming*
3.
Ching pao
world.
3jC
/*
5.
Fafffyt
PU.
in the
fiP $fc.
To print. L. 25.
To issue. L. 14.
Nothing but
6.
Chin*-shi*
7.
Kuan ch'ang* chong1 '*

Heo* fu 3 ^ %0i To await
j^
~j^
8.
of old.
named.
$R The Peking Gazette, the oldest newspaper
UiJ.
Also called ti-pao
4.
From
K)i $
Called
tf
ff
|t
exclusively.
V.
Official circles.
official
employment
L. 24.
5.
who
the one
waits for
such an appointment.
9.
10.
1
Sheng kuan* 1\ If To receive official promotion.
Keh* chih*
T^ To be degraded.
11.
Ih huei
12.
Chfi-cfri* %&
Once.
;
7^.
1314.
^ A machine machinery.
^ Wooden blocks a board.
c/iiao*
%$
*$C fi$
IS-
ftfc
The
$t
pastor
religion of Jesus
16. Tai*" | The Rev. S. Dyer, of the

inventor of moveable Chinese type.
V. 3.
17. Ling* If Intelligent.
18.
Hsiang*
liao*fah*-tsi*
19. Hoh* tsi* pan* ?$ -i'20. Pai-ts'i-tih iH -y- $'$
21.
Shnah l -in*^\
22. Pien*-tanif^\%.
23.
Pao*-kuan* $<
EJ1
ffi
ffi
^
A
To
W-.
Christianity.
L.
20.
a clergyman.
^ ~^
London Missionary
Thought
of,
Living word blocks'

compositor. L. 28.
'
print.
Convenient.
A newspaper
L.
17.
office.
102
Society, the
or devised, a plan.
moveable type.
13
IT
*S
i.
Luen^-tao*
establish.
Hsin*-hsih* fg
4.
Chilian*
6.
of.
L. 25.
^ News information.
To transmit to propagate. L. 15.
Hsia* hsiang*- T ^B To go into the country. L.
57/7^ |g To erect to set up.
3.
5.
To speak
l]
To
2. /,/A 4 JA
i- 4
16.
^ J^
7. Iong*-i*
V.
Easy.
8. C//7VA or cfcieh*
To
4.
intercept.
a system of geomancy which

9. Feng^-shufl
-fa Wind and water
supposed to control growth and decay, life and death, etc.
10. Ti-fang kuati frfa ~}j *g* lyocal officials.
A proclamation. Iy. 22.
11. Kao*-shi 4
Antecedents history of.
12. Lai*-lih* $&
'
13.
SkoM^ming*
14.
Feng*
chi 3
15.
16.
Rang*
7tt*
|H
To state clearly.
& By Imperial Decree.
f$ 5g
To allow
to suffer.
^^
j| By the side by the side

.p'ang-pien
A noise a sound.
17. ffsiang*-sheng* fjj.
Others.
18. Rang* ren* *%
19. Hai* (5^ An expression of astonishment and contempt.
.
of.
L. 18.
fa A demon a devil.
The idea of it being . .
shi %$
22. T'ien hsia shi ih li
Jl It is the
~~$
20.
Kue&
21.
Na
M^
li
23.
Ing*-kueh* 3
24.
Using*
England.
To put
into operation.
103
.?
same the world
over.
is
13.
m &
3M m
W -V
t^rsr -^
&
|1G
ft
ftfe
i5R
-fife
iij
5
6
IB
M H RiTJt
^t A /t S ^J
^ $, * Bt
*^
t=|3
fc-p
m
am
Htteh-shl
&&
Ok; or
Ts'uen^-chuang
Mao 4
^j'
jf
else.
L. 28.
a hamlet,
a village
To emit smoke to smoke.

Chuang*-chia* $ ^ The crops the harvest.
ien"1 *$ gg
L. 21.
To scare to frighten. L. 27.

Oh' 3 g| To squeeze to milk.
Seng^-keo* '& P Animals. V. 5.
ffiMi 4 IM '^ ruin to spoil. L. 14Trade. L. 23.
Seng l -i* &.
;
8.
9.
10.
If i To furnish military escort.

song* rjR
|5 A common saying; a proverb. I/. 26.
1
k'eo* nan- Mao*
13. Iang*-kao* sui meP, chong*
Though a lamb is good, it is difficult to suit everybody's taste you can't
11.
PaHping*
12.
Suh^hua*
hu*-
*(&
^^
HH ^ a H ^
please everybody.
ffv*-t'u*W& Stupid. L. 26.

|g ^ To gaze to behold.
pao* MJ$$i Weekly News. Hsing ch'i MSfl is used to avoid
the Christian term li-pai
^. The names of twenty-eight stars are used as a
14.
15. A'waw fran

16. Hsing^-ch'i
1
4-
ijifj
cycle of twenty-eight days. This being exactly four weeks the characters that
The names of the stars are fang JJ)
fall on the Sunday are always the same.
hsu
m mao
17.
b\\ hsiug
K'ihpao p
}\\.
The Daily News.
104
MANDARIN
Pi
ii
&
If
-^ S&
Ja 'B
it.
era,
0v
ilj
PI
13.
r&*
ill
-{EI
fe
it %.
3g
1'KI.MKU.
&^.
'S
OT
-h
1 1
A
T
B yv
SiM
ri/L^
/j
^, ^PK
'^
*
.
1t
X
If,
T>
&
11
ft
in 5E T
^fr
f1
/!>
H/L^ I^C
<J
m
*
X i.
Chong-ren
V T.
J:
F}I
-ffi,
A middleman
a mediator,
105
L. 20.
HAND A
Lesson XlV
A prefecture the,
nan
officer
<^n21
Department
To
An
loft.
storey.
To issue
to
iH
i
^^Short
profit. 3
>
''Filial.
deficient.
an occa-
;
'
To sweep. &>
^
To honour parents. J
'
English.
time
Advantage;
put
^r send forth.
A catty = ljflj$
in.
upper
ûA'Y*
<
enter
A tower?
;
A_relig-
To
'
j-
as time, etc.
<
~*""*7\
Jff
T(?
P rovince
2 diminish. To save?
To teach
sub-
eno
fah
*
a>i
difficulty
herbs.
ion.
division of
sht\
Grass
uio
region.
District
Trouble;
it.
ing
Head nan*.
Difficutf.
govern-
To
^_
reverence
to
Of ^
respect.
New
And
huai
^g
pai
also
Pang
again.
hall
a meeting
place.
place
<
circum-
Bad
To
.j
k2
ch'aj^^
*^
*
recent.
Old.
in
p
4
^
To
Com-
mon.
ruined
spoilt.
.worship
chiao-Pang
Chapel
tt"fe4
pay
respects.
search into ; to
*
look up.
church.
to
JS
kua-hao
ioJ
To
ih-k'o shu
register.
tree.
Negative Forms of Sentences.

Chinese shews a great partiality for the use of negatives.
The men were many ;
for instance, English would prefer,
In some
Chinese would usually prefer, The men were not few.
cases such a negative construction adds force; in other cases the
The same is true of double
sentence cast in this form runs better.
negatives, which both in Chinese as in English make an affirmative.
1.
'
'
Where,
'
For
instance,
'Dogs will eat anything/
not
wall
eat/ mean the same thing,
dogs
be mor^forcible in Chinese ; e.g.,
'There is nothing
or,
but the latter form would
Generals
f*
spring from setZ
on
and Premiers do
own exertions.
their
not
MANDAUIN
1'KI.MKIi.
good deal of money; l.'d-l-ih ch'icn. n

Dogs will cat anything ken nm/i in, />///. ch,'ih
All wont muh in puh ch'ii tih ffl ^ /f>
;
None but want money muh iujpuhiao uh'ieu
lie has a
tih
(Kf-
Numerals usecT as Adverbs.
^^^
'
two
are
Numerals
For instance, we say, <He came once, twice, thrice/ but
ways.
times/ as,
beyond this number we commonly employ the word
He came four times. This latter form is regularly used in Chinese.
The words denoting times' vary according to the nature of the
once
a time
a
subject, and may be translated variously by
hsia
tao
and
are
used
hud
Both
etc.
@,
fang |g
e.g.,
Jj|,
spell'
o shoh^kojt'a Hang huei ft
I upbraided him on two occasions
used as adverbs in English
2.
expressed in
* JL.***
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
MrT^Li has been three times
ft
* ii
Li hsien-seng
lai-ko
san
IS-
struck him four times ; or, He gave him four stripes

ia t'a s'i hsia fife, Jj fifc E9 TSing it again ; tsai~ch'ang ih huei ^_^_^^M'
The second time ; ti-r'i huei Jjf
gj.
He
How
often? chi huei} ^_@.

^
The last time ; shang huei Jljgl/*A
The next time hsia huei "FJlO.
I
rT
It is so every time; huei huei^shi chce-iang
^; Jg ^|.
I invited him once, but he, would ncrt come; o efriiupko
*
ih-huei
fa puh
k'en lai ft J&
& Jj -
0^
have been here twice before; o lai-ko
Fah
3.
'
Fah
its
(>
-f
t'a
^.
liangft'aiig-ffijjiiffijffi-
Force and Usage.
conveys the idea of
manifestation/
development/ or
'
expression in action ; e.g.,

His face has a yellow tinge; t'a lien shang fah huang
fijkjjltjl
The bread has not risen well ; man-t'eo muh iu fahhao(
..
Such words as
'
c
get/ grow/ becomeTêtc^, often give
but the connection alone can decide its force ; e.g.,
"
He
became faint t'a fah ruan

Send an extra letter to fall ih-feng
;
flfe,
*{^
its
meani
JLJ
\i!
DC-
lisin
ch'u
%% ~
as a Suffix.
used
with many verbs to indicate the
4.
effect upon the individual.
It thus has something in common with
our English use of the word ' you/ or ' one/ which is often used in
a general way without any special reference to the person addressed.
For instance, when we say, It exasperates you to hear him say so/
we may mean <It is exasperating/ without any reference to a
The word ren
is
'
107
14.
MANDARIN
particular individual, or
or persons in question.
PRIMEIJ.
we may mean
it
has exasperated the person

alone can
This, however, the connection
determine, and so in Chinese e.g.,

Is not his talk exasperating?
;
ren?
4$IgfA*fc A-
God always
/x
t'a ehce-hsic liua ch'i-ren
loves
puh
ch'i-
~y
f>_-y~X,
-*!>
*>
Shang-ti ch'ang ai-ren Jt Jj_j5i--S A;

Ixwji puh p'a-rcn jft
/f tS
Virtue does not fear
Ch'u $
as indicating Place and Circumstances.

situation
In
position
$P jr 5.
English such words as place
We speak of a place as
are used both literally and figuratively.
referring to a locality, and we also speak of a person being in a
'
<
'
'
'
Jf
*r
tight place/ in reference to his circumstances
'
position/
r
./
}r
The word
and other words.
<
and
jjg
so of
c/t/it
'
situation/
approximates
to this in Chinese, being applied to a place and to a condiThe character of such circumor
combination
of circumstances.
tion,
stances is indicated by some suitable word which denotes its quality,
In some disthe condition of goodness, etc.
as, e.g.,
somewhat
ffcj^jiajwh'u
tricts
used more freely than in others, being joined to almost

The following forms are current
participle.
C/I'M is
j^
or
any adjective
everywhere
Shortcomings; faults; tumi-ch'n
Advantages; superiority; ditdng
:
Usefulness, or value
in straits
Difficulty
iong-chSu
)tau.-ch'u
|| )$.
g ;^.
Dwelling place; chu-bh'u Q
Profit; benefit;
ih-ch'ii,
jjjt.
bad habits;
Every place everywhere
Viciousness
He
Jnifti-ch
n,
jg j^.
koh tao koh eh'u
JiJ
^.
^^
has great difficulties t'a /tc-n in, )i<n\-ch'\i, jjfe,

||
This thing is useless; chce-ko towj-hxi muli in, iong-cn'u$j[
;
He
constantly talks of my son's shortcomings ; t'a ch'aiw snoh

tuan-ch'u fo *% g8; JJ ft
jg."
j|fj
That child is not vicious; na-ko hai-ts'i muh iu huai-ch'u
o ri-tsi
till
La<>
and Chin
Distinction between.
There are many -English words which are applied indiscriWe say, 'An old hat'; An old
minately to things and persons.
man'; and use the one word old for both, but the Chinese use
one word for old in the first case, and another in the second.
is applied to inanimate objects, and lao
Generally speaking, chin
A man is lao ^, but his hat is
to living creatures, and to age.
chiu |f.
Things that have fulfilled their functions and are worn
6.
'
'
'
out, as a
'
decayed
tree,
are often spoken of as
108
lao
e.g.,
MANDAIMN
I
cannot get this old shoe on
xh<nj chioh
His clothes are
and
b.
<7.
The
^lUiTjOLiJl
diiu lixji-l*i
<>
C/I'-IH/II,
IB;
oirT;7're-7/A. i-xh<in<j xh'i c/ihi.-ti/i
oflicials
in
termed
J{f
Districts are
y*l
cfni'-c/i'i
place of worship
preaching hall a pf|
NOTP:S.
4fl
^H
I'K'IMKK.
charge
or
(7'o /wn/ or clri-chco
of
jft]
/w
r
t*
fi
*-
/Vl*
jjjg
or clri-fu
/;/m//
and
Prefectures
Departments,
JfJ
and
also called
is
or X*
^P Si
>Tfr
///#//
g'
J|-|
/-/w/j.
.*
or
or
cht-hsicu.
[See Lexxon
XXIX.] 0^
MlSCELLANPX)US EXAMPLES.
\\]
$$
cannot find this character chcc-ko tsi q ch'a puh ch'uh lai\
-.
u
There are men everywhere koh Ian fc<2/ujt in rzii~
There are officials in every city \[knh_Jji^ <~h
hsreii_ûkna.ii.\
He has gone upstairs; t'a shangtSfcffitiliao.
Tell him to come downstairs chiaoFa Jisia Ico lai.
^
Sixteen ounces to a pound ih chin\tri shi/i Ink lian&j "-*
This letter must be registered chcên^Jisin_iao kua-hao.
He is a filial son t'ashi ko hsiao tsi.
He respects his parentsy fa
He shews great earnestness Fa fall ta nih-hsin. ^&*
He entered the church last Sunday t\i shanît-pai-fih chin
They worship God in the church t'a-men tsai chiao-t'ang pai Shang-ti.
I
All these letters, without exception, were registered.

Translate
That old gentleman wears an old hat and an old pair of shoes.
China has twenty odd provinces a few years ago there were only
in every province there are Prefectures, Departments and
eighteen
Districts
the Prefecture of
2p has eight Districts the District
came
his
name
Meat is bought by the
last
is
year
magistrate
j|.
pound, calico by the foot go and buy 2 Ibs. 3 oz. of pork and 1
ft. and 1 in. of Chinese calico.
There are trees and grass outside
:
it is
How many times have you been there ?
;
really pretty.
I went once last year and twice during the summer of this year.
Tell him to come in and not to staud outside ; it is cold outside.
He is a bad man ; there is 110 benefit in managing affairs with him.
Be so good as to look up this character (^ for me in the dictionary ;
I cannot find it.
I came once last month, and he was not at home ;
I come again, and he still is not at home ; is it not exasperating
To
do nothing but speak of peoples' faults is bad. The first time he
measured from here this time he measured from the North gate as
far as to the door of the chapel.
The number of those wiio come
the city
church to listen to the doctrine is many ; they come once

The newly-built chapel is twice as large
every day in the afternoon.
as the old one
it
will hold, seated to the full, between 300 and
to the
400
people.
How
excellent
Writing Exercise
jg
# 0MS &
109
# R.
70
Jt K. 81.
MAM) AKIN
14.
PJBIMEB.
READING LESSON XIV.
A
v
The Land we
1.
So*-iu*-tih l
2.
U*-luen*
3.
TcW
<?/;
3g if
ffi
i*
live in.
All there are everything.

L. 17.
matter whether. L. 17.
1
The Three lights
=hsing san kuang*- B M
;"
flij
No
moon and stars.

4. HU* $J A
sun,
lake.
L. 21.
T*ai*-ts'u l ^C ^J In the beginning.
L. 24.
6. Ihi-ch'ieh*
ty The whole of ; all. L. 20.
L. 24.
7. Fen^-fu* nfr pft To command.
5.
8.
4
etc.,
'
This expression after such words speak/

One-sound
denotes that the speaker needed only to speak and the thing
'
'
Ih-sheng
command/
was done.
^
^
Ts'ad*-muh*
; Flowers, grass and trees.
Niao^-sheo*
ffi, Birds and quadrupeds.
11. Hoh"1
Living. L. 19'l's a^-hao*
V. 4.
12. TsâP-liao*
> Materials.
9.
10.
lifetime.
!L np
13. Ih*-pei*-tsi*
14. Lien* yjfe Even
including. L. 18.
;
15. P*an*-ku*$fc ~fc A mj'thical character

led the heavens and earth out of chaos.
16. Hsia*-u*
T W] To rain.
T
V.
who
is
supposed to have chisel-
3.
Hsia*-hsueh*
V. 3.
^' To snow.
l
for frost to descend.
ffsia*-shuang ~jc f| To frost
19. Shai* flpf To dry in the sun for the sun to shine upon.
17.
18.
'
'
20.
Shuh*
fjfa
Ripe
well cooked.
L. 21.
110
V.
5.
MANDARIH IMUMKK.
S3
11
^ Z
ft
-~
A^^n
tB
ft^T
ft
dfc
&
IK
M1^1
AW
^
aMR 3H4
8
ft
ft ft
A
sft
l^^m
ft
^J\
ttl^
ft IS
A #
ft
tt
14
1.
CA
2.
Ming*
70-
,B4 ft,
ft
A, A
Since
|5E
since
Asien* 58 El
it is
It:
is
so
....
7jc
....
6.
Ts ong l -wing* 1$
7.
Fang
8.
Ho*
Wisdom.
9.
10.
L. 18.
clearly evident that
Perpetual eternal. L. 23.

Hsien*
4.
Wl To manifest. L. 26.
4
l
s/io/i
5. 7"^n
^f g^ Further again. Introduces a
additional thought.
3.
it
-ft
side
IJJJ
a place
V.
subject, or
an
4.
nan-fang
merchandise. L. 19.
;
new
jfj
The South.
Goods
Chang J| here=To increase in.
Pi 3 ts i*
L. 17.
JH Mutually.
;
ffit
A^
Do not regard .... as men. L. 17.

Different climates
?K
Ifr-fang^ shuP-l'u* ih^-fang^ ren*
different men.
The Chinese attach a good deal of importance to the influence
of climate (^
) on character.
11.
. .
1
.pith tang* ren* $: 7^ ?$
it Weather.
13.
Tieit-ch*i*
14.
Shen^-liang* fy TjV Stature.

Tall of large build.
Kao^-ta* ;g
15.
16.
17.
Â
12.
A
A $t Generally speaking. L.
Ai*-hsiao* % ^ Short of small build.
;
Ta*-kai*
Ill
19.
M AXDA KIN PRIMER.
#*lW
ffiS
m nwrafi
& Atfc ^ g ft
H m
IM
;Ko
m m^
m
w ^
^S yv PO
/>
m ^j ^ % #;
% it ^ 0,^ ^^
,- i5 ^-ffi, *Jt
-r
T
A
^
&c
'r
WL
\&\
FTJI
'R
fr
tf_g^
i-
%irrfr
1 A
î"V
tt
A V^
X5C^.
-"*--'
ffl
^^
^K
"S"
-ffi.'
17
ji$V
ifi
;|p
MH-)
^fe
n^te
;il
JU t^
&
4b
1.
fPj
ife
it
3.
Cto
$ff
4. Ial-hsi*-ia*
-f^
* ÎE^
Productions
jfe
2. Pu1i>--t<ong*
Unlike
(5]
continent.
i-ni
ffi Asia.
5.
Mei*-kueh* | 1^ America.
Fei*-cheo l
Eo
;*fruits\
different.
ffi
6.
.
7?^
PP3
T'u^-c/i'an 3
u-i'
Jiffj
-lo*-pa
p/\
Africa.
5p
Europe.
[Q
^
%&
f ffi Australia Australasia.

$ft
New California. California is known as
chin^-shan^
|1|
The Gold Fields.
|U Old Gold Fields
Chin-shan
|ll or Chin chin-skan ?f
10. Hai*-tao* $ fa An island.
L. 16.
11. Tsai*-nei*
f^ Not included extra.
In all all told. L. 23.
12. IW-kong 4
:ft8.
Aoi-sV-taW-W-ia
9.
/&/
IJ
'
13.
Ch'iangt-hsi*
14.
So 3 pai*
tih^
15.
S/ieo*-i*
&^
16.
Lioh 4
To 1
In detail
S^ffl
shen*
pjj ?f-
Trade
1$ Briefly
fi^j
fifi
minutely.
The gods
handicraft.
slightly.
^^ A
Puh ru
20.
Ven* lao*
21.
Ti 4 -ti 3 -chi 4
in
name. V. 3.
Cannot do better than ....
$\ -g
t-ifi
6.
L. 19.
here=how.
17.
18. Ming^-tsi*
19.
V.
V.
To
3S g$
ask.
A geography.
112
6.
that are worshipped.
L. 17.
14
tit
,lt,
9 A
#A
8,
ffl
/, Hf
ii
IR
IK
fi
,
UJ.
IK
ff.it 41
jff.-ffi,
ffl
;K
- T
tt
*:
as
jt
ffi
^^t'
ill, ftfe
?,
*
t
fi *n. us
A
A3
M
P.
it
\
U
"
^15
f
uei* ft $&
A %
Divided into.
113
/y
MJ ^P
IS
MANDARIN
15
*>
LESSON
Thick
heo
To
generous.
To propagate;
hand down. To spread,
eh 'nan
lot
An age. The world.
Square.
pre-
Society.
Literature.
scription.
To
To
repair.
Jb uild. To /'uK.
;
generous.
ts
"j
,^
ts
To curse to revile.
to
To provoke
;
exasperate.
u Without; none.
workman
Labour.
A labourer.
day's work.
the
;
" The
jfi,
fyhieh*
A negative,
boundary
a limit.
seng
sJiih-tsai
Circum,
FTf.
;
To wake
ing
head.
First.
uo
really.
4Ulr\
To get angry.
Truly
basket.
-^
H3
"V^
/-îrt/
The
world
To
up.
real.
society.
shui-chiao
^g ^^
startle.
The
sheo
H*
'K'" HP* lan-tsi
Real true
Genuine.
hs
cJi'i
affections
feelings.
stances.
sh'ih
y
X'
^'
to per-
mechanic.
kong
;>:
trr*
exhort
suade.
smile.
ch (
ma
rce
Round.
uen
oh
4 cfi
To
uen
at
ch<
Un-
mean.
Civil,
as opposed to military.
\Jvr4jZ
tivate.
"ti
Thin
ficial.
as a disease.
1
-ft
cry-for-about.
Shallow
t<
A chief.
"K"
To
sleep.
The empire;
t'ioi-Jixift
the world.
N.A.
Calamity; misfortune.
tract;
moral essay.
Compound Adverbs.
1.
Adverbs
number
in such
are
frequently
repeated
before
verbs.
large
of adjectives are thus turned into adverbs by repetition, and

cases generally take a suffix, the commonest being (ft tlh.
Some adjectives given in preceding Lessons may be

compound adverbs e.g.,
so turned into
Sffi/PJSScA To make a man

must
toil
if
you don't you won't.
114
of yourself you
MANDAKIN
J5.
pRfcHEtt,
-^T^
He
in detail;
explained
She saw him afar
hxi-hxi-lih *hoh
/'</
,*
up
it
hi^li
ajjjfl
$j
gfc.
i&
t*a^men(kao-kao-tih had ch'i-lafyfa
ffj
v-^*
t^
They hung
Qll
fljl,
\tenruen-tih k'an-chien /'a
/'^
off;
fill
Abstract Nouns of Quality.

2. Abstract ideas are difficult to express
concrete is much more easily spoken of; it
in
Chinese.
is
almost impossible to
Anything
render such terms as 'whiteness; ' blackness;' etc.

Such words as
'weight;' 'thickness;' etc., are expressed by an idiom which
combines two words of opposite meaning, thus forming abstract nouns
of
Some examples have already
quality.
'
business
mai-nuti,
Hot-chin
jg; j
';
(j^
TJ*
<
far
near,
'When
weight '.
the medium between them
iudiciites
i.e.,
The same
thickness
ch'inq-chonq,
jjr
jjjg
pn-h precedes each adjective
distance';
i.e.,
'
light heavy,
'/f,
ih-ian(/\(Jh)h('o
The manner
'
which an action
in
A Law
a rule
'
;
Jf.
(ftfy
is
done
j^jS
^.)
At
'
It
is
done in
It
is
not written like this;
this
way
do you say
Shang
sh'i
and ko
joined to
^^
jfj
chce-iany hsie-ja/i
J.
jjfc
JJ
shoh-
used as Auxiliaries.
hsia and
**huny
ko, may be joined to ^fc
form principal verbs, or they may be used as
a principal verb in the same manner as j|fi
ch'i-fai
^
auxiliary to
and [J ^ ch'uMai;
to
ch'ti
C/ome over here
e.y.,
;
Go
ko-lai
over there; ko-chû

Bring the book over here;
-
Go down hxia-ch'ii "f ^.

Come down Jisia-lai
Come up; shanghai
>v
shu na ko-lai
^
\
Carry
sh'i
indicates the
it is
The words J^
and
Take
chw-iang tso-fah
puh
it
times
this sentence ? chce-chii-hua xhi tee)i-mo
hsia
J:
denoted by the word
is
affixed to a verb
according to which things are done.

a noun, but this is not common ; e .y t)
4.
I/WO~
as a Suffix indicating Manner.
lai
fah meaning
law
about the size ? ta-hsia o tsen-m o-ianc/ ? j$j\*

Jj
ffc^
moderate distance off puh uen puh chin /f jfir^^JS-
Fah
'
a/*^
^^^^\
\*
'.</.,
How
3.
beejn^gi\ en, viz., 5[ j|

r//'z/>-^'//o/,^neasuremenz.' Others are
it
it
up;
down
t'ai
;
shang-lai
/ hsia-vh'u
115
Jfi
.
JL
'
-j^*-'
-y^
MANDAKIN
Pen
5.
W>/
connections
Use and Force.
its
or 'root,'
'origin,'
"fa,
used as a
is
and memorialists employ
officials
2fc
selves in documents.
it
pronoun in certain
speaking of themthe colloquial and is
in
It has also passed into

prefixed to nouns to distinguish them as peculiar to a person, to the
place where, and to the time when he lives. It needs to be translated
according to the context in which it is found, as 'This'; 'The oîe
in question
'
'
etc.
r./y.,
Native; the place in question

Xatives of a place j><>n-t; ren
This street; /"'// l:ii 'fa fjj.
My country my native land
This month JH'II iicli
J|.
jtcn-fl
/fc
}$,
A'
/>o/ knelt
Ch-iwiy
Ifi:
^j
jjf
in combination.
6. In Wesson X. Section o, it was explained that f\ ti/i indicated

au agent/ or 'doer.'
Many occupations are thus defined, but there
The
are others which are more commonly indicated by
chiany.
followin are a few of the commonest
'
Carpenter
ft
nni/i-('lti<rn</
**
K.
'
Stonemason;
Blacksmith; /'/>//-<// /Vo/// |
Brassworker; t'ony-Ghiang
Silvei'smith
in-chlan
A'A7A'.]
MlSCKLLAM-lors KXAMI'LKS.
'pj
>^|
There are both round and square ones it en tih fcim> tilLJn in.
He is very angry t*a .svv/- tiLch'iThis matter is not easy to arrange chcc-ko .v/-r//'/;/^ pjih^haojHin,.
He slept well through the ni^lrU; t'a tyiuiih if tih hao chiao\~ "
He has just awoke t'a ts'aUising liao.
That person is constantly making trouble na-Jô ren ch_'_aug-cfranir-ti/i
This is Mr. Li's boundary stone chcc s/i'i Li chia tih kiai-shlh.
He is a good man without doubt t'a shl/i-tsai ski ko hao ren.
;
>'& ho.
are now building railways everywhere; hsien-tsai Chgng-kueh

ren tao-cfru /isiujlieh-lu.
o ch'uen-kgjt^LMaJigJitiei Pa
I exhorted him twice, but he \voti 1<1 iiiot listen
pnh k'cn ting.
Men preach all over the country H'ienJisicfyu ren cli'uan-tao.
The Chinese
cWA?e^l(v^-^^^
give you two tracts
song ni lian^-chan^j^jieu-shi-nciL.
How
about the length? Neither too long nor too

short; just right.
They came empty and returned full. How shall
we manage this affair? This is not difficult it is managed in this way.
What is that child crying for? She says her parents are dead.
Were they natives of this nrovince? They were natives of this province
Tr<nix/(itc
L.16
MANDAUIN PRIMER,
and
lived
in
this
outside the
wait
him
Tell
street.
front
He
door.
this
not to
square one over
thev are waiting below
is
'arry that round table over here,

The carpenters want their
there.
tell them to wait a little longer,
(
money
mine up quickly, and
constantly abusing people j as

he is not a good
he lupins to eurse
soon as he opens his mouth

man everybody says he is had.
and carry
t<>
15-
You may reckon four davs'

come upstairs now.
exhorted them four times, but failed to move them;
don't want them to

lie
labour.
they
To act thus is to provoke people to anger.

abused people.
the Saviour ascended to Heaven He told His disciples to
still
When
A fterwards His
the world and propagate religion.
and
and
went
to
every country
very manv
disciples
preached,
believed. 'When He came to the world He was a poor man
He was
a carpenter.
Afterwards He went forth and preached in His native
Sing the
country, exhorting people to believe and trust in (Jod.
go
all
over
10 1st
hmn.
Writing Exercise
Jft
ft-
READING LESSON XV.

Pure Romance.
A,
A m m
A
*fc
v#
^LLt
AA
to
A *
w^
?
Title of rei^n 1862 to 1874.
Inside; within. L. 20.

Pictures illustrations.
jNIanner style.
vStyle of dress
jr e t up.
3
Ieh*-tsi *J
Leaves.
Hsiong* ffi The breast the chest.
K'ufr-long* fft %g 'A hole an aperture.
r|j
'
'
6.
7.
8.
9.
Kang*-t&
-ft;
-J-
carryin.i; pole.
$J
MANDARIN
15-
fW/
1.
7\?//*-/mV/ 2
6.
to dig.
L. 22.
Q,
To
sit>-h.
To lean
'fz'*
without cause or evidence.
on emptiness'
'
Sui* hsin 1
^^
Ping* kông^
7.
8.
W'X
I$L
^
^
5.
jft
3.
To scoop out
T.^f
cave a cavern.
Rabbits hares.
Tn*-tsi* %L
.
not the slightest.
Chiao*-hua* %L fb Civilization. Note
ftp
$
To laugh two characters are used here to match
Hsi*-hsiao* -^
is usually used alone in the colloquial.
,& below, but
4.
for
&
Tong*
2.
with
1'KlMEli.
have no ground
To follow one's own imagination
/isie c/i n/i

gg <0
L. 17.
Hai*-uai*-tih^ c/ri* fan* yl
to
in writing.
9.
the sea
10.
sky
f^
Wonderful
To
sit in
tales
from beyond
travellers' yarns.
Tso* ching* kuan* t'ien 1
^f
a well
and look
at the
a limited outlook.
11.
Nan* kuai
12.
K'tf-hsMi 1
$$;
|\
And no wonder.
Alas!
n/
fg
As for example.
Hsien*-lo*fel& Siam.
13. C/n'
14.
4"
Iff t
ru
%fc
15. C/i'en*-tsi?
k\\
fii
^ A statesman.
that which
fii;
.
V.
^^
3.
A microscope.
Hsien?-uei*-ching* J^
i
17. Ch'uan*-uei' fl$ $i A ship's mast.
16.
118
is
most lamentable
is...
MANDARIN
SfiiA/en
Mci*-tao*
Ten-tenths
5J-
rflj
Whenever
entirely.
came to
it
15
1'IiIMKIi.
27.
ever
L. 28.
3-
hsiai* ii
Skates.
5-
To fly. L.
Kan* 3& To dare
to
6.
Sah*-huang*
To
4-
7- Pen*-lai*
8.
9-
10.
Kai l -si*
|^ ^
Pan 4 ho 4 $
Hsu 4
22.
presume
lie.
Iv.
to
I/.
20.
23.
Naturally and rightly.
L. 23.
Ought to die. Often used as an imprecation.

To lay in and transport goods home for sale.
To chat.
119
winter
M A X n A RTX PR M K
15-
r.
/'wA chiang
ta $]
2.
Tong
3.
Chûcn-k'ai
them
4.
li /
%]'
f^
Made
3g Didn't talk seiise
move to fight
Caused them to
$ty
to
l
5. Sheo*-shih
jjfc
Settled
it
120
was unreasonable.
desist
amicably.
Head ornaments.
1.
come
to give over.
Shoh ho lino
to blows.
by persuasion
persuaded
MANDARIN
REVIEW LESSONS
JMtLMKIi.
XI-XV.
^^
*$
examples of each Degree of Comparison.

two sentences how tilings are compared l>v repetition.
is the Double
Comparative formed? give two examples.
(Jive
Shew
in
How
illustrate in six sentences the use of
shew uses
In four sentences
of j|| j
^?
Q g.
:
Jf{.
Give Chinese for: locomotive; telegram; railway station; third

submarine cable; telegraph
class; electric light; electric tramway
;
pole.
(live
two examples each
Illustrate the use of
Shew two
ftf]
uses of
j.
j3j
j|[i,
f^.
Correct the following
ft
of the use of
to indicate origin.
- .4
ft a ft * &
SI
#S
+HR
fi
i5
38 to
ft-
Write three sentences containing Double Negatives.
What
the meaning of ff
is
shew
use in two sentences.
its
Translate
How many times a day
Kvery time, without
The last time he was not at home.
exception, he says the same thing.
The next time I will tell him to wait.
:
Shew
'(
use of
as a suffix after verbs
and
in its
literal
and
adapted use in three sentences each.
What
the
is
difference
in
the use of
^ and H
give
two
examples.
Translate
Chapel.
Place of worship.
hall.
preaching
hall.
(iive the
officials
names
of cities of three
degrees,
(Jive three examples

shew how they are formed.
to
with
of
of the
Compound Adverbs and
the use of
Form three abstract nouns of quality, and give three sentences

shew how they are used.
What is the meaning of j^ ? how it is used?
Illustrate in four sentences,
and as auxiliary verbs.
%,
Jg
as principal
How
is
*fe
2.
Jg
^,
both
used? give three examples.
Translate Heading Lessons
11
titles
who govern them.
XIV
and
XV.
Give sound, tone, and meaning of the following
H&ft)aJKSi*ii
mmnm
121
II
gm
ft
jg[
?
-jg.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
15.
J
3. Correct,
correction
if
necessary, the following,
and give
reasons- for .the
it
A
1
Write
4.
When
want
&
#0 & ^
il
it
in Chinese character
to
did he
meet him next
go?
fife
IS
Toôl
us
Â/VA^H
What
time.
aid
say last time
lie
lie went the 23rd of last month.
when
I was at home, but I do not

I heard
invited the wrong person.
know where he
it
is
money and was engaged in business in Shanghai. On

month that old woman came to change money.
come ? They can all come. He is not fond of going
things inside are better than those outside.
After he had finished doing
it ;
saw him
now.
said at that time that he
the 5th
say ?
What
He
had
the 21st of
Can they
out.
The
does the letter
he went to the house of Mr.
Chang. He first said, The people are too many afterwards he said,
The old people are too few. Did you know that those four gentlemen came in the 5th month ?
;
122
^
MANDARIN
VOCABULARY
To contract
To injure.
IMIIMKU.
III.
To cure; to heal.
To govern. eJX^
a disease.
Injury.
Disease.
vice
doctor; a
a fault.
Snow.
iieh
\,
~
1
The soul.
chiny-ch 'cny The capital
Ihig-huen
To
heal
rear
ô
To
'
ch
nourish.
city
To
support.
The metropolis
Iny Brave
>
the metropolis.
t'iao-fu
A
A
tao-kao
To
1
^
ini-ng-txi
keep/ as animals.
^ )n\fd^*\
'
to cure.
to
capital.
;
name.
coolie.
pray-to
heroic.
England.
"
iny-kueh England.
[-
*4
ten.
ilc-n
'
i,
2
//
k
fuli-kueh France.
tch-kueh
courtyard.
public building.
i-uen 1
Rain.
Spirit
huany-ti
Ef-
ch'en-tsi
The
soul
the wits.
\^&JLV*4JLAJ
in
lao-Jiu 1
Thunder..
it
j-
storey; a layer.
Divis-
a.
Both
A statesman.
A lion.
1 *1
A
A
tiger.
plan;
^
r-
ihrtao ch'iang
wall.
A
A
ion of a subject,
A sage. A husband.
A labourer.
NOTES.
Emperor
King ruler.
method.
An item.
are also used in refer-
'
as,
fy jj
>
>^
dose
of medicine.
chany and
ence to the contraction of disease,

^/w^r, He has contracted a
*-
ficacious.
H>
spiritual.
Intelligent.
h tien
Germany.
A prescription.
A hospital.
fang-Mi
Cruel.
wolf.
^L-
vA^^
capital.
sovereign.
The
"'"
scny-ch'eng Provincial
The
n(tnyUL Imperial.
*W^
Virtue; moral excellence.
Germany.
&y'\
mci-kueh America.
America.
lent.
'oo^v^l*
prayer.
^ a chang-liao
*\
M A N I) A I?
15.
b. Liny-huen
jg 2j|
no change of meamftgT"
c.
The
<7.
An Emperor
e.
YVz
-j-
/ Hxia
r
/iA'"|
To
r
N PRIMER.
with
/*z,
Irecpiently changed to
used as a verb before both
is
is
~f
U hu_en-lmy
often transposed to zfy
often omitted in speaking of names. ^_Q

"
is also called jfi J; hu-(niy-N]i(tiiy.
-u
fi>
ff-
is
ts'i
is
hsiiehy as,
:
snows.
it
lei.
t<t
'g"
and
snow
'
"p
ii
'
rains
it
Toj-ain
thunder, is ff
;
fo write a prescription is ||]

i
~ft is often used in the sense of
language/ as, The English
other languages.
The first of
language,
the characters which compose the name of the country stands for the
h.
Uen
name,
as,
French,
etc.
fali-uen
jj
READING LESSON XVa.
5.
An Awakening and
ffi
g?
a Journey.
T\
-f*
''
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
An
Chu*-shu l -tih l
Hsiao* hual
A funny
<=
To
Iu*-kitang*
Lei*4iacP
T'an
y?^6>
7.
Tseng^-k'aP-
liao 3 reo 3
closing the eyes, not

8.
Sui l -/ieo 4
9.
Shu 1
P3
ffi
fatigued.
lie
down.
T ^ To give (the eyes)

To open used of the
To
13.
14.
$ chu.
To
a rub.
eyes only
later on.
stretch oneself
on awaking.
sides.
TV. 24.
"
previously.
L. 28.
enquiries.
;
Fang*-uen* $)j fnl To make

Pick iu t'ien ti liao glj
?c
as
K To yawn. L. 25.
^ To look round on all
Ta* . . . ha*-ch'ien*
P1J
11. SP-nct* ih^ k'an* (5-1 gj
12. Tsao-hsien ^L sfe Formerly
10.
Bye-and-bye
ftfi
Jt
used in place of
|.
^^
s/teu 1 ff
f^ /ô is also
to ridicule.
story
strolf to ramble.
Tired
-/isia* %fa ^C
5.
6.
author,
t{ft
124
It
was another world.
pi
is
used of
MANDAIMN IMMMKK.
15
ft &' 4K I
*&-{&
2.
SnUqfe Although. L.
7J/ .... ch'iih-lai Jt;
3.
Tsifl-tsoiig
1.
1
jjig,
18.
.
$\
Ancestors.
4. Fiih^-hoh^ c/ri*-/ai* '&
Ê X
yft
To bring out by comparison.

L. 26.
To come
to life
aain
to
have
a resur-
rection.
|^ The present dynasty.

lp China.
L. 19.
15 To think to consider.
5. Tang^-ch^cio
6. Cho)io l -/nta*
7.
8.
I3 -ei 9 W
Knai uk*
'}'
t\\
Ufa
Uncanny
9. LiiP-s/tf-ngi-ch'i*
ffl )|^
things.
gramophone.
To receive a great shock.

Strange; wonderful.
12. Shen-itio
yjg used before an enumeration of things or persons
be translated by Such things as
...
10.
//<f/^
/7/
/rt
11. Hsi^-cfri*
ffi
t'iao*
-A
yfe
%$
'
may
'
TsU-hsing^-ch^dP ^ ft iji Motor cars.

Chioh* tah* ch'tz 1
SI 4i Bicycles.
15. FeP-hsing^-ch*!* J\\
Flying machines.
16. TsaH-k'ong^-ctwng*
In the air.
r{j
bewildered.
17. Luan* ftl Confused
18. MctpuW choh*
Unable to find out; %\
^;
completely lose one's bearings.
13.
14.
^
^
|ft *5 Rare; uncommon.

Extremely very sign of Superlative.
i|r
3
19. //s/V/rt//
20.
7>/// 4
21. C/t'iao 3 ^]
Ingenious
clever.
125
27.
to
MANDARIN PRIMER.
15.
ft
11
3ft
Pi
-ft
Ja
ig
fti
^^
315
m-A
O
-^
pi
,^
Pj
*,
ii
MA
i>J
*|U
A
m
JEl
^^-
w m
iij
jdi
ffi
1.
is
1
1
Ching chong
ch'iu* ching
fl
tji
To seek
to better that
already good.
2.
K'ong^-pa*
fift
ffl
To go
3. f*ao*'* $2
Perhaps
to
4.
Shuh*-shoh l ih l -pien*
5.
Chi l -huci l
6.
ChHn 1
7.
AV// 2
8.
9.
ien*
glj
it
to run.
$fc
\$
may
be that .... L.
To give an account
An opportunity or occasion.
$ BM With one's own eyes.
-ff
Other; another.
19.
Iy. 17.
Iy.
of.
28.
L. 21.
Kan*-pacP $& \% To guarantee to warrant.

Tang*-tang* ft ffi To put something in pawn.
;
120
L. 17, 29.
which
MANDARIN PRIMER,
15.
X
A
It
-ffi.
Jt
ffl
HE
T
15
A,
ia
-ffi.
IT
T: A
1
A
<v^^v
l,r
US
tt
Jt
, -ffi,
ftr
A.K.1S
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To enjoy oneself to be happy.

Dull of understanding.
4
~%\ f^ 4jf Utterly unversed in affairs.
Hao^-puh^ ton%* si
Hsiang* fuh*
~^f.
ft&
Lu^-viang* ^ ^
'jj
T'ong* s/ii* i/i -/ang* IP]

//rt iu ih-chien $ ft
Are
all alike.
ft Still another matter
127
further.
o^
MANDAKIJS
16.
JL'KIMEH.
XVI.
pel
Sign of the
coverlet,
To
passive.
suffer.
/
.V bridge.
To
time
discuss
To
HIM/
'
Sign of the 1mperative. Interroga-
To
tive particle.
cover ; to conceal.
to talk over.
lead; to guide.
Separate
besides;
extra.
To strike against;
happen
a turn.
A village; a hamlet.
en
Sign of the passive.

to
meet with.
<^M*~V
Again.
Addition
to
besides.
To learn to study.
to
To imitate
To
To
mimic.
endure.
science.
To
receive.
'
^
;Jj
deliberate.
cli'ih-fcii.
Sign of the passive.
Already; Sign
i-i.-hiiiy
country.
;
even;
Scholars
silver
level.
Just.
inside
To
fering
bear sufto suffer.
r//Vo-/x7 Silk
Sorrow
among.
Bitter.
â
i6
schoolroom.
Common.
Within
uLjjasi
hsioh-tâng A school;
to act.
To weigh
to
do
suffer
pcn-Ni. Ability; capacity.
>
To
suffer hardship.
A temple.
To think to ponder. To call to mind.
The
talk
over ; to
^5--
n^
pongee.
ih-tnaeti _//tt'
*(t
idol.
An
suffering.
Passive Voice
How
expressed.
There are several ways of expressing the Passive Voice in

Chinese.
Sometimes no special word is needed as it is contained in
the construction, especially with
x/i'i
and fj{j tih ; at other times
These in turn, vary in their use according
special forms are used.
the one on whom the action terminates is affected by it; as for
The commonest and
example, whether he suffers or is benefited.
most colourless form is |jj? pel.
This is most usual in the South,
1.
'xt
if you wish
to
come out on
endure much
top.
travail.,
MANDAKIN
but
North
the
in
r//wo
|ty
IMM.MKK.
or
r//mo
gfc
largely
in
it
replaces
colloquial use.
/.sv/o
*JJ
jg and r/* >// |lg, more eoiiunoiilv refer to anything
met with or borne of ;m undesirable character, as loss, goffering,
on the other hand points out a person as the
Mcny
injury, etc.
as does jjj ////// in certain connections; r.y.
of
some
favour;
recipient
IJ<> fy
lie was struck l>v a stone; /'" /*<! .\7/>/;-/vo t
$fc /ft
4
N/;ro
mtn
know bv whom
don't
mi
MICH
(<<>
money was taken
that
</'''
%\ ?t
'$
y*ijg>l"
o sheo-ko
have neen injured by him
>'<"
suffered greatly
They
tî-wcn
She received two cash notes
p-">
m T m & it i-
flfc
r
<-h^l>
t'-c
t'a-tin
hu
(ig
^.
:^
ffi
liny-l/ao liaiifj-chanq ch'ien
eâre all recipients of the Saviour's i^race

tiao ('hin-rJni-Wt W-Jluei fg ffi <S JK
ft
fi9
it
hai
f|
\\
J- c,hlng g,
*7
^(WJifi
5!)
o j>n/i cln-t'to
^s Use and
o-nu'n In nicny-
&j-
Force.
2. l-chiny
stronger than "J* //ô used alone, and when
I'u.io often follows it
a
verb
e.y.,
~f
precedes
I have alreadv spoken twice; o i-c.hhu/ xhoh-ko /i(i(/-hu,ci ^jj
is
'
He
has alreadv received the silver;
no
is
fah-ttsi, si-ch
hy
helj) for
i-chiny
Pu
I)(l
3.
it
stands as a
/if to
How
Jx
already ruined
7'?
'|^
mub in
T-
S tt
and where used.
the
at
is
% fi
the beginning
beginning or end of a sentence.

it
usually takes ~J* liao, and is
So used
it
expresses satisfaction or acquiescence.
be
may
variously translated according as it
of the Imperative, or denotes a <jnerv.
Its special
it
sijrn
must be watched and gradually acquired. j^/^^^^^JUÂ^^^^^

It
the business
it,
fnifti
stand
niav
it!
stands at
commonly repeated.
As a final particle
uses
i-chlny lln(/-liao in-tsi
There
When
t'a
is
ennuu'h
Inn,,, t<ii
I
in k'fii shui
f|'
wonder
if
/><> f
Let us g(,;
mv
f|'
is
7, ft
yet
ff /j
you have any
nlnh
r>
son
iii
)><i
it.
Si
boilino-
fxi-l'iaij,
Jg ^.
water?
say
ft $}
am
afrai(I_LioJL
ri-
ni
fg.
no more about
o-fili
jtd-r/itjti,
jfc
nn'ni
There's an end of
a-live
it
x/m//
/mo
jxij tni/i
N.A. Care should be taken in ushiu- the fourth sentence, as it expresses a desire to be rid of a person in the strongest possible manner.
MAISDA1U1S 1MUMER.
Slil
<0<
How
used.
It and
Lesson VIII. was defined as To cause/
'($[,
chiao or
chiao is used to indicate end or purpose ; to denote the
cause or reason, and in some connections to point out the manner
1 ig
of action, (in the South $ G
employed in a similar sense, but
so used it is not heard in the North)
Qiiao {( is most commonly
used and is rather more colloquial tham 'gJ sh'i ; it is often couj)led
with $f hao with no change of meaning e.g.,
You really put me in a difficulty ni chen chiao o mi nan, jjj;
4.
fihi
t'a shoh-hua chiao

ipeaks so as to 'make people angry
ffc jfr jg
Better iioHet ruin go~;puh k'o-i chih t'a ch'ii
pj"
We preach that men may trust the Saviour o-mcn chiang taoII chiao ren k'ao Chiu-diu
ffi f| J |j ^S jj tÂJU^jfc
Give me the money thai I may return Tfome /^ c/j/ien chih o,
chiao o hao huei chia ch'ii Jg g
g
jj [^ fg jj
ren
seny-M
IL
5.
^V e^
and uai are
^J
and
opposites,
^|> u-ai
denoting anything over and
above, or external to something else ; it is specially applied to relatives

through the female branches ; p^J nci has an inclusive sense ; e.g.,
An
outsider
ual(lu]
ren
fy\*
J{.
Jg-
Outside; overplus; t*<ti tti

$|>.
province other than that of the speaker uai seny
An outsider one outside the business uai hang
An expert; 'an insider' ; nci hang j^j fj.
Within; included;
,^
j
^^
tsai nei
and
uai
ptj.
^^
Not included puh tsai nei

The interior of a country; w/
dV
^.
#/
^|
j^
^^^
J^.
^"ITre placed at tlie end of

%[> ling-nai usually at the beginning; e.g.,
That silk is extra; na ch'co-tsi tmai uai $5 $Jp] ^f % *l\*.
The twenty cents is included in the reckoning r'i chioh cli'ien
.man tsai nci
^C
^|
j*j.
The 400^rsir~t^Trot included n(( xi-pdi ch'ien. puh tsai nci
J'sai n^/
^J
tsai
sentences; _J ling or j^
NOTES.
'
Ilsioh-fang JL j% is also used for school.'
are
well
as
as
styled P^
incn-xcng
Pupils
hsioh-seng.
teacher would use the term in speaking to or of his own pupils.
a.
^^
6.
The
found useful
following expressions relating to the country will be

Down in the country t8ai_Jiianj_JttiUi ;jj $!|i "~f
To go
country
c.
to the
hxia ren $$
hsia,
hsiamj_~^
A-
130
country people
lisiany-
MAN.PAK'IN
It is cold
This
is
we must cover with
over and above
met him on the
o-mcn iao kai
o tsai kiai sjiangjfeng-chien
raining heavily to-day chin-t'icn hsiajaî.

have made a mess of this chcc si ni long tih
It is
f><'i.
/"<?.
You
Weigh two
No
Icng,
t'j_cn
dice sin ling-uai lih.
street
a quilt
I'
taels
help for
We must
Let us go
it
p'i_ng ri
mnh
Hang
home
first
puhhao.
/ /
~y*
/?
~^L^^
<*,
iitfah-tsl.
talk the matter over
in-ts'i.
T-
^^^
o-mcn hsien iao shangljj
o wcnjchia^ch'ti pa.
>J^V
Â, o
cJk^
JÛL*-*"
'
i:
hands o_ch ih-ko t'a-tih ta k u. J^jJ^^

have already been insulted by him twice oji-chiitg sheo-ko l a-tih Hang
suffered greatly at his
huei^chli.
The Saviour
suffered that
we might be saved
Chiu-chu sheo k'u chiao o-men
feh chiii.
Idols have no
means
of saving
men
fru-sa
muh
in fah-ts'i chin ren.
He was eaten by a lion. He has been ill for two

Translate:
months, and there is no means of curing him ; I fear he cannot get
He keeps two pigs, three dogs, and also keeps twenty
better.
On the 3rd of the 12th month it snowed heavily; on the
chickens.
It does not thunder in the winter, but in the
4th it rained heavily.
summer. That scholar has great ability his teacher says he will
Dr. Li has opened a hospital outside the city ; he sees
be a doctor.
patients every day ; people come to see him, both from the city and
He writes a prescription and says, Take two doses a
the country.
are
Some
unwilling to take foreign medicine and go to the
day.
The medicine he dispenses
native drug shop to buy native medicine.
When you go out of the city, go straight on ;
is very efficacious
;
II from the
at the
city there is the village of the Chang family
end there is a temple, at the west end there is a school.
You
I think he has already
are there as soon as yon cross the bridge.
The tea-cups and the silk are included; the medicine is
gone.
The capital city of every country is much larger than the
extra.
I cannot think of a plan
can you ? Neither
provincial capital.
That hospital is three storeys high we have no house so
can I.
four
east
He bought the wrong medicine and was

high as that in this city.
Idols
are made by men's hands, and men
in consequence.
injured
place
them
in temples.
Some
are
made
of
wood, others of stone,
They cannot walk, nor speak, nor save men ; to

gold or silver.
The Saviour is able to save our souls ; we
pray to them is useless.
His
all
saving grace and obtain salvation.
accept
may
Writing Exorcise
g E
ft
$ S 8 S I K- 48.
131
(L>~~4
^*$
^*~i
MANDAUIN
READING LESSON XVI.

London.
2.
5.
Jb
/// //7/^'/
Ch'eng* ken*
1
Ching* kiai
6. Shatt!>+
[n]
ffift
3. r7/^r
4.
**!* A
A
Shang* hud*
Lncn* s/io/i l
The last time.

To discuss to talk
22.
about.
$> 'fa
To
clean the streets.
hsia*
i*-nen*
'^*
High
officials.
In person
.1:
|^
^,
House of Commons.
1
7.
T<7 4 fcuaii
8.
Ch
9.
Ren*-chen l 'M 31 Honestly
^c
in*~tsi* %,
L. 28.
This time.
Foundations of city wall.
[E]
ftg ffi
i*-iien*
ft J:
ffi
flT
1.
& % X ft,
"
f i, A A
tB
personally.
faithfully.
132
House
of
Lords and
16
'
&
PL
^ff
35
*fi
A
A
$i
-tn
life
m m
A IN t
m 1
Ts
m*#
*,
r
tt
A 4
1 mA
Â
5t
ft ^ftv-ffi,
-ffi,
*,*
Jt
1.
Iant>*
To have
;)ji.i
Ireatnl
:i
to lay
up on account
sickness.
1
To take the
air ; to cool off.

JR "[.' Below nnderneatli.
to descend.
4. I 'ails' lisia* loh* \i ~p ~& To drop down
to stop.
I.. 24.
5. T'infft-cliii' ff ft To come to a standstill
6. ^v/i,*' ;r;/ ^.
Inexperienced persons straniivrs.
1
7. f.ing;* In
H ffS To guide to lead.
2.
3.
Clt'eiis* Hany jje

Tic;/4 .... ti'-ksiaf
;
133
of
16.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
w*
$J
Wo
/E
*!
T
BS %
fl&
^-
Ê
m 5r& u ^
a
m * m A
M ^
~ M
*
B
"-J
riij
tu* ch'ttau*
2.
C/i uan*-tt*
3.
Hsiu-pu
6.
Luh*m A
JKJi
81
JKJ
ferry boat.
Dry docks
*&
docks.
To
repair.
Zoological gardens.
4. Tong^-uh^ uen* $}} $J
bear.
5. Hsiong* ffi
jl
7.
8.
Lao*-hu*
deer.
^ ft AA tiger.
leopard.
Au
elephant
9. Hsiang* ft
bird
10. Ch*ioh*-mao*
,^
a
snake?.
snake
ii. S/;^? jrE A
2
Glass.
12.
J$
bird?.
/^Wz
13. Ch'ioh* $B
^/A
But
17.
18.
an adversative
iufah-ts'i
To bite.
15. Iao<>
16. Licurpuh* tehl
14.
&
^Tf ?fe
V.
^p
Iv.
particle.
out of
No way
1& S
^^
no means whereby.
Virus
dreadful
23.
A crown.
Knan^-mien*
4
27. Chong*' chia

28. Chcn^-chn^
terrible.
V. 4.
^^
|d ff extremely ugly.
ff gS A throne.
Om*
poison.
An
f//rt.e
24.
4
3
25. /'to? fA / ^J
4
Value
26. C/rz/z
North
Iv. 18.
;
Monkeys.
19. Heo*-tsP
^g Iron wire cage.
20. T*ieA*-uang*-long*
T
intensive applied to things
21. KUCII*" t-g Ver5 .
sive.
22.
in the
6.
j" ^ f^ Very serious

TuWî- Poisonous; poison.
Tuh*-cM
22.
Called cA'angt-cft'ong*
tt
sceptre.
Ornaments
adornments.
be worth. L. 27.
( ffi High-priced
very valuable.
J& Precious stones.
;
to
134
disagreeable or offen
MANDAUIN
17.
3.
Hsiang || Inlaid.
6' s c&itf chPpacP fa
Priceless.
C/i'in-ch'ai 1 $fc ^ Ambassador; Imperial Commissioner.
4.
Ia?-inen*
1.
2.
ftf
P^ Official residence
^w a au*
4
5. /fr;/
ence
I'I;IMFJ{.
till
ffi
-^-
#J
court of law.
Those who attend
to official correspond-
secretaries.
6.
Tang*-ch'ai-tih*
^^
7.
3
C/iu* chiiP I too ft A.
8.
Cheng*'
sh'i*
Chin* chu
9.
An
iE j^
6^J Yamen runners; attendants

T To reside for a long time.
on an
expression used before quotations
chcc* ch'ih*, chin* inch*
cha*
JieA 1
As
'
^ % ft
official.
it is
H%
'
said
%.
He
who goes near to red becomes red he who goes near to ink becomes black
i.e., we are affected by our surroundings, associations, etc.
"
3
titan* IS J* M &
Words are long and paper
10. Hiia 4 cfrang* c/ii
;
short
"
more than can be said.

B li^ Iu the future
R'ih*-hco*
11.
bye and bye.
LESSON XVII
fcl
t<iny
to.
Ought. To be equal
Then. Read tawf.
To
u
regard
as.
With; by;
to.
To pawn.
To give,*
-s7/
so
ofi
-^
.s7mo
idi)(/
mien
JftjiAj
cheat
IdAs
^[*-*j-*^
_^&
to deceive.
surface
front
side.
before.
Personally. X. A.
1
Should
kui
ought.
To
owe.
Flowers
Cotton.
)
'
To
liony
ni
The
Mutual; reciprocal.
>
to beg.
To care; to control.
A tube. X. A.
To burn to heat.
To roast. Fever.
kuau
That which whatsoYêver.

place.
&f
.
I.
j^JL^
To follow. And; with, j

To apply to. ThejieeJ. *"
uh
To redeem to atone
to ransom. <^^3^
fh
To seek; to implore;
^-
*'
\
0,
That
to
spend.y
To
waste.'
MANDARIN
17.
To
(Hit
hack
to
IMJIMKr,'.
to
Ij^n/i
reap. 'Popart with.
wn
ch (uh-men
To
Advan-
Convenient.
To
follow
travel.
won mn.
No ma
Cheap.
to accom-
To
Wb
Forthwith.
pany.
e r
1 1
irrespective of.
p'ien
To
get married
of a
tageous. Then; in
that case.
Read
woman.
of a
Here.
This.
-kphJT* ma rry
follow.
Subsequently.
4
To add
to
to
in-
pien-taiiy
crease.
to gallop
to hiirrv.
That
>/-/*'/
Mutually.
hsiang-kcyi
Concern;
To
8ui-pien
oneself
of-
To
*^rend against.
concern.
Results.
:!
~TC
ffi
Through.
To
this
both.
interest.
Expenditure.
To. oppose.
all.
Fniversal
To
;
as
please
you
like.
foai-ti-hsia
underneath.
understand.
fi
Everywhere
Before
in the
presence
r^Âho w
/x,
op])ortune.
;
To run
Convenient
Concurrence
"
of.
expressed
1. Numerical order is usually indicated by

Some exceptions were noticed in Lesson V.
ti
before numbers.
Section
'2
other
For instance, in the

additional exceptions are also herewith given.
of events, or narration of them in regular sequence
recapitulation
such expressions being the equivalent of
Jg ti is not required
;
phrases
one Jiancl
last
like
;
'(hi
may
phrase
Oiu. the
place'; 'In the jiext place';
the other hand
Both .... .ând ; ' êtc.
This
In the
first
'
'
either
indicate
Jli t^cn</
:
/f
/'//
pith
mail
IK'
HI
simultaneous action
6, the
the enumeration of events.
;
c,
in
most
those
;
]g|
similar applications.
used
commonly
ilwnicn
ih-jticn
in
;
The
this
^^
ti/i
(/dined, no,- to the *n
f'/'cri
136
in/
cndu fctiî
>)
f/
(/
ii>if/
it.
\\
monev
ft
the
a
in k<nn/-ln
in nli
the second place no
in
in chîcn
i/nt/i
/v-/x'o/y
'
te* a- '-X -^v^l^^

and unable
mr\viIliiuF~nr the
~ place,
/P H*, II /f tb{&
place
fi-i,,;
-w
second
;-&&*
K7
He
Jj^
the doctor had no ability

first
and in the second
|>lace
medicine was of no value; th-lai /-XOK/ mn/i in
;/,
puh /;/
That child cries
15 IB
K',/, // liiih m'lif/
the
the
in the
lirst
is
Hi fitih
In
fe
have no time, and
place
*' x.*, t; it
lie
t'<t
lirst
ili-t *(')!*
11
Hi 98- <n>
preaches as he ôes
*,
Mr. Li
ili-inicn /xro, 'ih-mn'n
f'<r
ft
both wealth and land
lias
Li hsien-seng
in ch'iwi in
how
Result of Actions:
The
2.
eft'ect
indicated.
or result of an action which
is
commonly
indicated
'
English by such words as through/ by/ etc., as He lost his sunlit
through lightning/ is expressed in Chinese by a verb followed by an
adjective or any word that does duty for it, without anything special
to shew instrumentality
i.e., the verb shews the cause, the word
'
'
in
following, the effect; cj/.,

He is blind through crying;
t'ft-ti/t
icn-rliinf/
k'uh
huai-liao
IR II 51
7;
M.v clothes are dirty through being hung up
'Fhis
j)air
of
shoes
is
ruined
o-tili
by wear; ehce-skii&ng
'
ch'uan huai-Kao JS '1
^S
7- ^r-^C
'
Relation and Lack of Relation.
I:>t<>
i-xhattf/
hsicd-ts?
^
>
Idiomatic phrases which express lack of relation, such as No

matter'; 'Just as you like'; etc. scarcely fall under any welldefined grammatical rule.
Generally speaking they convey the idea
of unconcern and lack of interest, or else indicate a careless assent
'
3.
in
view
of
The subjoined
something to follow.
to express these ideas

I
don't care; n jjn/i l;n<in
expressions are used
Never mind who
it
^^J/gJirncn xA? .///// (or na-ih-ko)
is; j>nh
IS- fi).
matter what vou sav, he
unwilling
t'a Mu-M puh k'en
fofc ffife j$ gj, fo
II. C>v
Xo
*hh,
is
Just as yon like about going

'
talks (juite beside the
hua
faftgXfa^to
It has nothing to
mark
n-
do with me
137
eh'ii
puh
/'<7
ehcv
&
ni
%%
u-hicii
1*<'i\-ii\o
g ^ -f
oh'ii sui ni-ti/t j>ien
shoh hsic puJi hxknig
^ ^ ^^
;
ii
o a ktcn
'
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Take no
him whatever he says
notice of
/w7/
urn
x/io/
f'tt
mopuk&ao\li
On
in
other hand
tn~e
the
'
English by 'mutual
idea
'
reciprocal
before a verb
such as
of relationship,
^^^^
or by g j^ jji-Wi e.y.
This has to do with him chef x? u f'fi in hx'uinq kan
^0
hftifnif/
ft
# ft
denoted
is
usually indicated
etc., is
Jft
by.,/.
^M
Tmeet here to-day; O-IDOI chin-t (ien tn tsai-chcv-li hsicing

*i t-s
'*
one another; 'pi-t8 ci hsfa-ng <ti fy $fc ^0 ^.
\\ e all
=r
*S>>
The
4.
the verb
^/f
Relative Pronoun
the
the clause;
lish after it
its
i.e.,
we;
o-'incn,
r
used in a relative clause, precedes

dependent standing at the end of
before the noun, and not as in Eng-
it
is
position
is
(?.//.,
nidi-tilt shit-
-so
^ xo
noun on which
The books which we

men
a Relative Pronoun.
as
ffi ffi
read
$f
is,
The we which read books
^^^
x////,
'
o-
the books; xo, which
nicn, read.
Fhe doctrine which we preach

e flowers that he
bought
f<<7
o-inen xo chiang-tih tao-Ii

xo nuu-ti/i liua
fy
Pjf
ifjj
jf^
g ^
The words that were spoken xo Îtoh-tih htw JJf'fJfc fi^fS^

The men that came; xo lai-tih ren PJf ?fc
A;
f\
It
mv
is
'
~^^
^j-
has
business to do it; cfuv
xJi'j^TTxfrlTFnT/' JHI n
which
an inclusive sense,
iTTso
is
till
x?
^J
emphasized by the
hi ; e.y.,
addition of
All the things that I have
The whole
of his
money
'
^ ai?f/
T
o so-iu-tih
is
here
tong-lm
fa. xo-iu-tih
Some uses
c]\
'
e n~fn~~tsa i-cli < v-
of.
a very difficult word to use, and a beginner is apt to

5. Tang *jj*
be dazed by the various meanings it takes on in various connections.
is
It
be helpful to consider here three of its principal uses

stonjs_JQr_jvhat is, in the nature of things, nttmgôx right.
Thus used it sometimes stands alone, and at other times has Jfc pen
may
It
a.
kai joined to
or f$
You should
it
e.g.,
act in this
way; kai-tang chce-Jang
You have no right to curse him

It
r
b.
is
fo stand for
Take,
value
properly
for
t'a
;
'
my
duty
^''^f^^'U^fT-
ni ptili t<in<j IIKI t'a

ifc^^jjj) $L'tQ
o j>en-t(tii(/ x//o// ch(^~7\ua
to say this
to represent
to regard as.
exani])le, the sentence

na ch'ien puh tanfr vh'ien
:
He
regards
iom/
money
=^ $&
/(*
as
of
no
'm $jt j$
',
'
J-
MAM) A IMS 1MMMKU.

lie;
/v/,
/.<-.,
?'<//,
/f/m/, MS though
else
anvthing
it
uses; m', introducing object ; r//

did not stand in the place of
than)
chîeii,
was trap.
thought
Will von kindly pawn
money
(/.r.,
as
~~f
\^
',-
me
t3
He makes
t^t
ch'ni-tih
i>
uhang tang pû-tsi shun
/'"
pledge;
in
///
"j.niwn
fg Wih-chang tn<j p'ia&fatjfy-*
of
cannot
was
f/
In-fali
olav
fS
Jfi
(
(tanff-4 ien
'
ill;
c//'/V,
tut-ko) tang-flc'eo) o in-litio /"''/ (MS f@)
teacher;
Chang
hsien-wng
Idiomatic use
of.
in addition to its primary meaning of 'to follow/ Jj| ken has

a few idiomatic uses with which one needs to be familiar; c.//.,
I
studied Mandarin under Mr. Hai o ken (or f* onf/)
or
6.
'
He
learned
how
to calculate
from Mr. Li
feJR ^ ^ JL^
with Mr. Li to Peking
^ Jg ^ ^ J:
hxioh 8uan-fah
I
Mug
^vellt
r/,',7
3fc
They applied
for
7.
going to some trouble;
ken L!
/>/ liNicii-xeiu/ i$han</
/.v//
/'eh-
gfe.
it
f'-a-men
ken
f'<t
'mo ch'-icn
How
used.
f.//.,
troublesome Jet x>

jj^.
no end
trouble on his account
o|
;
the idea of putting one self about; or of
put mvself to
t'afei-ttao to-sJwo *ifo ^J Jtjfj
I
'/r/
effort
/'//
<"
^j carries with
To expend
mojiev^
:
/'''/
j*.
^fc
him
to
'
dw
fit
7.
5 >
J
Q ^
;
Ipnh cAinfao
V
^
.s> chen
troublesome affair;
Jei fih jg
J^
;/J.
^'ou have put yourself about for me
hxien-x<'H</~uei o fei-liao
rhis
is
fc-
^ô
'
j-
-.,
acting in the capacity of a
is
^ ^ RpJ,
^JL ^^^
'J^
and return on the same
)a*7-.
Chang
iltt
to serve in the capacity of.
i>'o
time
tliiit
^q ^n^/ H/tcH-mo rai
/NO chen-tihj chcti-tih tanfj /NO chia-tili
At
/>^
shang t'anh~ktytang
the false stand for the true, the true for the false;
tn</
At the time
You
,>
o chin-t'ien
it A.
W tAA4Â'-fi^
A
ticket
c.
itf/J
~9*&~i
*t-
IE ft
nJ*^t
to/IM/ko fa
C/I'IIH/ ni chili o
3- 55
fsjt\\liom do von take him to be?
fi;
^,
t*
f Mby *him*to-day
tt
was taken
y>//A
were
this for
ait**(fflg;
He has "-one to redeem
''<'
it
(ty
fjjj
it
'.'/
if
have fallen into his trap

*h(nif/-/i<io, have
o,
what stood in the place of what
Or,
money.
n a/iang-licio tî-tih t<tn</ ft

gone into /V/-//A, his /<n*<y,
'/o/,
'
MAXDAK1X
by the word 'expenses/ the word
the cause of the expense immediately preceding- it; e.y.,
fd-iouy ta JftjJ or Uj $);/.
expenses are heavy; iouf^fe!
It
often be translated
may
wliicli indicates
The
The expense
was considerable
of cart hi^*e
cli'tv^fci
pu/iJisiao
Mis father
a
NOTES.
composed
400 cash
o'a veil in i
*>
a.
Wi
ch'ien
y>r/<
As a X. A.,
chim f^.
for travelling expenses;
d-fih
lu-fcl
no
fj\
refers to a
block of buildings
of several
Lcxxon
[See
A'AVA'.]
LANKous EXAM PI, KS.

He
God nor man
I'a ih
puh p
j|
puh p'a
fa]
a shen, ri
This is very inconvenient chcc hoi pith pi en -tang.
He has gone on a long journe)* fa ch uh Hen men.
fears neither
yen.
expression generally understood ? chfc-chii luia fong-hsiug puh fonghsing /

They were burnt to death t'a-nien shao si /iao.
How ninch do you owe him? ;//' kai fa fo-shao (fi'ieii .'
Add a little more tsai cliia slicing i/i-tien.
He cannot manage that child fa knan pii/i clwh na-ko hai-tsi.
They prayed for rain but in vain f'ci-Dioi c/i'in it cliîu puh /isia-lai.
He spent a great deal of money t'a hita ch'icn puh shao.
u-lucn tscn-ino-iang o iao ch'n.
I am going whether or no
mai chcc-ko chiu shang-liao tang.
I was taken in when I bought this
The Saviour redeemed us from sin C/iin-chin uci o-iiien s/in/t tsni.
From whom did you learn Mandarin? Just as he
Tr<niM/(itc:
Is this
It is
likes; (if) he comes well and good
(if) he does not very well.
the books are difficult, to
a troublesome business learning English
read ; the words are difficult to write, but come what may I will
;
No
matter whether they were lions or tigers he did not

teacher struck the scholar a blow and destroyed
What he does, does not agree with what he says.
one of his eves.
That coolie carried my box and spoilt it in the carriage. On the one
hand he talks unreasonably, and on the other, he curses as soon as he
He learnt to use the abacus
opens his mouth take no notice of him.
No matter what he does, I cannot keep up with
from Mr. Chang.
him. Follow me. My heel is injured. I took him for a doctor, but
That man named Li is very poor on the (>th
I
mistook my man.
learn
it.
fear them.
The
of last
now
month he went
that the weather
the
to
is
pawn shop and pawned
cold he wants to redeem
it
a garment;
and cannot, and
This matter has

cannot think of a plan you think of one for him.
I
have
nothing to do with me; I cannot look after his business.
to
do
for
it
will
How
been taken in by him twice.
go with
you
me? He owes you Tls. '2 l why don't you apply to him for them?
I did so yesterday, and he said it was not convenient to repay it just
to (Jod, lie will
now, but he would see later on.
(If) we pray
More than 1,SOO years ago the Saviour died for
hear our prayer.
us on the cross in order to redeem us from sin
grace such as this is
;
higher than the heavens, bcvond the thought of man.
Writing Kxemse:
ft ft
I
10
&
if.
17
READING LESSON
XVII.
The Unwary Youth
1.
P-lai"1 ]^
used alone
2.
3.
ig
Chang
This expression follows some reference to time and
5i
-\- Jgj
]^
7fc
To observe
S/ico 3 %f
-ch'eng*
For some twenty years

to keep.
L.
Procedure
|M
is
not
26.
policy
past.
set
of
rules
regulations.
V. 6.
To abolish
4. Pel* }j&
5.
A\z// 4 chong*
6.
//$/ hsioh
7.
8.
AW/ 2
Sunn
uh"1
%jf
i5j
to
To
do away with.
attach importance to
to emphasize.
Western learning.
!;
Natural science.
ife 9fa
^ ^ Mathematics arithmetic.
Kitang hsioh ^ ^ Light as a scientific study.
Hita* hsioh
^ Chemistry.
hsioh
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
since
ward,
ft;
Tai*-su* ft
Hsioh-nen
'/>/
[^
ffc
/5'o//(,'-
used
is
fj
Algebra.
fo'j
Learning; education.
....
&
^ and
'
/-//^
{&
fi
with
in correlation
JU
From ....
^j.
Hij=froin
till
afterwards
.... hencefor-
etc.
3
14. Art/
15.
7//
Bic
To
alter
to
nicifi petti* tsai*
- E
16. 7/z 1 tn*-tsi tih
change.
-
91
4
!$
"^
^ year
bellyful
or thereabouts.
:
the belly
Chinese as the repository of knowledge.

17. Tien-fen Vc ^- Natural endowment or gift
it>.
Hsioh
19.
Keng fink ioug
tao hao-ch' it %$
slioli
5|l]
%_
%f $L
J]]
To study
ffi
It is
141
to
is
regarded by the
'parts.'
good purpose.
quite needless to say.
MA XL) AKIN PIUMEK.
17.
1.
r
/^//.4
kong-fu
difference of usage,
2.
Tuen*
.^c
Blunt
|i
}\\
dull-witted.
3.
Mo*
4.
J/// 4 ;// 4 /w* *& "^
To rub
Note
as study.
3^ To give time to to work at
beiug applied both to time and to work.
to sharpen.
No
fnj
resource
no help
for
it.
ft Japan.
5.
A'i/i-pen
6.
ran* pîng*
7.
Litau* iao* litau* A siting*
ts'u*
^$
Half a bottle of vinegar.
IS&
!.
}^.
|[ $$
When
violently shaken
makes
violent noise.
8. Client? ping* s/n* pan* lieu*
puli^ hsiang* *&
bottle doesn't make the slightest sound.
9.
To
/"iao 1 ;^
Hsien* nei*M. j$
11.
C/iHatig
12.
U*-c/iie)i 4
^^
Lang*
Waves.
13.
man*
'
}j
14.
(.'eni-taiif*
15.
Fan* pith*
16.
7^z
17.
7'wo 1
It
4
j]gf
Jg
hi niin-
Vd'
Steady
^^
full
"ft
He Fully laden.
to
happen.
firm.
Will not turn over.
vSelf-opiniouated.
To meet with
s/ii/i
differs
^ %&
# ^ M ^ To
f
ii
ffi
To meet with
things disagreeable or distasteful.

18. /'//// iao chicn kuai /p 3?
19.
%h
appears to be.
liao* tsai*
liao* fc
5//i ^1 j[|
'-
float.
to.
$&
from }^
Q. in
that
applied to
it is
Don't be offended.
have a name without reality
142
sham.
MANhAIMN
17
I'lMMKK.
&
ffir
^ IE ft S IS
m m m wm
^T
m,
-t3-,
Ff
-T*
Tihc
IB
1ft
-ft
B* T,
"crfr
>11A
,-ft' \
/ ///// ch'i-tao *M
3.
C7/#4 ch'uan
4.
Ping
tao
Hao
^f}
ffi
$\
Was
T,,5ft
terms.
^1 it Still ignorant of the fact that,

sea sick.
Laid prostrate by sickness.
143
/I
MANDARIN PRIMER.
17.
~'ft
* 7 ft
* to .a
,S A, IB
X 7R, H -
It'
'
ffi
n &
-^"^r
fi
Ifc
$J
$J
m
c .^
is
1.
f >?' ;/#//
2.
CX/^z- //tf/
nothing
but.
j$
|f|
.v//7
To be
connection=This
is
after all
Lao
4.
Ren* puh*
5.
T'ong -cltfuan
6.
O-iih niaiig* a
^ 5^ Heaven
chii*
^ ^\
tih ren
|s]
ftty
7.
lao ....
8. /,//! $H
9.
this
Providence.
I'nable to restrain
ftfi
fiij
pnj
Oh
as feelings, etc.
Fellow-passengers.
my mother Chinese
!
out for their mothers when in distress.
3.
t'icn
in difficulties.
jg jg J^ In this
ming | ....
fir
To take one's
life.
final particle.
Tong*-t-ing* hn*
H&
JiW
'i'
ne Tongting lake in Hunan.
144
commonly
call
18.
XVIII
LESSON
~>v>~**
J _^-~-*
To
TO pour
n-.
I I j
Read
Tofall over.
,
oJLtr^J-'
connect.^ Includ-
out.
)n the
Tail
)
f
<
__
animal.
^jJ^r^
(
^contrary
but.
iii<t-f e<>
rig-
i^-vT,) influence; to affect. To thank.

of.
Other.
Self; personal.
From.
the side
By
Self
>5
*"
To
be
even
m-uei
l
\
<l
kan-t&ng
past.
in
cause.
positions
by
of.
Al-
nearly;
not far out.
/^
^
fli
most;
j<>v.
the side
/i'(/-jjii/i-to
and adverbs.
Pleasure
/>*/'
Spirit.
influence;
to move.
the side
^-^
To
By
By with. To regard as.

Forms part of some pre-
,The Holy
Because;
in conse([uence of.
PI 3
(ineue.
-^
sign of the
so.
Because.
it
if.
Yes. Still; nevertheon the other hand.

less
Since.
of.
being
A
;
fond
Since;
supposing.
nough
'
huan-Jisi Pleased with;
must;
like.
own.
Therefore
lecessary.
<'li
if.
self.
^jjj^y;
,4
even
lg
wharf;
hence.
Private
If
jetty;
Although
Naturally.
)-
an
of
t /
Pronoun ttX-c/K @
Reflexive
t^j-ch! may be added to pronouns in
1. The word g
Chinese,
like the word 'self in English, and with the same force; viz.,
either to impart emphasis, as, I myself; or to shew that the action
hurt myself.
is turned back upon the agent, as,
Ch'in
and
with
used
the
same
but
are
also
differ
from
meaning,
7J
in that they have no possessive form; cj/.,
-
"
if?
ffi
Py Hf Sf
^Ûx^/0 ^Lâ
j^
>f
/x
A^^tt*,
CU> ">uo-<'
^^ home
if
is
pleasant all the time;
irujj/cdNfiitf
/ 14
^>-^^
^^
-UU^
U>**^v^_^,
^X^VVAJL'
fr*
MANDARIN PRIMER.
(^3
'
'.,-.
I wrote this myself ; ehce sh'i o oh'in-ts'i hsie till

He saw it with his own eyes; t'(t ch'hi-ien. k'an-chicn
I struck him with my own hand ; och'in-shco ta t a
I myself am also sick o pen-dim ic hai fthu/ ffi
l
^ 4 ^ $f
Myself;
Thyself;
HI
Himself;
fa
own
My
o)
-ft)
?-^
>
chi-fo
>
tor
^^|
.jft;
.)
2, and so with the plural forms.
>
ni
Thine own
His own
>
J|>
/-s
Either ... or
w ^^
6^ an(l so
Neither
the plural forms.
nor.
Sentences containing correlative phrases, i.e., introduced by

" "
nor " " both
and " are variously
neither
or
;
1m i JJ, or
Sometimes a Cliinese (equivalent hai
translated.
2.
" either
ie
jfa
understood
Is
ie
is
used, at other times
it
it
*h'i
sh'i t'a ?
ou?
or did
Did YOU do
He
it
it,
then^
or did
worships neither
puh pai p
omitted as being ôbviously
is
,s/iz t'
^xhoh-tih
J| ^.
fj;
slri
.FRWIf lie did not say
n^
e.y.,
i?a
id
you or he?
it
you did;
he? hai
God
sh'i
Supposition
)ii
^^
how
dri
fa xhoh-tih
fao-tih,
nor idols; fa
^^
3$ J: ^,
fy
Neither has he much ability; fa
Ur-sa
jttth
3$
ie
ni *hoh-tih
eJiiu-sh'i
hai shi ta ho-tili?
[>uh
pal Shang-4i
^ g.shen-ino
ie nnili
in
jten-s'i
ie
fy
expressed.
3. Sentences indicating suppo^tim^rcowd^tion are formed by

?o or
roh or
pith
-g roh-tth'i ;A)y
yaomi ; and by ^p
('liiti-wi'i followed
the
sh'i
by
corresponding correlative
^
g
^^
gt chiu, 4
SS /"HJ, and some others.
roh shall be used alone or
whether
.
'
i>e
^g
usually decides
the addition of
.s7/t
Euphony
>
not,
One of the things that makes good

does not affect the meaning.
correlative conjunctions
Chinese is the right use of suitable words
but as usage is the thing
to express the relation between sentences
that decides, it is difficult to lay down any definite rules, save to
c Jire
point out that jgfc chin and
amtmg the commonest
;
'
connectives.
The
roh has been left to this Lesson, as it

consideration of p}
a fault of beginners to use it too freely.
Supposition is very
frequently implied rather than expressed ; the use of jjfc ehiu or
the ' turn
of the sentence
ie at the beginning of the second part
is
'
146
MANDAIMN
Jg
I'lIIMKh'.
As between -%j roh and |g 'mo

being jjujlieient to indicate it.
/<>/>
roll,
usage prefers ^JJ iao rather than
being
somewhat bookish r.r/.,
sec Jiini I will tell yon; n ro/i k'nn-c/ncH t'a chin kno-xn
If
collotjuial
&*.&
a&
von want
*hada not
$
&*
If
it
it
it
x/ri
If
jmh
IIKI
If
to
it
von;
///
roh tao
<>
chin
<-hih
in
ffc-
been yon that said

t'ih o dihi
i>uh
it,
should not have, believed
ni x/ioh
\roh)puh
If you-Avjsh to
will give
o-o,
well and
hMnfjjffi&ifcftffiftlfc^lg.
Li'ood
mronjiao
<'h'H ic k'o-i fj;

.
he had not cursed me, shunhL I have struck Ium''l(rphj8hyt (a

hoi <(/ t,i Va mo
o,
Jg -JJ, -JJ jg fg iTfil
/fe^lfifc
s
<>
it
not Mr. Li then
is
Mr. (.'hang;
is
ir
/>"/'
Imien-
/>/
'//>
*<'
Ch -ran
Sui ran
%$ and
Qfc
SI
$.
w/ are used with or without $ m/f, but such

and
4.
|5E
The addition
a use is in most cases more bookish than colloquial.
xh'i forms a style half bookish and half colloquial, but its use
of
is conditioned by considerations of rytlim and force.
Chj-ran |J
forms the Perfect Participle and may be translated, having';
it is followed
'inasmuch as/ etc.
'since'
by a principal verb, and
ro/i takes
like
$ chin, j^ /V, or jj /man as required. Hni-mn $fc
Chi
|jj(f
'
^J5
âddition
in
to
these
takes
Although he
hsiao
is
he
unfilial,
t'a lia! *hi t'a
as an adversative particle
rh ioh
^]>
introducing the answering clause;
e.r/.,
still
is
his father's son; stii-ran t'a
ri-tx'i
fn-ch'in-tih
Jf|
flji
4h
sf:
.g.
""Though there is not much, still it is enough sin-ran puh to,

hnan k'o-i ftuan kco-Uao jfe
^, jg pf J^ g[ f]J y.
Although he gets angry, he is a good man mi-run t'a seng;
^^
cA>/ t'a ch'io/t
t*o
Since it
k<>n-mo
A-o
is his,
7;ao ren
S| gg
jjfc
^ftjfc_î
? clii ski
what do you want with

'
it
IB SF
A-
t'a-ti/i
ni iao
Adversative Conjunction
In the sentence,
He was a good man; bat he was not
the word but ' serves the purpose of
esteemed
carrying the mind
to something, the contrary of what we should have
The
expected.
conclusion we should naturally draw from the first sentence he was
a good man/ would be that the people would esteem him ;
but '
'
5.
'
'
'
'
points out that in this case the natural conclusion does not follow.
Such is the force of the word tao glj.
It thus carries its
original
of
To
turn
down
the
meaning
upside
thought or the conclusion
'
'
147
18.
Nl
A N )A -K-I -N
-
J'Kl
MEK.
we should draw, is as it were 'overturned' by its

Yet
Nevertheless
may translate it by But
'
'
'
'
hand'
'At the same time'
second
sentence
or
When
precedes.
generally follows
He
clause
or
in
'
;
On
the other
any word or phrase that places the

some kind of opposition to what
such opposition
it
Hence we
use.
'
of a favourable character,
is
ie
jfa
e.g.,
t'c hen eh t
very poor, but what he savs is correct
iong)
t'a-tihlnut
tac^hoh-teJ, puhô ffe fa jjf, flfc ffy J &($)! '& T> $tThough he has ability, he has made a mess of this matter ; suiran l'(t in i>cn-M ; chce-chien *? t'a tao tso-teJi puh-hao '$ %% fjji,
is
:1 ft
* ft
fit
7^
n*#
Compulsion expressed by pih

Pih-
6.
/ô or
#e/?
the latter being more common in the North.

At times
the
more
denotes
future
but
'obliation'
form,
usually
strengthens
joined to
it
not often used alone, but has cither
is
jJJ
ijfc.
it,
^^
tL^
necesaite^^flbfiJike
You must go
'<&
nifyititehjch'u
You must put this matter through quickly c/tte-chien
'
compulsion
<
^$
s'i
pan J| ft
NOTKS.
7>/r/^
rr.
5^
if
fo ,% iJ ft
is
joined with
as a correlative
t<ii
e.g.,
Including both the cows and the horses -f/icti. nh< t<t,i nin
JE.j
-^
//A when used in the
in colloquial usage taRes
6. P'any
sense of other
<v/.,
'
'
T]iis
is
othci'
people's business; c/m: xhi J>'<UK/
t'cn
tlJi
>ii
* A^*Nothing
c.
else; simply this
Huan-hsi
is
j|
Ijjjfc
/^/^
p'ang-tih, chiu
-s///
often reversed
without
sfii
^^
chce-ko
altering
the
meaning.
[See Lesson
XXX."]
'pj
/He has broken the law fa fan -liao fah. /

His disease has recurred t'a-tih ping fan liao.
He is nearly dead t'a ch'a-puh-to s'i liao.
He is engaged and therefore cannot come t a in si so-i pnJi ncng lai.
Pour out the water tao shtii.
They could not go, because they had no money t 'a-nien pnh neng ch'il in-uei
;
muh
in ch'icn.
To plait the queue ta pien-ts'i.
To-day Jthe Li family have an occasion of rejoicing chin-t'ien Li chia iu
hsi si. ^vuaJLAA^-jj^
He was very pleased to get that letter t a hen huan-hsi
Go to the jetty and hire a boat k'o-i shang ina-t'co ch'ii, kn (or cniao] ch'uan.
He was influenced by the Holy Spirit; t'a pel Shcn-ling kan-tong.
;
We
have
all
broken God's law
o-ineii
tufan-liao S/iang-f i-ti/ifa/i.
148
MAM>AK1N
Trans/die-
unwilling.
the pencils
What
that by the side of the tree ? Is it cot a cup ?

-o himself,
his elder brother
to
was
both
and paper, it cost f00 cash
books
Including
Von must tell him to come and see
were additional.
:
he
Although
I'KIMKK.
was
is
willing
Infuse and brill" a pot of hot tea; and also pour

The wall has fallen down.
out a cup of cold water and bring it.
come
and
tell
cheats
If he
me; he does nothing but
you, you
If he does
If the teacher knows he will punish you.
cheat people.
not repay you, I will.
Although he has money he is a bad man.
me
to-morrow.
are you unwilling?

Since you did
know, because 1 heard Mr. Li say it.
Although you cannot control his affairs still you should have said a
believe it.
Since lie said it,
few words to him.
Although this
When he was
affair has nothing to do with me, I must go and see.
on his journey he saw a lion a long way off; he was afraid in
Though this is a troublesome
consequence and ran back to the inn.
do
it.
It is now Spring, and the flowers are
will
still
I
affair,
open.
Because it was troubleIf you did not do it, your elder brother did.
some to have his queue plaited every week he therefore cut it off.
If God had not sent the Saviour to die for us, we should have no
way of being saved. The Holy Spirit came down from heaven that
He might influence meiis' hearts and cause them to believe and
Inasmuch as the Saviour has come shall we not
trust the Saviour.
Inasmuch
not see
as he
is
why
willing
how do you know?
believe in
Him ?
Writing Exercise:
ft
READING LESSON
fj
%&^
XVIII.
R. 132;
R. 39.
The Unwary Youth
II
'
1.
A''
u ch'ing i'V t& Bitter matters 'bitterness trouble.

Is often used as here to add empliasis=' as a matter of
;
2. I'eii-fc
See below 4c ^.
3. Ih-ih-tih
4.
Ts'ai ken
'
$] One by one'; in detail.

f& Cabbage" stalk.
149
fact.'
MANDARIN PEIMEE.
18.
A&
1.
2.
3.
T
ft
Pa-liao pa-liao gg T | T There is an end of it that is enough

Seng si ?f !$ To save trouble to economize labour.
Tang shah chu tih $ $ ffi ^ Was a butcher; plied the trade of a
!
butcher.
5.
K'ao .... cWih-fan

Zf;/- .... ^/^^ fij|
6.
/*//
4.
|&
.
..." n
tfc
Got a living by. . .

receive instruction to be taught by.
It is needless to make any distinction.
.
fig
To
pihfen pi-ts'i ~fr >$ ft f8t ]!t

Tu pi en-tang $1 f$ ^ All satisfactory.
so as to
would be
8. 7VA ft As used here==tip to the point of
f
used in some districts. See Revised Version (Mandarin), Acts, xiv, I. and
?
7.
>
below M. ft to
'X *|.
9. Hsin hua tu k'ai
'
<t>
if
|f[5
|>3
All the flowers of the heart
ly elated.
150
open
'
great-
,-tfi,
HKH*!
^m- A,
1.
CM hsin
A'W ^
tih ^p fo
ftty
Intimate.
May refer to me.

lu fuh Pong hsiang, iu fru I'ong tang
share happiness and grief together.
2.
n7 JU fH^
fj^
3.
HS
4.
.SV?;/
5.
TV 1 f& Low.
?^
Three or four
Hn
7.
Nan-k'au
8.
O-tih shen-nw si
9.
Uen-tao
5g
10.
Tsai san
11.
CA
12.
Hsiang
a small
ffl
Jgj
^ We will
group,
To lower.
6.
PI
Awry
lopsided.
M W Ugly.
^^
jfj.
in*-iten* $t
fltj
Something or the other about me.
Asked.
Repeatedly.
PBJ
cfri-lai
To enquire of
~'& To call
to entreat.
to
151
remembrance.
MANDARIN
18.
fo
A,
5:
-a
I'KIMKK.
w%
*A
Could not wait to go down.

/<?// Sisia ch'ii *g
f^ ~f*
neither one thing nor the other.
ffc A monstrosity
hsiang
1R & 3c ilil So that they laughed at
3. .SViz Va-men kcng hsiao fa f^
hi in the more.
~fc ^ /J^ A 31^ The great man does
4. Ta rt'fi pn/i chien hsiao ren ko ^c
v
not notice the offence of the one beneath him.
k'an liao fiao jfi
^. ff /J- 7, /J- ']/ ^f
5. Pa ta si k'an hsiao liao, hsiao si
7 7 Regard great matters (of offence) as trifles; and small matters as
already settled. L. 22.
lai
~fc & .... %$. Unable to distinguish.
6. A' au pith ch'nh
-^ If not .... then.
7. Puh-sh'i .... chiu-sh'i
To speak of nothing else
8. Pnh shoh p'ang-tih ~ft
simply
fiij
to mention.
1.
7>;/- />//
2. .S7/>/^//
'ftfc
9.
10.
^
%^
^^
Jfc
Nan
teh $$ f^ Difficult to meet with, or find.

Chetfi-cheng* m. IE Really truly.
;
152
To complete; to perTo succeed. A tenth.
ch'eng
&
en
Everywhere
To
To
promise.
allow. Perhaps,
tlic
whole,
To
fix
to decide.
Decidedly; certainly,
for the
forgive; to par(lon ; to overlook.
Custom; usage;
regulations.
n*\
to permit.
lie
Living;
lively.
Moveable. An occupation.
to grant ;
lioh
Exactly;
titiy-kiiei
Lest.
7>o
Goods
sound
L
hs
'
HI
)
'
,4
^
To
shu
cargo.
tone
the Gospel.
rao-sJni
k f ong-p la
p|
3A
Lest
perAVhat if.
;
haps.
1
k eo-in
Accent;
'
ai-ia Indeed
to
4
repeat. Again.
ta-kai
k'o-hsihAlas
yet
a tomb.
Briefly
Completion as expressed by ?/#u
The
dear
How sad
not.
grave
Oh
Generally ;
probably.
A grave.
Not
pro-
nunciation.
forgive; to excuse.
retui'n
to
overlook.
To regard to love.
To be spar in Q; of.
To
To pardon;
pronunciation.
X^
.1
*
Fearful;
wares
summary.
Fixed; decided.
Many
apprehensive.
little.
a large
;
number.
Happy sound
hsu-to
verse about.
k'ong
Slightly;
certainly.
chat ; to con-
To
fan
wait.
To allow
ji_mwy.
All.
b.
To
inai
rave-stone.
tone tablet.
fect.
ch'eng
jjfc
slightly.
and
certain actions such as success, or failure ;

or
completion,
non-completion ; may be expressed in a variety of
ways, the more common perhaps being by a verb and an adverb ; as,
Carried through successfully/
In some cases however, one verb
1.
results of
'
may
its
follow another, as
<
To make
counterpart in Chinese,
when
This latter form has

complete.
the verbs uan ^, ch'eng jjfc, and
^V^
ft
Vj
$&&A
The instructor leads
ptitude rests with the inrUi'idnal.

'
153
,
'
to the
door but
MANDARIN PRIMER.
ting
prefixed
order '
follow
*Q?,
another verb.
Tiny
may in certain
thus answering to such an English expression as,
cases
Made
'
be
to
e.g.,
This was made to order; chcv xh'i tiny txo-tih j^f jg- g? ffi
The bargain is completed; ch ia-cli'ien chlang-ting-liao fj
fj-fj.
'j^
& T-
When we
|^
have finished reading, we will go down nien uan*

fe
IF* ft fl W'. 1
ifeshuh-tsui-iih -s? ((so) ch'eng-liao
Redemptionjisâccomplished
;
o-men
liao shu,
%T
k'o-i hsia-ch'u
He
could not uo it; t'a teo

puh-cjfievig fy fii /? )&
will not hold all; ih-$wj hxlang-tsi ckaang puh-uan
One box
Probability.
There are several words used
in Chinese to express the idea of

in English by 'most likely';
are
indicated
such
as
probability/
the commonest are
'in
all
likelihood
etc.,
;
seemingly
Hsiang ?g hsii |^ ie-hsii jfo |^ hxlany-pih ?g ^J k'ong-p'a
2.
'
'
'
tfi
fo--p<
%^
jHsu
and /e-/i.sv'i
|^ are more widely used in the North
than in the South, where g: fg k ony-p a, largely does duty for both.
In the North Jg f^ k'ong-p'a usually carries its original meaning of
'
being largely absent.
apprehension ', the idea of
probability
are in current use in most parts e.g.,
Hsiang $J and hslang-pih
I think he can read ; o hskntg t a xh'ih-lx'i 3&
Jg fa g^
He probably will not come; hm t n pub ^'Ynl fifc
3^- J
l
'
^$
He may
come, or he
^ *,
may
le-hxii
ie-hx-ii l<u,
notjrc'd
pak
lai
to-day.
Perhaps he has some engagechin-t'ien
muh in lai; hsiang-pih
hsien-senc/
come
tr
ent at
iu
li
Hal
home?
is
&te&&mm
Most
*s*
&J$L
Perhaps he
likely
e a
*X^*
3c
'^
jg
on the ietty? k'ong-p'a t^tsaima^-Vco sliang
>
it is
his
own
fault
to-pan
sJii t
ajsi^h/i4ih
ts'o
fia
Certainty and Uncertainty.

3.
The word g?
colloquial
to
'
^'n^ 7
express
the
to fix/ is the
idea of
word used in
'
assurance ; etc.
principal
'
'
certainty
'
;
Other words are joined with it, but do not appreciably modify its
The opposite meanings of uncertainty ', and impromeaning.
are
denoted by TJC uei and 7^ puh, also used in combability ',
The following lists give the collocations most commonly
bination.
'
in use
154
'
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Tlny-ran
Puh-ih-tiny
J'ih-thiy
It is
tfc
j$.
>J$
gr.
cft'l)
&&.+ #.
It is not
puh^chienrtih
certamthat what he says

chrn-M fo ft ffi
*lri
People say that

kuovv^
(Puh Men
le-ux-
ren s/ioh
Will the steamer
laipuh
is
to-day
It
is
not certain
hua
who
fjfc
chin-t'ien ho-
56-
chuen
by ^mottow^kanwinfft'ien
3
a
m ^^^/ =L
done
)'
by him;
-^ Sr;
'^7a
l
eh<.^fing-^huen)sh'i
tso-tih
buy such a dear w atch na-mo kuei

mi
ch'i
pihnran
j>uh
>F &j| ftj *, ffc j& J8|
J5
lie surely cannot afford to

t'a
^JSW
Wbad man
^^>^^^3$/p^, /f*
lat ? puJi ih-tiny
"
-oh-tih
Magistrate is a
ko huai ren ; chce ic-uei-k'o-chi
4 *'TJ *
come
was certainly
it
<a uei-
come;
trugj J^t&LV'
]^)istrict
It will certainly be here
35 'i
is
ft^bffj[
tlê.
eJiitysieitfsh'i
A,
tihpiao
f>
not at all certain that he will be willing to
pihk'enlai
J9-
Approximation.
Phrases which convey the idea of approximation, as applied
to exactness and accuracy are much in evidence in every-day speech.
non-committal and inexact attitude of mind, coupled with a
Some of the
genius for generalizing, accounts for a good deal of it.
phrases under Section 2, are employed in this connection the ideas
of probability and approximation running into each other.
The
are
the
most
used
following
expressions
commonly
ch'a-puh-to
4.
/f
shang-hsia j;
This tub
is
nearly
ta-kai
full
'
jrenerally speaking,
men
^^
chir-lto
i^cn
ta-pan J^ cp
ch'a-/juh-to
are unwilling to worship
to-pan
man
God
llao
ta-kai
ren
puh k'en pai 8hany-ti ;J; $,

/? "ft" ^F Jl *$?
For the most part men have notTtravelled^videly ren ta-pan
muh iu ch'uh ko iien men A^C^J^^ffij^jS ?.
That old gentleman is about seventy years old na-ko lao hsien;
iu ch'ih-shiJi 8ui xhang-hxid W)
fjjjij
^ ^ ^ ^ ^t
"f"
_ll
TF*
1 jy in Combination.
I î
used alone sparingly in colloquial, but, joined to many

prepositions and adverbs is in constant use ; the most common
combinations are as follows
5.
is
155
MANDARIN PRIMER.
]9.
Before
formerly
i-chfien JL^ |fr
Behind; afterwards; i-heo jjj[ jj|.

Outside; beyond; i-u-ai ^\ #|>.
Above; over; i-shang Jj[ _.

Below under i-haia fy "f
;
To
This
regard as
to consider
i-uei
Jj.
from tnerest
in that it is verbal in
form, and admits of the Object being inserted between its parts i.e.,
i
jy introduces the immediate Object. It is used largely in documents
and in the speech of educated men, taut is slightly bookish :)
last expression differs
He considered himself in the right ; t'a ts'i i-nei xh'i 'fi^QJ^l^^.

I must be about my father's business ; o tang i o fu-ch'in-tih s'i
NOTES.
FuJi fj is not used in colloquial in the sense of

other words, e.g.,
with
To come to life again
again ', except
resurrection fuh-hoh, or ftih-seng fj fg or fg
and a few others.
The
b. Fen J:J{ is used both alone and in combination, as e.g.,
^ne has gone to the grave to weep t'a shctng
grave ; fen-nioj${
fen ch'ii k'uh fl[i Jl JJ{ -^ 55 jfbut nio j| is rarely used alone. )
and
G. Ho
J "when applied to cargo sometimes takes chlen
sometimes not; e.g..
How lujjgli^rffgjbas that ship on board?
About 30,000 packages; fkrf-f'iao/WHOW in to-xhao ho! in wn/ uan
a.
ehien ho
d.
$ tej
The
^ fe, f H
^"$ between
to
K-
ft
make/ and
'
distinction
'
to
make
into
not shewn in Chinese by affixing a preposition to the word

but by affixing the verb eh'eiig
e.g.,
He made four pieces of wood into a box; t'a
tso-ch'eng ih-cfri hsiang-tsi

e.
<
Ma
fa %*
'
',
is
make/
pg
pyjjjg-k'uai
^ JR,
In the West
puh tih %$
>V'txrr^v>^v^
'.
j^
ftfj
jft
is
()[
used to
pan
p.
express
uncertainty
[iSV
e certainly cannot manage this affair chcc-chien
Let it be so settled \vdiiu stn na-ino tiitg-kuei pa.)
;
s'i
t'a ih-tiiig
pan puh ch'eng.
One cannot speak of this matter with any certainty chcr-ko si ie s/io/i puh ting.
^The teacher will not allow him to go tisien-se ng puh \c/iueti){or /isiQ. t'a ch'ii.
He^has decided to do it in that way rf\i ting-kuci iao na iang tso. *fir**
a seat and let us have a chat ch'ing tso. a-men
k'o_J\âii-t'an.j
explained the generat nreannTg'; t'a lioh-lioh-tih chiang ta-kai-tih
;
i-si.
Unfortunately he will not listen to any persuasion k'o-shih t'a puh t'ing cfriien.
lived to be eighty years of age t'a hoh tao pah-shih siti.
\Alas he is nearly dead ai-ia ! t'a ch'a-puh-to s'i I iao.
Ood is willing to' pardon Shang-ti k'en rao-shu ren.
Tlie Lord doubtless has already risen from the dead Chu i-ching fuh-hoh liao ;
;
He
^
/**
V"
chcs shi ih-ting-tih .
This must be made known everywhere
cJuz iao ch'uaji picn t'ien hsia.
156
MANDARIN
:
of
foreign
street
in
Call
1MJI.MKII.
19.
shoemaker
want him to make me
There arc a great inany people
the
hoots to order.
all
they are guiug to see
a pair
in
the
the
newly-arrived
by no means certain that these two loses
He may come to-morrow
of medicine will make your disease better.
there is no certainty.
The three la rue characters
or he may not
The goods at the
Hi were engraved upon the tombstone.
iM
are
both
dear
and
are
bad;
shop
they
certainly unsaleable.
|J
Probably he will not come to-day, because he is afraid it will rain.
His accent is not very good. He has travelled everywhere and been
to almost every country.
The pupil came late to-day, therefore he
cannot go back early.
This trouble was most likely provoked by
;
]>ro!)al)ility
Prefect disembark.
It
is
<
A
^
I will briefly recount to you the

JfL TJC Jj.
hospital. That carpenter has come a good few times
told him that a plank of this thickness is of no use.
not understand your meaning?
has brought the wrong receipt,
received, not for a registered letter ; no

he has not been to the Post Office.
The Saviour was first
this is a
doubt
He
opening of the
I have alreadv
Perhaps he did
receipt for
money
on the cross, afterwards buried in the grave, and on the

3rd day He rose again.
Xow His grave is empty because He has
already ascended into heaven.
Afterwards, when the time has come,
He will return to the world and cause all those who believe in Him
to
This is the general meaning of the Gospel.
enjoy great felicity.
crucified
Writing Exercise
&]
(fj
ftj
jg f
READING LESSON XIX.

The Unwary Youth
fl!J
R.
-\*
III.
n4iuifc
1.
2.
Shang-i ting-liao
T^/e'// //>;/ /;/-/.??
ffi g||
f^
Had
decided after consultation.

^- Counted over the money.
fa
~f
MANDARIN
ft
PRTMETl.
T
:
Jb ft
*}
-l
IB
{H
H.E.*
ft
T,l
T.tt! ff
'
Ift
&
ft
Q
shan- ~&
i-fi
On
the person.
2. Trttfif /f'z>;/ V?/ Jt Tliat day
the same day.
4
1
Streets and lanes.
3. Trt /^m/ hsiao* hsiang* jt ffi /J
4. Chen k'u si liao IR.
?E 7 Things have come to a pretty pass.
5. 7vV;/ // Hang Seng'
Jfe 3f *fe. A strange place and strange people.
6. 7s<f>/ Â /O0
f$ T How shall I manage? how can I get out of this
1.
7>ff
.9//v/
J:
difficulty
Ta-k ai
l
7.
8.
9.
ih k'-an
Hsiang ch'in
Hsing hsiao ^f
10. Ching*-i* $k ;^;

11. Chong uai sh'i
and abroad.
*
fl" No sooner had opened it and looked. . .
fellow-countryman one from the same district.
% To perform the duties of a filial son.
A present an expression of respect.
ih li i|t $\>
in China
3JL The same principle both
.
^J" [J3
$jj>
3H
A.
158
19
7 &
ft,
4X
iT
^ ^ The doctrine of
piety filial duty.
It is onh* fitting that.
X 1$ Wages.
^ To kill oneself; to commit suicide.
Hsiao kong /J X A labourer.
/* hsing-li $$ ft ^ To make beds.
/to/ choh-tsi JH 44 ^ To lay the table.
Hsiao-lao
2. Pen tang jfc.
3. Kong-ch'icn
4. Tsi shah g
1.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
filial
'#;
Hsl p'an uan ffi *g $ To wash up

Shuah
To brusb.
plates
and dishes.
Jglj
/ chi-ko ch'a shui cli'ien [13 I'F^ fl^l ^^N II Give you a
often used in the sense of to pay to settle up.'
11. Chiu suan liao
3 T And that will settle every thing.
12. Shang teng tih J:
First class tip top.
fiij
10. A'<7'/
is
'
cutusbaw
'
Puh
where
Did not know
chi-tao Is'ong na-li shoh ch'i

to begin his story.
14.
Tai pnh long
15.
Tso .... iang-tsi
'hsin -fo
fife
ffl
... ||
Was altogether too heedless.

To put on a style to make believe.
159
;
MANDARIN P1UMEB.
20.
Newspaper proprietor
LESSON XX.
oh
To cast off to abandon.

To undress to strip.
;
To give alms;
To part with
$>8flce
heh
lood
xh<ui
oh
Evil
//<//
wicked. Read//
To hate hateful.
He she it they
1
2 </*>
Pe
4
Iffl
this
/;
Ought; should; suitable.

Read ///r/ 4 1\) respond
f
./
Buddha.
w
,
[to fulfil.
that.
Grieved
sorry
To wound
ah a n<j
1)0
U<'
sad.
to in j u re.
/-,v A r/
All; the whole.
G rie ved
K/
Distressed.
distressed.
To forgive; to pardon.
To avoid to escape.
To remit to forego,
slice
^jij{
destiny.
Entire;
perfect.
11
\Ll
11
All the whole.
..
/
1
/N
partition.
moral.
to reject.
;
A command.
J.
Fate
Ijife.
inii)f/
by.
i
l[
an agrecovenant
ement. About; nearly.
To separate. Divided
loli
to bestow.
;
'-ni
To pardon
ten
Christ.
chi-tuh
c///
An
To
.si
ch
interrogative
venture
pao-ing
k'uai-hoh
Buddhist monastery.
A mosque,
A foundation. Prooversee
/^*
3
>ft>.
to
su-
To
fsh
TO
)
i
sh
r
/\*
GRf
"
jE|f
ch (i-8$
""""
HfT
comb.
-rf=-
-7;
/t^
A'o
wisdom
160
give
up
life for others.

4
Marvels
miracles
Strange. To blame.
coarse comb.
To
kual
*
mediator;
a middle-man.
chong-ren
perintend.
r
recom-
retribution.
cheerful.
perty.
tti-h
Happy
to presume.
To
j)ense
particle.
dare ; to
kan
-"?^-
wonders.
ih-hsia-ts'i
A short
time; at once.
(/ained without experience.
MANDAIMN
KeJr
fig
I'IMMKIJ.
how
20-
used.
often the equivalent of the English word

$|j
It lias a secondinterval,' and is applied both to time and distance
ary meaning of Mo belong to something different', as say, a country,
The word
1.
/v//
is
'
or a religion
c.r/.,
Take this medicine once every

ch fih ih
hud
other day
SJIJiJljri^J^Lj^H'
H sit Jives three streets
A man named
in ko
lln-tili ohu-kia
Ming
UJg
Rg
fe
dni'-koioh keh ih-t'ien
off; kch liang-t'iao
ffl jft Sfr
69 ft
chiaL
We belong- to different religions; o-men keh-ohoh chiao^^^jj&j^.

C/fc'*
("%'/
2.
wen-U
:& in combination.
a character principally used in the book style, or

but like jy /, it is used in colloquial in combination with
is
:J
jyj,
It forms part of many prepositions, its meaning being

The following combinations
determined by the preceding noun.
other words.
are in constant use

lleally
In the midst
The rest
Amongst
tih
.s'z
in fact
of
whereas
among
the remainder
in the interval
but
JJ.
ch'i-ii
;
it
eh'i-ehienTi
wEen
matters
fjs
^^
g^
^g
come again;
?fc
ch'i-ii-
|| |^.
had mastered the subject, but, as a

he had not half done so t'a i-uei hsioh huei liao, ch'i-
considered
matter of
*h'ih t'a
eh'i-xhih 3
ch'i-cho'ng :&_fjf.
\\'e will sj)eak of the other

teny o tsai leu twti shoh 3jL
He
fact,
that he
pan puh huei fay,ffi^^~T, ^^1fe^ J^^H>

many people were taken ill, among them an official
in ih ta
great
iu hsu-to ren
<'h((it(/-]>in</,
ch'i-chong in
ih
ko kiian
^ ff ^ A jj
n Ihe doctrine that he preaches there is much to affect men

till
tdo-li ch'i-chony hen iu lisle kan-tong ren tih hua
t'a chid
idity
its Use and Force.

an
interrogative statement, and usually
strengthens
demands an emphatic answer in the negative unless followed by
puh when an affirmative answer is required. It forms part of a few
bookish phrases which have passed into colloquial use as,
a polite phrase signifying that
How dare I? ch'i k<in
Jjfc
Ch'i
3.
Ch'i
the speaker
How
this
c//.</
is
is
unworthy
of the~trorionr or
there such a principle
Wi
li
3jg
$fc
compliment paid to him.

is no such
principle as
there
g|.
commonly conveys
the idea of surprise or astonishment

1
Can it be
Is it possible ....?' e.g.,
?
Know ye not that we were baptized into His death ? ch'i
IE
hsiao-teh o-nien sh'i lisiao t'a-tih si sheo //x/ mo? j=
pfe
It
J9
as,
_a
m%
161
jj
^-
puh
&
/pa
MANDARIN PRIMER.
2Q.
Will
hsioh huai
Do
ff
it
do
mo
o-men
k ( o ken t'a
ch'i
know
uot I
ways
to imitate bis evil
his
ft
ifc
o ch
meaning
puh
clii-iao
u-tih
mo
i-x'i
iEJBJgRepetition of Verbs.
Verbs are repeated
for emphasis or for euphony.

Many verbs
thus repeated have ^j k'an as a suffix in the sense of ' to try ' ; or as we
7
In some cases the verbs are
if one can do it.
say in Knglish to see
as
tenff-ih-tcnr/, Lesson VII. Section (> ; e.g.,
separated by Hi,
$f
4.
^ ^V
Try and do
See
it
tio-tso
you can write
if
**+*
k'anflfe f|/^f. -^4gjf

h#ie-h#ie k.'an j| 3,
it;
it and see; Iwng-Uang k'an

{jj^ IH^fLet us go and, listen o-men k'o-i clfci fing-fing
-//-Measure
^ ^ f^
;
5.
There
ft-)
nothing in English exactly equivalent to ih-hsia-tsi
is
or as it is commonly pronounced ili-Jid"f ^p, or ih-hsia

"]*";
ts'i or ih-ha^
It is heard more frequently in the South and West
than in the North.
Perhaps the nearest thing to it is found in such
idiomatic forms as,
'
Give
it
a push
'
Give
it
a pull
etc.
e.g.,
Give him a beating pd t u t(( ili-ha-tm jf^jfit^ff

*y -f
I will be there immediately o ih-ha-tx'i chin lai '^^-^f-f'^
f
Wait
Give
a while; tewj ih-lia-ixi

it
NOTES.
the place of
him
to
a.
'
'
ism
all at
ih-ha-ts'i
once;
^.
"Yvct^f^
T I^FL$ft
chih t'a
In describing religions the word

and other suffixes e.g.,
chiao
j|J
fife-
takes
Protestantism, or Christianity; le-su-elnao, or Chi-tuh-chiao

15 if: %, or
It
Eomanism t'ien-chu-chiao
^5;.
S9
^^
Taoism
tao-chido
Buddhism
fuh-chiao
Mahometanism,
^;.
Jjf
$fr
^.
Imei-liHci^cliiao [U
Lesson
^.
|P|
XXX
J\
No wonder
he's
ill
he has eaten too much
p] J|
kiiai pith tch /'a
ping
Pa
liao,
cfrih tih f'ai to.
Don't blame him pnh iao kuairâ. ,

Not very far from each other Wisiang\keJiJj)iih uen.
That house has a good foundacfosrfnfa^7 fang-tsi in ken
He
in
has left the path of rectitude t a shcc-liao cheng In.

That person is very joyful na-ko ren hen kûai-lioh.
A middleman is indispensible chong-ren shi shaa^wkjiao
^
Tell him to take off his shoes \chiafraôh hsiai-tsi.
The whole family is good ch'uen chia in sh'i haore
cJii.
tjj^*
tih.
*"
The entire Scriptures Sheng-ching ch'ilen sfat

The Old and New Testaments Hsintiofy Chiii-ioh.
God is gracious and forgives mens' sms Shang-ti
;
iu en-hnei,
tih tsui.
Jesus gave up His
life for
us
le-su uei
o-men
162
sh<e-viin%.
sha-mien ren-
IMMMKU.
M. \NDAI; IN
Ti'(nix/<itc
streets
20.
We
away.
were separated l>y a high wall.

They lived two
talked the matter over with him, and he said, Is it
When
you don't know we must invite a middleman?
the morning you must put on your clothes, wash your
None of the things
face, comb your hair, and sweep up the floor.
that he is using are his own, all are lent to him by other people.
Everybody said the death of the man Li the day before yesterday
was a retribution; he truly was a bad man. The Emperor has
possible that
you get up
in
already forgiven those criminals.

Although his friends exhorted
him not to weep, he still wept because his spirit was wounded.
Give what is over of the rice to the poor.
In this city there are
Buddhists, Taoists,
Christians,
dhism came
to
Romanists, and Mahometans.
China nearly
J,00()
years
Mr.
ago.
Bud-
Chang
is
wealthy, but as a matter of fact,

the whole family has not much money.
The ancients supposed the
earth to be Hat, but as a matter of fact, it is round.
Is it possible
that such a good man as he is would do such evil deeds?
You
Mandarin.
You
are
too
good
speak very
complimentary my
constantly saying that his family
is
vocabulary
there are
is
very limited.
happy and
Heaven is a good place all the people

Good has a good recompense, evil an
;
joyful.
up His life because He loved men if

had not loved them would he have been willing to die for them ?
Those who worship Buddha think that he is able to forgive them
their sins, whereas he cannot do so
none but God can forgive
Christ gave
evil retribution.
He
Writing Exercise
It ft
READING LESSON XX.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Chih lao-pan
Ko
Mn
rih-tsi
chi -^
l$\
tso
$S-
IL
City Ramble
I.
%fr ^ ^ f|= rS Worked for

To pass the days to live.
hoh
^p
his employer.
^ A hen.
T'ong hang |5] ft Fellow-craftsman

fang -^ To give birth to to beget.
;
163
in the
same business.
MANDARIN 1MUMEH.
20.
ft
Jtfir
3: (B
tt
13
ifc
The 5th
1. Shang
men .h ... PI Shut up shop.
observed as a half holiday.
.
2.
Hsing puh
3.
Ch'iien u ts'i
fixing ft
which
6.
7.
8.
How
will that
do
month
is
H&'"Called
^ IS No such thing.
the door' called outside the door.
jlfc
men n^ P^
shm ^ f Who's
4. C7wVz0
5. Slri
ff
of the 5th
there
This or JR
f@
is
the
usual enquiry,
answered by the illuminating reply H; f.

a complimentary term.
Lao fu-tsi ^ :fc -^ Old sage
Hsiang keh puh Hen tH P^" ^ is Was not far away from where they were.
Cheng mien shang i "@ .h Directly facing them just opposite to.
is
'
'
164
MANDAIMX
ffi
i&to
Ji,
HE
4J3
ITT
18^31
-^
^f>
ftA
-TNJJK;
R/u\
flLfife
1.
Song
2.
Sui-choh g|
ts'i
rill.MKK'.
20.
A^
Ht^
^J^3
:
7^
?a "*
^4^
1*1 b-
5B,i^ 1C
Give children idols are supposed to have this power.

To go with the crowd to do as others do.
A mosque. Also called j^ ft =.
^p
jg Tp
Li-pai-si jig
Looked all round.
4. 5z //5/rt /// k'an frtj 7;
over the way.
5. 7>/z men 1^ P^ Opposite
6. Chiao-mcn i% P^ Sect
religion. Usually painted
boards, with a tea pot underneath.
3.
-t.JK
^
;
165
on Mahometan sign
MANDAKIN
20
VOCABULARY
bottle
IV.
vase
JLMUMEK.
The
$U*
lla
\jjjt
^1
xhuh
(ti
experienced
versed
girl.
ninny
woman
To
woman
mother.
To
lose.
slip;
To
//o
ligent.
/t.i
t^j
To
spit
Bright
To
gent.
cha3ig-/u
To
intelli-
understand
...
fight; to
husband.
Wheat
A fan.
of spirit.
The
Ich'udngi-hu
hack
to chop.
^.To throw stones at.
mono
man
just.
*/wni-/*'i
clear
wife.
To
,n(/
to vomit.
F"air;
1,,-(>/lf
war.
Materials; ingredients.
To estimate.
.^
light.
ear.
To underming-peh.
stand clearly. Intelch-'i-fx'i
/m/if/To rely on.
voung
a girl.
The
r'i-to
paternal aunt.
girl
a
ku-niang
Intimate.
title of respect.
Cooked.
in.
To
endure.
terrace; a platform.
pe
to take
nee.)
To
allow.
shirk.
stuff.
wife.
ts
to snove.
To
n>
^military.
-To push
To marry
..
sun.
male
principle."
(
J
Light bright.
1
troops
ping A soldier
The
so-called "
Clear.
wg
A window.
dream.
Material.
To dream.
Easy.
^ h
To
covet.
door.
Flour
X
A5U,
V**
merciful.
-
vermicelli.
TA
ts'ony-miny Wisdom;
wise clever.
;
The
t'ai-iany
13
ii
eh -finny
sun.
The moon.
Dough.
^*>\A
$Iiih
Wi-pei Compassionate;
family.
they are ladled.

tnie.H
suitable.
United. The whole.

3
or millet after
Agreeable
Avaricious.
Population.
shut ; to agree.
To
oh -.s7< 'ih
form
pattern.
166
Exceedingly
matchless
etc.
MANDAIIIN
\OTKS.
relating to
insulting
((.
care needs to
(Jreat
another.
in
what
since
women,
unobjectionable, hut
is
Ku-niang
in
20.
Jg
jfa
others the reverse
i.
4.
5.
some
place
districts
terms
may
is
he
<jnite
the case.
PI
ffl
Sending forth light; glittering.

As used here=The idea of such a thing
.
Shen-mo
ancients indeed
3.
one
City Ramble II
4- If
2.
is
in
READING LESSON XXa.
exorcised in using
IK-
re>|>ectful
in
Shen-fu j$
Tien teng tih
Zw /^//
A Roman
Catholic priest.
sh'i-heo
jtg
&
ft
North side of the road.
167
they the
MANDARIN PRIMER.
20.
iE
KB
115
CFft^'tt'tft
1.
Chiang shu
2. 5ftft//
3.
;r
t'ai |H
I*
$^ A,
ft l&ffc
^ft
A An olc
*-
-'T
pulpit
a platform.
acquaintance.
^- To enlist as a soldier to be in the army.

(ft jpg ^1 A countenance full of joy.
tihfuh-ch'i
Tang ping
',
4. /// lien
5.
3/a
6.
K'o-hsi
7.
Liang
lien
fah kuang
ffi )j^
-)^
A beaming
face.
occasion of joy " delighted "

chieh shu ffi gV i& Two verses (of) the book. Compare
"SX
^ An
168
MANDARIN PRIMER.
*~
**"
fiH
IMJ
pî
ifis
;|i^
20
H
^
ft ft
W^ Ag,ft ft ^t^^
jtftr
gg
ffi
(ft
-til
&
ill
T
r
1.
^/zw.g- r?
2.
Hao^-fuh
3.
Nien ching
Devoted
fa $
^$
4.
Shoo
Mien puh
AJZ chiang ty
A^
ffl
J59
li It
is
needless to enter
of understanding.
ffi ffi
5.
ch'i
w^-
//*
men
into detail with
To
to
Buddhism.
repeat or chant prayers.
To burn paper money.
liao
tsui
$&
~fc
Could not escape from
sin
or
its
consequences.
6.
Puh
shi
sentence and
7.
is
Puh pih
huan
^ ^
^&
.
correlated with
to shoh
^^^
ffc
jg
"
:
It is
Hnan marks
If I
had not
..
unnecessary for
169
the
.then
me
'
turn
'
of the
should not."
to say
more.
MANDARIN PKIMER.
2Q.
REVIEW LESSONS XVI-XX.

:
How
Indicate three ways of expressing the Passive Voice.

(
I have been injured by him '
I have been favoured
say,
1.
would you
by him
'
'
I have been taught by him ' ?

Illustrate three uses of f| in as many sentences.
'
Which words indicate end ',

Shew in four sentences the
i
and
or
'
purpose
Give two examples.

between jfc #J*
difference in usage
^.
Give two sentences which denote simultaneous action, and

three expressions which denote regular sequence without the use of
fg.
How
is
the effect of an action briefly indicated
by an
adjective ?
Give two examples.
What
expressions are used to indicate Relationship ? And what

it ?
Give three examples of each.
to indicate the absence of
use, and position of Jj/f.

three meanings of
in as many sentences.
Illustrate two uses of JjJ, and give three sentences
containing g.
does
Give three
g, differ in use from $1 and ;$?
Explain meanings,
Shew
How
examples.
Give the rule for saying 'either or'; 'neither nor', and
it in two sentences.
trate
Which words
Shew
illus-
are used to indicate Supposition or Condition ?
their use in four sentences.
What
correlatives
do
and
Qfc
take
Give three sentences
to
illustrate their use.
Give two meanings of
and shew
gj|
their
use in as
many
sentences.
"
Illustrate
How
are
$,
5E
??> anc^ 3j ni
Probability,
two sentences
each.
Certainty, and
sentences to illustrate each.
Approximation,
Un-
Give two
certainty expressed ?
Give four sentences shewing the use of jy.
Illustrate the use of PjfJ in three sentences.
Shew
the use of
^ and
j|
Translate Reading Lessons
in three sentences each.
XVII. XVIII. XIX.
Give N. A. of wall, bridge,
and
>
2,
street,
temple, idol, flower, goods,
tablet.
Give sound, tone, and meaning of the following
$ ffi'is m m & m * l a T K
it m t it t s ft & at n #
170
a-
anw a
a s
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Correct
3.
for correction
if
20.
needful the following sentences, and state reasons
fc
ft
ft ft
*fifcffe
Write
4.
in Chinese character
He may
I have
come, or he may not ; wait awhile and see.
him
between
and
300
cash.
Who
400
was
that
already promised
who came yesterday and sat there for half a day ? I don't know ;
ask Mr. Ch'ien.
What
is
his
name?
You had
better ask him.
He and I have already crossed the sea together. Bring that square
Divide a half and give it to him, and
thing to me over here.
afterward refund Mr. Chang the money you changed yesterday.
The
teacher that he engaged has not yet
come
I don't
know where
perhaps he has some affairs at home ? He said

something pleasant both when he rose up and when he sat down.
He is really a capable man. Count over your money and see how
he has gone
much you
move
attend
it.
to),
have.
He
He
himself
is
unable to move
it
calculated to go yesterday, but he had
andjiierefore could not go.
171
you try and

some trifles (to
MANDARIN PRIMER
PART
III
SUPPLEMENTARY
HANDARIN PRIMER.
LESSON
/m<w<7-
>
21
iieh
*
jfiL
XXI.
1
Incense
fragrant.
Blood.
2
To
lien
3
Wine
hu
long
to subtract.
spirits.
lake.
Fields
ien
chong
Seed
rash.
land.
Serious.
To
sheng
To
pain
to ache.
To
farm.
measure of 10
a bushel.
âscend
to
Vui
Not a
;
And
shang To
ping
4 ts'i
$'i
leg
the thigh.
negative.
also.
Wrong.
ch
k
ia l
K*
Altogether.
frame
Calamity
hsien
Leisure
misery
ia-pa
A dumb person
lesson
k'o-lien
To
pity
pitiable.
nti-r'i
unoccupied.
dumb.
evil.
idleness
plough.
land ;
;
soil
ground.
PpJ
pint.
a rack.
To
plough.
Earth
t<w
reward; to grant.
Rewards.
To bestow to confer
on an inferior.
pro-
mote.
k (o
sow.
Lame.
tsai
Read
grain.
chong*.
teo
iieh
chuang
t'eng
>3
till.
Deaf.
ch<
/<>/
to
ch
hsiah Blind. Reckless
To plough
To call to halloo.
To remove to do
away with. To deduct
ch'u
pity.
ts
"
k 1 Gn(J
/ In9
han
ieh
21.
daughter.
chuang -chia
Crops
growing grain.
a task.
In Lessons I. to XX. only the commonest forms and uses of

words contained in the Vocabularies were dealt with. In this and
the following Lessons additional meanings and usages will be given
and illustrated, Avith a vieAV to aid the student to a more thorough
and comprehensive grasp of the language. The introduction of this
matter at an earlier stage would have had a tendency to bewilder
rather than to help but at this point it should enlarge the vocabulary
and increase a knowledge of different idioms. The number of the
Lesson dealt with follows the \vord " Supplementary."
;
Fei $
and
its
Uses.
^ puh and
as a negative is stronger than

1. Fei 5/
character belonging to the book style.
But
ft
like
begotten of proficiency.
175
is
strictly a
many
similar
MANDARIN PRIMEK.
words
has passed into colloquial, and in certain connections
it
freely used
Right and wrong
To
**
Used
negative and positive ; failings
|f.
get into or provoke trouble
with
is
something
of people,
etc.; sh'ifei
is
e.g.,
One cannot
puh-k'o or
pj"
indispensable
ch'uh
rce
fj-
fei lai f^;
sh'i
indicates that
it
puh-Jmng,
[ij
e.g.,
get on without
money
fei ch'ien puh-hsing
|J
|g
ch'ing t'a puh-k'o
|f
xfido not
It will never
to invite
him
** wJoined to
eh'u
by
'
'
except
fei
forms a phrase which
it
translated
'
;
be variously
may
'
unless
etc.; e.g.,
Unless Mr. Li goes he will not get back the baggage

Li hsien-seng ch'ii, t'a chiu iao puh ch'uh hsiiu/-li lai
)
&m
*,
T> IB if
**
Except that he does not come, I will certainly apply

the
money
ch'u-fei t'a
puh
T> JK ft
ft
is the only way
X,
lai, o
This
puh
ken
only by this
and
ch'u-fei
^ 9t ^
him
for
^^
to
t'a iao ch'ien $|*
ch'u-fei chce-ko ts'ai
its Uses.
used
two senses
ând also
and
with
ordinary one 'To remove;

jy #|\ i-uai in the sense of
In documentary
etc.
Besides ; none but ; with the exception of
that the
and
indicates
it
uai
takes
alone,
usually
#|>
correspondence
writer will do all that is said between ]; ch'u and %\* uai ; e.g.,
CVi'M
2.
to exclude'
in
is
its
U</
*~f
'
'
Deducting the tare
him
i'
ch'u-liao p'i
^ "f
fc.
AVith the exception of Mr. Ma, no one can get the better of
in argument ; ch'u-liao
hsien-seng i-uai, u ren neng shoh Jco
Ma
ft
IS A H H ji ftT Jl.*no4other*name
but the Saviour's that we
t
There
is
ch'u-liao Chiu-chu i-uai,

k'o-i k'ao-choh teh-chiu
in order to be saved
muh
may
trust in
iu pieh-tih
ming
Successive Action.
expressed in English either by a special
'
*
the use of the
repeatedly ; once more ; or by
form closely corlatter
This
day by day/ etc.
words and phrases
responds to Chinese idiom, in which, while special
The
are sometimes used, it is more common to repeat a word.
3. Successive Action
word or phrase
same word as,
is
'
'
as,
*
following expressions are constantly so used

fl$
the
M>
an d
ufMy-wng fi
fi-
same purpose; as does tony
Iu
jj.
pit 1
176
shi-shi
y^
Jj-J,
vhi-k'eh
prefixed to a verb accomplishes

'
tony JJj /f> jj always' ; e.g.,
MANDARIN
1MMMK1!.
hti-liao
Here lie is again N'
That cock crows all the time
/'//
fill
mm&m
The
M&
$was
he
i$
ill
lie
day
fa
'
He
ta ren
together once more;
fy
jjjj
jgfc
Jfjj
chce-i&'ng
me?i- in <-liii-/n>i
tony, chiu
puh
^J A-
The following pronouns
Lesson
I.
are in colloquial use in different parts
Mandarin-speaking area r
r
2
A\ e; us; e.g., A\ e two;
Rg tea.
of the
To
>m/>.
jj$j
ffc
*//?
strikes people on every occasion; t'a tony
Supplementary
4.
u<i.n</-n<niy
They have met
T-
so on every occasion;
is
It
2fc
prayed incessantly; t'a hair-ping tin

^, 8t 8t
flfe f?
$f jB
8h*-*M-k<eh-k<eh4ih ch'iu
ih f.</Vw,
3J.
int-ko konf/-chi sfii-sh'i-tih
2'3
f$
2
(tti*
nong. I
jfg
Xi-mcn
give.
ff^
fjj;
te<t
Used
receive.
men Hany-ko
$*}
in Peking with fo
fl|=|
{[.
jig
ni, as,
conveying the idea of respect.

Largely used in Shantung and Chihli.
me thou you. Used only in the South.
is in some parts used as a polite expression in
You, sir;
I; we;
-iii-nah,
lfy
To
us.
speaking directly to a single person.

T'a fy is used alone for the plural of inanimate things.
Tih fa as
stood
e.g.,
;
'
honey
'
Kelative
Pronoun
often stands for a
or,
noun under-
English we may say, His food was locusts and w ild

What he ate was locusts and wild honey.' The transla'
in
f
Ate that which
tion of this passage in Matt. iii. 4 runs as follows
(
That which,' is rendered by tih ffy
was locusts and wild honey.'
:
Tih
immediately following the verb.
which ' ; or a noun e.g.,
What he wears are straw shoes ;
thus used =. what '; 'that

1
fiff
ch'uan-tih shi ts'ao hsiai
know
I do not
shen-mo
Chce
gg
if.
to indicate
^ i&na
or,
He
wears straw shoes
^ ^ S-
fa
what he says
iHi
puh
hsiao-teh
a shoh
tih
t'a
sh'i
fa fi S'jg.
following a personal pronoun may be used
though in some connections they may merely
|ft
and
J($
contempt
denote a protest e.g.,

That fellow has no gumption
;
You
ffc
at IB
Shi
are an unreasonable fellow
A#
Bi
a na-ko ren hao puh tony

ni chcv-ko ren
puh chiang
s'i
li
a-
at times
repeated in giving assent, and at times has

In the former case it may express impatience
or may be the equivalent of
Yes, yes, I know all about that
such phrases as, Very well well and good let it be so
etc.
tih
frff
is
added
to
it.
'
'
'
177
MANDARIN PKIMEK.
2J.
Shui
J5 {UK^
fj|,
'
whoever
<
JS xhen-iuo are repeated as the equivawhichever

whatever
e.g.,
whichever one you want iao na-ih-ko chin mai na-ih-ko
tut
lents of
Buy
'
<
'
'
siB-nasis-flWhoever wants
lai
it
may come and take it
na ||
|| pf JH
AVe have whatever you want; mo shen-iuo
Eat whatever there
ahui iao, shni fro-i
is
shen-mo
in
in
shen-mo
J|
shen-nw
ck''ih
shen- in
Ten. Sundry; often takes the place of
shen-mo with no appreciable difference of meaning.
J/a.
p^ is used constantly as a sign of the interrogative instead
of Jjfc mo in colloquial
but most teachers prefer to write mo Jg.
is used in Chinese as in English to denote "a
Tong-hsi
"
worthless fellow
j-f-
j||
^ g
e.y. y
His son
ft
% ? s
a bad character
is
t'a-tih
shi-ko huai tony-hsi
I'i-ts'i
w-
Shen-mo
t'.r/.,
jg is often the equivalent of All sorts of
There are all kinds of people shcn-mo reu in hi
^P ^f
The phrase {x
mi ^1 * w shen-mo means Not much
with
Xot many
Aj^ to-shao added
e.g.,
'
'
^S S
'
'
'
He
much money
has not
&mm- not
% * H RHe
It is
t'a iiiiih hi
much importance; muh
of
has not
many
nails
&&%&%$
&to ?
^^
â
in
/w
//itt/t
shen-mo ch'ien
ffe
J^ >^
shen-mo iao-chhi
^^
shen-mo to-shao
used in a prohibitive sense,
Pnh-i(io
Do
'
parts superseded by the following characters

2
To distinguish. To part. Other
g|J' pieh.
not
',
ting-ts'i,
in
is
many
moh. A negative not.

Don't talk ; ni-men inch shoh hna {^
Do
another.
not.
3|L
Do
not covet
fP9
S'J
moh
1^ IS-
(
tong t an-hsin J|L Jjf
>JJ\.
and ^5 s/ut/i are opposites, and as applied to persons
$en<7
include the ideas of ' Being versed in ; familiar \vith ; acquainted
with/ and their opposites ; e.g.,
He is a raw hand ; t'a shi ko seng sheo fife,
f@
;
He
is
afraid of meeting strangers
aÂThey are quite familiar with

mm
* ft m '& is&
As
this
applied to language seng
ranted by usage
is
t'a
^^
p'a chien seng ren
chce-ko
s'i
fjjj
*fg
t'a-men hen shuh
used in the sense of
'
Unwar-
'
e.g.,
These two characters are used

Hang-ko t*i hen seng Jf pg f@
in
^^
1-78
an out-of-the-way sense;
^.
ch<t'
MANDARIN PRIMER.
21-
All negative particles such as

fei ;
/>"/'; Jfc " ; fa MC/ ; ;j
inav be reinforced by the addition of certain words, which
etc.,
need not be translated except where emphasis is required, in which

Not at all ;' etc.
case thev correspond to English
By no means'
The following words and expressions are often so used
ch'it'H-iHiH
/>'"//; -fi) e//'/W/ and
"$
$J "en ;
^p Cli'icH
t
'
others
<.</.,
Certainly
x&
&
You
tt
it
was not he that did
it
phiy pnh
sh'i
t'a tso-tili
jj
to-
must not do
on any account
it
nan puh
k'o tso "$?
Pi ft-
X((-ko jj(5 fg is used colloquially in reference to either persons

or things that are evil or undesirable, but about whom or which
To say of a person that
the speaker does not care to speak openly.
he
is
jg|
JJ|J
is
mean
to
that he
is
unspeakable
',
and the same
expression applied to a place indicates that it is bad beyond words.

So also diseases are ascribed to
fg when it is not thought prudent to
g|$
enter into detail for fear of the consequences, e.g. , if a demon were to
hear his name, it might be bad for the person who ' gave him away '
!
NOTES.
a. Tsi
is
added
to indicate the person afflicted
A
A
A
b.
deaf person
7)^
and meh
Barley
Wheat
ch'iieh
f.
^ are spoken of as
ta-mi
Jfc.
Millet ; hsiao-mi >J^
llice
:Jf|
long-ts'i fj- ^f>.
cripple; ch'ueh-ts'i $jj ^f.

blind person; hsiah-ts'i Jg
Mi
|| hsiah, j| long, and
to
as.
'
'
large
and small
as,
$fc.
^ ^.
ta-meh
hsiao-meh
>J^
^.
The blind, the deaf and the dumb, are
much
to
^ ^
be pitied,
hsiah-ts'i, long-tsi,
hen kô-lien.
That house is unoccupied na-ko fang-ts'i hsien-choh.
My head aches terribly o-tih t'eo t'eng teh iao ming.
Sow in the Spring and reap in the Autumn ch*uen chong ch'iu koh.
Call him back pa t'a han huei-lai.
Give me a call, and I'll be there han ih-sheng, o chin lai
Ten sheng make one teo ; sh'ih sheng ih tea.
Rivers, streams, lakes and seas chiang, ho, hu, hai.
ia-fta,
cash a pint mi mai u-shih-ko chîen ih sheng.

They burn incense before the idol fa-men tsai p'u-sah mien-ch'ien shao
hsiang.
God pitied men and sent the Saviour Shang-ti k'o-lien ren, ta-fah Chiu-chulai.
The Lord caused the blind to see and the deaf to hear Chu chiao hsiah-tsi
Rice
is fifty
k'an-chien, long-tsi t'ing-chien.
179
MANDARIN PRIMER.
21.
Translate
That man is very pitiable ; would it not be a good
The daughter of that deaf man is
thing to give him a few cash ?
blind
she cannot see to do her hair.
Have you mastered this
:
lesson?
have already done so.

He decided to cross the lake
he said, It will never do not to go and see my father.
and go home
We
cannot dispense with the plough in ploughing the fields.

If
people do what does not please that boy, he constantly gets angry
nothing will do but to give him a beating. With the exception of Mr.
J no one can manage that affair. If the fields are not sown, from
whence shall we get food to eat ? Miss
is now
eighteen years old.
From the time she was four years old she was dumb she could not
Her father took her to the School for Deaf
speak a sentence.
in
and
than
six years she understands peoples' meaning.
less
Mutes,
Is it not a great wonder ?
This trouble certainly was not caused by
Mr. fjfr. Northerners cannot get on apart from a wheaten diet, and
southerners cannot get on apart from a rice diet.
The soldier struck
him two blows with a sword. The sun comes out by day, the moon
by night. I dreamed last night, and in my dream saw a black man.
What is the meaning of this ? There is not much meaning in it.
God is both wise and merciful. If He had not devised a plan, no
one could obtain salvation.
With the exception of the Saviour
He sent, there is no other who could redeem us from sin. If we
;
desire to enter
Heaven,
it is
Writing Exercise :-glJ

11.
indispensable that
we
trust
Him.
$H $&^*&
144.
READING LESSON XXI.
City Ramble
Ifc
A-
5:
^ at* m
fl
^tt?
III.
M
-fcF-
-*^
mi
-Ab
e>^
m, lc
1.
Nien
2.
Kâi chiang
tao
$fc
^
$j\
Read, saying
|g
Began
to explain.
180
156
MAN DA KIN
^ Wi
Br
$fc 1ft
J'KIMKH.
"fife
21.
PI
ft.fi.dt
_k
ift
it
of
'
^ here = To appoint.
1.
7^w^-
2.
Hsiang
Such
$fc is
often used before an enumeration of things in the sense
as
Tsai shi ti-shang ih-ch'ieh u o-men in ih-ch'u tih

l^J
^ Jfc .h
that is
.11 #J Note the construction^: further,
-tJJ all
of benefit to us
^fe J: on the earth.
na-li is here used idiomatically and does not need
4. T'a na-li
to be translated fl 4fc
S
ft Have come from Him.
Medicinal herbs.
5. 70/t ts'ao 3g
6. 7*iz/j chang %
To grow up.
.
7. Afa . . . //// ^R .
#j He who ... the gR prepares the way for the #j
below.
8.
To
harvest to reap.
Shep-koh J^c ^l
To be taught and reared to be brought up.
9. Chiao iang
10. Ta puh hoh li
3
^>
Very unseemly perfectly unreasonable.
11. Res ho
to cause trouble.
jpH To provoke calamity
3.
ffc
1R ^f
jjfft
X&
&
181
MANDARIN PRIMER.
21.
ft st
T tT JW Jt
m
-5|5
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ft
ft
2.
ft
To
.ft
suffer.
Note how
sin
and suffering go together.
^ ^ Omnipresent.
^ ^n Omniscient.
^ Almighty.
U-so-puh-neng fa
ih shoh Q ^
O
^ These remarks of mine.
U-so-puh-tsai
U-so-puh t'/ii fa
PJi
pff
pff
itb
r//rs?
Face to face in the presence of.

Tang-mien
To worship with reverence.
Ching-pai i%
From which statement we see
Chre-iang shoh lai
'}'
MAM'AKI.N
LESSON
XXII.
Remainder
sv/A
'ertainly
''"
surely.
Like.
\\>
I ''>!>
support with the

o oonunifision.
hand.
To
Superior;
class
'<
a scries.
Medical treatment.
hand
He;
ch'i
responds in
some uses
To
contract.
ch
k
'
.,
tiffi-k'o
i 4
^=ET
ch
k
plan
To
ch'any
..
y^
Vien-uen
"
^J
pal
To
^ ( '~J'fl h
Astronomy.
Wair on the
iu-&ai
Judtva.
To
kuel-chil
Propriety
All told.
To
select.
l(
usage.
feng-bwh Customs ;
manners.
To
harvest.
human head.
taste to experSign of past tense.
ch ).
k (
assistant.
>J
>
com-
a device.
reckon.
ience.
.3
An assistant.
pany.
.
Numerous.
An
The
To
ho
fjfj.
knot.
form, as fruit.
To settle an account.
as
Afedicine,
Corto
'sage.
Surgery, as opposed to medicine.
to.
it; etc.
she;
opposed to surgery.
A custom.
tm i-k'o
To fly. Quick.
To commit to to
n
Tudccided.
overcome.
excel.
Vulgar; common.
overplus.
I'Yuit.
To
22.
I'lv'l.MKU.
An
kaortskp-*
pick
official
proclamation.
up.
ruin.
ch'ioh-niao
Defeat;
Birds.
to be defeated.
4
ch
To
_.
Read
descend.
**
To
,
the middle
submit ; to surrender.
hsiany-.
class.
2
j^ A
An omen.
sh'i
7J^
i
sh
..
Uh-Uany
Toproclaim.
teacher an in-
XW2
teh-txui
structor.
T'eo g[ as a
Suffix,
The word 'head'

class; hence we speak
1.
"jffi
$t
To offend.
To apologize.
and as the Equivalent of Ti
%*.
used
is
hi/
Strength ;
power.
of
in English to indicate a
category or
things falling under such and such a
^'> VY/ ^
r/
" Y/
a personal
183
wtl
Matter* arc NOOU
infe/-rietr.
.settled
MANDARIN PBIMEK.
22.
This may serve as a rough analogy to a use of g| t'eo in

'head.'
Chinese, in which it indicates some quality, or places some action
under a certain ' head ; the (Duality being indicated by the word to
'
Take
for example the word |g t'iug to hear

which
added to it denotes that what is listened to has some quality
which makes it worth hearing e.g., There is something very interChaiuj HtsieH-Neng shoh-hua hen iu
esting in what Mr. Chang says
affixed.
it is
jjijj
t'eo
^ ft
t'ing-t'eo
%B
ft ft
words which have occurred
fft
The
following
Lessons, take Hjf t'eo
Something worth saying

Harvests; uien-t'eo 4
Palatable toothsome
hoh-t'eo
Fit to drink
shoh-t'eo
ch'th-t'eo
p
Pleasing to the eye;

to
jj.
k'ao-t'eo
ijj|
p|j.
gjf.
hsiao-t'eo
Ig.
jig
k'<tu-t'eo
laugh at
nien-t'eo
f$
ffjf.
Something or somebody to lean on
previous
jjfj.
Something
Thoughts
the
in
jfjj.
^.
Object of desire hwang-t'eo /g gg.

aspect of a coming event ; lai-t'eo 2j |i^.
Thai fellow is unspeakable; na-ko ren nmJi
;
The
hi xhoh-t'eo
j}|$
fg
^S
Jft
'
A air
ta
What
si-
is
there to laugh at? ni xheii-mo hsido-t'eo
^ m vi-
Liao
*~f
^-?
as a Principal Verb.
2. /y/ao "j* is not only a sign of the Past Tense, Lesson III.
Section 8, but also a principal and auxiliary verb; e.g.,
The matter is already finished; ti-L'h'iny i-c/nng liao lo
^^
T$1
There is no
*7
T>
T'eo
often takes the place of
#jj
of a series
The
The
settling this affair
chcti-ko
liao jjiih liao
tti
JJ f@
7;
ti
Jj|
in
speaking of the
few
first
e.g.,
first
few chapters;
first
two days
t'eo
t'eo c/n
Hang
chang
t'ien
gg
gjf
||
^.
ij;.
If you speak too rapidly, it is impossible to avoid mistakes ;

shofi-hua t'ai k'uai chiumien pnh liao iutx'o IftfSic'R^î^T^lHThat affair of A. insidtiug B. was settled up long ago ; Chang-
chia teh-tsui Li-chia tih
*^
E 7
si
tsao-i liao chieh
$jk
%=$>
j$
%fc
ft
Supplementary Lessons II. and III.

when used in contrast, is often the equivalent
3.
and needs the addition no of special word e.g.,
:
Ren
of
'
others/
ft
On no account
*r ^~
hVht with others
184
pit h k'o
ho rcn
hi-fh'ni
pj"
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Liany
and j~ xnn are often abbreviated
JJ9
the North
22and
I'm
to
.sa
in
e.y.,
Three cash
for two; MI. c/i'/oi I'm ^ ^

fjij.
Numerical categories are very common in Chinese, and the apt
Some are
use of them adds a good deal to the style of a speaker.
used in a sense different from the meaning suggested by the characters themselves
e.y.,
"jj /\, -f-.

Eighty or a hundred ; Hi peh pah sliih
Three or four san u ko ^ 55. fflBetween 900 and 1,000 shany-ch'ien J =f-.
About 10,000 ; shany uan J^ |J.
Nearly 100 cash peh sliih ko ch'ien "g Hh f@ |In addition there are many combinations which are
;
proverbial in their use
e.g.,
Too many cooks
spoil the broth
In the South
pa
ffi
'
sizes
One
ch'ih ta
or
two
pah
'
hsiao
'
or,
pah chioh j
ch'ih sheo
AHAll sorts and
almost
j ;fc
About one
>!*
'
expressed by
is
e-9->
An
hour or two
About a
One
^ g.
or
pa liang tien chony $fa Jg pg Sfi fflpa iany-ch'ien J ffi

|
two garments chien pa liany chicn i-fuh fj: Jg ^
dollar
tien
k'uai
This idiom
Ren |g
is
sometimes used as the equivalent of
is
jfcj;
not used in the North.
when money
to be responsible
in the question ; e.g.,

for/ especially
I will be responsible for $2.00 ; o k'o-i ren liang-kuai ch'ien
pf
is
am m&
To acknowledge an account or debt ren-chany |g gg.

To disavow responsibility puh ren chany 5f> |g ^.
Mai JJ is the general word for <to buy', and is the one
ijfc
usually
but the Chinese use several different words

to
the
article
These probably
according
they wish to purchase.
vary in different districts, but the following list will at least be a
employed by foreigners
guide
Jit
ch'w.
ieh.
HSj
To
pull apart
to haul.
To
to intercept.
cut
off
^g uah.
tih.
1 -4
ch'eng.
flf
4
jj*
2
}[}j
To
To
ts'u.
iu.
Buy
HK*He
scoop out
to dig out.
lay in grain.
To
;
To
style.
Vinegar.
Oil grease
three feet of calico
weigh.
steelyard.
paint.
ch'ce (or chieh)
has gone to buy grain
san ch'ih
t'a ch'ii tih -liany
185
fjjj
pu
jj
Jt (or
ff? iff.
^)
MANDARIN
22.
Buy
a bushel of rice
Tell
him
to
ua
buy
^$
lai
Jf
pjf fjfc fj
has just purchased two
chin man-t'eo lai flj, g| f$ jig Jp
He
How much
mi Jg
ih-teo
~2^ Jfc.
three Ibs. of mutton
iang-ruh
shao ch'ien
PftlMEft.
#.
bread
Ibs. of
fj|
vinegar shall I buy
chiao t'a koh san chin
Ten cash worth
tih ts'u lai ? k'o-i ta sh'ih-ko ch'ien
n + tais a
&aas
$, 17
four ounces of
65
t'a ts'ai
ch'eng
Hang
$*
fjjf
lai
till
o k'o-i ta to-
Kl ff ^>
ffiltf
oil ;
s'i
|g fjjf 2j.
Hang in lai ff
Buy
I want to buy six ounces of wine ; o iao chuang luh Hang chiu
ffi/^
to-shao repeated, forms such phrases as, HowO/w
or
>J?
'
ever many or much ' ; ' As many as
e.g.,
he
wants ; t'a iao chi-ko chili t'a chi-ko
Give him as many as
S 1
^ ^
'
ft fl ft ft ft flall, whatever the number
HL
Reckon them
shao
Ch'ih
4.
'
suan
iu to-shao
to-
%%>}?&%&
Lesson
her
[Jg
III.
as applied to a vessel
means the amount she
'
draws/
'
draught
That
e.g.,
vessel
ch'uan ch'ih
s'i
draws more than four
ch'ih to *hui ||S f

|g in addition to
Ch''ih-fan $fc
lent of, ' to get a living by
lives by the sea
shui
yfc
of
feet
^^
ordinary use,
water
na-t'iao
7]^.
is
often the equiva-
e.g.,
he
fan ft fc
ft |g.
Every man lives by
ch''ih
its
|7g
'
He
k ( ao shui
$j
own
his
pg
a sailor
is
[lj,
t'a eh'ih
calling
ch'uan-shang
k'ao shan
ch''ih
tih
shan,
7JC pfc -fc
rations
as,
Hang Grain
provisions, is similarly used
That man is a soldier na-ko ren ch'ih Hang ffi f@
P
flsometimes for the
is often repeated with compound words
Iu
;
jffl
sake of emphasis, sometimes for the sake of euphony ; e.g.,

To have a good foundation iu ken iu chi
g.
Where in English we use is ' to indicate a condition or quality,
'
He is wealthy/ Chinese often uses
as ' This is reasonable
or,
an adjective or an
iu, followed by a noun, instead as with us,
^^^
'
'
adverb
e.g.,
That statement
He
is
is
well-to-do
reasonable ; na-chii
t'a iu ch'ien fa
Used
idiomatically /j| iu frequently

as applied to time or things ; e.g.,
Do you want any more ?
b 'U.ft
He
* T 4f T
was there a long time;
hua
^ ^.
has the
I have plenty
iu
li
gj$
meaning
of
hai iao
mo ?
t'a tsai-na-li lu riMtri
186
^] fg
^ S-
'
plenty/
iu
fy ^
lo
iu
MANDARIN PRIMKK.
Ch cmff f^ used
22.
7
person on leaving, is equal to 'Good-bye
( )n
t*t(ii-hiu'i.
as is also ]p^
entering a room | cluing addressed
After you.'
to one going in means,
The following list gives most of the prepositions and adverbs of
to a
'
place in constant use

In the midst among
:
tsai-chong-chien
In the middle; txai-tang-vliong

Behind txai-hco-t'eo % ffe ]jf[.
4
The right that which
;J iu.
"m
fgj.
rfr
*$*
The
tso.
on the
is
right.
left side.
On
On
the right side; t8ai-iu-})ien % ;f 5^.

the left side; teai-tso-pien % S. ?&
In front ; tsai-ch'ien-t'eo %
fiff.
Here
tsai-chw-k'uai
fa Jj- ;gjj. ^
There; tsai-na-k'iiai
^b fflS fil- ( TT i
11
u o
,,
W* %& xUsedpnncipallyintheSouth.
,
Above ; tsai-kao-t'eo
tt iRf H- (
Iu this place tsai-ts'i-ti fe jjfc J^.J
wherever
^Va-/i J6
e.g.,
| repeated
Wherever one looked there were people ; na-li k ( an na-li iu ren
;
Tao
xf or
^ and
verb denotes necessity,

;
hua
na-li shoh na-li tih
Puh-teh-puh /p
etc
<
JiJ gft
may
Û
JIS
$f IS-
>^ puh-neng-puh preceding a

be translated by ( cannot but ....';
/^
"|g
e.g.,
I cannot but go
He
bound
is
Huei
[J,
'
translated
to
pien ^g,
whenever
Wash
it
^^^^
o puh-teh-puh ch'ii
come
^>
puh-neng-puh lai flj xp "fb xp ^.

or similar words repeated with verbs may be
'
'
;
t'a
as often as
every time you use
'
etc
it
e.g.,
long ih-huei hsi ih-huei Jg *
0.
ft
We
reckon accounts as often as you make purchases;

mai ih-huei tong-hsi suan ih-huei chang .R^-0^'gf>^~-> EHLai 2j and -^ ch'u repeated or separated by a verb denote
will
'
repetition
e.g.,
talked back and forth and have settled nothing

shoh-lai-shoh-ch'u hai sh'i muh iu shoh ting
fP5 |^
They
Great numbers went to and fro
Tui
J is
'
writings
used as a verb,
'
pair or brace
To check
and
Let us check the accounts
**-*
A
pair of flower vases
Add
little
hot water
;
;
lai lai ch'u
for
(
'
k o-i
to
ch f ii tih ren
to fluids
chang
ih-tui hua-p'ing *
tui ih-tien k f ai shui
187
t'a-men
to
2j
compare/ as accounts or
Adding
pa
^î
'
e.g.,
tui-ih-tui
fj
pj"
jy
^ ^f.
gjjj
gg
^.
ffi
MANDARIN PRIMER.
22.
NOTES.
^ usually takes
Ko
a.
ts'i
when not preceded by any
descriptive word.
though a book word, is continually used in readyand

so used is understood everywhere.
phrases,
c. Sheng
frequently takes "f hsia with no difference in
)}|
b.
CJii
made
meaning.
d.
g an ^
Chang
as used in Section 2, stand for

?
as ' A.' and i B. in English.
two
hypothetical persons, and are used
p]
jg
victorious every time Pa-men ta ih-chang sheng ih-chang.

He understands surgery, but not pathology t'a long uai-k'o, puh tongnui-k'o.
There is no such custom muh iu chce kuei-chu.
They were
That teacher is very unmannerly na-ko hsien-seng ih-tien kuei-chu tu muh in.
Taste and see if it is good ch'ang ch'ang hao puh hao.
Select two large ones chien liang-ko ta tih.
I will commission you to do a little affair for me
o t'oh ni t'i o pan ih-chien
;
hsiao
si.
How many
are left over? sheng (or sheng-hsia] to-shao ?
The Prefect issued a proclamation yesterday Chi-fu tsoh-Vien ch'uh kao-sh'i.

Bach place has its own customs ih-ko ti-fang iu ih-ko ti^fang-tih kuci-chil.
;
We have all sinned against God o-men tu teh-tsui Shang-ti.

Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners Chi-tuh le-su chiang shi uei
iao chin tsui-ren.
;
The
bird he gave me sings constantly ; alas

it has
harvest this year is not so good as last.
That large tree bears fruit once a year. He has gone to Peking to
study astronomy ; there is no one here competent to teach him.
Where is the food that was left over from yesterday ? If two
nations go to war, it is uncertain which will conquer and which will
Translate
just flown
away.
be defeated.
The
How much
have you over of that 3,000 cash I gave

is there
nothing over ; it was not enough.
The proprietor of the shoe shop on the main street has engaged ail
additional assistant.
That coolie is very strong he was able to lift
that large stone tablet by himself.
The hairs of your head are all
numbered. Mrs.
constantly speaks of the failings of others, and
you yesterday ?
Not only
I beg your pardon.

I hand this copy of
provokes people to anger.
the New Testament to you
on no account make it dirty. I want
to go on the street to-day to buy a few pints of rice very well, buy
and bring back with you two Ibs. of pork and one Ib. of fish.
The Gospels say that Jesus came to earth in the West, in Judaea.
;
He grew up in His
When He
carpenter.
father's
house,
and
for
thirty years
was a
years old, He left His father's

home and travelled all over Judaea, from north to south, from east
to west.
He both preached and healed. When He saw a blind
man,
him
He
gave
to speak.
was
thirty
Him sight; when He met a dumb man, He enabled

He performed all kinds of miracles.
Writing Exercise :-Jt
ggfcMJSMiifglJgflR.
188
19.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
READING LESSON
XXII.
22
-f-
City Ramble IV.
ft
1r
16
"
#;4fc ft
Tif*
JEi
ffi
IP
^cl^ff
M^^
ivHv jg
& ^ Used in an accommodated sense.

Intimate to love dearly.
Kuei-chong ^ g Honourable.
Chie-iong
Cfrin-ai $,
;/, f 55 To manifest clearly to make clear.

Chiang-seng fT$ 4fe To descend and be born to come down to the world.
Ch'eng liao ren shen Jifc T
H- ô become incarnate to become a man.
Ih shen tih tsui
full of sin.
flij ^ Entirely sinful
Shan iu shan pao, oh iu oh pao ^^f$||,
Good has a good
reward, evil an evil recompense.
g- Unable to endure.
9. Tang puh ch'i t%
/TzA
S^SIR
10.
ii.
12.
Pu
r
To make amends for.

Poh-li J$ ^ To escape from as
Shen neng
^g Divine power.
f)|}
evil habits, etc.
fi|i
189
MANDARIN PRIMER.
22.
ft ft
fl
|B
^%A
A
si
IS
So hsing so uei
C/M 4 fd
To
ff
p/j
record
Shuh-chia
ffi
ffi
pj|
15 That which he did
put on record.
To manifest to make
actions.
to
How may
clear.
that be seen, or
E Wrong.
fK
-a,
Ui
58
Piao*-ming*
Tsen chien-teh ni feJi^yfa
Ts*o-cVu
mw
%L
ss
"E
pfttj
iij
-ft
Ransom
price of redemption.
190
known
MANDARIN
_h
1
H
22.
JBl
1'IM.MKK.
Teh-i
ffi
ft
A So that.
On good
2.
Ho-hao
3.
Pi-fang feng
jflj
an illustration.
4. Tâi-chu
jj
l.(t
il
ife
pa
Jt
terms with
reconciled.
M, Ha g| Let us take the
A wealthy
wind and the
person.
Ck'ien-ts'ai IS Ht Money
wealth.
6. En-chu
A benefactor.
5.
7.
Ih'Chih
uang shang hsing
~ it ^
191
^f
To go
steadily upward.
rain as
MANDARIN PRIMER.
23.
m=+n
LESSON xxni.
To
liu
A
kuan
*'
.
flow; to
drift.
Nature; disposition.
Abandoned.
Accustomed to.
class.
rih-pen
0'
Practised in.
To fall down or into.
To
And
Tl
also
Stars
Tools
uten-
furniture.
4
|
seng-i
Trade.
tah-ing
To respond
pen-lai
Originally
at
hsiao-hsin Carefid
garden
an or-
to accede to.
spark.
as
but.
planets.
ing
uen
vhia-ho
sils;
reng-chiu Still
break.
To solve.
To kneel to bow
down to.
kuci
before.
gong.
Broken.
Japan
Japanese.
To lose. To change.
quality.
first.
;
cautious.
chard.
&
Eternal perpetual.
tah
To
To
reply
scatter
ko-nien
time
re2
to.
spond
sah-
to
pao-fu,k
sow
to
talk wildly
Military
uen
en
ch (
t8
ing
\
iony-iien
warlike.
rect, as
so tied up.
Perpetually;
eternally.
inf/-hsu
To promise
a promise.
shave.
Clear
square
time; a turn.
meal.
To
t<i
when
to
Lies.
lie.
Year's
next year.
cloth for tying up

bundles ; a bundle
to let loose.
To
New
;
chi-hshiy
Memory.
(Jor-
pure.
an account.
Gas.
oh'ieh-ch'ieh-tih
Blue. Indigo.
Ian
pao
Earnestly
A parcel. To wrap.
Tiao
$$.
C" ih-to
ilin
urgently.
A cloud.
as a Principal and Auxiliary Verb.
As
1. Tiao jfjg is used both as principal and an auxiliary verb.
an auxiliary it is heard much more frequently in the South than in
the North.
sentences,
It
is
used with the verbs illustrated in the following
and also with
fjf
ta
j|g
ch'i
low/
Oema unwrnur/ht form

192
and g
hsi.
nothing ux
23.
Mv
has dropped on the floor;
pencil
to
#.
'*$
lie cannot
o-fi/i
jti/t
Into t&Q/i-t
T-
Jft
that salt
sell
7 itwith
You can remove'
m K 7 i* & * &
end
IKI-/CO
f'-a
/<'//
i/xn
puh-tidO
3JK f[U
HH
ft .'ft
it
Turn
this
Turn
to the south
nih\tia* ft
i><t
ohce-ko
/:/<>->
c/ii fit to
rh.'ii
ho
fc/i-tiao
t'co
l> '^
J&o
2.
end
f'to-fxi
ua*n0 nan tin a f)j

Jg.
not wash out if hot water is used
iony rch *<hni chin-
It will
L
for
paper
knife; ton'/
M ffi^$fy t&
7JC
as an Interrogative and a
Sun^^^V^
o pj" often forms ]>art of interrogative
us
jfcujgiices
Ls it so or not? /j'o .s7/> cha>-ko iany-tx'i ?
JJ f@ /fj
'
pj"
Pj^
.Before certain verbs

s
roughly corresponds to the word 'a
it
English, denoting that certain things may be loved,

loveable/ etc.: it has been already so used in a few
It may be prefixed to the following words which have
a suffix in
;
hated, as
Lessons.
occurred in earlier Vocabularies-:

Kvident it may be seen that .... k o-chien "pj" j|,. Loveable h'-o-ai^^ ^.
It may be known; which proves .... k'o-clii
"pj ^tJ.
l
i^v^^T^
*.JL*~/
Allowable;
Worthy
J:'o-hxhif/
of res])ec-t
Abominable
p[_^p.
k'o-ehing pj Q^.
detestable k<o-n- "pj ^.
Terrible; that which mav be feared; fco-p'a

3
Worthy of death ; k'o-shah pj" |g.J /^Z' ^'
"pj
']'g.
indicating Totality and Uniformity.

many words to convey the idea of sameness
or uniformity, and also to denote totality
the summing up of parts
it
into one whole
may be prefixed to the following words which
have already occurred
Of one heart, or mind ih-hsin
>fj>.
Of one mind ih-i
^.
I/?,
Jh
3.
"
is
prefixed to
Of the same
The whole
;
variety
ih-kal
ih-chow/
^ff.
^.
Together with i/i-t'ong -~ gj.

All together; ih-k'mvi-ri^
-^-
J.)
T^
Continuously ih-licn
Jjt.
Of the same way, or quality, or company; ih-lu
The Avhole family ih-chia
^.
The whole body the whole of ih-t'i
|
;
-ft
n P
v*
Also,
hoiKj.
In
'The suni
all
to
total
sum
up.
All; all at once; ih-ch'i
the whole of
With.
'
^ From ^-c/t
193
dtfc From
ih-lwnu/
Together, idyrws^ $yv\***~ L
;
/,
/.s/
dfc 4 -
Even; uniform. All.
'
'
'
MANDARIN PRIMER.
23-
Supplementary: Lesson IV.

Ckien
4.
to
come
used iu certain connections in the sense
is
'
of,
To expose
and as a sign of the Passive <v/.,

Chinese paper must not come in contact with water
Ohong-
to
in contact with,'
kueh
puh-teh shui 41
$ft .H .3LS ?X*
ts'ao fany-fat
Thatched houses must *irot"t)~e exposed to lire
chien puh-teh ho
'& >&.
^ s soon as ^ cTrmelntoôntact with fire it was burned ih chien
ho chiu shao-liao
^C St j^ .1His disease is no betfer; t'a-tih ping pnh chien hao j&flljfjFft'/^ j|, jf
Don't be offended pull iao chien kafti
'g.
|g
ch'i chit')}
^%^
His malady is a
ch'ing ih-tien^ -*
Teachers
chin 4
lighter to-day
To
(
'lasting,'
prefer
little
chhi-t'ien t'a-tih inng chiei
divided as to wnether
arfe
chien: or Kg? citing; or/
should be used in the sense of

j
Southern teachers usuall
materialêtcj
prohibit; to restrain
enduring' as
chin<j.
That thing will not stand use; na-ko tong-hsi pii/i, chin (or
T>
(or
chien) iong ft f@ |C
)(ffi;J
This garment stands wear; ohce-cMen i-shang chin (or chien)
ch'uan
Tsai
'
often the equivalent of
is
responsibility etc.; and

Wealth and honour
'
To
consist in
To
rest with
'
as of
power
'
as,
^^^
rest with Heaven ;/*/ kuel tsai t'ieu

I take the responsibility of that matter; n<i-chien si tsai o
The
practice
hsing shan puh
(jfjôgûegsi^
uipê^-Ujpt^jn words
consists in
'
Sluing J^
account ; as,
Put
it
is
to
account
my
As
applied to a stream
denotes to go with it ; e.g.,
vees,
g^
WTAbove
^
To be
/S'z
'
4a
H i? Mark
after
the tenth verse
as used with
in difficulties
The shopkeeper
^f
/it
difficult to
7jC
go up
<
for
next
as applied to the order of
Mark
Ma-t'ai tsai
Ma-k
Lu-chia
tsai
Ma-k'o
teat ti-sh'ih chieh i-shang
may
either
mean,
To
i-hsia
Jg. jfp
Ê
^J^-fÛSiU Jl*
be engaged
'
or,
as,
is in
hsia shui iong-i,
H-
'
an
shang o-tih chang "pf jy J^

|JJ |g.
denotes against the current, as
""f" Asia
chapters, books, etc.; e.g.,

i g nex * to
or comes before
;
i:
Luke comes
in
k'o-i
it
It is easy to go down stream

shang shui nan
;JC
Joined Avith jy i it is used
fr
^*
!S? ffi^Sas 'iin item
employed as a verb 'To ente'r
tsailfsiu, faaijisin
trouble
p'u-hu in
194
liao si
fj
"7*
~V*
MANDARIN
am engaged
tone, to
is
& g ft & m
Thp
bartier
is
IE
o k'ati t'd
home keeping house
at
4:h DJ5
xlii
koch
also
7;^r/t
it
means
As
3c
(
'ff It'
ing fcuan
Ma
tsai
t'i-t'eo-tih
according to circumstances; k'an

to
li
circumstances require
7
;
<^ */
t
indicates direction
Adapt your conversation
xi
e.y. }
si
hsing
your company
^^
lâ/n^ren
PP'
BA<
the 1st
in
* X * (pijJ^JU^ **IM~~U
'
<W ^*
a (wi-wi-fi hîn */m

official
uuifi iu
.sjf
->. -M~ -***4
t-
is
'
an upright
fe'an-meSTiJ ffl
ffi
In idiomatic usage
or
or It depends on
Ac-t
o h#ien-t#ai hi
e.g.,
there reading;
think he
X *)
23-
applied to reading; to thinking; and, read
is
watching
He
now, and have no time;
%%.% *(8
J"'a>v
IMJIMKR.
ft y,
sKoh-hua
depends on the price k'an chia-ch'ien kao ti

(J
"K iSIn which direction does England lie ? in the We$:)iy-kueh
"*
\k<an)na-tiif(inv? k'an hsi-fang
It
CVwu
is
a word, the force
^ H (^)S5
by practice and observation.

to an understanding of its commoner uses
The Japanese caught
*>"(S^W^f-
and usage of which must be acquired

A few examples may, however, help
:
at the
expresû/and ^^j^)^' } Ri-pen

ft
IS itPeople came to him from every quarter ; * ren ts'ong s'i-fang
ckiu-liao t'a lai
^T
E
fe ^- '^^
That military official comes and goes witnouF any notice nako u kuan xhoh lal chin, IdL xhoh ch'ii chhi ch'ti
AWim)^ $
ren chiu-choh t'a-tih liua slwh
A^
Buy a box of matches while you are about it ',(chiu-sheb chih o

mai ih-hoh-tsi iang-ho
II
ft
^.
kNote the idiom in the third sentence
Said come, then came, said go,
then went/
Oh in, Jjfc so used after verbs repeated, conveys the meaning
H X^ ?W
'
that the action took place either without delay or without notice ; as,
No sooner said ( kill than he was killed ; shoh shah chiu shah
'
part
shoh ; jjj. chiang ;

joined to
such prepositional phrases as,
of
'
regards
As
i
:
As
luen
$fo
i
With
and
fan, forms
fj
reference to
'
'
;
As
to^; etc.; e.g.,
to his son's disease, I fear

ping, o p<a
lia-offi
it
cannot be cured
luen-tao
fa
$$&%?&$*&
f& 7 7I made no reference to Mr. Li's
o mnh
shohkaddLi
Ma
ft ^ % ft feijW ^ ^ y.
I will speak about
for you chcc-chien
o
chih
m shoh-taoâo^ #*&VlMiftft jjlfTJ
Hao
used in
in
ri-tsi-tiJi
chifpuh
tfl
affairs;
in
tih si
this affair
jff
is
some connections
case the emphasis is on hao.

It
and also as a superlative ; e.g.,
is
s'i
k'o-i
an ironical sense in which

'
also used in the sense of <
easily
195
MANDARIN PRIMER.
23.
Very
'
easy indeed
meaning that
it
was not easy
hao iowj-i
very heavy rain hao ta

jft J^ j^.
That man is easily gulled na-ko ren hao hong
'ii
NOTES.
a.
Japan
is
also called jgff: tong-iang.
'
Rickshaw
'
is called a
ch'ce because it was first devised in
If? f
jff toHg-'mng
Japan by a missionary. It was originally called a '.'Man's strength
carriage; 'hence the word Jinrickshaw A^jfi? the Japanese name for it.
/
p]
moon and
ri ileh hsing san kuang

The carperter uses all sorts of tools muh-chiang iong koh iang tih chia-ho.
Outside the city there are both flower and vegetable gardens tsai ch'eng uai
hua-nen ts'ai-uen tu iu.
Be careful not to break the gong hsiao-sin, pu/i iao ta p'o Hao lo.
chce-si o puh tah-iiig.
I will not consent to this
Sun,
stars
Question and answer i/i uen ih tali.

Beat him first and then see hsicn ta tâ ih-tuen, tsai shoh.
Originally I had two. fans o pen-lai iu liang-pa shan-tsi.
All the accounts are settled up ih-chîeh-tih chang tu suan ch'ing
Some people have two meals and some three meals a day iu ih-Vien
;
ch^'ih
liang-tucn tih, iu ih-fricn ch'ih san-tuen tih.

He knelt down and earnestly besought God to have mercy on him t'a kueihsia, ch'ieh-ch'ieh-tih cfr'iu Shang-ti k'o-licn t'a.
Heaven is a place where eternal happines is enjoyed t*ien-l*ang s/ri iong-iien
;
hsiang fuh tih ti-fang.
Translate
The small
Although he
is
bottle has fallen
wealthy, he
still lives
in a
down pick it up at once.

broken-down house. The
;
oil lamps, but now, generally speaking, all countries

The day the hospital was opened, both civil
use gas and electric light.
and military officials were there ; in all between twenty and thirty.
The Yellow River flows east right into the North Sea. That river
ancients used
without any warning, rising more than

"Which do
something to be afraid of.
It depends on the person ;
is better, to wear blue or red ?
think
you
it is better for a child to wear red and a grown-up person blue.
Do not lie on any account ; liars both injure themselves and others
That
Don't be offended with me if I tell you the truth.
also.
him
a
character
and
he
teach
at
once
I
is very bad
pupil's memory
it is that the child is spoilt by his mother.
of
The
it.
pity
forgets
His money is insufficient at New Year's time ; he cannot clear up his
is
very unreliable
rises
it
ten feet in one night
it
is
He
The seed you

upstairs reading the newspaper.
I
went
to the church
When
not
has
sowed last year
yet grown up.
When they had finished praying, a middleI saw them all kneeling.
man went into the pulpit and said, Let us sing hymn No. 102.
accounts.
is
aged
All the congregation at once opened their hymn books and began
in all they sang five verses.
to sing
They all then sat down and
All
God's
he
him
to
listened
said,
promises are trustworthy.
preach ;
;
Writing Exercise
ffi
&&*3 **#
196
CI
& 30.
MANDARIN
READING LESSON
23
I'KI.MFJJ.
XXIII.
The Astute Miss Feng
^ E
3* ft
ft ^
ft
$B
ft
ô
1ft
ft,
'IB
Chia*-u*
ffi
Family
^ $$
Kuan-chang
3.
Nen
4.
Sh'ih-fenfang-hsin
5.
Sni hsin
long rcn
6. Afa;/- mien- $$.
Ch'iien
puh
1%.
~\-
ft 1&
To be
(^ >b j;
after accounts.
A Was able to handle men.
ft]
fife
affairs.
To look
2.
7.
fT
1.
ft
ft
-^ -a
^,+
_h
^ m
I.
fr
Unavoidable
ta-sitan
Mind completely
at rest.
to one's liking.
;
difficult to avoid.
cfruh-koh j&
fl" .^! ji
Had
not the slightest
intention of getting married.

8.
iiei
nien JU
^ fa To give attention
to
to regard as the chief
thing.
9.
10.
f'ei*
ren*
^ X As a man ^ A ^
Chieh^-ctnad1-^
SF
was a bad man.
^ To form association
197
with
to
have intercourse with.
MANDARIN PRIMEK.
23-
ffl
ia.
f&
M &
fwk
ifio
*
cV ien
2. Ih-lien to-shao
fg || Worthless.
huei su
jî
5.
6.
7.
For several times
î? [a] |f
in succession.
^ To compel to marry.
$ Hamlet village.
Ch'iang*-ch'u* 531
l
4. Ts^ten -chuang* $'
3.
Keng-chong ^f || To cultivate.
Fah ch'ien f || To disburse monies to make payments.
Come what may no matter what
Puh kuan tsen-mo-iang / ^
Jg
;
^ ^
happens.
8.
that
Chang
in ch'ien in
li/i
$;
&
tfi ~J]
Presuming (on the
had both wealth and power, or influence.

9. Chîng-tsao ^ tji Very early in the morning.
10.
T'eo-ch'ien tseo
12.
0f[ )|y
Went on
ahead.
Y ^ Serving maids slave girls.

Sui-hsing ^ ff Following on.
11. Ia-t*eo
198
L. 24.
fact)
MANDARIN
The farmers people about

To alight from a horse.
1.
Chuang-hu
2.
/&m
3.
K'uh-liao ih-ch'ang
4.
Tong
5. CJi'iu
;//
ch
fi
,^
"["
ing
Hfl
cfceng chi
Tsai k an ih-pien S-
7.
Hsien ren
Idlers
23.
the village.
~ ^ Had a good cry.
%t )& 2.
ft
to be affected.
The time when
the harvest was ripe.
~* fl Gave one more look round.

;
loafers.
^- Thatched cottage.
8.
Ts'ao fang
9.
Kuang^-ching^ Jt ^C
10.
/&#
&
11.
Tao cfruh
Jp:
To move the emotions
sh'i
6.
$\
I'lMMKK.
hsia ming-peh
fij Jh
situation
"p
To empty
outlook.
Took
J|
out.
199
in the situation.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
^ $* The seat.
1.
Tso pail
2.
UeP-tsi* Hi ^F
3.
Chia ren
4.
Tien
t'eo
5.
Ling
liao
6.
Chi nei
SjC
jjj|
ft
Chiao-fu |f
lh-k'eh
Inside
5*c
îj
that hangs round a chair
a screen.
servants.
To nod the head.
ming $(~f
7.
Chioh-fn
A Retainers
JPJJ
8.
9.
The curtain
fts
Received instructions or commands.
within.
Chair bearers.
In no time
Never used alone, and slightly bookish.

Also called #J
in a short time.
M K Coolies.
200
$jf
$J.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
24.
LESSON XXIV.
All
eh
rn
To
entirely.
suan Sour
use or supply to
the utmost.
k<oh
To thirst.
ha
Vicious; depraved.
Thirsty.
To smear
<tli
over
so
ch<
Heterodox.
Grieved.
acid.
oh
ny
lock
to
rub
to wipe.
to lock.
To take openly by
force. To snatch
To
ing
stop
to delay.
to rob.
Suitable.
ch
The
Sweet.
shoulder.
Jc
iien
ch
to
ch
To be willing; to be
desirous of. Avow.
iangTo take; to hold.
accept.
connect.
tai
for.
mi
To deceive to delude.
To lead or go astray.
To punish
fine.
eh
hsieh
choh-chih Impatient ;
anxious.
ia-t ( eo
Slave girl
kan-hsin
Willing
to
contented.
4
Anxious; hurried;
fen-fu
To command
a
mi-huh
command.
Error;
to
deceive.
urgent.
To rest to
To desist.
;
"
chiang-lai In the future.
stop.
2
To
punish ;
punishment.
waiting maid.
-ff*
Sweet
hsing-fah
t'ien
Suddenly
all at once.
To look towards.
15th of the month.
ih
Blinds; curtains.
hope.
ch
ing-tang Satisfactorily
To mislead. Doubt.
To expect;
uang
Willing.
hull-ran
iien-i
lien-ts'i
2
punishment.
hu
Korea.
-p
hsing To punish; punishment.
To
kao-li
settled.
Sign of the future.
fah
To
To
ts
Sign of the future.

Used as
pa. Read
4
chiang
general.
To treat. To wait
.
Willing;
voluntarily.
To receive ; to meet.
pleasant.
C/mi
Various uses
of.
1. Chin ff is a word, the force of which must be learnt from

'
examples and practice. The general idea is that of entirely/ but no
one English word conveys all the meaning. The following examples
shew its use with nouns, and also before and after verbs
:
E9
5L
Ift
All within the four seas are brothers.
201
HAND AKIN PRIMER,
24.
To do
one's duty as a
man
chin ren
s'i
||?
A 3f-
The uttermost the extreme limit chin-t'eo

5j
With all one's mind and strength; chin-lih chin-i
Use up all the material you have; chin ligo
;
Most
excellent
entirely
good
chin mei chin shan
Entirely ; chin-hsing
f}.
He says nothing but evil ; t'a chin shoh huai hua
There is more than can be spoken ; hua to shoh puh chin |
Si-
He
has inexhaustible wealth
Chiang
and
Jjff
iu iong-puh-chin-tih ch'ien
t'a
its Uses.
is the word commonly

used in books as the
2. Chiang
equivalent of Jg 2}a as a g ig n of the Object. In addition, it indicates
proximate future, in which case it is usually followed by |jj iao;
but }jf 2j chiang-lai may be applied to both the immediate and
y^*/~'
distant future as the connection
may demand;
He
JEE3
is
^>^
e.g.,t
nearly forty years old; t'a chiang-fyhinjs'i-sh'ih sui
}f^
In time to come, all nations shall worship God chiang-lai koh

kueh tu iao pai Shang-ti
ch eng
As he was about to enter the city
; chiang iaq_chin
;
{ff^^pgP^^J:^.
.
Supplementary: Lesson V.
3.
The following
to time
list
gives the words
commonly used
in referring
en
In speaking of days, Q r'ih may be substituted for 5J
ko
is
added
and
some
other
places,
frequently
Nanking, Peking
g or chin-r'ih-(jcoj 4fr (0|i..
To-day; chin-r'ih
;
as,
To-morrow ming-rih 0^ H
or 'ming-r'ih-ko 0^
H (JS) e*c
to-morrow heo-t'ien, or heo-rih

5c or
Q
ao
as
have
29 or 30 days as,
Months are termed ft ^ a or *J^
they
This month has thirty days chce-ko iieh ta JJ f@
fc
Nien
may take a N. A. when an adjective is used e.g.,
Seven years of famine; ch'ih-ko huang nien
huang. Barren ; drought. Reckless false.)
uen nim.
The first year of an Enperor's reign is known as jg
Day
after
(From 5
uen.
shang and
The
first
the chief.)
\U>u;
TF^W are. aprjliejd to years as \vll as to months; e.g.
Last year ; shang-men

Next year ;Asm-m'eri) or lai-nienl~f
Year after next heo-nien
;
$..
202
<rv
^VVA^V^X
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Tsao
is
JfL
used
in
It frequently takes
many
24Good morning '.
'
places as the equivalent of

a correlative ; as,
cli'ien as
ffi
few years ago
tsao chi nien ch'ien
g|
IpL
is
Ta
prefixed to certain designations of time
The day preceding the day before yesterday
ffi.
as,
ta-ch'ien t'ien
fa
*3cThe year preceding the year before last ta-ch'ien-nien ;fc Ifr 4The day following the day after to-morrow ta-heo-t'ien J^fe 5cThe week before last ta-shang li-pai
Jt jjig ?f
The week after next; ta-hsia li-pai
~^* jjjg ^f.
The year following the year after ne*t; ta-heo-nien
4.
;
Ko
j^ as applied to time
^^
used in the sense of
is
To
observe
or
'
keep
as,
To observe a birthday ko seng-r'ih *^

H
To keep holiday ko-chieh
fg.
To observe the holidays of the 5th and 8th months
J. Jj |jj,
/\ ft fj.
chieh; kopah ueh chieh j
;
Now
ip <$, ft
At
at the present time
ru-chin
ko u ueh
ts'i-k'eh
^ ^,
m-.
this
time
chce luiei-ri $j[
Afterwards; ran-heo
Some
From
w-
hsien-chin
J.
ko-heo
other day ; kai-r'ih

henceforth ; from
ffi
gjr
fijz,
jg
^.
now onward
^ t, ^
^.
ts'ony chin i-heo
This life and the life to come chin-seny, lai-seng

Ancient and modern ku chin -f ^.
Sooner or later at some time or other tsao nan JfL
;
Formerly
?> Ik
heretofore
ts'ony-lai
hsiany-lai
Bjj.
su-lai
Some time ago on ahead

;
In
In
In
In
bygone times
t'eo-li
or t'eo-ch'ien
$](
At
the start
Mediaeval times
divide
chony-ku
k'ai-t'eo-r'i
ch'i-ts'u
The Chinese
^)J,
"JJ,
*fc.
^ gj
^.
j^ ^J.
"gf
r$*
-fc.
up time into periods of two weeks called
jjj
In the country, farming operations are regulated by

and many local events are fixed in relation to them. Their
chieh-ch'i.
thenij
jfij
in the beginning
In the beginning t'ai-ts'u

Primeval times t'ai-ku
Olden times shang-ku J^
^$,
|J, $% gj.
formerly ; hsien-ch'ien ; ch'i-hx'cn

former years; uang-nien ; tsao-nien
^, ^L f.
former days ; uang-r'ih
time to come ; uang-hsia
f.
Previously ; a long time ago ; teao-hsien ^ ^.
;
names and approximate dates are as follows
203
MANDARIN PRIMER.
24,
lih-ch'uen,
Spring begins.
February 5.
u-shui, Rain water.
ruary 19.
ching-chih, Excited
March
^t
Feb-
fjz
20.
Summer
begins.
tober 8.
HJ [^ shuang-chiang, Hoar frost

descends.
October 23.
Winter
j
lih-tong,
begins.
November
Grain
If: hsiao-siieh,
Little
snow.
in ear.
November 22.
la
siieh,
Heavy
g?
December 7.
snow.
solstice.
3v
fills.
6.
Summer
Winter
December 22.
tong-ch'i,
June 21.
hsiao
shu,
July
ta-shu,
7.
>J
mang-chong, Grain
J[ jg hsia-chi,
Sep-
8.
Û
21.
June
AV hite dew.
ft ch'iu-fen, Autumnal equinox.

September 23.
Ochan-lu, Cold dew.
ffi
5.
hsiao-man,
heat.
23.
tember
ch'ing-mwg, Clear a n d
bright.
April 5.
kuh-il, Grain rains.
April
May
Limit of
August
H puh-lu,
&
insects.
begins.
7.
eh'u-shu,
5.
Hh-hsia,
Autumn
tih-eh'iu,
August
ch'uen-fen, Vernal equinox.

March 20.
May
j>jf
heat.
Slight
January
Great heat.
Little
han,
7.
July
solstice.
cold.
6.
Severe
han,
cold.
January 21.
Hsia ~f is applied to individuals when two people are in question,

and is the equivalent of the English word party
e.g.,
Both parties came to an understanding Hang hsia pa s'i-vh'ing
'
'
shoh ming-peh
MT
JG
fe1# Ift
beginning of an action and
as applied to animals it means To beget
e.g.,
To begin to Avrite to write hsia-pih "f ^.
To commence operations hsia-sheo ~f ^.
To discontinue going to school hsia-hsioh
To dismiss an employe ; hsia-kong
T,.
To get off a horse hsia-ma ~f J^.
lt also indicates the
its
discontinuance
'
'
^.
To
(Q
lay an egg
hsia-tan "f ^.
Horses and asses beget foals ;
foal ; a colt.)
chu.
;
lii
ma
hsia chu
Chih
(
t i
in
as a sign of the Indirect Object

Southern Mandarin e.g.,
$fc
I will
is
|(
"p gQ.
largely superseded
by
buy you a lock
t i
ni
mai ih-pa
.s-o
^ ^ fo JJ
Jg
^.
There are many words used in Chinese to intensify the thought,

and which roughly correspond to descriptive clauses in English e.g.,
The steamer goes like the wind ho-luen-ch'uan tseo-tih feng
;
*K $w 7m 7E N}
K204
MANDARIN PRIMER.
The
soldier's
k'tiui.
sword
No
it
as sharp as a spear; ping-till tao chen sh'i

(
($$* f 'H<l- A sharp point ; tip of a lance.)
do it; kan-k'iun. (or chin) tso J| $ (or Jj|) fjj?.
the chair on their shoulders than they flew along
is
ls(!KifJJJ|3g|jt|Etfe'
Hurry up and
with
24-
sooner was
(Jiiao-t-H'i
t'a-men chiu
Hi
shwng-liao chien,
m * - J: 7 M, ft f & f# * J&.
;
t'ai
till
p ao
l
fei
ffi
The student should make
note of similar words that he
may meet
To be
his reading, or in his intercourse with the people.

able to use them aptly is one mark of a good speaker.
with
in
^p]
Are you willing to study? No ni iicn-i hsioh, puh ilcn-i hsio/i f puh uen-i.
The luggage is all ready; hsing-li sheo-shih t'ing-tang.
In all things we must treat men courteously peh si iao i li lai ren.
The sheep has gone astray iang Iseo mi liao In.
He was deceived by Mr. Ko f'ci sheo liao Ko Hsien-seng-tih mi-huh.
Don't be anxious puh iao choh-chih.
That child is most aggravating na-ko hai-fsi chi/i-si ren.
He saw the city in the distance t a uen-ilen-tih uang-chien cfreng.
The Koreans robbed him of everything Kao-li ren pa Pa-tih tong-hsi ch'iang
;
teh kan-ching.
Men who
break the laws of heaven cannot escape punishment fan t'ien fah
tih ren mien puh liao sheo hsing-fah.
God treats men graciously Shang-ti tai ren iu en.
That person originally had a depraved mind, and
Translate:
walked in evil ways ; his father and mother exhorted him a good
;
Later on he broke the

times, but still he would not listen.
laws of the country and was taken to the official, who first beat him
100 blows, fined him Tls. 50, and said that if he were brought before
him again he would punish him more severely. In all probability
he was deceived by evil men.
For three weeks in succession it did
not rain, so the inhabitants of the place became anxious and carried
the idol out and set him by the roadside
now they are on the look
out for rain, but so far it has not come.
Vinegar is sour and bread
is sweet ; to
say that two people have drunk vinegar, is a figure of
The
speech.
carpenters stopped work at 12 o'clock and resumed
work at 2 o'clock. The weather is hot and the road is bad ; rest
awhile.
He treated me as a child. Mrs. ^. told her slave girl to
many
down
and lock up the front door. Are you thirsty?

drink as much as you like.
The clock has
the
table
and
then
dust
the
stopped.
Wipe
clean,
legs of the large
I have used up all my money
chairs.
lend me a dollar or two.
In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth. All men
know that if they break the law they fear punishment, but if they
break the law of God they regard it as of no moment.
Why is
this ?
For the most part because they do not receive punishment at
the present time, and think it uncertain whether there is
any
let
there
is
the blind
water here;
punishment
in the future.
be so deceived.
Men
Writing Exercise
It
is
very lamentable that they should

is a moral
certainty.
reap what they sow, that

> ft
ft
g g g ^ g m.
205
MANDARIN PRIMER.
24.
READING LESSON XXIV.

$A
a
TMC
te
fi PJ i,
II.
Jt
t&A
is
^ "As the story goes "the words with which Chinese

Hoh tao
^ Bawled out.
Chcs ti-fang shl o-men-tih seng-i M
^. /t The business
Jf j| ^c1R
1. //
j/wA 15
novels usually begin.
2.
3.
^fe
p^J
of this place belongs to us. Certain sections e.g., by the river side, are
by separate lots of coolies.
To begin to commence operations.
4. Tong-sheo ^]
5. Ta-liao ih-tuen ff T
III To give a beating to.
6. Han-chiao nj$ n-J- To call out.
;
7.
8.
9.
10.
worked
7sen-kan
SK How do you dare to ?
Chiang-chin }& jJr Close up to; getting close to.
$j( Reading; bringing with.
Tai-ling
the opposite
ffi %$. Coming forward from
Ing-shang ch'ien-lai gl
^
^
direction.
@^
n. Huan kan shen-mo jg

J^ Why do you continue to follow ?
12. Chez si tsai ni jg
^ i/Jt The responsibility of this affair rests with you.
206
MANDARIN PRIMER.
24.
.,tf
mm
#E
It
15
$ I* IS
ft
ffl ffe
J&
--
1.
Ch'ang^-fu* mm ft
..jft
To support
the bride
is
usually helped out of the
sedan chair.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Hsien 1 k
ai l
Niu-ch'il f
l
$fc ffl
To
lift
as a curtain, etc.
aside
^ To wrench
Pi-ts'l hsiang-kuan ^t
Looked at each other.
CAÂ liao chih ^ T & Was excited and impatient.
off.
jft ffi Jl?
S/*
Odds and ends
sh'ih-Peo 5? S" |i
of stone.
.Mz rA^? 5i' tsoh ko hsiao Pan ^M^-f^ffS^n^ Regarded the affair as a joke.
8. Hsin*-chi* fo g\ Plan
device.
7.
'
9. Long* fi
10. Lcur-shlfl
11. Sui-ran .
thoughstill .
12. Puh hao
.
cage.
^ A rat
3
.
ch'ioh
a mouse.
4$
Note the
'
turn
'
of the sentence
to
shoh-hna
$?
|%
JJ3
207
Didn't like to say much.
Al-
MANDARIN PRIMER.
nR
m,
^t
^GL^
^
v
a.- T
$J
HL
>&&*
ffi
A&
%*
iJ
&&
JB
ffl
T.*S
&
_*
m T
fit
1.
.Sz
//o
-tfi/7
fi5 i&i
If
chcc-ko nien-i'eo 5E
?S f@
ift
Bi
Give up thought of
it
let
the affair die out of his mind.

2.
Cheng
ch'i IE 15
3. Ch'ieh*' 3g
principal wife.
concubine.
Iv. 25.
Dj? f^j To quarrel.
^ Nothing accomplished.
Tong puh ch'eng hsi puh chiu Jfe ^ ^
/ /z'00 5i ^f T ?P To be in trouble, or difficulty.
4. C/i'ao*-nao*
5.
6.
|?Jfc
7.
Kan-hsin
8.
Pa
'ft
& Willing
hsin iong chin liao fE
content to ..."
jfr
/H "^
the whole mind to.

9. Ren hsin cheng puh p a lui ta
not afraid of being struck by lightning.
l
A *b
IE
^ A present recompense.
^ 59 Bright brilliant.
10.
Chin pao
11.
Kuang-ming
T To
208
exert to the uttermost
tfl
to give
f^ ^T Upright people are
25.
LESSON XXV.
rtrt
lend
ft!
To
in
official seal
Demons
stamp.
quarrel
To maUe
11(10
ance.
To
////
stand up
Mixed
up, as a
deed.
hud
Still
Ashes
Talent
t*'<ii
To
dust
lime.
ability.
help.
class
in
To
aid
To draw.
ing
4
Cheap.
draw-
a picture.
e a n
India.
lih-tih'i
At once; im-
peli-hsiny
The
iany-ho
c-h'ao-nao
To
ho-sh a ny
tao-s'i
4
Taoist priests.
reh-nao Bustling; busy;

interesting.
kony-hto Merit.
3
efficacy ;
results,
tao-ti
After
good
2
To
/^/o
hi 1
A.
Weary.
drum. To drum.
To
A
san
to
in
lao-sh'ih
Honest; well-
jjcn-fen
Duty; obliga-
disposed.
arouse.
umbrella
all
the end.
suffer.
toil
quarrel.
>uddhist
priests.
-4-*
_ *.
Satiated.
;
people,
Matches.
eat to the full.
Merit
honour.
worthless.
To
To
in-fn
haste;
to help.
yet.
mediately.
busy.
u
confused.
guild.
Hurried;
a disturb-
Bustle; noise.
to es-
To draw
tablish.
to dis-
pute.
devils.
+
To
n/Jv rA
print; to stamp.
An
at
!
tion.
;
o
1
chie-ehie Elder sister.
parasol.
hony
To swell;
wei-mei 1 Younger sister.
a swelling.
Chiu
g{ joined to other words to indicate Promptitude.

In Lesson I V. Section (> jy^ c/tm is used to indicate sequence,
and also to denote that one action follows immediately on another.
Thus used it may either stand alone, or be reinforced by other
words to indicate that an act should be done without delay. The
commoner words so used are as follows
Instantly; forthwith; no sooner said than done;
$$ Hh-k'eh ;
2
gg J]^ sui-shi ; jg J^ ma-shang ; g| |p sui-chlh, from |p chih Imforthwith.
Then.
Indicates supposition.
mediately
I want that thing at once; na-ko-tong-hsi o-lih-k'ch chin iao
1.
&
mm*w
fc
ill >il >J&
Mm%
When a fault
is
known
209
it
should be amended.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
25.
It cannot be got
for
They applied
fa
m%
it IP
His
forthwith
it
chin-
J|^
t'a-mcn- sui-chih ken-choh iao
M-
foot swelled as soon as
ma-shany
teh-puh Uao
Uh-sh'i-tiJi
immediately;
ch'i-Iai
clwny
it
was struck
-
fy
fft
jjjj
ff
Jg|
t'a-tih chioh ih ta
gj
J;;
Jl
JJjjf
ty*.
Tao-ti JiJ jg and other Phrases indicating Conclusion.

To the bottom/ is used in the sense of
The phrase JiJ
tao-ti,
the English phrase to come to the end of
i.e., after all is said and
we arrive at the
done, a certain conclusion or final stage is arrived at
'
2.
j[j%
'
'
'
end/ the Chinese arrive at the bottom.' Let a story illustrate its
Years ago a lady living in an inland city brought
use and force.
some cheese from the coast and gave special instructions to the
To which
servant to put it in a safe place, as rats were fond of it.
'
it
might be true that foreign
any rate would not touch such stuff.
Consequently he left it in an exposed place, with the result that in
His only confession and apology was,
the morning it was clean gone.
tao-ti
cJi'iJi
Uao
eaten it after all
notwithstanding
jg jfg "J*
jglj
he replied, after smelling
(!W//w
that while
it,
rats
would
my
high opinion of them.

The following characters and phrases are of the same import
eat
it,
rats at
To
examine
Finally
A ch
The end
</
The
into.
finally.
To return to to go
To belong to. To
The
divide, as in arithmetic.
ch (
period ; a limit of
end
Mean. A
From
finally.
negative.
these are derived the following combinations

Ife chia-chiny
Finally; after all; in the end; etc.;
:
kuci-vh'i
~J*
moh-lino
ft
du HI (/-chin
7^
~|*
'ife
is
$J
dri-chony ; fiSi $ km'i-km

moh-heo.
inoli-moh-Uao ;
;
jfa
^^
Supplementary
Kan
3.
To
beginning.
The
time.
/;
long
start.
fflf
of.
time.
back.
still.
Finally.
J
>
finally.
all
The whole
"
tie
end
After
in the end.
Vocabulary
colloquially applied to a
few
JiJJ
I.
articles in the sense of
unadulterated
meat, wine, milk and vinegar arc said to be 'dry'
when no water has been added to them. It is quite common for
meat to be blown up with water to add to the weight ; this is spoken
of as kutin xhui Jg ?K r r/-?
Dry meat is high priced fain ruh cJiift-cli'icH t J^l^jMil^'Dry' milk strengthens the bones and sinews kan ni clniauy
'
'
-.
'
211)
M. \.NDA KIN
1'IM.MKi;.
Unadulterated vinegar never <MCS bad;
&
25.
lean
/.s'//
i<nn/
jti'li
IIIKU
*#
!fi
Unadulterated wine easily makes men drunk; k<m

JI -t Hf A-
dun, k'ai
rm it
/,;
T<ii
'a
as
same
(lie
Iin.s
belt,
JJi'jf,
English;
of
hell
( liinese
as in
figurative use in
'
is
also
a /one'; etc.
It
country';
coloquially employed to indicate a manner or style, as Milton says of

"
"
tlie devil, lie was
girded with snaky wiles;
e.g.,
lie has an exasperating
M&*&AMm
'
way with him;
t'a tai ch'i-ren
till
are outsiders, and speak with a Shanghai accent;
They
sin uai-Iu rcn, tai
iny-
-i-
Shanghai
k'co-in
fa
A,
i;
f|
%\*
jj
I'd -men
$$
?fr
ft-
Lesson VI.
Cheng
4.
'
'
upright
It
orthodox
the
also
is
the opposite of hale Jf|$ ; the one the equivalent of

'
the other of ' depraved ' ; ' heterodox ' ; etc.
;
opposite of
fan To turn over; to turn back.
is
'
;
The one may be
<
translated
'the right
by positive
by 'negative'
wrong side'.
As applied to time j cheng means 'Just; at that time during,
and so roughly corresponds to the present participle. Head cheng*
it denotes an exact sum, and is added to numeral
expressions to
Contrary.
side'
the other
'the
'
prevent unauthorized additions being made

The whole day ; cheng t'ien chia J
.
800
taels
Due
west
only; san-peh Hang cheng
e.y.,
^5*.
"0"
Hi JE-
cheng-hsi J "jg".
Exactly in the centre; cheng-chong J pf*.
Just as he was speaking; che-ng tsai shoh
;
hua
chi chien
n z n& mOrthodox
correct
; respectable ; proper ; cheng-ching Jg

jj.
the right side, that is the wrong ; chce-shi cheng 711101,
;
This
is
na sJufan mien
& J|
J9&
The
K V*
ffriK.
reverse of each other; ih fan ih cheng

K'ai [)3 iu some cases is repeated and does
jQ.
duty as both principal

and auxiliary. It is also used with many verbs which indicate to
'
to begin
to open
divide;
e.g.
There is no opening this door ; chce-ko men k'ai puh k'ai Jf
'
'
'
'
<
pygs * mOpen this box
^^
f
-,pa chce-ko hsiang-tsi ta-k ai j Jg f@
Jj* gg.
are
too
things
numerous, there is no room to place them ;
tong-hsi t'ai to, pai puh k'ai
i: ^, {$ T> li
Wind up the clock ; pa chong k'ai ih k ( ai jfl* |f g|j
|g.
Make out a receipt; k'ai ko sheo-t'iao gg f@ J{^ {^r.
It is used with the following verbs that have already occurred in these
The
^W
^
^ ^f
and ^
Lessons
tseo;
In addition to
:
huei-fi
J)^
fflch'ieh;
in-tnan,
chi-tJii
'f'
are used for
211
^ fang.
^ Q mo-
\ chu;4j* iso ;
to-huei-ri ;
gg huah; ffichang;
'When'?
jj
as,
M AND AKIN
25.
It
is
PliiMEK.
ready whenever you want
it
to-huei-n iao to-huci-r'i
in
lai tih ? Jg J3.
t iw-tirWhen was
JftMfii.
When did
Clwiifj
others
this
brought?
you arrive?
C/H
xJii chi-sh'i
ni mo-Jniei-r'i tao tih
jr denotes emphasis, as in reading
etc.
the opposite of
it is
song
? fo
Jg 'gf igj fa.
esteem in the treatment of
eh'iug in most of
its
meanings e.g.,
fe jjr Jj
fa].
How is it you speak without discrimination? tsen-mo shoh-hua
puh clii ch'ing chong ni ? >g jg J& f
;&J
fi ?!
To make no difference between important and unimportant -puh
fen ch'ing chong
ft
j|.
To esteem one and despise the other; chong-k'an chcv-ko, ch in<jk'cm na-ko fi
<g, Jg
||5 f@.
The meaning of the same word in English may vary very much
;
$!j?
this sentence; nien cliong dice ih-chii
Emphasize
in different sentences.
Thus in using the word strike/ we strike
a person', or 'an idea strikes us 7 , or ' we strike the right path'
while a band ' strikes up ', or workmen ( strike/
These various
'
'
uses, which must be very confusing to a foreigner, can only be

understood by observation and practice.
Similarly the word ta ^J*
is used with a
large number of words, some of which have been
already given others are added below
:
To
To
To
strike a
match
ta (or la) iang-ho
;
ff (or };) ffi ifc.
be victorious ta-slieng ; or ta-skeng-chang ff Jf or
be defeated ta-pai ; or ta-pai-chaiuj ff |[^ or ff j
Victorious every time; ta ih chang, tshcng ill cfangff
Defeated every time; ta ih cha-ug, pat ih chang ff*
To arrange to set in order ta-tien ff ij.
;
To fish ta-il 1ft ,@

To estimate; to consider; ta-Hang ^J ^.
To j)iit uj) an umbrella ta-#<tn ^J* |j^.
To fight; ta-chang, or ta-chia ff $fc or ^J* ^.
To yawn ta ha-ch'ien ^]* Ppf ft.
To plait the queue; ta pien-tsi ff ||f ~p
To determine to intend ta-saan ^J j|r.
To draw water ta-shui ff ?fc.
To trouble; to annoy; ta-chiao ff |^.
To sit in contemplation, as Buddhists do ta-tso ^J ^,
To make a rough draft ta ts'ao-kao ff
^".
To make enquiries ta-t'ing ff I.
To get (one's clothes) wet; ta s/iiJi fiao ff \j^ ~~f.
Go by way of IVing-kiang ta Ch'ing-r/nang two ff ffi
.
^ ^,
An
elder brother
is
are referred to in order as

Iao san, the third brother,
by f} hany,
row
^^
spoken of as
^^
and
(ao
so on.
as,
212
r'i
l( '
t, and
his brothers
the second brother
The order
of birth
is
indicated
MANDAKIN
What
am
is
your place in order of birth? ni limit/
the fourth (brother) ; o /HUH/ NI ffi ft jig.
NOTKS.
I).
is
flD
\ty
<-/ii
.'
fo ft
j$|.
confined to verbal altercation.
help with extra work to lend a hand' is

to help with money, food or clothing \8 *$
<
assist in a
(
koi\</-t<io,
(I.
C/i'ao-iHto
<i.
To
while to
r.
25-
I'UlMKK.
/liai
or
J[|
general way is
JJJj j)(tii(/-fxn.
while understood in the South is not so common as 5V
means 'fair'; 'just*.
jt'icH-i ; the former term also
fgi
Peh-hsing
"g"
refers to the people as a whole, as members

of the people in the house as ~g jj peh-
To speak
of the State.
hxhif/ is incorrect.
fa]
$(|
mart chcz shi ko reh-Jiao nui t'eo.

We must be mutually helpful o-inen iao pi-ts'i hsiang pang.
This umbrella is very cheap chcz-pa, san hen chien.
chcc-ko hua hna tih hao.
Thi.-i picture is drawn well
Lend me a hand cluing ni lai pang o-tih vicing.
A treaty was drawn up between the two countries Hang kuch lih-liao ioh.
This book was printed in Shanghai chcc pen s/iu shi Shang-hai in tih.
Kloquent Buddhist priests are very few in k eo-ts'ai tih ho-shang pnh to.
When you eat, eat sufficient ch*ih fan iao ch'ih pao.
The proprietor of that general store is very honest na isah-ho-p u-tih lao-pan
This
is
a busy
shi ting lao-shih.
The Lord makes amends by His merit

Kong PU o-uien tih ko.
Christ was on earth, He continually cast out

s/iang tih shi-heo ch'ang-ch'ang kan kuci.
When
Chu chiang
for our demerit;
demons
t'a-tih
Chi-tuh isai shi-
India is a very large country ; it is nearly as large as the

Translate :
Don't be in a hurry ; he will return
eighteen provinces of China.
Locks, umbrellas, blue cloth, matches, wine, incense
immediately.
Where are
and rice, may all be bought at the general store.
matches produced? in Japan.

Formerly they came from the West,
but afterwards the Japanese made them in large quantities and sold
them cheap, so that foreigners could not carry on that line of
The day
It is impossible to build houses without lime.
business.
he invited me to a meal there was neither enough rice nor vegetables,
The watchman beats his drum
so that I was not half satisfied.
My books are too many to put on the table. I must
every night.
Although his disease was

carpenter to make me a bookcase.
him
written
a prescription, after all
had
and
the
doctor
(]jr)
That basket seller is honest and
he would not take the medicine.
tells the truth.
Every man must do his duty. AVhen the Saviour
call
serious
was on earth He divided five loaves and a few small fishes, and
They all
gave them to 5,000 people, besides women and children.
ate to the full
and there was as much as they wanted. Both
Buddhist and Taoist priests are willing to chant for people, but
" If
money is indispensable therefore everybody says
you have
die."
if
must
live
have
none
money you may
you
you
;
Writing Exercise
ft
* '& H H*
ft
213
'ft
M-
MANDARIN PKIMEK.
25.
READING LESSON XXV.
Zl
|j|
Bookselling Trip.
ft T
IS _hviS
uft
^Pl
1^
ft,
m x
n ^ ft
HJi
ill
Sid* chih*
BP Immediately.
To cast off from a ship's moorings.
A^'rt/ clfuan [jf]
k'eh
fjf
Pilgrims who go to famous shrines to burn incense.
3. Hsiang
To start.
4. Tong-shen $]
5. T'ong cfreng M. tyfc A large city on the Yangtze.
A cloudy day.
in
6. :T'zV
p Earnestly.
7. K'u k'eo
8. ///^ y^'6'^ />^Vw ]^ P
By the side of the tiger's mouth a place of
1.
^
^
2.
^^
^
great danger.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
wing
Song
r
Aa
jg
f^J
To
lose one's life.
$
Jf /i\ Regarded
tang p'ang rl feug
Pnh tsai i ^
;y; To pay no attention to.
it
as a
wind blowing.
/W* /-w^/ in kong "^ 1U j ~4\ V) Would not regard it as an

Fen md ch'i si 5$ |^J
^ A plain matter of duty.
Pao hsin $$ fff To give information to carry the news.
;
214
act of merit.
MAN PA KIN PRIMER.
H p
A"wfl;/
i-5
bag
tsen-mo-iang
25.
a sack.
^^
.!f|
^ Come what may
on no account.
is only so used in the North

M Western suburb.
S/nii ic
^ Nobody whatever" not a single person
pith
I have troubled you."
Nan-uci
To trouble to annoy
Held on with a death grip.
ie puhfang sheo ?H
^
Hsi kuan
Ef
Hf|
ffi ih.
.$;
/// /><?
Han*
JJt -T-
-111
fl-;
chua-chu
:
f|
Surrounded.
JIH
ffi
S'i
Uei*-chut^&
j!
L.
Took
Perspiration.
To talk reason
21
26.
a grip
laid firm hold.
to discuss the merits of a case.

r
MANDARIN
25.
PTITMER.
#K
-ffi,
Sui o-men pa || fjj j^ ^ Must do as we wish.

//(7<9 }^ 7 Let go; 'dropped
him.
1.
'
2. 5tf//
3.
4.
5.
Pa s/ieo ih fan* fE ^Kuen* tS; A stick.

1
C////^
%k To lay hold
^ Gave his hand a turn.

of
and
specially used of the hair of the head
the queue.
to dig the nails into.
ffi To pinch
Tlie shoulder.
ChienWeo* M
Huen* ko ch'U & ^ ^ To faint away
The whole body JS J^ ^
Ton<>--shen j
6. C/i'ia 1
8.
9.
I..
ff bathed in perspiration.
28.
^ gg The tongue.
10.
SheW-freo 1
11.
Chang*
12.
ffuen* g| Horizontal.
Tablet sign board.
Pien 3
13.
family
,ff
is
To
swell.
^ -Q: Father and mother of the people the

chPfu* mu* |^
the model on which the Chinese government has been framed up
3
14. yJAV/
till
7.
'
'
now.
216
MAN DAI MX IMMMKU.
VOCABULARY
To dr
*H3
in the
JE.
sun.
get a sunstroke.
To hate to dislike.
hen
V.
To
Hen.
An
25.
Ax/
Read
Rjj
di^
"^
L
^||
Rotten.
fan
ch'cn
To
mi
Ragged.
thi
To
Hungry starved.
Hunger dearth
.
famine.
To fill up to satisfy.
To act in place of.
â v
ic
To
pci
father.
term of
gentleman.
prepare; to provide.
;
Perfection.
peel;
to strip.
lose. To cast
respect
;
'
k }
c/i'onf/
play. To play
to jest.
^1
cA
state to a superior.
Ax/
1 )O
earry on the back.

4
fo /The load of a
JfJI?
Stale, as bread, eggs, etc.

1
a pit.
Smashed.
2
well
drill.
beast of burden.
To break open to unTo tear down.

rip.
To escape to flee.
/xvA
'no
14
To
)pen; loose, of textures.

Thin, of liquids.
iny-''
expression of desire.
To
practise.
awav.
hnn Dry weather; drought.

Dry land as opposed
to water.
To endure;
''^
is
*4
JR
cA
II
An
open space.
spell; a job.
contribute ; to
4
ti-_/>t'/
to
4
To
iiin
To
ts'fdiy
freeze
icy
cold.
Luck.
range of
An
bin.
mmm
hills.
expression of
He
It.
has
(.'hi
Tin
a.
lost
fL
is
is
Russia
o-Io-xi
iao-puhr-ieh
Bad
evil.
ino-fnn-tUi
I'-n
applied to the Joss of children
two children
Russian.
form; to influence.
XOTKS.
oh that
desire
hint
a wife.
as
To drag to pull.
To draw a bow.
To smelt. To trans-
In
htsih-fu
To prepare;
make ready.
A daughter-
in-law
granary;
Hurried.
transport,
goods.
liny-
cattle.
subscribe.
tony
Animals
seny-k'eo
pj
To
..
k (
married
woman.
To jump; to leap.
To climb over.
((Hy
fii-ren
weather.
place.
J.EJ
Bone.
fair
J;
t'iao
<-'h
clear skv
*
\n<l
"fcfi"
to bear.
also written ii.
217
fin /i<tn</-ko Jtni-txi
ftfe,
beggar.
by death;
^^
f@
MANDARIN PBIMEK.
25.
READING LESSON XXVa.

The Horrors
1.
7^si
chih tao
3
2. /ft/ 1 j//<70
||
From
jfi =10
5.
Fah seng
6.
Teh ko
8.
9.
until
Ti puh ling Jfe

U* knh* H. i The Five Grains
7.
Extremely rare.
^ The ground unresponsive
ffi.
'I?
fjg-
4.
3.
Famine
of
& To grow
to cultivation.
all grains.
of plants.
To manage.
Tîao*
To sell grain. Used principally in the North.
lang seng | & To support life to live.
Hsin hsiang. ien uang &
11^ ^ Waited expectantly.
ijlfl
10.
Shut
ch'i fji
11.
Fah
ch'ing*
[l
ff-
But who would have thought that

Bf Clear
cloudless.
^^g
A light cloud. A thick cloud is JfE g.

IW-p'ien* poh* mn*
3
3
f/t'/ /// it ^f But
but it was only ....
l
14. Ioh iu* $)
About; nearly.
It was ex15. Chilian Hang hen nan uang hsia uhi ^{j
tS -^
tremely difficult to transport the grain brought by the steamers.
12.
13.
16.
Shan 1
r
17. J\ i
posing that
ling*
|lj
^ A mountain
range.
at the end of a short sentence such as this

as to .
See below
$.
$|
Ijfi-
Jfc
^T^
218
And what
if? sup-
MANDAIJIN 1MMMK11.
25.
HX
Jt
r,fl
JK'fi
Chioh*-chi&* $p fK Porterage coolie hire.

Fei fn-chia chin t'iao puh ch'i ^. Hf
JE None but the wealthy
fjfc fjg
could afford to buy.
1
1
The two provinces 011 the
Hang* seng* fg ^$1 $
3. Tah kiai* fih
1.
2.
frontier.
4. Chili* tao* fa
5.
K'n
teh u
When
Hi]
came
it
to ...
k'o shoh liao *g
fah
$F.
ffl.
$:
Distressful
~f
beyond
expression.
6.
was
Hsien
.=at
shi
first
7.
Ch'ong chi
8.
Shang
9.
Sni
the relation
4fe
they
though
g|
;rg
fa Were
ch'ioh
.
At first it was
and then
.
To
satisfy
See below heo shi
after
it
hunger.
still
/man
.
still
.
.
tan shi
but
.
Igjf
UJ
Note
^B
H( To rise in price.
Chang chia
Ch'icn k u nan nan ^ffa |f| Manifold ills.
12. Ken chi sheo o j&
5J ^4 Characters are often separated from each
other, as here, for rhetorical effect they could be as well written
A final phrase=and nothing more.
13. Ri?-i*
14. Ts'ai* kan*
$& Before they dared to ...
1
or else.
15. 7V/; ran*
%fe Otherwise
10.
11.
fTii
219
MANDARIN PRIMER.
25.
JL fS^Bi
to
SIM
I.
r ^6>
.2.
Hsiit'h
3.
M To
'//'/
rt
jg|
I iti hsia
//7/^z
j^Q
-^
HF
iR to.A,
1J^
ffi
a^
from trouble ^
^ refugees.
To weep tears of blood.
>'
^
Formed associations.
flee
ifi
liu fa
j){g
The Dmgon King, \vlio is supposed to have all

4. Long* nang* fff 3
water under his control.
5. Ch'ang* sheii* hsi* H^ |i|i %fc To have a theatrical performance before
the gods. This usually takes place outside a temple.
6. Fuh-ie ffi ffi Buddha.
8.
A staê.
Hsi*-t'ai* |$
Hua frai fb B3 Melted.
9.
K'an pao-liao
7.
10.
Chih shai
II.
A an sheo
Aa r//z
12.
^}R
j^[
|^
&n
T Looked till be had etiongli.

Kept him drying in the sun.
Hard to bear.
00
fijjl
But don't you know? ignorant of the
fact that
Quite unconscious of.

Calamity and happiness the vicissitudes of life.
L. 27.
15. Chih* lih* ^^j Put forth every effort; strenuously to t-xert.
JI
This is usually
16. ATan men kuan-liao ]^f J |^ 7 To shut the south gate.
done in the time of drought, since heat comes from the South.
Became a desolation.
17. Ch'eng liao hnang ch'ang )fc 7 ~9fc
13.
14.
Ping puh
Ho fuh
jjjfi
ch'i
f-eng-iang
\fe
-);-n
^-
$j
220
MANDARIN
IMIIMKR.
REVIEW LESSONS XXI-XXV.
3L $&
25.
^ 3%
Give three sentences containing ;][; ;:nd two containing

Illustrate $fc ~~f
jy f}\* in three sentences.
Write three sentences containing J^, ffj:, :jj
as the
jg,
of
whoever'
whichever'
whatever.'
.
=J.
e<|iiival-
'
What
characters are employe<l to reinforce negative articlethree sentences to illustrate j/(j as indicating
ijnality.
Give an example of ~J* as a principal verb.
'.'
\\'rite
Translate
That vessel draws three feet of water. Jf>(@
AM^S'
Give four diiTerent \vords meaning To purchase.'
He exhorted him every time he went. He paid
'Translate:
him each time he brought a load of goods.
How is Successive Action indicated? (Jive three examples.
Write two sentences containing $ as a principal and an auxiliary
:
'
What
is
the force of
before a vert) ?
pj"
[vert).
Indicate three uses of jj ; four meanings of J; and ""]"*; and two of

jg.
Translate:
The next chapter. Mark comes next to Matthew.
What is the function of
after
fj, and gg-V
|J
|J,
two sentences containing

and )(^.
What are fjj ^? Give the names of four of them.
AVhat is the force of jg, ^?, and similar words before adjectives ?
Write two sentences shewing how yji may be strengthened.
Shew in two sentences the use of Jij J^ and
Shew three uses of J
two of g|j t^vo of
Jjr together, and
(Jive
two
of each alone.
Illustrate the literal
What
is
and figurative use
the difference between
itf
Jjjfj
of
in
38
and
two sentences.
fjf f
Translate Heading Lessons XXIII and XXIV.

Give sound tone and meaning of the following
:
3.
if
Correct,
for correction
ic
need
be, the following sentences,
and
state reason
A HT
ft!
221
m^lg
MANDARIN PRIMER.
26.
Write the following
4.
His parents
'
said,
in
It
Chinese characters
is
no great importance.'
of
After
all, it
n matter between those two brothers. Very well, very well, say
no more about it.
He has travelled in a large number of places; he
came back this year in the 1st month. The second time T lent him
I took the dollars to him, and he was unwilling to
$4.00 odd.
is
receive them, so I had my trouble for nothing.

I don't know
whether he has started or not yon had better go across and enquire.
;
the sea there are several millions of
Beyond
on with
later
going
people
elder brother to see.
my
fear he
willing to sell that large piece of laud; at first he wanted

Tls. 100, but he afterwards said he would take Tls. 4
when you come
will talk the matter over
He
name?
reckoned back and
Send that
wrong.
man
<g|
forth,
with this
of
not
is
more than
We
less.
Your honourable
again.
and
think
after
reckoned
all
it
letter.
LESSON XXVI.
To guard. To observe.
To maintain.
sheo
t(tn
burden;
Read tan
responsibility
load.
Scissors.
ien
To
7 )
ul
>
to slip
rr
I ears,
pel
siege.
;
back
purpose;
rr
lo weep.
lesson.
pel
the back
To
pillow.
special.
the back.
chen
to lease.
Read
3
On
with
To carry on
To repeat
to fall.
t'eh
rent
ei
To stumble
To cut
scissors.
su
tlcli
shew
to
To try to attempt.
To examine.
To surround to be-
uei
ch
ts
undertake.
sJii
to
forth.
To take
To manifest
Jisien
The
side.
use as a
pillow.
l
ao
ch (
ts
Ch
,
ai
Ml/SJ/
ho
4
cannon
>
a gun.
spear.
gun
ien
san
a pistol.
An
To
kong
scatter; to disperse;
break up. Read cw 3

medicinal powder.
bow.
to
How ? Why ? What ?
A laud meas-
ure of 5
feet.
arrow.
Low in height. To lower.

222
tao
Ail island.
fan
All
ft
common. Mortal.
MANDAKIN
A torpedo.
(Jenuine
clt'cHg-shi/i
26
I'KI.MKU.
'"'-
ffi IS"
II
real
Baptism.
The
10- IciK't
truly.
Trousers
!:'n-fxi
]
t8U-tsong
1:1
Ancestors.
An
official
hsiang-mao
Appearance.
Stupid
drawers.
A war
hn-t'u
devil.
dense.
To
proverb.
flij
Various Uses
be loath
to.
of.
1. Attention has been called already to the use of certain words,

which, though properly belonging to the book style, have filtered
Such words usually form part of
through into common speech.
set expressions, and if used separately by beginners are generally
misunderstood.
For example in Lesson XVII. Section 3, the
This is quite intelligible as it
sentence Jj Ijfc
^p occurs.
ffi
used alone would mean little or nothing.
stands, but 3& qp
Similarly the Interrogative Pronoun jnf ho should be used with
other words, as follows

What is the need for
:
Why must you act

What
What
Why must you
concern or business? ho-kan

is it
to
do with him
? chtu
Why? uci-ho? ffi jpf.

Why take the trouble?
ii
Why?
AVhat sort or degree ho-teny fpj

much
qualifying word, as, great
How great a degree of happiness
69 SI
/
'
'
&
How? What?
How
'!
fnf
t'a in
ho-k'u
'
so? ho-})ih chat 'utny hxlny ni
etc.
;
!
ho-pih
jnj
>J.
^p.
ho kan
*
g/7
flif
usually followed by some

;
e.r/.,
ho-teng ta tihfiih-ch'i!
jnf
rw-/to? jn fa.
about? 7io-rw /fa #flAvhat means ? wherefore ? ho-i
By
What harm
fang To
hinder
How much
or objection
to oppose.
is
An
more ..... or
? fa J^.
there? Iw-fany fa
If even
you cannot do
..... fa
how much
it,
hsiny, ho-k'uang o ni
(From
tyj
obstacle).
less
hypothesis being granted fa ^JJ ho-k'uang

emphasize the logical deduction ; e.g.,
puh neng
^/j.
ffi
ho-k'uang i.e., an
used to introduce and
less
& fo 4 ^
half
223
is
way and
can I? chiu-shi ni
fft
f^, fa
stop.
fj
ic
Jig.
MANDARIN PKIMEH.
20.
T'eh
T'eh
2.
and other words indicating Purpose.
which indicates purpose
$jp
colloquial, but usually takes either

etc., are also denoted by the following
4
$fc
ku.
reason
a cause.
is
not often used alone
or
i ;
uei.
in
Design, intent,
Intentional.
1
c
Partial.
Inclined to one side.
l^ p icn.
"
P'icn |g is commonly employed in a bad sense
obstinately and
to
introduce
used
or
when
sentence =" but,
determined"
perversely
" it is often
alas
;
repeated.
But you are bent on discovering my

'
faults; ni p'ien chien ch'uh
o-tih ts'o iai
ffl ft f|f; $g #.
fa fi
Expressly specially purposely
^HeSsinned
'iu-hx'ni
purpose ku-i -ffc jg;

fo\ îcn-p'lcn { (| e.</.,
ni'nuj c/i'i ku fan fy PJj j$J
JQ,.
worship him o men t'e7i-i lai pai
-i
>fr
t'
of set purpose; t'(.t

have come on purpose to
*P Hi-.
4*
?M
That person does evil purposely
**
mm
j[g
;(?h'u-h*in
We
of set
na-ko ren cfou-hsin
oh
tso
j&f^ 9.
A(
Jt
and Use.
its Position
noun and is often related to frj tih, from

3. Fan )\j
which it may be separated by a word or clause; in such cases fan
that which/ etc. e
and tih (Xj may be translated by Those who
^
All those under two years old, fan liaug sui i-ffijtih J*LFB
Whoever hears my words and does them fan t'ing-ohien o
hua ch'ii hsing tih J{. J[j|
fj 6^Jff fj
Whosoever confesses me before men; fan ts<n ren mien-ch'tcn
precedes the
'
'
^^
ren o
tih
^L
A^
ffi
"SJ
pS $5 6^-
Supplementary: Lesson VII.

4.
/c
He
often has the force of an emphatic particle
was quite willing to die; t'a

Not a single person would go; shai
&'if
ie.
kun
hxin.
fy
ic jut It ch'ii |(|
as,
Tfc jfa
"jj"
>^>.
^.
/jp
or expostulation e.g.,
JJ often conveys the idea of remonstrance
cte hai ttiao)keh !
allowed
this
be
Can
a
such'
of
The idea
thing
jFfa/
^8 ?S Cn'fft-
What
To-shao
J
is
there against saying it?
>\?
'
in
na hai
iu
shen-mo xhoh
some connections may be translated by
More
'
More
alone e.g.,
by
;
Give him a few more to-ahao chili i'a chi-ko
>]? $$
|| (@.
He knows more or less English t'a to-nhao ren-teh chi-ko Ing-
or less
or
kueh
'> I? ^. ?1 IB 3fe B
ft
That girl is more or less proficient; na-ko ku-mang te-shao
hud ih-tien^
(B *S *6
^ > t - IS224
MANDARIN
Among
so
IMM.MKH.
26-
people as the Chinese, there are necessarily
polite a
Many sound stilted and

good many polite phrases in common use.
unreal to the ears of a foreigner, but they are used conventionally,
and must not be taken too literally any more than similar terms in
a
It goes without saying that they are used more freely

educated
among
people, hence discrimination is needed in their use
to address high-flown language to a coolie is to cast pearls before
At the same time, as the proverb has it, "No one blames
swine.
Knglish.
^ A
and it
for being too polite;" // to rcn ]>uh hinii jjjj|
/fJ ft
to err on the side of excess than defect in this matter,
especially as so many of the rising generation have no manners to
you
better
is
speak
of,
Xo
natural or acquired.
is made to
give an exhaustive
list
attempt
of such expressions
most of them gather round the

characters and combinations given below
2
3
fai
shuh
To belong to to be
Eminent exalted.
ao
to.
Precious
valuable.
ig3 p
subject
as relate to age, place of birth, etc.
4
I
Old age long

To command.
sheo
liny
cause.
Treasure.
life.
To
term of
'
fj]
any To look up
to.
To
relv on.
respect.
A mark
hao
or
2
?
>*
'
a sign.
To
disobey
oppose.
A name
number.
stvle.'
(.'h
.,
ten
Stern
s/ice
A cottage.
)
(
MU A
..
relatives
2
2
I
koh
to
my.
Stupid
To pay
advance money.
h Armour. Finger nails.
screen.
*
ii
dog.
A branch.
In speak-
ing of one's junior
to
/.
dignified.
simple.
fu
'
style,'
or name.
I have long wished to know you chiu-liang ft $f.

I have not seen you for a long time chiu-uci ft j[j:.
;
I have been wanting in respect; sh'ih-chiny *fc $jfr.

I have not had the pleasure
used in answer to queries as to
one's
name muh Imy-chiao \^ fjj| ^.

*
is your name
*$.
(hao gj) ? fai-fu ?
name
is
tx'aotsi
My unworthy
Ta-ch'eng ;
Ta-ch'eny 3JLJ$J$.
;
What
.KueiJIprecedes enquiries relating to country, city and residence; e.y.

Which is your honourable country ? Kuei kueh ? or Kuei kueh
sh'i na-ih kueh?
or -j^
jj
^.
.Jj| ffi
f
am
a native of
England pi kueh Iny kueh

;
Liny ^precedes enquiries as
How many
Your
Your
flgr
to father, mother, son
daughters have you? chi-uei liny-ai

worthy mother ling-fang fa >g.
worthy father Uny-tsuen fa ^.
;
225
g.
and daughter;
'?
as,
MANDARIN
26.
are the equivalent of my' as used below

Chia %j and shea
Both my elder and younger brother are at home chia hsiong
shea ti tn txai chia jfc
ffa %$ %
^fcYour exalted age? said to people over fifty years old kao
'
%^
You
more complimentary than hsien-seuy
sir
hsia HJ "f
*fe
koh-
Your honourable place in the Cycle? kuci chiah-tm ? jlj; ^ ^.

What animal presided over the year of your birth, Sir? Hsienscny shuh shen-mo
till? -fo
$L JR
iBr Jft
$J-
The Sixty Years Cycle.

The Chinese employ two
sets
of characters to
form
Cycle of
sixty years.
They are used for casting horoscopes, telling ages, etc.,
and are spoken of as The Heavenly Stems and The Earthly
Branches
TEN HEAVENLY
+
chiah
First
XT
stem
heavenly
STEMS.
Men-kan.
Sixth
the year 1904.

1
2,
ti]uj
*
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
ih
^ piny
L
~~f
r
heavenly stem.
Seventh
,,
,,
Eighth
Ninth
,,
,,
Tenth
TWELVE FAKTHLY BRANCHES.

-h
1.
2.
3.
3
ts'i
-^
3
.g.
4.
fin
5.
6.
ch'eo
11 p.m. to 1 a.m.
1-3 a.m.
shih-ri ti-chi.
in
3.
HMO
4.
ch'en
s'i
8.
9.
s
11.
hsilh
12.
7ti
7-9 a.m.
9-11 a.m.
11 a.m. to
5.
6.
1.
p.m.
7.
The year 1894.
8.
1-3
3-5
5-7
7-9
p.m.
p.m.
p.m.
p.m.
9-11 p.m.
The Chinese use
Rat.
1.
1-rtl
10.
sluti
ma
11
iant
9.
10.
11.
12.
r/m- 3
these Twelve J>ranclies for

Most
people can say them off in order,
purposes.
while for us to learn them off too.
They are used to
MAN DA
1.
The
I!
PlilMKIJ.
26-
12 hours of the day as indicated above; a
two English hours;

The months, the first month being
'hinese
hour
being e|iial to
2.
:*>.
4.
///
'J|
The signs of the /odiac, Aries being f*i

The 12 points of the Chinese compass, North being
;
txj
12 days.
Cycles
The corresponding symbolical animals similarly preside over
Chinaman knows the animal that presided
years and days, and every
He often ({notes
over (xhnh Jjj), the year in which he was born.
his age by mentioning the animal, and on hearing the animal he can
of
f>.
\'2
years, also cycles of
rapidly calculate the corresponding age.

The Stems and Branches are combined to form a curious Cycle
of Sixty Years, Juta chiah /.s'z ~ffc
f. The mode of combination
as follows
is
The
present cycle began in 1S64 and that year was
and first branch; ISO;") was ih-ch'co

^f, the first stem
and second branch; and so on. In 1874,
-J, the second stem
the stems being exhausted, the first was used again with the eleventh
chinh-tx'i
1875 was i/i-lt(d

branch, forming chiah-hsuh
j^
j, the
while in 1876 the branches
second stem and the twelfth branch
being exhausted the third stem was used with the first branch
It is obvious that in sixty years

forming piny-tsi pj -^ ; and so on.
the ten stems will have been used six times and the twelve branches
five times, so that the sixtieth year 1923 will be the last in both
lists, vi/.,
kuei-hai
$j>
and
hi the following year the
Cycle
Avill
The combination which marks
the year is known as

siu tx ci 'jjfc ,fc the order of the year
according to the cyclic characters.
This, and the still more inconvenient system of ([noting the
year of an Emperor's reign, are the only methods the Chinese have
begin again.
computing dates.
"
tf
are f ur sets of stems and branches,
f@
pah-ko
and indicate the year, the month, the day and the hour of a Chinaman's birth. In the case of a contemplated matrimonial engagement
"
the two sets of " pah-ko ts'i
J\ fgj tp are submitted (by the parents
of
The
t-a'i
competent astrological authority, who

compares the two (p'ai pah-tni
/^ *?) auc^ predicts without
hesitation whether or not the marriage will turn out fortunate.
The
"
formal exchange of the "pah-bo ts'i
constitutes an engagement.
NOTE. The Chinese way of reckoning age is quite different
from ours. Instead of reckoning a child one year old on the first
anniversary of its birth, they reckon it one year old at any point of
The folloAving year (beginning from
the year in which it was born.
their New Year's day) they reckon it 2 years old so that in Chinese
reckoning a child may be two years old before in English reckoning
it is
From this it Avill be seen that the age of a person,
fully one.
according to the Chinese mode of reckoning, is at least one and often
two years more than according to ours. The commencement of the
of the parties, of course) to a
227
MANDARIN PRIMER.
26
Chinese
New Year
between the 21st of January and the 19th

time to our next birthday we are reckoned
be two years older than we reckon ourselves to
varies
From
of February.
this
by the Chinese to
be Avhile from our birthday
to the following Chinese New Year

they
reckon us one year older than we reckon ourselves.
Of course the
few weeks at the beginning of our year before their year commences
have the same chiah-ts'i as the previous year.
;
NOTES.
called chien-ts'i
Scissors are
JjJ
in the South,
North, and cJucn-tao j| JJ in the West

^fchien and ^j? chiao are both used as verbs.
ckiao-tsi
in the
b.
Ch'iang
c.
T'eo
|jjf
âdded
also written
is
j|
Iff.
to chcn ffi in colloquial.
is
am
fjj
$|
loath for you to go o sh<z-pnh-feh ni tseo.

That child is repeating his lesson na-ko hai-tsi pei-shn.
This load is very heavy chcc tan tong-hsi chong teh-hen.
The rent of that two storied building is % 20.00 a month; na-ko leo-fang fsii
ri-sliih-k uai cJiîen ih-ko iieh.
Four men surrounded him si-ko ren pa t'a nci-chu liao.
The meeting then broke up huci chin san liao.
Tears covered the girl's face na-ko ku-niang man mien lin lei.
Chinese shave their heads foreigners cut their hair Chong-kiieh ren t'i t'eo ;
I
Uai-kneh ren
cJiien t'eo-fah,
coat and pair of trousers ih-chien kna-tsi ih-t'iao k'n-ts'i.

All should observe the Lord's Day ren-ren in kai s/ieo li-pai.
Four men were baptized on the 6th ts n-hih in s'i-ko ren s/ieo-hsi.
The devil does nothing but injure people mo-kuei chin hai ren.
;
of yours?
What objection is
I have come on purpose to see
there to sleeping on a foreign pillow ?
The soldiers of ancient times used bows and arrows ; soldiers
you.
Translate:
What
business
is
it
day use guns and cannon. Tell him to saddle the

Forty men surrounded him all armed with rifles, and
though he was mounted on a good horse, he could not escape. I
am hungry I have not yet had food. It has rained heavily these
Some were starved to
last few days, but it has cleared up to-day.
of the present
horse.
death, others frozen to death beggars all died of starvation. Though

he was poor, still he contributed $8.00, and was desirous of contributing more. Soldiers have ability developed by practice. He broke one
This thing has been drying in the sun two days,
of his legs by a fall.
and it is still not dry. The appearance of a Russian is very different
from the appearance of a Japanese the one is tall, the other is short.
Does he understand German ? Yes, more or less. All AV!IO believe
It is most important to observe Sunday.
in Christ may be baptized.
Men err in worshipping their ancestors the One they should worship
The Saviour chose twelve disciples, and kept them with
is God.
;
Him
to prepare
them
Writing Exercise
Jf R. 189.
to
go and preach everywhere.

ft ff It
ft ft
228
&
X&
29
MANDARIN
26
I'K'IMKK.
READING LESSON XXVI.

The Development
-f-
of Japan.
*fc
*0N
ffl
fH H& IS
ft
m%
jt
>*4
01
SI
A,
A
jfi
/L if it
3.
like.
ftt Resembling
Ta puh hsiang~i*ong ^c
Is]
tB
Greatly different from.
$ Another name for Japan.
Tong-iang
4.
Lien-ch*eng
1.
2.
Hsiang-si tB
&
^ fa Connected together and become.
229
MANDARIN PRIMER.
26.
^ Tpgetlier with.
A>
-^
^)i
Lost harmony
71? c/ri-Iai
ft
JG.
.S7/7// //(;
A'
<?;/
/>////
ceased to be on friendly terms.
^ Commenced hostilities.
^ ^ |& Looked down upon
r//'/
despised.
liao f$ -$ J To become proficient in by study.

I*ing fa/i J?. ^- Military tactics.
tih iang-tsi fg 11-' . . . 6ij
.
^p To put on a
7. Chia isoh
to act as though
3
S. /\ri c/ieu* }ff
Disposition of troops for battle.
1
Pretended to be simpletons.
9. Chiiaiio-i- tai
Hsioh huci
.
ner
10.
S/n/i 3 ?ui* ^K tt
torpedoes.
11.
V Itii
chûan
&
Water thunder
fFf Aft
torpedoes.
14.
15.
Ta
13.
ih c/nuig sfieng Hi c/iaiig
fought
16.
/(v<9 //<76> fl"
17. //// ho-ioh 51
ifil
|J"
T Had enough
^}
To discharge
Torpedo boats.
Cannon shot.
Chiao chang > 1'^ To join battle.
Ta liao pai chang ^ ~f J& f^ Fought
12. J*ao-tsi $&
~[."
To draw up
a losing battle; were defeated.

,ft
ft Won every battle they
ft
of fighting.
a treaty of peace.
230
MANDAIMN
T,
#F
M,
&
to
^
n M
^^
fr
i
9
"^
^ XL SP lH
W M ^
^^^
a.
>te
^:
7,
19
iff
jff
*,
^-
UU
Jli
*!>.
26.
11
13
^^
"F
Ji
a* ?
W ^0 A
A &.to
if,
/> US
ifc
-ft
CH
tfrf
fe<\ tit
A vim
1.
2.
2,.
5"/if7// //rff
Liang
.
liao
Iisia
ni f
f(%
j$}
.
come to satisfactory terms.

parties.
mode of speaking of two parties
1*o
Both
"f*
ffi
neither pronoun
has any reference to the speaker.

1
4. Chiiin^-c/uiang jjl'
Military accoutrements.
Rations for troops.
5. Ping*-hsiang*
-.
6.
7?//
/fr;/ tiin
8.
Puh hsiang ko
9.
10.
in
Tsai
iang-tsi
"^
fH
flS
t|
Different
from
its
normal
an inferior sense.
.
sheo hsia
Beneath the hand under the control

governed by them.
tributary kingdom a dependency.
.
Knei Va-uien knan $%

A''it
to.
jfii;
11. Shit/i* kut'h" 1^

12. Chu-hsia ft 1>
13.
Here=must were bound

To transport.
$
f^
7.
appearance
[iSi
To
chin t'ien lai
settle
^f- ~\^
JP]
of.
Is
down
^^ftK
to dwell.
Sweet after bitter
;
" the sweet

bye-and-b)
e.''
MANDAKIN PRIMER.
27.
LESSON XXVII.
To warrant to insure.
To guarantee. To
;
protect.
m
io
UOI
r
1>(/
To
patrol.
l1ie palm of the
To
Wild
ic
Suspicion.
tear
ai
rustic
savage.
)niamented
in-
gay.
u-t ( ao
Grapes.
tien-hsm Sweetmeats
The
Colour.
Sort
eh
To inspect;
)
(
k
-
see.
lao
/
8cli
A
V
prison.
secure.
iii-nien
Mournful
TCI
to over-
icii-xeh-
C'olour.
tx'i-raii
Of course;
jail.
Firmly
naturally.
;
hsmn-ch iny-ch ilh
'4-
prison.
sori'owful.
kind.
1.4
eliien-l(to
face.
Lust.
confectionery.
prize.
( Colour.
little.
timidate.
to rend.
Slightly;
A wilderness.
To scare to
its'
To
*>
A mound.
};<tn</
to tie up.
To hoodwink to blind.
To dislike. To object
to.
monish.
hxicn
ad-
to
bind
to control.
manage;
To warn;
To
infect.
catch/ as a disease.
To
hand
To
dye.
1
eh
Brutes; wild beasts.
the sole of the foot.
melan-
final particle.
Mournful.
Grief
Fragments. Broken.
...
To go on circuit.
sad.
men Sorrowful;
chol.
ill
large guitar.
police station.
''fan
To
traffic; to deal in.
Assent
policeman.
how
emphasized.
Simple affirmation and denial, assent and dissent are expressed
But when to this is added emphasis,
^juh-sh'i.
by Jg; sh'i and /f
and the thought that something must be so in the nature of the case,
This is expressed in the following manner
these are insufficient.
:
1.
Of course; you
are right; k'o-puh-sh'i pj"

You bet no mistake about that kan-4st Jfc
\\liy ask that? Of course not; na Jnil ucn
!
What
That
.g-.
are you talking about? it a

is certain ; >m x/r? ih-tiny-tih
Idi-tili
J[J
|j.
/
him
J[J Jj|
.'
Jg
|[J
^.
ftfj
gf.
^.
disposes.
232
.MANDAUIN I'HIMKR.
It
needless tn speak of that
is
mi- x/ri pull-unit/
xkoh-tih
JjJ
ffi
J^
Ift #J-
ffl
Tliat
27-
without savinu;
iroes
jg at
mi
*//?
puh-iong chiang-tih
Final Particles.
Tlio Chinese use
2.
a
good many final particles in ordinary
commonest of which is a
Beginners should use
they have observed how and when the people round
conversation, the
|5jiJ.
sparingly until
them use it, as if misplaced, it has a tendency to make the speaker
^ j * lul
look ridiculous. There are other particles such as D$iJ f(l
(Jj?
it
'
.'
nd
latter
tlie
commonly following
Supplementary
K'en
3.
is
-ft
word which ends with
'
'.
Lessons VIII and IX.
employed colloquially
in the sense of
'Readily;
'
rapidly
easily
e.g.,
Horses easily
Mv
fall sick
/////
k cn
l
piny
*<'ii(f
jrrowin^ rapidly; his won't

chang; t'a-tih h<ii-fi j>'n/i k'en chary ft
child
is
jjj
grow;
$%^
^^
^.
o-tih hai-tsi k'eu
-f
g,
fife
$j
This ground dries up rapidly chcv-ko U k'en kan Jg fg J^ -^ jp.

is added to
many words; sometimes to indicate 'a class
and at other times to denote 'an individual' ; e.g.,
;
f '///V/
People; individuals; ren-c/iid

State; country; kiwh-chia [jH
\\'omen
An
^.
^.
females fu-tao-chla jj
}
elderly person; lao-ren-chia
Officials; knan-dini
*jr
jg.
^.
^|A ^
^f.
Merchants; business men; shang-chia ]JJ ^.

Shopkeepers; p'u-chia fj ^.
At home with the mother of a woman twii mnng-i-hta ^^(g^.
I have come to look for a person named Li
o lai chao Li chia
;
*#*
A
steward; kiian-chia
l\il
Xorth
^.
is
it
employed indiscriminately in the South, but

t'eh
often replaced by
when anything
is
unsatisfactory nature is in question; e.g.,

A string of cash is too little ; ih-tiao ch'ien t'eh shao
fyl\n
mark
exceed
it
^
the
L>
or jjV2
il
In
His language
:
/<'mtJtf5
There
an
To pass over is also used to denote a going beyond

may be used alone or take either Jf| il ; To pass over
'
jg
in the
of
is
^^&
is
on
or
^ fen
beyond
all
to
e.g.,
bounds;
t'a
shoh-hua
t'ai
ko liao
puh-pih
ko-ii
shang-
i:'ST^no need
to be excessively grieved
JK fl i&.
233
MANDARIN PBIMEB.
27.
Tiny Jjj in some districts as a superlative is aspirated (t'ing).

Other common words and phrases which denote the highest degree
are
.
.o cli
The
Jf choh-xhih Thoroughly; in
deed and in truth.
ridge-pole of a
house. The utmost
.,
)
J
Very.
Exceedingly most.
the
All. The utmost
point.
'
tao-chia Fully; thorough-
At home
ly.
chi/i-ch'l
:j
North
form
extreme.
^ teh-hufiny
'
Used
in the
in connection witli
of
Ten-tenths; per-
sliih-fen
fectly
thing unpleasant or painful.
The very last; cJiin moh-moh-liao

The innermost room; chin-K-pien-tih
S5
flU
He
ft
He
huei-koi
shasa t +
He
*K
Ts'o f
tno-clna
at
it
ita-ko
/vr
a*
JI ffi
thoroughly
is
cliinff xholi-
fang-Mi
'
repented
64 IS
home
at
eS
fa
hsien-tsai ehoh-8mh~tih
4;
Chinese; Chony-kuch Jnia
in
S$
flil
5'J
joined to j^_ ko and used in the same sense as

'
with the exception of ; e.y.,
AMth
nntli ni sfiih-fen tao-
//(//
is
ch'u-Hao,
him?
home
now thoroughly
ffe
g|.
:ji
tlf
^not yet quite at
is
entirely.
g pf
^ ^*
^ ^ ^ T-
Detestable in the extreme; chih-di'i k'o-u

Kxtremely low-spirited; MOI tch-huany
Any. Very.
x//
any-
at anything.
strengthened
the exception of
ta'o-ko
Mr. Pien, who would dare
Pica li^lcn-^n</ *hni ken
Apart from him there
is
shoh. t'a? |
no one able
to
it
^ ~f
to reprove
j^ jj
manage
t'a i-
yfe
^|
tx'o-ko t'a
muh
in neny pan tlh

j^ ft ix ^ff fb $? $fSo far, in these Lessons f|3 tan and jfc kuang
for
3
'
'
only
other words in
ch'i
Only
tan
Single
tuh
kua
Single; alone
ac-
ue
Unlined.
bill.
chuan Only; specially;
Flavour;
taste.
ih-uci-tih
Devoted
solitary.
The only
was
Southern Mandarin.
6^
uniformly.
ch'i-teh or J^ |^ clii-ncny
to
thing possible
Jesus gave Himself up to doing good and healing the sick

su chuan-men tso hao si, i ping-ren
$fr
f^ fjjj ^f ^! ^He does nothing but injure us; t'a ih-uei-tih hai o-men
to
solely.
Few; little. Friendless.

Used colloquially largely
in
chuan-inen Solely; entirely.
An
alone.
have been used
use denoting limitation are
but.
count
I
common
ill-
234
le-
^ A^
MANDAIMN
27-
I'llIMEIJ.
He
chid f\ fa
the one establishment <-lii /.\-'/
^.
onlv was left; tan 8heng~h#ia fft ih /:<> rcn IiJtlJjfl'F'fi
il
/NO
does not devote himself to the business at all
He
fa hna
says he will come; he has no intention of doing so;
Only
He
/'//
.v'j
\,
fa
pint/ pnli fai
gj! |j>
^^
fy
2J,
2j.
Money and Exchange.

In
addition to the
relating to
4
fjj
4
[j||
money
'Vocabulary
in
are in constant use
Lesson IX, the following terms

:
To be worth value.
To make money; to
chili,
ff-
eh eh
sine
To discount; to abate.
To buy or sell on
4
1
ch'ien
To own
//
Profit.
/Vf//
To
4
'
A-ô
shce-pen
dollar
is
silver.
in
fail
detain in custody;
to dis4
at
.7*2
Jfl
redit
to
run
a score.
up
*^l
To
business.
count.
The
touch/ or purity of
deficient.
To add to.
To deduct
/^Y/t
Fineness,
ch'eng-seh
/g^
to suppress.
f
ing-iang Mexican dollars.

pen-ianc/ Spanish dollars.
f^ chany-chia To rise in price.

4
fR tieh-chitf To fall in price.
credit.
4
earn.
-
eh iid n
small balance
teiid-ts'i
used in weighing silver.
2
k'eo-feo Discount.
gjj
(
iang-ch'ien tsoh ch ih ch'ien
r'i
g| f
ffi
To-day a Mexican dollar

iatid
hoh
The
is worth .71
(of a tael) ; ehin-fien inyeh'ien ih fen in-tx'i
ffi $k~f'
-^ ^C
value of a Spanish dollar is Tls. .75 ; pen-iany tsoh ch ( ih
Rff'P^'il^
cJi'ih
ch'ien u ft
^ g|
^ f^cash
How many
j^.
to a dollar? Ao/> to-s*ha.o ch ( icn ih-k ( nai
How much
shao
silver is a dollar
in-tei ?
worth
^^^
the average (between two or
How much
Add
it
Pay
xn
Hany
!$&
ih la-ri
^%
kuel
ih
pan
Less than it cost under cost price ; puh kco pen

Worthless ; puh ch'ih eh ien
fjj ^.
>}?>
/f>
iah
Kn(iiire the market price; ta-finy hdny-shi

ff ^, fa
Unable to change (money) for the full price; hudn
hany-shi fe
JjJ
fa
'-ft.
235
suan
J.
u peh
in-fei tali
more amounts)
up diah ko tôny-r'i % (@ $j*

half, and leave a half unpaid
fa
in all ? ih-txony hi to-shdo ?
ih-k'nai iany-ch'ten hoh to-
/g
^p
| -j^:
Three taels plus five hundred cash
Take
'
ih
pan
;.
fff.
puh
tao
MANDARIN PRIMER.
2*7.
In ordinary cases amounts are reckoned to two places of decimals,

but bankers and others extend their calculations to five places of
decimals, as shown in the following Table
:
huh
10
10
10
10
3-J
an
atom= 1
=1
s'i
$ji
2
liao
gg
=1
//
s'i
liao
a filament.
a hair.
jig
a grain.
j||
ft a hundredth.
//
fen
of the first things the beginner needs to know about is Exhe may perhaps find some of his difficulties on the subject
;
One
change
lightened by considering the following

To find the
Dollars and taels are exchanged, or sold, for cash.
value of either the whole or part of a dollar or a tael, all that is
:
needed
to multiply the amount

is the value in cash of
is
$30
simply,
to
Answer.
It
$30.69
336,000
e.g.,
1,1*20 cash a dollar?

)
-
=
x^=T72tr
1,120=1,120 x 30
+ $ T^@l,120=- V
Or more
rate
by the
What
$30.69x1,120=
multiply decimally
should be noticed that this answer is
The rule in such cases
slightly larger than the one given above.
is to add 1 when the remainder is over a half.
34,373 cash
How many
cash
1,560 x. 36=562 cash.

It
Tls.
is
.:>(>
worth
1,500 cash per
tael ?
An*.
follows that to convert cash into dollars or taels all that is

is to reverse the above
process ; e.g.,
1,040
many dollars should I receive for 1<S9,(>45 cash
needed
How
189,645 -r 1,040=$182.35. Ans.

How many taels will 2,650 cash realize if
1,520 cash per Tl. 1 ? 2,650 -M,520=Tls. 1.74.
per $1
The
changes
Ans.
conversion of dollars into taels, or taels into dollars proceeds
as above
a.
silver
e.g.,
What
the value in taels of $4, the dollar being at .72
is
100 dollar cents=tael cents 72

'
yi
is
Too
Hence 400
Or, more simply, $1
??
??
worth .72
y<p= Tls.
tael cents,
.-.
2.88.
Ans.
$4x.72=re-
quired answer in
b.
$1
Ans. Tls. 2.88.

taels.
the value in taels of $8.65, the dollar being at .73?
worth .73 tael cents .-. $8.65 x .73=mjuired answer in
What
is
Am.
taels.
c.
What
is
Tls. 6.31.
is
Value
.-.
the value in dollars of Tls. 5, the dollar being at .71 ?

of 71 tael eents=100 dollar cents.
1
=Î
Hence
500
Or, more simply, Tl. 1=100
500 -r .71= required answer
100 dollar ceuts=\ -f.

100 x
=$7.04. Ans.
of
Tf
cents
in dollars.
236
.-.
Tls.
5=500
Ans. $7.04.
cents; hence
MANDARIN
What
d.
at
PIUMEFv.
27-
the value in dollars of Tls. S6.92, the dollar being
is
tad cents? Tls. S<>.<>2^. 73 -$119.07. An*.

All the cases which arise in dealing with taels and dollars
T.\
siinnned up in the following brief rules

1. To find taels, when the rate is given
number of dollars by the rate; e.g.,
may
be
How many
taels are in
///
/</r/.s,
nut/djtly the given
$150
According- to the rule the answer
is
50 x .73= Taels 109.50.
Ana,
To find taels, when the rate is given in dollars, divide the

"2.
given dollars by the rate e.g.,
How many taels are in (63.75
$1.37 per tael?
63.75 -Kl.37=Taefe 46.53. Am.
3. To find dollars, when the rate is given in taels, divide the
given iaels by the rate e.g.,
How many dollars are in taels 100
.725 taels?
;
100-f.725=$137.93. Ans.
4.
To
find dollars,
given taels by the rate
How many
1
X.K
taels
when
;
the rate
is
given in dollars, multiply the
e.g.,
dollars in Taels 112.15
12.15x1. 37 =$1 53.64. An*.

In all eases there must be more
$1.37?
dollars than taels
fewer
than dollars.
In a country where silver is largely used in an uncoined state,

and passes from one person to another as the equivalent of so many
ounces, it is evident there must be some standard by which to test
In some large centres there is a Valuation Bureau
its quality.
called Kong-ku chuh
$f JJQ, where silver in local use is tested
and stamped; its quality in relation to the standard being thus
officially certified.
termed
owing
'touch/
is
This standard of fineness or purity, technically

known as ch'eng-seh jfo ^, perfect colour/
to the fact that
impure
discolouration.
silver is detected
by (among other
thus
expresses the standard

'
quality of pure silver and roughly corresponds to the English Par
The actual quality of silver is stated in relation to this
or 100.
standard, but the manner of stating it is the opposite of the English
things)
Gh'eng-seh
'
For instance we speak of five out of a hundred as 5 per

and a half out of a hundred as 2J per cent., etc., but the
Chinese express the same by stating what is left when the percentage
method.
cent., of t\vo
is
removed.
age
This obtains in speaking of
ca-sh, discount,
and percent-
e.g.,
Silver at 5 per cent; chiu n in-tsi j\^ 5. 3H -fin such cases is understood, not expressed.
-f-)
Silver at 3| per cent; chiu luh u iit-ts'i -fa -f^ JL
Note that <a half

This cash
is
is
The
HI
expressed decimally=.5.
2 percent, short; chce
237
sh'i
chiu pah ch'ien
ten (shih
^.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
27He
No
deducts 3 per cent. ; t'a k'eo sanfen ch'icn fy fa J ft |g.

discount is allowed in buying odds and ends
mai ling-sui
muh
iu
k'eo-t'eo
tong-hsi
$ Tg |f gj
Jq jjjj.
If an account is reckoned at 20
per cent., a thousand cash only
equals 800 ; chao pah cheh suan chany, Hi tlao ch'ien ch'i suan pah
p* m
mM*A
m,
w&
in
In many places money is forwarded from place to place by
means of drafts procured at native banks. The percentage charged
varies according to circumstances, but whatever the sum total
may
be it is usually distributed over some or all of the following heads
Difference of scale ; hsiao p'ing >J* 2p.
:
Discount; k'eo-shui fa yfc.

Depreciation of silver mao-seh 3g Q.
Commission; huei-shm
?J<.
The standard in such cases is the one which prevails in the place
where the draft is issued, and it is customary to keep all accounts
according to that standard rather than in local currency.
If, say,
money is sent from Shanghai to Chongking, it is better to keep
accounts in Shanghai taels, and enter the local values in a separate
Care must, however, be taken in converting them from one
column.
For instance, money sent from Shanghai to
value to the other.
Hankow is subject to a percentage, say, of 3 per cent., and in
;
forwarding from there to Chongking a further percentage of say,

3J (expressed decimally as 3.25) may have to be paid on the draft
Let us suppose a cheque for Shanghai
obtained at the native bank.
Taels 100 is forwarded to Chongking by way of Hankow.
At
3 per cent. Tls. 97.
Hankow it realizes
This sum is forwarded
to
Chongking
at the rate of 3| per cent and realizes Chongking

In converting this amount into Shanghai taels it will
Taels 03.85.
not do to calculate it at GJ, owing to the calculation being made on
93.85, as this gives 99.71 only. The true percentage for reconversion
is
found as follows
Chongking
taels
9 3. 8
5= Shanghai
Hence
The percentage
7?
100=
is
reconversion between
taels 100.
9)
"93. "83"
1
= 106.55.
%%^jp
Ans.
And the true percentage for

and
Hankow
is found by the same
Chongking
therefore 6.55.
process to be not 3.25, but 3.35.

Interest
is
Half per
reckoned by fen ft or hundredths.
interest is expressed
by
The common custom
is
cent,
pan c, half, instead of decimally, as above.

to reckon by the month, and not, as with us,
by the year.
Interest must not be charged above 3 per cent.
ko sanfen Jg jfij
ft.
pf J
He only wants 2i per cent. ; t'a ch'i iao r'i fen
=. ft
m-
238
ch'ii li
pan
li
puh-k'o
fjjj
|g
MANDAIMN
M
1.
.71?
2.
s(
LLA N
:<
>
IMMMfifc.
KxA M
is
27L KS.
Wliat is the value of $S05.29 in taels,

Ana. Tls. 014.30.
What is the value in taels of $-17.053
AM. Tls. 34.7S.

Hankow Tls. 200
SI. 37.
3.
= Chungking
Tls.
dollar being at
tlie
if
the tael
what
193;
An**. 3.03 per cent.

percentage for reconversion?
4. If the tael changes for 1,500 cash, and the dollar
how many cash should

5. What is the
I receive for 30 dollar cents?
value
Am.
worth Tls. .73?
in
taels
/I//*.
of $1)7.304,
worth
is
is
is
the
at .71,
cash.
399
the dollar
if
is
Tls. 71.0319.
0.
Spanish dollar being worth $1.25 Mexican, what is the
Am. $89.78.
value in Mexican dollars of $71.823 Spanish?
7. What is the value in dollars of Tls. 80.29, the dollar being
Ans. $117.40.
at .735?
full cash (tsuh-ch'ien J!
8. What is the value in
gj) of
470,345 cash at 95 ? Ans. 452,528 cash.
person changed Tls. 54.03 of chiu-pah in-txi -fa /\ |g

An$. Tls. 53.54.
pure silver; how much did he receive?
10. How many cash should be obtained for Tls. 805,241, if
the tael changed at 1,054 an ounce? and how many cash short
would there be in the sum total if the cash used was ehiu u \> 56L
9.
for
'
Amount
Ans.
11.
is
obtained 1,431,109 cash; amount short 71,555 cash.

dollars are there in Tls. 489.0, if the dollar
How many
worth Tls. .74?

12.
$70.43
dollar
Ans* $001.02.
being worth 1,003 cash, what
is
the value of
Ans. 81,245 cash.
80 cents (Spanish) will buy one Mexican dollar, how

Spanish dollars shall I receive for $92 (Mexican)? Ans. $73.00.
14. If Tls. 40 Hankow are equal to Tls. 50 Shanghai, how
many Shanghai taels shall I receive for Hankow Taels 872.36 ? Ans.
13. If
many
Tls. 948.22.
15.
How many
dollars should
you obtain
for Tls.
3,562.201
the dollar being at .691 ?

Ans. $5,155.14.
16.
person remits Tls. 564.41 of pure silver from Ta-li
to
Hankow where
chiu ch'ih
5.5 per cent, commission.
in-ts'i
What
is
is
j^ *fc
-p
the draft worth in
Fu
used, and pays
Hankow taels ?
Ans. Tls. 549.86.
cheque for Shanghai Tls. 356.25
is sent to
Kai-feng
cashed in Hankow and forwarded by
draft obtained from a Chinese bank.
When it arrives in Kai-feug
Fu it is found to be worth Kai-feng Fu Tls. 323.99, or Hankow
Tls. 344.67.
How much per cent, was charged in Hankow on the
17.
Fu by way
of
Hankow.
It
is
how much on
the draft, and what is the percentage

Shanghai taels ? Ans. On Shanghai cheque
on draft 6 per cent. percentage for reconversion 9.96
Shanghai cheque,
for reconversion into
3.25 per cent.

per cent.
239
MANDARIN PRIMER.
27.
NOTES.
term for
J^
[5jJ
Seb-ch'i
Sliih
G.
centage
ffl
many
Iii
If
-f*
<'.r/.,
ând
f
is
jf
places
to
-f-
common
the
go on and
(^ Imti-kang.
also used for < colour.
sluh-fcn
is
hmin-jtu
jj
For a policeman
policeman.'
shang-kang and
b.
a.
<
off
duty
is
are employed to express pershih-ko iu pah-ko puh-hao

;
Eighty per cent, are bad
ffi
I understood thirty per cent of what he said; sh'ih-dni o tongteh san-chil

ft f{ ft ft
&J-
MISCELLANEOUS EXAMINES.
p]
g|
His disease is slightly better to-day Va-tih ping chin-t'ien shao-nei hao ih-tien.
He cannot protect himself, much less others i'a pao puh chit ts'i-chi, ch*"i neng
pao teh chu ren ni !
Tlie official in charge of the police-station is named Chang hsuin-ching-chiih
tih kuan, hsing Li.
;
He
He
superintends this business cJuc sh'i t'a chang-kuan till si.

objected that there was too much to do t'a hsieii si-ch'ing t'ai to.
Flowers and grass are of all sorts of colours hua ts'ao, sheu-mo ien-seh tu in.
Will yon have it dyed red or black ? sh'i iao ran hong-tih, sh'i iao ran heh tih ni ?
Will this colour fade ? chcc tiao sell puh tiao seh ?
I hear that his eldest son is put in prison; o f'ing shoh t'a-tih ta r'i-tsi hsia;
liao chien.
Retain this firuil} in your memory iao Iao chi pith uaiig.
He has gone into the country to purchase horses fa hsia hsiang fan
7
ma
ch'u
I iao.
It is possible to deceive men, but not the gods man teh ko ren man puh ko shen.
The Kingdom of heaven is like a merchant seeking goodly pearls frien-kuch
;
hao hsia no- inai-mai-ren chao hao
Translate:
a
you have done up the bedding go and call

the jetty.
There are four policemen in the
the east end and two at the west end, and there is
\Vlien
coolie to take
street
two
at
chu-ts'i.
to
it
also another standing at the door of the police station.

\Yhat are
you sad about? I have just heard that my mother is dead.
broke the jug to pieces on purpose; this I saw with my own eyes.
He
He regarded his son like a pearl in the palm of the hand. He

hoodwinked his father and went to Peking. If you only give him
500 cash, of course he will not be willing to come he objects
to the wages as being too low.
The eldest brother was pretty good,
but both the second and third brothers were given to lust, wine and
Tear up this piece of paper. The two men began to
covetousness.
He has the face (]}) of a
their clothes to pieces.
and
tore
fight
;
man, but the heart of a beast. The lion is the king of beasts.
There is any colour you like there are both red, yellow and white.
The Saviour wept over the capital of Judtea because the sins of the
His heart was sad because He knew
people of the city were great.
that in the future they would suffer.
Judas (Jg ^;), when he sold
Christ, thought he had deceived Him, but as a matter of fact he
could not do so.
Is it possible to deceive the omniscient God ?
Sooner or later men's sins will be
matter of common knowledge.
Writing Exercise
of course not.
made manifest
this is a
& * S * S 4 K.
240
1 1 7.
MAM>\i:i\
27
I'K'IMTJl.
READING LESSON XXVII.

The Younger Brother
I.
m *
^v
jib
r-"
IE
_h
ffl
T+
jgfc
I
fGL
1
"Bf
ft
^ lyook after sheep.
1.
Fang
2.
Lao*-mai* ^L iM Very old.

Cfri m ing Jfi ig To name.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
icing $C
Ioh l -seh* %) ? Joseph.

Ming chu $j ^c A brilliant gem.
TVrtz' 5Â
^ ^ Many coloured.
^
Ch'ang kua
|]|> A long unlined gown.
Nih*ai* pith* wi.ng* ffl
^ f^ To love foolishly
to
shew
foolish pre-
ference.
9.
10.
In-ts'i
Keng
j&
On
this
account
in ih chien ch
si
V. 6.
hence.
E ^
^f
fl*
There was also another
strange thing.
^^
To dream.
11.
Tso*
12.
K'uen ch'eng k'ucn
meng*
!|^
}&
tffj
To bind
241
into sheaves.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
27.
ftl 4>
-if
ffl
ft
3js.
& 7F
"F
iM6o ffl
15
T T
ffl
Hsia-pai
Pz
3.
Cheng
4.
Tseo
5.
Tnh in ta-ko pnh k'en
"JC
ta
il j
ffl
^ To do obeisance.
^ ^ ^c To defer to you as a superior.
1.
2.
f 7^7'
JE
1/fC
jg|
mi Hao
It just
fe
$fc
happened
7 To
tliat
lose one's
$j|
^f
way
to
go astray.
If ^S If His eldest brother only
was
unwilling.
ru
hao
6.
/*///;
7.
Taf
8.
Lai pa $$ |
your
7^
j(|i
^ Waited until
Come on
#f
The
best thing to do
is
to ..
Often used as a cballenge = come on and do
best.
242
27
MAXDAIJSX I'KIMER.
T,
i
2.
Pith
kuan
t'a si
3.
^^//^
4.
Ih~pang
5.
Shcn-mo
6.
Joh-ts ai
7.
Hsiang
is
11.
12.
its
\(JJ
Did uot care whether he lived or died.
such things
as.
medicines.
^j-
if-
=^
jfej
mai ren
lai
^H fS
meal.
^ ^ Drugs
^ Spices.
liao
Ta-iliia
bearings.
A company.
It?
Kith ru/i
Shoh
$ ^ All kinds of
10. Fan,
/$
[
usually applied to objects at a distauce.
8. -SV;/^ ///-^/t/
9.
hoh
Ih-tncn fan
k*eo
^%
s/wh
Thought of a plan.
Bones and
^ j| A
The whole
ch'ii
^M
7
a near relation.
flesh
P To
deal in hutuau beings.
of them.
f& 3*
To
L. 28.
talk a thing over
to discuss in all
MANDAKLN PKIMEK.
27.
,7
to
ic $r
flit
ft
6^ f^.lS
m
T
fa
M,
v !t ^,Hi,
i,A
^ - A
*
ftl
St-siit
Torn
fffc
in pieces.
Hsiang-chia M ^ Homesick.
3.
Peh-rlh
4.
Heh-ic M ^
5.
Ch'ien hsin nan k'u =p
6.
Hong
7.
Ti-chong hai J&
8.
Iai*-chih*
9.
^/^ 2
|^
H In the daytime.
hai ^L
Through the night
night time.
^&
t|i
f|b
The Mediterranean
Sea.
Egypt.
iVw 1 ch'eo*-mih*
n. Shut wa-t'eo
in the
^ The Red Sea.
Ta cfreng hsiao
10.
$ $ ^ Varied hardships.
A#
^
tien ^c
ik *1
gr[
1^
/J-
^ Densely populated.
,^ Large and small centres of population.
place of
traffic
situated on a
waterway
L,oi>don .
^ 51
12.
Han
13.
Si hsiang pah eking* tih rcn [^
14.
Ts'ai
15.
Tsah
ma-t'eo
Bl
place of
traffic
MA
away from a waterway.
*t
fi'j
mao shuang ch'ilen Jf%l li & Both

$| lit Odds and ends of jobs.
si
244
Men
from
all parts.
talented and handsome.
e.g.,
MAM) A
LESSON
As
I'KLMKU.
IN
XXVIII.
according
II
$$,
A+
To
to.
28.
To
lead; to guide.
tice.
enlighten.
chi
To change to alter.
to
i<ii
c/iich To loosen
di
untie. To explain.
k'Hdiif/* A basket.
If*
Toen-
Toquotefromabook.
A.
To
finger; a toe.
point
t#di
67
Private
*^
To
State.
fish
Hen
proof.
ohia-ren*
Jl
chief minister in a
konf/
animals.
kill
personal. Sel4
palace
Natural
source.
p'ai
'(/
isai-hsiang
minister.
Perhaps;
if;
To depute;
A clan.
To prosper
whether.
kong-siPublic business.
ia-mcn
magistrate's
to
office; a
send.
court of justice.
eh'ao-t'iuy
;
to
in-
txo-vhu
The
To
Court.
take
re-
sponsibility.
pdo-hn To protect ;
To decrease; to decline.
To lift to raise. To men-
to
preserve.
tion
prime
to.
t i
crease.
Doubt;
to suspect.
a temple.
splendour.
to doubt;
i-Im.h
Domestic
servants.
secret.
proper
h
to indicate.
cJii-tx'i
to bring forward.
p'iny According to. Evidence.

ch
Whereas ; according
k
to. Evidence.
)
chi-InieiA.ii opportunity.
To
trust to.
To
An
entice
to
induce.
accuse
falsely.
ch'co
To
in-in
..
lai
Branches.
p'ing-an Peace
peace-
ful.
enemy. Enmity.
cht-t'eo
Fingers;
toes.
Beginning or Origin.
^^
In the examples already given of the use of

pen and
pen-Id i, the prominent idea is that of a root sending forth branches.
Uen jijf which is often used for jjg iien, A fountain/ in like manner
indicates the source from Avhence events now or have their rise.
1.
Thus, by a natural transition of thought they both denote commencement or starting-point, and usually carry with them the suggestion
that so it should be in the nature of the case.
tfc 7.K
>S
i/
oli <lt'tnk K'dtcr
think of the fountain
of the source of
your
245
benefit*
be
mindful
MAiTbAKIN PRIMEE.
28-
common
Th<> following
expressions are in
At
5fc iien-hisicH
use in this connection
primarily; originally; as a matter of fact; etc.; Jg
first;
jjf
uen-ktl
Hjj ch'i-t'co ;
^g
Jjfe
ts on(/-J:cn.
Alternatives expressed by hueh ^.

been shewn that ai. alternative
"either ....
denoted by placing one sentence over against the other,
It Las already
2.
or"-
is
no words answering to "either .... or" being needed. In books,

however, and in some colloquial forms Tjj$ hueh, either alone, or
c/w, A pronoun, or Jjl dri is employed as a more formal
joined to
method
of
saying
MM
the
same
The beginner should
thing.
use
it
sparingly.
Kither this
j$
It
ie
is
way
or that; huch-xlti chcv
hueh-sfii
na
la IK/
hueh-ehce
t'a
HCIK/
i<tn</
gist!-
not certain whether he can do
wi-Ko-eki j$
4#
fa fg
or not
it
pf fcj.
Supplementary: Lessons X-XIII.

T^tii
3.
is
H|
employed
the
introduce
to
second
half
of
conditional statement, and denotes that after certain things arc done
certain consequences will follow.
In this it approximates to chin jjjjjj,
but with the difference that while

or connection
indicates that
temporal sequence and
tint*
\\ ait until
eat
chin shews the natural order
'jjfc
and nof before in

(</), it is then
in
and
thu,x
moral
se<{uence t'.y.,
only
(6),
he has finished eating and drinking and then go and
J||
tx'ai
ami drink yourself; ten</ tî ch'ili

t,
ig
j,
am what I am simplv by the
oh.'u ,/,>/, hoi,
&n
pj-
a*
gi'ace of
.s7/?
mm-fido, ni
lioli
tih
*t
tx'ai
k n-i
l
m-
God;
o hsien-taai
en tx'ai ch'eng tih
ffi
Shang-ii
W65 I.
cA? ; etc.;
Sometimes it is preceded by such words as Hg fuJi ;
which point out that when people are spoken of, those referred to stand
by themselves,, or Avheii two classes are spoken of, that one and one
ch'eng-MasO ho-teng
-ffi
A7
fa
i'cn,
n\cn<i
S^
A, '*
under consideration; e.g.,

People who are not sick do not need a doctor sick people only
need one; inuli in pint/ till rcti long puk cfioh i-KC-nf/ ; efi'i iu pin<j tih
ren h'al ion,, tch cAoA
ft,
ft
ft
o)ily is
A p n mFollowed
A J83 *
&%
K*
ffl
by
sin or
Jj hao and preceded by ^
chce or J|J
places a matter beyond question ; tv/.,

This doubtless is the light way to do it; chce-iang txo ta'ai
)ia, it
That
is first
class
na
ts'ai
hao
ni
$fi
largely used as a
Mandarin; after verbs it denotes inability;
Jîfi-l'o
is
That countryman
puh-ko $>
is
^ ^f
gg.
superlative
c.y.,
exceedingly simple; na-ho
m^JA^^ ^
246
i8-
slii
in
Southern
MAM>AIHN
overcome him
cannot
#&
ft-
to Jf
Ico/i,
in
28-
IMJIMKi:.
argument
.s7/o//
fa
fttili-ko
^JJ gj
following characters and combinations are used
The
addition
in
'
Ônmd
Each
the
jjj:
-each';
for
-/<"//
etc.:
every.
of every
l.">tii
md
month;
tidi diili-n
ft JJ -p
a re.'
with; whenever.
forwarded on the :'>rd Slid 8th
&HA
jxi/i
Each one
/.'o/<-/xz
Each went
clt'i/i
inci-fciuj
'
/eflgr 8<x?l
full
fa-
mei-ftng On evei-y occasion.

observe Sunday once every seventh day;
)'
To
35..
To meet
"Letters
se\ erally
severally.
koh-tsi lend
own home;
to his
t'icn
c/iifi
fa
if*
7^ ^p as rej)resentino- all sums u]^ what goes before other words
3
TogOVern to rule.
expressing totality are 3^ font/ All the whole.
4
the whole of; all. All the whole;
cAo/*// A multitude;
jjfa
'
'
t'oHff-t'ouy
55. Jfr
^^
ta-chia
^ ^ t-chi(i ^ ^ td-c/uniy.
^ ^ commonly follow j)ronouns;
t'ouy-xhoi
and ta-chong
consulted about
They
all
This
garment
IJotli
t'd-mcn- ta-chia
it;
tit
as^
shang-Mang fy
1*n
t<>n
////
is
badly made throughout; ehoB-ehien
^ftfc^
i'l> liao
Lesson
5l'^
$J
Piih-m
The
i'K
64
i-shang
*F-
XI.
Different words are used for building.

are used for building a bridge; JB; /srô
vessel
ffll
Both
is
Jja
two and {^
///< for a
wall, and $jt 7/.s/j/.
'
'
the
equivalent of, Cannot do better than ;
-fa
best thing is to go to the yameii and see the official
c//^'
and
is
N/Hiny i(t-nn:n c/itrn kudu

-f([\
JYou cannot do better than not go
As an
^gj
;
p^
ûh ru
r.r/.,
]>nh
^.
pit/i ch'ii
^ ^p ^ ^.
not joined to all verbs, but

auxiliary
to the following which have already occurred
rA?/
//.sw
for building a
for a city wall.
employed
is
it
may
be
Shco
H;
A-
c/t'i
^;
tiny
|j
tin
f|
^f;
Jt
c/</
|g ;7>o
ch'jh
H
f
^!
;
cli'i
jig;
;
//V/i
/c/
gj
$|;
tso
fg ; >VM
sheo jg.
^;
^;
chan
^;
k'ao
///V
|^
///</
Lesson XII.
Z/ gjl joined to ~f /mo is of the same import as
ch u-liao
~~f
and fjf "p Wo-Udo
Apart from; with the exception of
e.y.,
Apart from this way of doing it, how can we act? li-lido dni'-
'
'
mopnn,
1*<>n-ino
Imd
//*/>/
ni?
flfe
T^lJSKHf^Jil'frff
B6-
Lesson XIII.
The advent of the newspaper has pressed many terms into new
moulds and given them fresh applications. If the suggestion bear
fruit that the government should issue a Standard
Dictionary of
247
MANDARIN PRIMEK.
28.
Terms and appoint a body of men corresponding to the French

Academy, there may then be some uniformity in the terminology
employed to represent new terms introduced Avith foreign arts and
Meanwhile we must employ such terms as are in common
crafts.
use some connected with newspapers are as follows
:
Editors-in-chief
Editor
txony chu-pih
chu-pih
|g,
iijt:.
|^.
^
^
fi.
Compositors pai-ts'i-ttk -jf|
AReporters ;/afi#-*ii rcn |
Moveable type ; hoh tei pan fg *
;
^.
article; hien, or hien-shoh

h-sin-ucn $Jf |jf].
Newspaper
News;
Advertisement; kao-pcli
To
ffiffiny
4
gg
I
K
g
H
To
toiy
3
f.so??//
2
ucn
||g
kuan
$|
A
A
or
gjg}-
|j.
jj.
enquire about.
vessel
rise.
All.
To
/
i
\
)
gjjj-
a utensil.
To record.
The chief. An emphatic
To
hear.
loom.
machine.
office.
public
particle.
smell.
An
opportunity.
tavern
an eating house
etc.
private dwelling.
Newspaper
office; jjao-kuan 3j$ ^|\

an article tcny-pao
fg.
Printing machine in shu chi-ch'i p[)
|g gg.
is used figuratively to attach oneself to a person, and
T'ieh
to pay out to make up a
also in the sense of to make good
To
insert
|j,lj
deficiency
c.y.,
To pay out money as for

To pay the difference in
Vich shui
jjfi
a loss, etc. ; t'ieli ch'ten %fc jjj^.

the quality or 'touch' of silver;
;]<.
To
be attached to, as friends or clothing

Intimate ; t ieli-lmn i\f\ fo.
t'ieh
shcn
ftfa
^.
He was
so scared that his face
changed colour
t'a
ft]
$|
heh teh lien tu pien-liao
ien-seh.
To
transact public business pan kong~s'i.

There's no undoing this kiai puh kâi.
There is abundant evidence; iu p*ing iu chit.
Flourishing and declining by turns /// hsing ih shnai.
o tso puh teh chu.
I cannot take responsibility
This underling was sent by the Prefect chce shi ch'i-fu p'ai tih c/i'ai.
I will explain it to you o k'o-i kiai-shoh chih ni t'ing.
He has changed his mind t'a picn-liao hsiu.
I will go when I have an opportunity teh chi-huei o chin ch**u.
To forget how to write a character when one wants to /'/ pih Jiang ts'i.
;
The God of peace ts'i p'ing-au-tih S/iang-ti.

Heaven is a glorious place T'-ien-Vang sh'i ko iu
;
iong-iao tih ti-faiig.
MANDAJMN
1'KIMER.
28.
The branches of the vine can only bring forth fruit;

They went according to his
they are useless for anything else.
Commandment and loosed the ass. In the j>rovince of Shantung
A yamen is a place for the
there are a good many vineyards.
transaction of public business.
own private affairs are of little
:
My
importance. This in all probability is a private grudge. At the Court

there are prime ministers and statesmen, all managing government
He
took up the basket and went

he tells the truth
I had a dream
without proof.
business.
Don't doubt him
things.
no means
man
That
meaning.
courses, and afterwards got
its
explain
to
is
all his
make an
iron
to insert
it
enquiries about
and write
buy
by
last
night and cannot
him
into vicious
money by
false accusations
man
tears.
really
enough
newspaper article yesterday and sent
him
the street to
his statements are
enticed
first
jfc
off to
it
shed
He
it
wrote a
to the editor to-day, asking
in the paper.
Reporters go all over the city making
all sorts of things, and afterwards go to the newspaper
them up. The peace which God gives is deeper than

men have this peace after their sins are forgiven. The Lord
commanded His disciples to go to the village and unloose the colt of an
ass and bring
it to Him. The devil leads people astray to commit sin.
(jjfc)
office
the sea
Writing Exercise
JtlB'ftllKAfiftJIt
READING LESSON XXVIII.
3.
4.
Ti*-pah*
5.
6.
Iong*-tu*
7.
8.
9.
matter
II
shi long hsin

Hen Jl 5c Daily.
Uang ch'ien chin pu fa
1.
US-
/\
The Younger Brother
2.
1'f
Chien
fj'j
^ To promote
Jft
Made strides forward.

j|
to advance.
;
Expenditure.
^ ^ To be anxious about.
A^'ao /^ r//w //A
Kua-hsin
Chuan-hsin
Aft
in
hand.
si
'\%
ft
fi{j
Trustworthy.
With one mind.

. . . 1
tang si pan
^^
249
f?
ft give
attention to the
MANDARIN PRIM EH.
28.
^mm.m
-m
in
*SP
nt
A^
ffi
6.
^ \ Wife of a high official.

^ But alas
Fang*' tsong ch*ing* ink* J& ^ 1W i^ To give rein to passion.
Cfri liao huai
Conceived an evil purpose.
j@ T 91
To comply with.
Sui-ts'ong ^
to last.
SAz tAow^- ^ fe From
7.
Chioh u-lien JU 1^
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
gone.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Fu-ren
U-nai $jf.
15.
16.
first
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
JKt
Was
conscious of the fact that her character was
In hsiu chêng ch'eo @

/
f/L Became his enemy because of chagrin.
Nteh l -tsao* Jg jg To fabricate.
Huang*-ien* gj| W Ivies a trumped-up story.
miV j//^ AJ/W
M IK 'fr The face of a man, the heart of a beast.
Ts'uen* fa To conceal to hide.
Ch'lng hsin "^ H" Readily believed.

Was moved with anger
Tong ch i
To put in prison
ffsia 4 chieti 1
Hsing 1
^^
y^
shitai*
puh
uniformity.
17. Chinl-tsuh*
18.
J@t
(i5S
14.
ih l
jgf
to be angry.
Flourish and decline with no
^ A jailor.
H Prisoners.
Ch'ai-ren H A Yani^n runner.
Huang*-kong ^ ^ The palace.
To pour out.
Chen*
once upon a time.
lu ih-huei ^
IS On one occasion
Men men puh loh
f$ ^ ^ Dejected.
2$<
Ch*ii-fan*
JfB
g-f
ffi
250
MANDARIN PRIMER.
28.
_h
&T
41
ft
15
1ft
JS
/ ho fang
Chih*-chiang*
ni ? ft
fil jlfj Vfe
What would be
the
harm
in
juice sap.
3 C/ii ffi To press to squeeze.
4. Feng* 2j$ To present with both hands.
To carrv on the head.
5. Ting-choh U|
3
6. C/tan
To behead.
^\- $fe
7.
8.
;'w
Chao
do
9.
10.
ii.
so.
Sure enough certainly.

fr To act in accordance with.
Jising
ih t'i
Jg Bring to the notice of ; to mention.
.
Ti
l
Ch'ien nan
$ On no account.
Man k'co tah-ing ffi p
j|g Was
}
full
of protestations that he would
^ & To assure take my word for

To transact.
5///' si Hen* t& ^ & & To drink water and think of the fountain
14.
to be mindful of the source of a benefit.
i-hco (^
JU M Henceforward.
15. Ts*ong
12.
Kuan-pao
13.
Pan-li
7;;
ts
it.
3%
%ft
'i
jit
251
MANDARIN PRIMER.
28.
JL
ft tt ft
-BL IP ft ft
ji
&
1
33 To do one's duty.
pen-fen f|r
Sheo knei-chil 3j* $[ fti To behave oneself properly.
*
/// Pieu hao si ih f'ien
5^ Better ever
J^ #? iSl
every day.
Ch'iah*-tuH fa j|f Exactly right.
Hsi*-tsao*
ffi
Jsfe
C/t'ao* hsiai*
//'// //(?
|J
position of misery.
To bathe.
^H Court boots dress shoes.
ft 7 ?H J& To emerge from a place of death
;
^^
from a
Ih f'iao hoh lu
a path of prosperity.
Jft A road of life
Si ri fnh-hoh $fc jTjj $
Resurrection.
7ii' (^ As a matter of course.
n. Ih-iien pnh p ien
IS Without the least partiality.
SA
12. Shan in shan pao
To good there is a good recompense.
^f
13. Kuaifl-hsi* K9 f^ Consequences.
8.
9.
10.
'
^^
252
MANDARIN PRIMER.
LESSON XXIX.
To
detain
flexible
+
ti en
05C
behind.
Soft
il
leave
to
29.
%
Reason
-ku
cause.
weak.
'
ing
Hard;
To
.12,3
stiff; firm.
expect to
hope; hope.
<'".'/
1
pit. To entrap.
To amass; to store
w
k'eng
i
eh
fo
up.
,y/tz
"
ien
To drown
c/j.
to
Words. To speak.
ing-ien
u-chien
sui-ts'i
^f>
TilF" lu-uei
fulfil.
To
fulfil
To
An
ful-
meet
to
"
ao -sheny
Flourish-
ing
burned.
ear of grain.
Keeds.
eo
breathe,
Scorched
^r
Vexed.
happen.
iCtO
finger-ring.
filled.
submit.
serve;
dose of medicine.
;
>
ts
over with.
Assuredly
To understand.
to
all
certainly.
ien-ii
To verify to
To examine.
ien
ko-ran
To
desist.
A
to bolt.
to overflow.
ch'uiTo blow;
i
be
to
Clothes.
4
stories.
Submerged.
To pass through
fuh To
pastor.
To
thin; emaciated.
Lean;
penetrate.
2
Unfounded
pass on.
seo
t'eo
iao-ien
to revolve.
To swallow:
muli- si
market.
To
(
serve.
'
chuan To turn
To
fuh-s'i
.,
as vegetation.
Vigorous
chuang-sh'jJi
strong.
ch'ing-ts'u, Clear.
^g
fei
Fat
'
of animals.
plump
ch iang-cfi ia ng-t ih
Just the thing
just as
Inference
Phrases used to express.
In deducing a conclusion from a line of argument, we
...
1.
may
word or a phrase.
Certain things being so, we

infer certain conclusions.
Words like 'therefore/ 'whence/ 'since/
etc., generally introduce these conclusions ; or we may employ such
'
In consideration of/
This being so/ etc.
Chinese
phrases as,
employ
either a
'
colloquial usually prefers this latter style
more generally employed

phrases in
or na $$
tft 2fc
common
in books.
the single words being

gives some of the
The following
which may be introduced by either ehce J,

rt
chcv-iang-k'an-lai JJ ib
chce-iang shoh-Iai Jg
use,
k'an-chce-ko-iang-tsi
in
e.g.
Th e same from beginning

253
to
end.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
29.
Since this
S h'i t'a-tih
is
the dog
so,
not his; chcv-iany-k'an-hti, keo
is
tit
o-me,i tn Itai-tang al Mia-ny-ti
Finally
Looked
IK ( ur in)
in conclusion
from
at
puh
$>
ft Wft 7>
If this be the case we should all love
JE
to
sum up
this point
God;
^ #,
ffi
of view
ekce-iang-shoh-lai)
^ ^ f ^ St
tsong-ri-ien-ehi
f=
faan-tai
.
fjjj
ts't
ru)
t-s'ong (or
$|,
t*
jfc
2. One peculiar Chinese construction, to which little more than

allusion can here be made, is the stringing together of four characters
to form a phrase.
Such phrases are very common, and the student
advised to learn them and to use them freely.

kinds which we will notice in order
There are
is
five
1.
2.
Repetition of ih
Intercourse; coming and going; ih lal ih uany
Coming and going; ih-lai ih-oh'u
^.
2j
.
The second
character repeated
phrases are descriptive.

With earnest desire
Perfectly white
3.
The
and
first
correspondence.
Foolish ; stupid
\vitli
fify
E E
ien-pa-pa-tih 05
peli-seny-seng-tili fy
third,
at the
till
tj
2j
end
such
&5-
f\.
tj
or second and fourth the
or
same,
in
hu-Ii-hu-t'u ffj] |g fjj ^.

Well intentioued hao-sin hao-i ]fr fo ^f ^.
The first and third opposites, or in correspondence.
;
4.
Hypocritical
Early and
5.
k'eo-sJri hsin^-fei
late; ch'i tsao shui
-^ fo 5j.
JEJL [g
nan $&
Differing in size; ch'ih ta pah Imao

Neither the one thing nor the other;
Supplementary
3.
\$fc.
Numerical.
Other adverbial numerals

4
7^
4
pjji
ts'i
The next
chen
file
in order.
of soldiers.
^j fan Foreign.
Also
Fah
Lessons
in
*fc
^C
>J^-
puh san puh
XIV
common
to
s'i
/}>
5l
XVII.
use are
A time. A series.
A battle. A time
a short space.
time; a turn.
m pien
may
these Lessons
; jg tsao ; j|t ch'ang.

be used with the following words which occur in
To grow rich to become wealthy fah ts'ai jg gj-.

To become light to shine ;fah Hang
J.
To become dim of sight ;fah hua |f ffi.
To become vicious to develop vicious tendencies fah Imai
To be sad melancholy fah men |f f^.
To become weak ;fah man |f ^.
;
254
MANDAUIN
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
shew hardness;
become
to
manifest;/^// AX/HI jg
become sour; /a// MUI-H
29
PltlMElt.
stiff ;/<//
ing
jijj.
|fj
Jj^.
f$?.
|fJ
shew mercy f<ih Wi-pci fj ~jj f.

be proud; arrogance /a/i cliiao-ao |f gj| ^.
shew stupidity to be stupid fah ha-t'u
fjj]
;
be
stiff
;fah p<ui ff
$t.
$.
shew authority; to put on a semblance of anger fah

Severe; stern ff |$$.
Feverish ;fah-xhao ff j^.
O/i^t ;,J may be added to the following words
Greatness that which is important td-ch'u
/j.
Smallness that which is unimportant kxiao-cli'ii, >]> jg.
;
nci
jjfc
Height preeminence hio-ch'u J^

Everywhere tao-cli'u pj j^.
;
)$g.
meeting-place
chu-ch'u
Ijfc
jjjjz.
Bitterness; suffering; k'u-ch'u
The extremity extremes
An
j^.
chih-ch'u,
/g.
a low place hsia-ch'u "f J^.

In the open ; publicly ; ming-cli'u Bfl J^.
In secret in the dark ; an-ch'u 0|f jg.
inn
In every place
koh-vh'u
J^.
In addition to the characters already given, the following take

ren as a suffix
:
Hal
ch'iu
long j$
pang-ttsu
ffi
gjj
kan-tony j^ JJ
Lesson XV.
The word
^'ai furnishes an interesting illustration of the way

J^l
which the Chinese language is being adapted to express foreign
ideas.
It is now employed to translate world as applied to any
a distinctive
etc.
special occupation or province, as of knowledge
word immediately precedes it e.g.,
The commercial world shancj-ldai f&f ffi.
The official world kuan-kiai *j? ^..
The world of learning hsioh-kiai jjL }..
in
'
'
Lesson XVI.
Another word which forms the passive is

To delay.
ai, iai.
Side by side. Near ; next. This is most commonly used in connection
with suffering or anything undesirable e.g.,
;
To
To
from cold ai leng sheo toug

be cursed and beaten ai ma ai fa
suffer
255
^^^
^ jj ^ ff.
$fC-
MANDARIN PRIMER.
29.
Lesson XVII.
Other words
to express lack of relation or interest are
To allow to tolerate. An official position.

To adhere to, as an opinion.
chii; kii To grasp.
ren
$ij
As yon
no matter;
like;
puh-chu ^p
puh-kuan
jfy
etc.;
^p ^J
ren-p'ing
Not matter who it is, he must act reasonably

U hsing si ^ fa fpf A,
$} JJB fr ^-
puh
H
^
iao chao
chi-kuan
chii
ho ren,
hsien-ckin
Merely attend to matters of present interest
kuan httien-chin ^ JH
H? S,
^Further meanings and uses of *jj; tang are as follows
1. In the presence of; e.g.,
^M
^;
e.g.,
ch'i
To
confess his sin in the presence of all
*A
ch'ienren tsiu ft
fi ft
2. To bear
to endure e.g.,
My punishment
puh
Unable
P-
tan-tang
tang chong-ren mien-
vh'i
to
is
ft
greater than I can bear
fij
bear
>
^^
IB
responsibility
o-tih tsui t'ai chong,
Sused
unworthy
in self-
^^
depreciation ; puh kan-tang

^.
I cannot bear such a heavy burden
tnypuh
Mien
etc.
ch'i
jfjj
is
ar
*t
also
*^F
to
employed
*
s ^P
denote
chcu-mo chong
social
status
tih tan-tsi o
reputation
e.g.,
He
for managing affairs ; t'a hen iu

has a great reputation
flfc t&
Let him off for my sake k'an o-tih poll mien rao-shu t ( a pa
WW ?
m a tin m m 4 nheo
Shameless
mien-tsi
NOTES.
a.
mien-pi
In the North
g.
fo
ffi
uei-ts'i is
-^
used for
reeds/
Chiao $i is used as a superlative before some words

Very dry ; chiao-kan j$L j. Curiously enough, in the West
used before 'wet/ as Very wet chiao sh'ih fjjL '{j^.
b.
$&
ft]
Evil reports circulate everywhere tao-ch'u tsao iao-ien.

The inone}* was just enough ch'ien chiang-chiang-tih keo liao.
I do not accept this principle
opuhfuh chce-ko It.
Without cause or reason # ilen u ku.
That child is impatient of restraint na-ko hai-tslpuhfuh kuan.
Keep the vegetables hot; pa ts'ai tin reh.
If you are unwilling, there's an end of it puh uen-i chiu la tao.
You speak Mandarin very clearly ni shoh kuan-hua hen chîng-tsû.
He doesn't see through my meaning fra k an puh f'eo o-tih i-si.
The wheat is overripe meh-ts'i shai chiao-liao.
It is not easy to be a pastor tang muh-s'i puh iong-i
Hell is a place of suffering ti-iuh sh'i sheo k*u tih ti-fang
;
11
256
e.g.,
it
is
MANDARIN
I'UIMKIJ.
29.
Sonic reeds grow by the river side and some by the

Animals are fat in the winter and lean in the .summer.
There is an abundant harvest this year. Light is just breaking in
the east.
Men do evil in secret, and are recompensed in public.
Before
This piece of bread is too hard; there is no swallowing it.
lie went abroad he was a
poor man; he has now come back very
The Customs will not let goods go aboard till they have
wealthy.
examined them, \\liat he said two days ago has truly come to pass.
Detain him to a meal.
No matter (^f ^) how much ability he has,
He suddenly got into a rage
I don't want him here to serve me.
and turned and went away. Although he is over seventy years old,
he is still vigorous.
When the wind blows, the grass moves. They
went three times in succession, and in the end did not meet the
Yameu underling. No matter whether the disciples of Christ are
rich or poor, they all have the hope of heaven in their hearts, and
sooner or later Avill all get Home.
When a man goes to hell, he
can never come out although his friends engage all the Buddhist
and Taoist priests in the world to chant prayers for him, it is useless.
Men need not spend any money to gain the hope of heaven ; God
Tr<uix/ttt<'
side of lakes.
gives
it
to
men
freely.
Writing Exercise
SI
&&
READING LESSON XXIX.
1.
Chiang -chiai |f f Explanation.

Ch ecP-fc an* gÎ fl- Ugly evil-looking.
l
257
III.
H/Lu
^ ^ ji ft
^.
2.
&
+H
jl>
The Younger Brother
3:
IP
Jt
iij
P<J
MANJDAK1N PBIMEB.
29.
1.
Pao-man AgltPull.
2.
Fei-mei
51 In good condition.
Tan* poll* \'fc Jjp Poor; indifferent.
Chiao $fa Dried up by the wind.
- Both in the same
Kuei uei i/i |
category.
Chiang-iao |ft S About to on the point of.
3.
4.
5.
6.
'
f]
7.
Ch'i-shi tn
8.
Feng* nien*
To point out
^
Ren ti Hang k^n \
to indicate.
Plenteous years.
i|
^^
Both the land and men will suffer.

9.
Ify
L. 30.
io. Slien-chl -$ =g So that.
IT. Ting* chuen* ^? ;$ Certain assured.
12. Chii* cP-tih* ii* chien 1 $% $> to
IL In niy liurnbie opinion.
;
13.
T'ong*-kueh^
14.
Chih -sheo*
fai
The whole kingdom.

To store up.
ft^
jffi.
Jj^t
"~* One-fifth.
In any fractional statement the
be regarded as the denominator the number
as above ."ft
as the numerator
2- ~-~ or i fen of 5 feu, or
following ch'i
iXf=i. Any fractional number can be expressed in this way.
16. Chcc ih-fan hua jig ~ $r IS This speech.
15.
number
6^ y^;/
ch'i
before
fen
*fr
35*
may
258
il
29
^W
^fMI
3c"$
u4 fll,ft
fA
i.
MANDAIIFN PRIMER.
Feng^
13 ii
To appoint
^J-
^ To take off
Tseh^
Ih l t'ao* kuan*
z>;/
^z 3
R!
ft
i'J
to office.
of a ring, hat or spectacles.
*|T
3^
complete
outfit of official dress.
^ A chain.
|5f
The neck. In the North poli* tsi*

Chingi-hsiang*' >/fi
Kuan-li
?1 To rule to superintend.
To avail of to take advantage of.
Ch en l -choh 4
S/m l vj> Sand.
9.
10.
'
Nii-tsi
-fr -f-
T^Vw 1 w^w 1
=f>
&^
Chuan ho
12.
A'
rt/
A young woman.
f/î
/VA*
^ $3
J8H
The
difference
@ i| j^ ^ Calamity changed
iiei full
ih-t'iao ch'nh
13. Shi* lien* f^
used.
between heaven and
the abyss.
11.
is
To
fcfj
^ ^f
14.
Teh* hsing*
15.
Cfi'eug-ch'uen
lit [#]
test
f^
î
?^
To open
into blessing.
of escape.
way
to put to proof.
Virtue.
^r
To complete
259
to bring to perfection.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
29.
Jl if H-
B
^
ij
P"ing* liang*-hsin* %& !a

)r
Ih-pîen chêng hsin
%
rA/ />-^ ^'a Ao lien
3.
afraid of being tested by fire.
2.
4.
5.
act conscientiously.
A. true or faithful heart.
o^
Rohpuh shi % ^ j| If it had not

Huanpa liao $g | T Fairly well
'ffl
^C
been that
;
Genuine metals are not

.
passable.
A'aw ////. |2 >H; Drought.

Difficult straits.
Chien^nan*' |g
But.
8. Chi* in 1
=
9. /5? f Here To saddle an animal.
10. Mien-teh $& ffi To avoid lest.
6.
7.
11. Ari*-p ai*
12.
To arrange to set in order.

8(1 To take leave of relatives or
|f
Ts*'i*-pieh* |f
260
friends.
MANDARIN PRIMKU.
30.
LESSON XXX.
To
injure
to spoil.
Injury.
To
..
"
Low
gather to-
ing
lower.
To
gether; to assemble.
hxiii-k'ii, Tired
suffer-
ket
To
tl
::
assemble; to col-
cliii-/nid
hardship.
m-i-it
beneath.
Majestic
im-
posing.
fa'al
4
ki<u
ehieh
shao
4
tfyt
*
To guess; to
To warn. A
surmise.
To
?y-Pll
not of the same
surname.
hxhiny Towards; to or from;
kuan-hsi Consequences;
I'i-inicn
facing.
t'eo
kai
responsibilities.
To steal. Stealthily.
To alter to change.
To repent.
Good-looking;
respectable.
hud-tahTo answer;
Worthy. To match.
line
ttcJl
thief
A
1
ehui
detail
minutely.
lid
robber.
Conscience.
ng-hsin
rebel.
so
like
To pursue. To reflect
upon.
Transgression
ko-fd n
kong-ch Iny Respectful.
As
clti-ii
to
to
d -p d i
(
come
to dispose.
...
to.
To reverence.
To a r ran ge
fault.
chien-cheng
ning-k'o Rather.
pih-p'eh
To
shen-chi
5WR:
persecute;
Where
in
gg
^*
pj*
and
'
It is better to die
'not.'
uang-en-fu-i
Ungrateful.
its Correlatives.
English we should say 'It
sin/ Chinese would say

'than' by a negative,
sh'ih-t'ido-kidi The
Ten Commandments.
inasmuch.
Ning-k'o
testify
Up to the point
of
To
testimony.
to harass.
1.
In
dispose.
2
to
reply.
To
a row.
Relatives
clt'in-ch'ih
To carr.
take.
haughty.
commandment.
chido-ao Proud
precept;
Niny-k'o
is
better to die than to
and not
pj"
to sin
'
expressing
or k'en -^
is
the
Never was a good work done without
much
trouble.
261
MANDARIN PRIMER.
30-
'
'
equivalent of
It is better to.
or
Rather tlian
they
one
or
other of the following expressions
precede
puli
ie-puh
/
puh-k'o ;p Iff puh-k'en
e.g.,
-pf
Kather die than steal niny-k'o si pith t*o txeh
pj" ffi /
fj$ jj$.
Better to recompense kindness than to be unthankful for it nine/
.
'
^
^
^^
^ ^
Kather endure persecution than follow depraved courses
k'o shco pih-p'ch puh
hshiy hsie-ln ^
^p
*g jg
Sequence, as expressed by shen-ctii ^ 3L and chi-ii g
en ptih l; c o vancj-en-fa-i
nf fR
P! Jg
ft. j|.
It is. better to be cursed and beaten than to lie; ning-k'o al
shco in, pnli k'o sali-limincj
pj
J^
ff,
$}' gg.
k<opao
>
k'o
p]"
ma
ninc/-
fj> ffi
"pj"
*jjfa.
jj^.
is employed to denote
2. Sheify-cJit
matters
logical sequence
have reached the point at which some results are to be manifested.
or as a prepositional phrase
Clii-u 3? :)J5 is used in a similar way
;
introducing a subject
His sickness
&xs
is
e.g.,
not unto death
t'a-tih pine/ puli cJn-ii
The two men quarrelled till they began to fight

ch'ao-nao, shen-chi ta ch'i chia lai
f@
PJ/ ?$,
fy
(ft
Supplementary
While
and
ro/i.
liang-ko ren
S ^ ^T & $& 2R-
3.
s'i
Lessons XVIII to XX.
^ wo are the words most commonly used
to express supposition, there are others which are constantly used

in books and in the conversation of educated people.
They furnish
the same variety as such English words as 'supposing'; ' provided

'
that ; 'in the event of ; etc., but context and usage must determine
'
the translation
If
in the case of
sheh-roh |J
granting
chia-t-oh <g
etc.
t'ang
fjjf
t'ang-roh
jjjj
Tao fy\ is often strengthened by the addition of fan g[ which in

some districts precedes it, in others follows it. Another adversative
3
in a high style of talk is
But; if;
7J nai.
particle in books and
,
Joined to
namely.
puli-slii
It
sh'i
often used as a correlative of
is
not the scholar, but the teacher that

nai-sh'i lix'ten-seng
puh-hao /f
^*
ft'
Do
chi,
not seek your own

nai ck'iu li ren jfc
In addition to
profit,
hsii
is
bad puh sh'i hsioh/P if 75

i$
;
f!l
A-
pih, the following words and combinations are
>gj
'
J^
but the profit of others fei ch'iu
,75^
fij
employed to express necessity

4
u To devote attention
2j|
/fc
e.g.,
seng puh-hao,
it is
Necessary
'
:
to.
must.
262
Duty
business.
Must.
MANDA1MN
Mu>t
is
it
to
necessary
I'll
etc.;
ffi
30-
Kit.
jgj
ti-jfi/i ;
u-iao
%$
jj^J
Men must practise goodness /r// u-4ao hsing-shan

He will surely return; /<</ txon</-t<'/i i<> Inici-lal
;
< '/^rf
is
word round which Anther many expressions denoting
such as 'nearly';
approximation,
includes those most
li.-t
little different
^^
or
c/i'r/
fch-iien
Just a
commonly
following
not quite the thing ch'a i/i-tien

9$.
the thing; ch'a-jjuh-to or ch'a-ûh-li
;
(ûite beside the
or
The
etc.
almost
Nearly right;
M7$
'almost';
in use:
^^
different; ch'a teh-to |
mark; Widely
^ ^ jg.
little
out; Not
much
beside the
mark;
ch'a
/e
c/i<,
Ch'ioh 31 forms part of a few phrases which introduce something

additional, generally in the way of protest, or taking exception
In the North 'it is colloquially proto something already stated.
nounced
;
<i [I
k'eh,
and some teachers write
vh'ioh read as
But
there
is
l;'ch
"pj"
k'o for
it,
but
it is
probably
e.g.,
something else
ch'ioh in ih-chicn
ffi
f^.
Lesson XIX.
Other phrases of similar import to

$fc td-hii ; J^ ~p H/KDUJto-loli
ioli-'ni ;
;
etc., are fc Ify
ffi ~/^
-Jfr
kuang-ehing
;[f j
chiang-ckin; "jj
ch'ien-heo; as,
h*i<i
About
three years ago; tsao sail nicii
till
,-
kuang-ching
J^.
%*
is
nearly
jS + a-
?oA -/tt luh ch'ien rcn $}

TA ^F* Ayears old; t'a cliiany-cliin u-sh'ih sal
Nearly 6,000 people
He
fifty
'fjjl,
Lesson XX.
Two
ch'i are in constant use, viz.,

other interrogatives besides
Icn
while used largely in books is not
nan-tao.
^'aii-fao ||| 3^ is more common in the
infrequent in colloquial,
jg ien and ||
North than
in the South, and is frequently followed by

jj
puhmo or pg ni, used after
which
c/i i,
takes the place of
ch'enff,
and conveys the idea of expostulation or remonstrance ' e.g.,
How can such tilings be possible? ien neny iu dice iang tlh
'
'
<
*?mn%&m%#Mmake
a mistake in reading, can it be that it shall

If he should
not be pointed out to him? nan-tao t'a nien h'o-liao chiu puh ch'ichiao t'a mo!
|
ft
fe
%.
HJf
263
%%&&
MANDARIN PRIMER*
30-
Sequence of events as well as of time

repetition
is
frequently shewn by
e.g.,
Kill each one as he comes; fai ili-ko shall ih-ko

2j~ f@$c~ f@Use sentences as you learn them; hsioh ih-chii iony ih-chil
ft ft
Jp
ft-
Send the sheets away as they are printed;

chant/ ED
gg |f
5|.
&
Tientsin
is
in chi-chang fah chi
$f|
'pj
a place where
many
people gather together
fHen-chin
shi ko ta
chii-ch'u.
The thief stole my watch na-ko tseh t'eo-liao o-tih piao.

Ten in a row ih-p ai shlJi-ko.
To injure others and benefit oneself siien ren li chi.
This colour does not match chce-ko puh p'ei (or ////) seh.
;
He
told the matter in detail t'a pa si-cluing ch'iang-hsi shoh-liao

ih-pien.
cannot guess your meaning o ts'al pith c/wh ni-tili i-s'i,
They met together every Sunday at 10 o'clock t'a-men mci-feng li-pai-t ien,
shift lien chong chu-huci.
The Ten Commandments were given by God shih-t'iao-kiai shiShang-tich' nan
;
hsia lai tih.
We
should worship
God with
all
reverence
o-incn kai kong-kong-ching-ching*
tih
pai Sliang-ti.
The Saviour is willing
to forgive all our offences

inen ih-ch'ieh tih ko-fan.
Translate :
and
in the
I spent a good deal of
end he spoke
trouble you to take
ill
(J'^f)
of
me was
;
Chin-din
money and
iien-i shcc-inien o-
trouble over him,

?
May I
not this ungrateful
my home ? He is a respectgrown up good-looking. A thief came

I got up and
of trousers and a coat
this letter to
able person, and he has also
last night and stole a pair

If a man acts conscienfollowed him, but did not overtake him.
Don't speak in
tiously it is unavoidable that he will be persecuted.
Two men came as
too low a voice, I can't hear what you say.
witnesses, but their witness did not agree.
Everybody dislikes a
who
exhibits
it
the
same
is
pride ;
principle both in China
person
;
That child answered his father altogether too rudely.

This affair was arranged by
This is a matter that concerns you.
Sooner or later the Saviour will return, and
one of his relatives.
He is loth that any should
all men must assemble before Him.
not be saved therefore He exhorts men to repent, believe and trust
in Him.
Whenever a man repents and believes, he is saved.
and abroad.
Should we not all repent and trust Him ? God so loved the world
He gave His only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in
Him, might not perish but have eternal life.
that
Writing Exercise:
1|
MJUBUJSfcJI^&afclSj.
264
MANDA1UN
30
J'lllMKI!.
READING LESSON XXX.
,A
The Younger Brother IV.

N
52A
^
1
,JK
3t!l
flit
3i
ta -m ft
$ &&.H
ft
w-
ft
-^*-^
ffl
Ji
T.-flfe
J:
rs^
>
SR
>ka
T,H
f
n
a
Xlfc
A
1.
K'oh*
2.
C/i'in inu-ch'in |
t'eo* ?i gg
3.
Chîoh in ih iang
Puh 1
5.
6.
|^ But there
P ^f
fg Are not
do not belong
Cen in ^ m The original money

Liang hsin fah hsien Ji fo %
Tsao tsui liao
S!
was one thing.

a book phrase.
to
money they brought with them.

To be convicted by one's own
the
*)l
conscience.
7.
f
m
To knock the head on the ground the kow-tow.

-f^ J$l His own mother.
4.
hsi 1
fe
0^
7 We
have met with retribution.
265
MANDARIN PRIMER.
30.
T
J&
Jfc ffl
-H
T
-ffi,
n--f
ffl
I.
tai
^ ^p To treat harshly.
2.
T'ong-si iS ^J
An
interpreter.
3-
Fan hua
To
translate.
4.
T *K
ITJ1
|f |g
Hsie* ^1 To unload
to
as a burden.
drop
7-
Puh liao ^ ^ But lo and behold

Mien mien hsiang kuan M li tB M Looked blankly
Heh ko puh liao $fo
/fC 7 Scared to no end.
8.
Ih-ch'i
56.
9-
Tso pao
$j
1^:
fjlfe
10.
Kuei
II.
Li*-uh* fg
12.
Shuang fen
13.
at each other.
flSj
tsai o
period
some time.
To be surety
shen sheng if
Ifa
Presents
^ ^-
to
^f
ic
undertake responsibility.
J^ J: Fall
upon me.
gifts.
double portion.
^ As soon as
266
it
was
light.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
n m
m.m
Jl
30.
>
.
'
.Air
P
4
i'J
r
r
m
RM
CAwf ^?^
Chui shang
il.
3.
Chfg
Seo 1 | To search.
6.
7.
8.
ft:
4.
5.
S To follow after to pursue.

^ .h To overtake.
shen-mo hna M" ^ ^ ^ IS What do you mean by such talk
1.
2.
sh'i
il
-2ft
^ X A slave.
JU |g =^ ^ To return good for evil.
/^ iao Hang hsin ^ 3g M *b To dispense with conscience,
P'nh ren
I oh pao shan
Ming
chien
OJJ
Of clear perception
267
intelligent.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
30.
VOCABULARY
4
"
Weak, as
Insipid.
liquid. Light, as colour.
tan
ch
To
cliieh-tai
2*
)
iu l
>
ball
To
t'ni
3
to
retire; to
demand.
To examine; to
tsui
Drunk
To
To
ino
shen
bite
kan-chih
To
market.
intoxicated.
gnaw.
pan To remove
Peaceful.
t'ai-p'ing
To
tn-ts'i
send.
To
lodge
lin-chu
at.
To make good
tai
indemnify.
bag ; a pocket
hs
To unload
to get
"2
rid of.
To
I'm
Near
descend.
on the point
seo
to
strive.
To
search for.
chieh-sh'ih
Jisih-ts'i*
Strong ;
tough.
A mat; matting.
pai
long
To do;
sheh-t'eo
t'ien-fen
The
tongue.
Natural en-
rcn-nai
The
ts'i-heo
To
k'oh-t'eo
To
nose.
sheo-i
craft
4
;
of kan-chih
An interpreter.
an
In some
chao-p'ai
fire.
A signboard.
art.
headman.
Proprietor; manager;
Skill in doing.
a.
t'ong-s'i
2
thanks."
wait upon
catch
To
The ceremony
"many
of the kotow
to serve.
sliih-ho
Patience.
forbear.
dowments.
pi-ts'i
to
manage.
Strong, of liquids.
NOTES.
to
eng
cupboard
a press.
of.
To
ch
dislike; to
loathe.
plan;
chang-ch'eng
procedure.
kuei-tsi
l(
neighbour.
sack.
belly.
To
ien-fan
to
robber.
The
Ji'idng-tao
"
port.
also.
money.
to trans-
to
ting-ch'ien Earnest
redress.
1
this account.
o
"
To
out.
stretch
On
'i
go
And;
ping-ch'ie
test.
in-ts (
;
to
withdraw.
k'ao
4
coffin.
p uh -Ua o Unexpected
To beg
t'ao
a sphere.
receive; to
welcome.
VI.
districts
kan-eh'ang
g ^.
268
g Jg takes the place
MANDARIN PRIMER.
READING LESSON XXXa.
30.
+=
|$
4$ Jg
The Younger Brother V.
1.
Hsiao
iih
'
/J>
ing superiors.
2. Ts u ts'i 10
l
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pad1 hsiong*
P>ieh*-hsia*
$j
The small one
On
the
first
5t Brother
1> To leave
.JJfi
'
^^^
8.
Tu* rih*
Shang
t'o
til
'it
fife
He would
die before
$ & ffi jl Were compelled by the famine.

To pass the days to live.
9c To come to a satisfactory understanding.
;
IT. Rang*' =g To suffer to allow.

12. Pei pei shang shang tih $& ?
;
14.
9.
13.
in address-
1
Pei^pei ts'an* ts'an* tifr
jg
Mournfully.
In^-chien^ [^ pH^ The nether world the world of darkness.
he would
10.
term used
occasion.
by the same mother.
to forsake.
55 *> /w// fcen chiao t'a ch'il ?E

let him go.
Pei* chP-huang* so* pih>
~fa
7.
a depreciatory
^^^
Grieved in spirit.
long-uen tan tsui ?TC
t
5P Bear the blame for ever.
K'ai en [^ & To shew favour to be gracious.
269
MANDARIN PRIMER.
*A
ft/J
ft
1. Chih hsiao-tih tien poh mien tsl jfe /J* ft

Suffer me not to be
put to shame.
2. Puh uang-chi
hao-ch'u 7^ ,g\ f C, . .
o We will not forget the
benefits conferred by you.
3. Ch'uan ming f^ % To spread abroad the fame of.
>& To be moved.
4. Tong hsin
5. Heh tiao liao huen $& $ T *& Scared out of their wits.
6. Huen* s/ien l
The whole body.
2
3
r
7. / <7^ /<?6> f jij- To tremble.
8. Pao*
. ch'eo*
ft ... 0t To avenge.
2
Man
5i tsai ren, chêng si tsai t'ien f$
A.
9. TJ/ô
proposes, Heaven disposes.
10. Pad* J^ To embrace.
n. T'ao*^ To harness.
.
^^
12.
Heo
13.
14.
Chuh*-fu*
15.
li
T/
9i3
Tseng'^-nao*'
Huei pao
substantial present.
To charge.
To quarrel.
$Jk tift
[B]
^^
^ 'Return message'
270
report
MANDARIN PRIMER.
M ft
Hfl^
9)$r'tiL--it;fcft^v
If
30.
ft
K ft
^sF1feiI
fi,
ft
1.
7*z>
2.
/ iiai
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
slicing tiao hsia lai tih

;1;
Unexpected.
^ Beyond thought.
Ching*-kiai*
The boundary
-^-
the border.
Ing*-chichl
|^ To welcome to meet.
Hsing li ft $g Saluted observed the appropriate ceremonies.
A'4 .sz/tf;/ 1 /; 4 ^^m 4 .|. g^
"|C Snivelled and wept.
yJ/<9/j /^ tih en-tien
*J& ^C ft
Exceeding great grace.
;
AH
1
3
Ch'ing ts'ao
^L Green grass pasture.
9. Hsien-fen $& ft A District.
10. Chuen*
A book a document.
11. f/i l p'an* cKi*
$ f^tt A game of chess.
8.
12. 7/2 1
13.
i'uan*
T*eo*-/isii*
14. /fc# tien
ma*
11Jj
puh
A ball
|^ A clue.
in* ren
gfc
of
hemp.
^ & X Nothing whatever

271
is left
to
man.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
30.
1.
2.
Parents.
Shuang ch in
Z/^ ch'eng* $ft f Journey road.
U tsai u ping 4$ fc $& ffi Free from calamit
and sickness.
REVIEW: LESSONS XXVI-XXX.
'
3.
1.
Give three sentences to
Shew
illustrate the use of
two sentences how ;jg

Write two sentences containing
in
Translate
to
see
you.
>> |g f^ ||
f{jj,
name
unworth
My
from
differs
f{,
and
'
in correlation.
I liave long wished

I am a native of
fg
is
Bjft
America.
Give two uses of
^ and
^
Explain
Shew two uses of ^ in as many sentences.
What
are
-^ and
j^jj
Write two sentences illustrating two uses of

State the difference between -fa and ? ^.^
#$
Translate J& fe ;
V&' |R ; ft SGive terms used in carrying accounts to
Translate Heading Lesson XXVI.
Illustrate three uses of
(or
f|{j)
five places of decimals.
|||.
Give four words used for building. 7

Shew use of
as an auxiliary with four different verbs.
Write six terms connected with newspapers.
Define |g, ]fjj =*
and shew how it is used in a sentence.
Give four adverbial numerals three expressions containing
<
and four containing
]%?.
^ '&){,
^ and and
Illustrate the use of
uses of
How
in as
many
ffi
',
and shew three
sentences.
are Jg pf, :|
?g JJ^ used ?
Give two sentences containing J|
QJ.
Translate Heading Lesson
XXXa.
272
different
MANDARIN JMMMEK.
2.
(Jive sound, tone
and meaning
30.
to the following cliaracters
*f*&Si<l*aH*ftiK&Je*
&
K
8fc
fcfc
ffl
*fi
Si
&
ft.
Tliese two books

3. Write tlie following in Chinese character
Put this food here for them to eat; it is nearly
are not very heavy.
enough for three people. This is much larger than that; I knew
:
it.
You do as I tell you, and it will
His
easy to write, but not easy to talk.
mother came back last year on the 3rd of the 4th month. When
I do not know go and ask
did he bring these two newspapers ?
I
told him to go three times, but he was unwilling to do so.
him.
that as soon as
be just
It
right.
looked at
is
is bad, why not go to a higher

place ?
Speak a
slower and I shall understand.
They all walked two stages,
and could walk no farther so they stayed in the house of Mr. 1J.
They all scattered some went to the east, others to the west. This
Since this place

little
The
only half as heavy as that twenty-cent piece.
an unreasonable fellow ; he broke my brother's
His friends are many, but he has not much money.
head open.
It has fallen to the bottom; go and fetch
This was made to order.
It is unimportant whether you do it or not.
Men have
it for me.
Alter this for me it is too light.
The
sin, but (lod lias grace.
man who sits at the door opposite is like one of the ancients ; go
It is easy to understand
across and invite him to come over here.
the meaning of this book, but difficult to act according to what it
All in good time; ask your teacher to explain it to you a
says.
sentence at a time, and then you will understand all kinds of
ten-cent piece
man who
is
sells tea is
expressions.
273
ADDITIONAL WORDS FOR EXERCISE IN COMPOSITION.

The numbers
refer to List of
Numerary Adjuncts.
Abuse; destroy, teao-t'ah

Acclimatized, fuh-sh
Bee,
nuh-f('n</-txi
Beggar,
u-i-t'u-
a,
g|
gfc
Jjt
^^^
^ *?
l
liuu-tx'i
Behind the back
Bath-tub, Jwi-tsao-p'cH
ncnr/-kan
Ability,
privately,
'
Accompany,
p'el
Ague,
p'i-luni
pg
)]^
All the world, uan-kueh-chiu-cheo
Bell, a small, ling-tang
Bellows,
Blame,
Alter,
Blow,
k<'H(/-k(ti
2
Answer back, to, h u-a n-k'eo

HM4>
Ant,
Antecedents,
Anxious
jjj
to,
Blow,
Blood
p'ei-U;
Ji
t$eh-pei
-f
ch'ui
to,
(of wind), kuah-fciiy )|

circulation of blood,
;
h&ieh-meh
hti-Iih
Boastful mannei', fn tno
about, to be,
Apologize
feng-hsiang
to,
jj
p'n
l
Breast,
p'hiy-l-o
Apples,
Apprentice, an,
A.s-/oy/r/-/"Vv>
Bricklayer,
t'.u-ti
ua-chiang
Arrowroot,
Brush,
Brush, small, used
eo-fcn
to
wash
Assistant; employe, ho-chi
Attention, to pay,
Axe,
//?(-/
Buddhism,
/u^8i8
Bucket,
Buffalo,
Bag,
;
roast, As'ao
Balustrade
Bugs,
wng-si
Burial; funeral,
;
trimming,
lan-kan
fff
Bamboo- worker, mieh-ehiany 1

4
But I'm
j^
across a door, xlnmn

l
C-all
H jf
1
upon,
Candle,
274
to fly in pieces,
afraid
r/*'M-ew
Barometer, feng-u-p in o
r>nrst, to
Butterfly,
Bannermen, Tartars,
Bar
5%
3
|
Broom,-
Arm,
Bake
JJg
ch?-]>'(t
dishes,
ADDITIONAL WO1JDS
Careful.
the
ff'^J
2
shoulder, hîny
ash-strings, c
man
'at,
jt'ti
Yosswise; aslant,
'row, a,
'iicumber,
Cemetery.
iny-ti
Centipedes,
n-knny
Certain,
tih-c/i l ioh
Chance; luck,
iiin-c/i
Character,
p'in-hxiny
$$>
4
A/0-/V/
^"fe
4
J5
Cupboard,
I;
Customer,
Cover,
|J
jt^
distinguished
chu-ku
a,
kai-ta'i
a,
against, to
chiao-r/t'atif/
Chopsticks,
x/w
g^
to stee}),
ch'dng
Daylight,
t'ien-liang
Debate; discuss, pien-hien ^|
Climate,
to,
Decay,
an-uei
Comfortable,A ua ng-k
^^.^
to,
uai;]fc*fy*j
to^chiao-fu
to,
Defame,
pi-thiao
^C
huei-pany
to,
Determination
HfW?
Consider,
to,
cold,
C/opy, to
in,
h ch-xn
Avill,
liany-4ang;
Countenance; looks,
mien-wao
7jC
4
/f^
xjf^lfO
3
vh'iii-chiu
Diligent,
Dining room,
Disposition
flf
SJ"|||
cl^'iJi-fan-i'dHy
8f JR
J^fo
temperament,
jjg'
Dispute,
to,
Distinguish,
"
'ougli, to,
pu,h-t'ony
Disagreeable, f'o-icn
Disheartened, huei^hsin
a clean,
Pew-eMi^
4
jlj|
//V////
Cotton-wadding, mien-hua
Different,
/nan ch'ihpah-
x'i-lm'uniy
make
^r
lii-shui
Dew,
I
Confusion, all
dii-ch'i
iiiicn-t-li'iaiiyfj^^j,?
iiau-eh'iioi
.|8
3
constrain, to,
Complete,
Illt
^fVJK
1
Compare,
ijj^ffi
hony-p'ien
xhv.-fuh
to,
*huai-pai
Deceive,
la-chi-huanff JÎIL
Comfort,
<
Debt, to contract hopeless,
a,
Cold, to take, *
In.
Cholera,
Cool
..^;_n45
Dangerous,
Dash
Compel
Ig;
from
Chisel,
'ommit
u el-Mi.**
Tartars,
a set of, ih-<'h'nr/-/.s7
Curtains,
f$ $t
Chinese,
/iiu(n(/-/:ii(i
Cup,
Ji|
as
jfg
Jjg
('heat,
fien-chi
a,
burtyard,
Vawl, to,
tnao-ch'ong
Caterpillar,
COMPOSITION.
KIJCISK IN
tsi-/ixi
Carry on
(
K.\
|-'ol{
Divine,
to,
pich
txi-icn
fen-pieh
c/n/n-kua
glj
*^ 0^
3*
Slj
1
rS
ADDITIONAL WOJIDS FOR EXERCISE IN COMPOSITION.

Divulge,
tsoh-tiheny
Doze,
ta-tu-en
to,
Find
*rw
fault with
comngs,
Finished
Draft, rough, te'ao-kao

xhui-kco
Drain,
publish shortvhieh-4uan
;
complete,
Drawer,
ch'eo-t'i 1
Drill, to,
tn'ao-ien
ch'eny-kony
*;*;
Fir
Wffi
Fi ring,
21
Firm
Drunk, to get, hoh-twii

iah-tei 9
Duck, a,
song-shu
tree,
ch 'a i-h o
stable, chioi-ku
Duster,
'nwh-jnr
Dyer,
ratt-chiany'
cli'tnt-mei
Flatter, to,
nS' ^!
Flea,
1
Floor-boards,
Ife'E
ti-j
Flour,
Eloquence,
k'eo-tx'a i
Flow,
sht-huan
Fly,
ilen-chia
Follow,
ir
to,
]
Employ, to,
Enemy, an,
Enter
t*'(in(/-i)i</
ken-Kid
to,
Fork,
a religion, ruh-chiao
Escape from,
to-pi
Estimate,
kit
to,
a,
Even; uniform,
ch'(i-t#'i
a,
Fortune; wealth,
Fortunes
chiiiii-iiin
to tell,
suan-ming
Example,
an, pang-iang
Exert strength, to, cfi'uh-lih
Extort,
to,
Eyebrows,
Foundation,
ken-chi
leh-wth
Frog,
ha-ma
inel-inao
Funeral, to have
;/J
1
a,
ch'uh-pin
Face, to lose, tin-lien
Fair;
just,
lewig-p'ing
3^
JJJr
y2|i-
ta
({amble,
Generous
broad-minded,
Faithful; loyal, chony; chong-hsin
Gentleman
2
Fame,
ming-sheng
^j
Family, one's own,

3
pen-cliia
Tfc
Genuine;
true, ch'eng-sfiih
Ginger,
seng-chiang
Glass,
po-Ir
Glue,
chiao
Father's elder brother,
1
Sir, /ao-ie
Go
to law,
ta-kuan-si
Jj"
}
Father-in-law, chang-ren
Goat,
Father's younger brother,

shuh-shiih 1
Good
Fault; offence,
to,
Fifl up, to,
Governor
a,
of a province,
hsiiin-fu
t*en</-teo
t'fcfl
xz
tsong-tuh
h&iong-meng
Fierce,
hao
Governor-general,
ko-ts'o
Favour, to shew, k'i-en

Fight,
xh<in-inydeeds,
it
Guard, to,
Guest room,
276
j)(t-N/teo
k'ch-t'fniy
ADDITIONAL wouns KOK KXKRCISI;

/*O-/<M
Hani,
Hand
to, to,
ig
xlico-i
Handicraft,
Hate,
//
to,
Head, top
of. f'<-<>-tuiy
IT*
BJTTJT
*u-t<ii
Heretofore,
Hinder,
Hin<ler; impede,
Honour
If;
\
parents, hsiao-ehfuen
supposing, roh-x/i?
mmortality, iouy-xeuy
Implore,
k'en-ch'hi
Indefinite,
han-hu
Indifferent,
lcny-t(tn.
Intercalary mouth,
Investigate, to, chui-chhi
Irritable ; worried,
ckih-tsao
Jugglery,
hai-fali
Kerosene,
ho-in
Kindness
benevolence,
ren-i
Kitchen,
eh'u-fang
Kite-hen range, tsao

Knot ; boil, a, keh-hth
Ladder,
t<i-tf&
Lady,
t'ai-t'di
1
Ijady, young, fariao-ckie
Lamp-stand,
I jau tern,
teny-t'a
IN
COMPOSITION.
ADDITIONAL WORDS
Neat,
ch'i-eheng
KXKhvisK
FOJ*
Pour
Pour
^p^
Niggardly,
COMPOSITION.
into, to,
kuan
over,
chlo
Noon,
ehong-shang
Preach,
Nostrils,
pi-k'ony
Precious,
4
Number,
jjj;
Occupation
to,
Present, the; before one's eyes,
illicit, t<i-ht<ifi
Private;
trade,
Prophet,
Odds and
ends,
Opinion,
()j)itim,
tfi-icn
Oranges,
citii/i-fxi
L'(t
;
"
n-fxi
Painter,
toilet,
/x'ô-r//?"
Partition w&U^pifa-tei 1
Paste,
chiang-tsi
Patois,
mien-hu
ha -It a a
Peiieeful,
tîi-pîn/
Peaches,
t'ao-tsi
hu-ohiao
Pepper,
Period of two hours,
1
sfci-ch'eri
Per spi re,

Perverse,
-h
-?
Overcome,
Paper,
Pump
/i>i(/-xu!
i-chicii
uh-han
ti(fo
Physical vigour, hsueh-efci

Pile up,
ch'niH</-*lni
tire
hsien-eJii
engine,
ADDITIONAL
Sand, gravel,
\\OliDS
KX KlfClSK
I-'oi;
COMPOSITION.
IN
xhtt
'
Strength,
{j;
Saucer,
ticli-fx'i*
Saw,
cAf7-/x>
lilt-lnnnj
15
/i/i-<-/i
WSr-f
iU
4>
:{
'
T*
^ ron
."'
~jj
-JJ
noinj, hco,
ilnids,
Scandal,
Stupid
Scorpion,
Search
Security,
a,
Sensible
of,
Severe
;
chioh-teh
Subject
stal>Ie,
to address,
theme
text,
ft'cuy
k ( nri
Suffer loss,
c/t'i/i
Sugar,
t'finy
Suitable, fitting,
Sliee}),
Sign; mark,
Sin, to,
chi-Iuto
Take
fan-teui
Skill,
|ft|
Slightly,
x/ufo-uci
Small-pox,
t'ien-hua
f^
fx''i-hxinf/
^|
-?
Tea
cli'd-ic/i
^'
Tea-table,
cJi'<i-chi
Teeth,
;<i-c h'i
(in leaf),
^fc
5c
-B-'
broken,
^
^
*f
t'ieii-hxi
Snapped
tui-ching
chîen-liang
J^
leave,
Taxes,
hxhi-tx'j
Sleeves,
Temporarily, ehan-sfii
Ten Commandments,
the,
^
xh'i
1oh
Snatch,
So that
fen-sheo
stern, l/-luti
Style, to
jxto-rcn
to,
Separate,
Shed
k'ao-c/ihi
into,
in
order
to,
Testimony,
x/< 'i-teh
fci-txnri-
Soap,
k'eo-kony
Thermometer,
;
Tin-oat,
In'o-/oiif/
Thumb,
/r/
Spade,
Tiles,
*/-^-
Sparrow
Tooth-brush.
/<v
Sore,
chûang
a,
///"
c/ri-t'co
Soup,
Spectacles,
lcn-cJin\(/--
Spider,
clri-cjui
Spoon,
t'iao-knif/
Travelling
ex]>eii,ses,
rA'?-/xz
Sprinkle,
Stalks of
Treat, a disease, t'iao-ch'i
jyrain,
2
fJJJ
.sv/
Treat, meanly, k'ch-po/i

JlJ
4
Trouble, to be in, feoA-wan^
/w/
Troublesome, fan-soli
Stinking; offensive,
x^/
Stop up,
.svA
Storm,
k'uang-feng
Trust,
to,
/-Km
^~
fip
Stove,
a,
--T
lo-po
Turnips,
USS^
Twist with the fingers, nicn J
ADDITIONAL WORDS FOR EXERCISE IX COMPOSITION.
puh
Unconsciously,
Unendurable
ch'ipuh chioh
unbearable,
Unlucky,
tao-uin
Unrestrained,/
Upright,
cheny-ch'ih
Urge,
fa'?r/
Vaccine,
nin-teo
Vegetables,
su-t#'(ti
Vow,
lixii-uen
JE
AVax,
lah
Weak,
ruan-roh
Weave,
cliih
Ihi-Iei
Weep,
Well off; well-to-doju-kue
AVet nurse,
nai-ma
AVliole
AVife
entire,
Avife
huh-luen
and children,
chia-li
to,
^
^
S^
2
l
Wife, to take
Will, the,
WiUing,
AVillow
AVauder,
to,
Warm,
p'iao-Uv
innni-lw
tree,
fa-- a
A\ asli-liand basin,
hsi[face,]
AVatcli over,
k'fin-xheo
^^
^
li
Win,
hty
1
AVoman; women, nai-nai ;
lien 2><en
a, ch'-ii-ch'in
Wonder,
280
no,
il
kuai-puh-teh
A LIST OF NUMERARY ADJUNCTS.
1.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
25.
MANDARIN PRIMER
PART
IV
MISCELLANEOUS
A SELECTION OF MORAL AND RELIGIOUS TERMS,

I.
Affable
Moral.
4
k'udmf do
Jj
|J
hsiieh^hsing
/,/WiV
Anxiety,
Annoyance, unable
to stand,
/ico
jjj^
nr fan-
puh
After regrets,
-hner
hsiao 1 hsiao 1
to abate one's,
ch'-i*
*fet
fc
^
*&
navP-nu*
Anger,
rs
Si 2E
Jior-jj in(/-
Ardent,
jjjf
amiable,
Arrogant,
Anger,
J|
if?
gj
fe
y&
,.
Affection, mutual,
nsiancf o
Advantage, to take,
e-h'P-fu*
Airs, to put on,

Antecedents, of questionable,
paP
Iu* jjiih
chiJr-fi
Auspicious,
Admonish
Ii-
1
k'ong chitf-tsi*
caution,
Bashful,
Boastful (of wealth),
Bad humour,
in a,
Believe
in,
whu/-
lien? t><P
/.-'w-
^/
^^
^
^
^
^
-fH
gg.
jflj
ch (uen4-hiai*
"HJ
potf
|f jg
=| 'g
4
/cm Uao* p'r-ch'P
Banish sorrow, dispel gloom, hsiao 1

Besott.1,
ts'ecr
JciaP-men*
3B
*Jt^
jg
ffi jg:
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Courageous
huen 2 shen 1
to a degree,
sh'i
tan?
fig
Jf
Jj?
Conscience, not to violate,
Confidence
in, to
have,
Charity, the door
of, is
P'ei -fuh
hard
shan 4 men- nan-
to open,
k'ai 1
never
Conscience,
to
act
against one's,
seng
k'uei
mg puh
-p
hsin
tsoh
s'i
Caste, to lose,
Correct; upright,
tuancheiu/
Covetous, insatiably,
Jjg j
Courage,
ta-n^-liang
Corruption
fraud,
Customary
proper,
si
]|j|
-pi*
jgj
nan- ch'an 2
on with,
Difficult to get
Do
ft
an 1 fen 4 sheo* chi*

fan 1 teh 2 u 2 ten 4 tih 1
shift /mo 3 t'ft-tony*
Contented,
>
ren*-choh 2 hsing*
as one likes;
kao l -7i$ing 4
Delighted,
Disheartened,
men4 men* puh
Dejected,
oneself,
ien4-u
Detest,
hsiai -tai4
remiss,
huang^-cha
Dissipated,
feng
-liu
Emotions, the seven, ch'ih
hatred,
grief
and
viz.,
fear
joy
love
^|
h*P, nu , ai\
a/ 4, n 4, iuli 4
ren^-nai 4
in a
j
cM
^,
4
(ii )
3fct,
^,
g,
fo4
4
1
puh cJm
^.^ ^.^
IS
fo(rt/4
B7
;]>
to,
|
cherish,
Evil, to eschew,
desire,
hope,
Enmity, to
-fc
state oi,
;
mi-ny-
*|f ,
Endure, unable to,

Excitement and alarm,
Expect
ku?-kuai* p<P-ch<i4
Eccentric,
an -mei puh 1
Darkness, moral,
anger
mm
Deceitful,
Deteriorate, to
ch'ing
Ioh
k'oh* hsiang
k'etfchP
Desire, earnestly, to,
Deny
Jp'an
â
-uang
and embrace
286
cAi
...
tt
2
cAi4 c/i'eo
good,
{i
SELECTION OF MORAL TEEMS.
fond oh and averse
hating,
work,
naor
to
Fvil habits, to be contamin-
ated by,
Evil
hmong
vicious,
oh*
Fxtort,
Excitable,
ho 4 -k<-n
root of,
P]vil,
Fearing nothing,
Fright, to get a great,
Fear, to allay,
Faithful
xheo 4
/mo 3
ih l ta 4
!<//i
-i<ih
~~iT
Km
<-/nn</
honest,
Favour, to unduly,
Friendship,
Feelings the heart,
hsm
Gentle
reo^-ho 2
Grief
yielding,
-ch ( ang 2
:
uen l -ho 2
sadness,
Grateful
for,
Grateful, extremely,
Grieve,
Gay
tan l -iii l
to,
fan*-huar
fashionable,
Good,
liangp-shan
2
latf-sh'ih
Hypocritical,
Hollow
h*ii -ckia*
false,
fg
fg
Hatred, profound,
Hate, to cease
to,
Hoodwink,
Honour, to,
Harass,
,,i(iir-ho)ty*
to,
4
Idle and unwilling to work,
in? sheo* hao
2
4
1
In jure others for one's own gain, suen reri U c/</ 3
4
i
Incorrigible,
-oh4 -t'ao l t'ien1
hao hsien2
Indolent,
Injury,
Kindness
2
;
grace,
enl-eh'ing
4
Kindness, to repay
a,
pao
Keep back what
due,
lehl-k<en*
is
-eti
287
At
MANDAKIN
P1IIMEK.
Lethargic-,
Light
frivolous,
Lonely,
Loath
to part with,
Lenient, to be,
Low;
mean,
heia*-ehien
Lies,
Love
ardently,
I jaw, toils of,
Modest
Make
; humble,
allowance for,
Meaning, to take in a,
Matter that does not concern oiie,A*/nr
Mistake
error,
ko*-sk
Maltreat,
Nature
disposition,
Narrow-minded,
Niggardly,
Natural feeling; goodwill,
Outspoken,
Obtuse; obstinate,
Oppress
othej-s, to,
h*iny
-c/i, iit(/-
ft
fjj
tu -lian(/- Hsiao*
Jj^
k'eh 4 -jjo/r
Îj
jj
^J
renz-ch <ing2
fj|
A-'eo
chii
k'ua i 4 h#in
'
c/<
Hi
'
tlh
-nr
^pj
{^
^BA
ch'P-iah4 inr
Occupation, no fixed,
in- h>
Patient,
naP-hxiny
jjjf
ft
Pei'severing,
keng^-'hsi'n?
'Jg
Provoking,
r<i'
:]
rcir
Ax/or
3jr>
Perverse,
Public-spirited,
Petulant,
Pleasure,
Poverty;
straits,
llage, in a great,
Kelations, the Five Cardinal,
Kash,
k'u-en^-k'ir'
/w//
3
<t
cA'/
/^Y>-
/^r//-
huangi-t'ang
Reward,
288
shang
SKLK(T10.N
MOKAl, TKKMs.
()F
mm
m&
IMribulion, to meet with,
IMrarl
Rescue
(of testimony),
to save,
fall -c/iin
Bob,
Veo -tao
tameless,
lien* p'i
Straightforward,
keng^-efiih?
&
he
mm
S<>lf-<>pinionated,
Self-important,
Scare,
mm
to,
1
Self-satisfied,
iany-
Shameless
u~
Shameful
Shame
rascal,
;
H5
t'P-Vieti1
tiifi
P!
sin,
tsui -nieh*
nan 2 -ko 4
troubled,
Sin, to
ashamed,
Sorrowful,
the results of
Sin
;
4
i
eh'ecP
uÎy,
Sympathize,
Sad
c/t
tehr
do away with,
nanr-sheo*
hslao 1 tsui*
Sincere,
Temperament,
Temper, uncertain,
Troublesome involved,
niuli2 chuen?
,[j'i--e/i'i
tan 3 ch'ieh*
Timid,
Trouble, to
stir
up,
rce
Wte
ho 4
huan 4 -nan 4
Tribulation,
Unaffected person,
chueh2-4uan*
Undecided,
Unable
to give up,
gAce
tih*
Ungrateful to others,
en
1-
Useless individual,
2
4
1
ch'eng ch'i tih
Unprofitable,
Understanding,
the,
hsinL-eh (wo4
Violent,
Virtue,
Virtues, the Five Constant,
w 3 ch'any-
28U
MANDARIN PfUMEB.
4
fei* lei
Vagabonds,
Virtue, to practise,
hsin
Vicious
huen 4 -chauy 4
worthless,
Whimsical,
fan* fufi
ren 4
to confess,
Wrong,
Word, to break
sliih
one's,
ts
puh
Jff
jjjL
Pg
tiny
o4
hsin 4
hsin -chiao l
Worried,
Wrong,
hsiny
HE
to
do knowingly,
sany^hsin
II. Theological.
Almighty,
u 2 -so*-pul^-neng 2
Atone
shuh 2-tsui 4
for sin,
Apostle,
shfl-t'ur
l
korty -hiiei
Astray, to be led,
shco
Authority and position, having,
pao
private grudge,
(
si
|[g
'S 3^ Sc
ch'eo 2
ch'a 4 lu 4
tseo*
;p
-iiir-li\ih
ch'iieir
^/f
^p
^ -g
^^
fc ^
Avenge a
jj^
ieri -8hfi
Angel,
Assembly,
jflt
tseo*-
Astray, to go,
Act shamefully,
/xo
tin.
lien* tih
picn hv<u
4
i
hnei 4
Altered for the worse,
Assembly, a deliberative,
*i
fa
^^
f^ ^
$& ^
liao*
4
tsong* huei
Assembly, general,
Arrange the order
of thought, p'rf-p'ai ts'eny--ts'i
4
4
4
4
pei -chiao ; Vui -pu
4
hsi*-li? ; chin -li*
Backslide,
Baptism, terms used
for,
$$
ffi
|J, jg
J5t
SI,
/f0
fg
Baptism, to receive,
Baptismal pool,
have faith
Believe
hsiany^hsin
in,
nieii
Bible-reading,
l
-sheny -$h u
Bishop,
Burdened by
M^
sin,
^ ^- ^
r
(1
fl
ie
and
there
sca
is
290
trouble
the shore.
is
boundless
repent
A SELECTION OF TH F.OLOfJK'A I,
an
Bible,
itinerarv
of
TF.RMS.
8hang*
the
t'ienHifcluteh'eng
heavenly road,
benefit, not the slightest,
Bible class,
ch'a 2 chiny 1 h wi 4
Beseech,
aP-eh'iit-
Bring before one bv means

ofsneeeli,
;g
shoh 1 tao* ien*-ch'ien2
Catechumen,
hsioh 2 -tao 4 -tih 4
C 'Impel,
chiao 4 -t'any 2
l
Chi -tuh
Christ,
Christian
Christ-
religion;
ianity,
%*>
*
H 66
HJ 4k *
-su -chiao 4
l
tuh 1 chiao 4
,1
loin the.
chin 4 -chiao 4
,
rules,
chiao
Church
2
**?f
t'iao -kuet
7,
j
/
Jfenq
y
>
4
)
4
\
'
'**
l
JC-t^
Colporteur,
Calamity, to avert, and escape

the punishment of sin,
.,
ts("
/(S ' f'
MWB
'
oh feny oh suh
evil,
uan4 u 2
Certain, absolutely,
ih l sh'ih 1
t'an l -hsin l
Cupidity, to excite,
/ow/
Contribute
chuen 1 ch'ien 2
money
to,
/>
i
-.LI
/n
Crucified with Christ,
j.
and death,
Christian Endeavour,
Church meeting,
C'rises of life
of, of
..
-ts2
ser^/ sz ^'A
mien^-li
5E
IP
-chia 4
^ Mt r^ tS
^
^
^ fo
Jg ^
tina^Zn
JS ^
-^ ^ ^
5^ ^
3sL
kuan^t'eo 2 1
huei4
ftfr
k 1
ffi
SH
7Ei /WO
'
a,
none
men 2-t'u 29
,
make
the doctrine
effect,
sh'ih -ts'i
fefi-liao*
ehiat-tih 1 tao*-lP
Changeable,
Change, to pretend
to,
Change, through fear of suffering,
291
4-
""
\
l^\
IRJ
^J ||
^H
^^
2
4
t'any huei
Cross, to
shzh
cheo*-ma 4
to,
Christian,
"jfo
ho 2 Chi 1 -tuh 1 t'onq 2

,
..,
Curse,
fc'"'
Customs,
&
chiao 4-huei4
the,
Church,
Ie
Church,
f
jfc
ffc
l,,r
church,
^g^
frj Jj
^>c
M AND AKIN PRIMER.

(
by one's own conscience,

v
to live as
Carpenter,
ehioh?-teh2 Uangfi-hsiri
Conscious of being reproved
4
tseh -pefi tefi-c-ln*
(
(
2
skua 9 vh'ionq
y shed*.
a,
A:o
/
\
..
7 j
4
..
r?A -fez
\
/
1-4
Churches, federation
Wen hu-cP
of,
if
ffu
55 |g 2 ig
77 ^T
]$$
-T
-J
Deacon,
Devil,
Disciple,
ft ft
Duty,
petf-fen*
Deceive the Lord, we cannot,
man2 puh
Desires,
s'i
illicit,
a position
Depend
on,
of,
fljg
ch'eir-/n<'tr
>|^
s$
Jg
yfc J^-
chan l -r((i
(
tao 4 -Uao*
tih
none
3
it
ta-ri*
an</
Defilement, to contract,
Degeneracy, to have reached
CJt
-ch ( iiu/~
4
Discouraged,
Destruction to perish,
ko 4
ur
to,
ta
tP-pu*
A-Vm 4
it
Jniei
Delegate, a,
Division (of sermon) main,
3
4
-s7/r
tuau
Earnestness,
Elder,
Enquirer,
Evangelist,
c-h
Exhort,
Expound
ch
Scripture,
Escape from calamity,
ucn 4 -/i iui 4
i<ii
-#h oh
ao nan
/S7
^H
l
4
(
cJiing -ko k ti?-iutn
Experience of trouble,
jg jg
hsuen^-iniir
Elect, the,
Enlisted under the
banner
of the Lord,
tsai
of,
j
|^
fjj
ch'i-
^^T
pan
rin,
Chi<?-tih
ch'uh 1 chiao 4
Fail half way,

.
jg
reh*-eh& hsin 1
'"
Forgiveness, the hope
hsia
Earnest, to grow,
Expel from the church,
Forsake every
u2
IP-k'cti
UV
292
r'i
^^
fei
iW-ch'ieh
t,^,l,*
g| BM
MS
-tD
SKLMTION OF
Fault, not to be reckoned, a,

of superiors and
Fom'ive
,
Tl IX)L< Hi
I
'A
l<
xium 4 nr
/>?///'
TF.RMS.
//o'
/f
inferiors,
of equals,
Forgive
God
(terms used
God
God
God
the Father,
the Son,
the
used
Holy
mo--*////
,-<i<r;
f&, gfe Jn
4
4
Sheng Fn
4
Sheng Tsi*
4
Spirit (terms
for),
Sheng Ling
^ ^' 35
SJien-
f^^ ;fuh^n iao ^jf^jjji^
Gospel,
en l -ficn 3 ; en^huei 4
Grace,
Ionq (or /fenf/^hciH/'
Grace, abundant,
7 \1
^;( /!
Mt *
rob G,H! of his,

ilorv,
* ' to,
Goodness, to
I 11
<
L.
'"' /
for),
.^
iif\f\\fi
./^.T.lO
'.'
1I
!5&
/,.
*f".' "f
I
M
^
4*
^^
Jft.,
Jg%
SBh
Vja
y
(
IXI
*U.
'
<}(tr\*
advance towards, nau(f luuP-di'u*
tseo-
t'ien*
Heaven,
Heaven, ascend
to,
ic
Heaven, come down from,
ts
oncr
fti&fi-shcincfl
/.
T
A 7
/,
2
c/iKiiiff h#ia*-lat
T'icn -fu 4
4
ti -iii/i
Hell,
Hymns,
4
(/t )
fecwi^-w^-sAt
first
step to-
\vard,
^
J||
K^ î
chatxltfleh ~Juh -tih

t'eo- ih
ittt
way
teh-fuh- Wi
to,
Happiness, unable to obtain
t?hj
puh
SM
ni<>ir-/u
^ |g
-ft
3^
**x>
^"i
^ ^ ^ fg
./
Happiness, the
5^
j^
Heavenly Father,
Happiness, the
^/j
pg
choir chen 1
true,
Hardened and impenitent,
/;J
j
Heart, difficult to cure,
Holy
Spirit, to
//*///'
quench,
j
noiv
spirit,
iiii ( ,i
Elope, to lose,
4
2
piny nan'
fo
j
'
f!
"^~
j&
&
^J?3fc*jf ffiUMr^T
l
with,
^^
fc
<km*
/ /l
<
ll
^'''^:
5/!';S
shihl-licwP p'tint-it-ant
293
MANDARIN PRIMER.
T
Immersion, terms used
<
chin 4
for,
h%
hsi* -
Ifi
'
4 /.
chan-h?
4
4
^><m /ism
Incredulous,
jjjt
ffi
|fj|
lao*
^^
ch'ang
Indifferent
leng^-tan
jsfa
hsiao 4 -fah 4 Chiu 4 -chu^-
cold,
Imitate the Saviour's example,
tih
lot
pang^-iang
Judgment,
8hen*-p'an*
%
3
4
srs heo 4
shen'*-p'an %
death, there
is,
,.
,.
T
Justification,
(
I
Litany, the,
tsong*-tao
(
in prayer,
^'n<7
o3
*
Lord's Supper,
Love one another,
sheng
men 2
|j| jjg
tso
t'u
in vain,
lao
Chit
sliuli*
to,
to the Lord,
Live, to
make
things
tih
iang^-uang
(
(descriptive),
pa
s'i
Chv?
2
-ch'ing
shoh 1
hoh 4 -liao*
choiuf-pao*
Mediator,
Hi 4
live
4
4
chong tan
ma 2-/^
Look up
u2
hsie -hsia
of,
7[C
Load, to put down a heavy,
ft^f
,
i.
pfi-ts 'r*-hsiang -ai

2
I
[
i
-ts'an
reri -ts'i
moh4 -rih 4 J^ J^
Loving-kindness,
uen 2
Lord, to belong
\fy fjg
^^
^
chiao*-iv?
Member, church,
sheo 1 ehido*-iu*
Ife -S
Member, to admit,
l
tsao* ih -pen* ts'etf-tei* jg
ft
Members, make a list of,
2
2
!$ ^g
Members, strike name off list of, keh ming -tsP
l
2
kong -Iao
Merit,
ward
$j 2
chii -huei*
Meet
together, to,
Moved or affected
by out-
^ ^
.
things,
yjfc
t'ien -ti -tih
Leprosy, full
Ijjfe
teh 2 ch'enq 1 uei 2

L/
/.,
rt/lfc/>/llXvI
'|T
Last day,
Labour
/f>
be
Ie l -su l
Lead us
||
Jesus,
Judgment after
y^
OT 9S
IB'
fg ^p
1
Immortality,
;
J&'
pan i
seng puh
ifi
k'en^-ch'iu 2
Implore,
>U
fj*
294
^3
^^
If
g.
A SKLKCTION OF THKoLoiJH'AL TKKMS,
8uan4-p (an*
o /nto'
Miscalculate,
Majestic,
Jt
Meeting, to lead
Meeting, leader
a,
of,
Meeting, to open
Meeting, to close
conic
to
Mind,
k'<ti
a,
huei*
san hud'
a,
to
right
a*
state of,
.Minutes, or records,
4
Moderator, or President,
cheny
'i
Missionary,
Missionary, lady,
ni& chiao 4 -s'i 4
New
huan 4 -/'an 2
thoroughly renewed,
ih 1 hsin 1
Narrate,
New
ch'ony--seny
birth,
Office,
Omnipresent,
FJf
u 2 -so*-piih
Omniscient,
Open
-cW
JJf
a place of worship,
4
Office, to lose an,
One with
efiinP-fen
3
w Ch^-tnh lienr-hoh?
ta 4 kuan chieli 2 inuh 4
Christ,
Outline, general,
Order
15
m*n
i-r-
arrangement,
4
1
tint It -si
Pastor,
tao^-kao*
Prayer-meeting,
Preach,
Preacher,
ch ' uan^-ta o^-ti/i 1
Prophet,
hsien l -clii l
Propagate
religion,
Pulpit,
Plans, quite independent of

men's,
Perfection, cannot have both
pan
tiov
ren 2
nih 1
tci?
suau
ncny
^P
A A
eJi'iiar
to.
Profit, seeking one's
U 4 -ih 2
own,
Pope,
chiao
Prayer, public,
Pray with one accord,
kony
eh'i
huany-
ch'i
ha in 1 ch ci 2 -tad*
295
if IS
la</^-ixf hud--t
Prodigal's retuni,
Progress, to
make
rHJ M EK.
N J>A1! J N
good, in
the Truth,
^/
tao -/r
'
Persuade,
ch'uen -m lcn'
Pay
/w 2
attention,
Prayer, form
Prayer
is
emcacious,
^
~
fV $ r*- # *
4
--
**
xA>;
tu
iu
:]
fji
hud
lao*
-M*
-4r ;?
xv
i
chiehl-nheo4
Receive; accept,
Repent and amend,

Reward good and punish
jj
/iud~-/ixhi -l;aP-ko 4
jfc
({ fo
evil,
Rise again,
of, (&fi
i&ng
4
//mo
disciple,
tih
txi
Revival meetings,
Roll, to call the,
fieri*
pao
ch'i
A/^'/
Ax/////
sA?t/i
the,
fen
chili
4
-ing
fa
nicir-t'u-
-x//?'/r
pao
tsi
Reckless,
^^
^ ^g
^^
ahanff^lnai fa/r-oh
4
4
fuh -hoh
heo4-hueP puk*
to,
Recompense, several kinds
Redeemed,
fffj
uctr
Priest (Roman),
Rash
|pj
fisiao-i
Repent, too late
-f
JS Ji Jt
ft j
/'///</'
t<io''-k(io
r
Presbytery,
Ax///
tatfi-faio
of,
jj|
.s-/m^/
c/i/^/r
c<>-
iu*ehang*-chin
7''
'
t<t*
Progress, gradual,
/f^
*fc
H* fi
win'
j^ JJ
JA ^g
miny-
Saint,
4
^ ^J
S Jl |^
p^
teh -chhi
Salvation, to obtain,
4
1
chiny -shang shoh
4
tsuP-oh
4
Scripture says,
Sin evil,
;
Sin, to
Submit
fan
commit,
ings,
Suddenly assemble and sud-
iv
denly disperse,
Singleness of heart,
-t8\ii
kud
to the
Lord,
Submit to the Lord's deal-
tso
-hsiany
-oh 4
(7m 3
-p'ai
...
tih
^
J^ ^
ftfj
ft'}
BX ^r
%l $
%t
chuaii
2 4
hîit c/^cii(/
up, to,
Suffer in our stead,
Self-evident,
haietP
Sect
chiao 4 -ux'ir
religious body,
Salt, turned into a pillar of,
JJK
>*,
tsony* ch'r-ldi'
>W
Sum
^^
i
^
7 1
{R
A/r cM4 huh san4

-,
3B IP f^
|fjf
so 3
Chip
-fuh
an
ei
t'i
o^-'itien'
2
r'i
/'
tih
^. fo
^G
^^
fp^
-s-AoA
xheo 4 k'lP
chicii*
pie)i ch*en(f*ien
296
ti/i
cku
-t8'i*
fj
]!ff
jjfc
f^
jjfa
-H-L
|j>
^^
^ M 6f
S8 fi
A SELECTION OF THEOLOGICAL, TEKMs.

IP
Sin, involved in,
|p
[Jg
ch (a2'k (an4 sheng^-oking 1
Scripture's, to search,
Sympathise with,
////'
Self-existent,
Serve God,
Suffering, intermittent,
4
Ihig -sui k'ifi
Sermon
x/iciif/
coined
term),
(a
Singing, to lead the,
Standing
Huff' ch'ang*
chan4
*s
so 3
position,
hi en*
tih
Synod,
Sanctify,
//A
Spiritual,
Ten Commandments,
2
l
4
shih -t<iao -kiai
the,
tso -chien
Testify,
ji
in one
sub-
-cheng
III
ott/t ~i(jtl/4 ;/1
.,
L I
Tract,
cMeft 4-sA>; 4 -Me>r
Trust,
^-jfc'ao
Trust in the Saviour,
A;'ao
a type,
Typify
Two-sided
;
jf
j
*.L
the Trinity,
-hsie 4 ; kdn*-ckiJi*
Thank,
Three persons
stance
ti
Chiu*-Ghu*
-piac?
4
Hang* mien
affair,
tih
1
s'i
Tune Book,
ko 4-fan 4
Transgression,
liu
tong
Unstable,
hsl 1 liu
Unity, a spirit
tong
2
lai
2
,
hsi 1 ch'u4
of,
United in one,
Uen 4 -hsi 2
Virtue, to practise,
AVickedness of
Warning
to us
now,
to
AVorship, to conduct,
be
chien 1 tao 4 hsie2 in 2
all sorts,
:tso
a,
o*-men 2 lislcn 4 -tsa i 4
till
cJticn -ki(ii
4
ling* ffi-pai
297
4
}
FORM OF PRAYER,
ffl
T!
ftf
ttJ
f!
î
ffl,
ft
ffl
-.ft
^s
Una
1n\
7ifr
ffl
8;
jg
3e
ft
-t
ft
ffl
5']
7,
^fe
fif
-^V"-'
||
It
^î
HI
ffl
m ^
ft
A
/'Xrf
PI
.^
ffi
IPI
n f *
M:
:*U
*Jt
^b.
pjtfc
*J>C
Tp^li
*7>v
/^
l^
>^
-""
Kl
H
'
jg
ft ft A
m
m
m
P4
n, f
* ^
A, * HI' + W
J
^ *
11
fi ^
$
ffl
ffe
fflo
ffl
Ife
A{j
^c
ft
v^
zfcfc
i\
fir,
iVt
it
ffe
ffi
fi
Ife
m ^
m *
& %.
* ft
j" M
r
ffl,
ft
ft
f-fe
Jl
ft
298
Jft,
jjk
THE BOOKS OF THE OLD TESTAMENT.

chi4
Genesis
Gh'u,ang*-shi
Exodus
4
Ch'uh Iai -chih2 chi
ffi
Leviticus
Li 4-uei4
chi4
^lj
X umbers
Mitf-su* chP-lioh4
Deuteronomy
Joshua
Shen -ining 4 chi4

Ioh 4 -sku l -ia 4 chi 4
Judges
/StWi 1
Ruth
Lu 4-teh4
Samuel
II. Samuel
Sah*-mu?-ri* ch'ien?
%\]
I.
chi4
Aeo 4
Shu
*%w x
Ezra
Nehemiah
$J
InT
IB
Ni^hsP-mP
1
gjjj
chi4
St "S
flr
?|)
M
M
ftj Jfe
Ki
$}{
$M ^H
fa
Jfc
{fa
|g
ft J& J- Jt
^T
|g
WWM^
Shu 1
Ioh4 -peh2 chi4

Sh'^-p'ien
|J ^'
Proverbs
Chen l -ieri2
j|j{?
Ecclesiastes
Gh'uan^-tao^ch^-shu 1
jfo
of
Solomon 7a 3
Xo
Isaiah
I*-sai4 -ia 4
Jeremiah
JeM* 4 -w/3
l
Shu 1
cAi4
1
Ie
Ezekiel
I^hsi^chieh2 Shu 1
Daniel
Amos
Tan 4-i*-W Shu 1

Ho^-hsP-a 1 Shu 1
Ioh 4 -ri 3 Shu 1
la^mo^-s'i 1 Shu 1
Obadiah
^-pa -^ -^
Jonah
Micah
Ioh 4-na 2 Shu 1
Hosea
Joel
Nahum
Habakkuk
Zephaniah
/S/Mt
?S 4l ^
H^
Ki ^ ^ %
7^ |g
^|J
^g^
W^^
fi W ^ tf
W ^
J|$
jfij
ipf
jfy
Plf
$$
S5 ft Wf
1
MP-chia 1 Shu 1
Na4-hong 2 Shu 1
4
1
Ha^pa^kuh Shu
1
Hsfi-fari-ia* Shu
Hat-kai 1 Shu 1
Sa^-chia^-liîa 4 Shu 1
Mat-W-chi 1 Shu 1
opening of the book there
299
-g*
iff
J$
-W-mP AP-ko
Lamentations
Malachi
Jl
I$ Sf
Job
Psalms
Zechariah
5 B? ^
g^^
shang ?j 3E fc
r-sP-t'ieh
Haggai
Jg.
IB
Esther
The Song
IB
|g
Lih4 -tai 4 -cM 4-lwh4 shang 4

Lih4 -tai 4 -chi4 -lioh4, hsia 4
1
1
I'^-s'^-lah Shu
y
II. Chronicles
fc
$
S&
Lieh4 -uaiig 2 -chi4-lioh4, hsia 4
Chronicles
JjJ
j;
4
4
4
Lieli -uang*-chi -Uoh ,
Kings
II. Kings
^R
^ |B
$J If 3S IB
3
3
#a/t -?mt -n
I.
I.
c/ji
fjj
-ftf*
WE
Ig
^
ffi
^^
5i JM ^
^
"& fi
^
W S 3K tf
$j
]}5 ft|
^ff
B^ |^ ^:
ffi
fa
r
jfij
is profit.
g
jg:
^:
'
THE BOOKS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT.
s*
Matthew
Mark
Luke
Lu^-chia 1
John
lolr-lian*
The Acts
Epistle to
'
Hsing -ehuan
2
the Romans Lo -ma^-ren 2 Shu 1
Corinthians
I.
II. Corinthians
Sh'fi-t
Ko
Ko
-lin -io l , ch'ien 2
-lm 24o\ heo 4 Shu 1
reii
Philippiaus
Thessaloniaus
Timothy
I.
II.
w#2**
-st
^J
T<ieti-
Khu 1
ch'ien
Shu
Shu
Tr
chia 1
1
\
Timothy
& ^*
W.
cli'icn
hco
Shu 1
Shu
it
ti
m%m
tir
T'P-iiuP-f'tti
:"
^
A
^c H W A #
iS H ^ a
if
2
sa/i* - lo- - ni -
iJt-
Shu 1
? Shu 1
Colossians
II.
mM,A9
Shu
Hhu 1
Ephesians
Thessalonians
Galatians
I.
ff
**
Titus
Philemon
FeP-lih*-men2 Shu 1
Hebrews
Peter
II.
I.
Peter
John
II.
III.
John
it
ffl
&
it-
u^
Shu 1
James
I.
PP-Jeh* .ch ( ien 2 Shu 1

1
rr-^heo^Shu
IoK*-han*9 ih 1
Shu 1
ri*
Shu 1
Ioh*-han*,
torn-
Shu 1
John
Jude
Revelation
ir /%
Mew
Gracej whiGh,
so to speak,
300
makes us over again.
BUDDHISM.
Ancestral tablet, before the,
of mercy,
Buddha, highest
fg
//m/--r/*'/V/r
~&
tx^-lnnujtitle of,
,'ti--t<tr-fnlr
Buddha, Shakyamuni,
Buddha Amida, I put
]jif
%\\
my
trust in,
Buddhism,
jn/i--chi(tu*
Buddhists,
fah*-men
Cautions of Buddha,
ifi-chiai*
h've,
Crackers,
Chiu-hua,
[ticn^-pao*
Demons,
Demons, orphan and neglected
c/iiw'-hutr j>'u--8a
idol of,
spirits,
JL
kuefi-snen?
^7,7
r
7
/i // / )r~*
/' //
->
*
.o
h* )(('}'*
^^
fy,
jjil)^
-f/IV
*Cjn.
?M.
) (*
|J
ip7>
J
Divine by means of
ch'iur cfyieti
tallies,
Festival of all souls, to cele,,

brate the,
,
>
tar-cn/iao
^c IS
.,
,
1
Fore-ordination,
*
Four
womb, mois-
births
ture, egg,
,,
;
âr, etwin
metamorphosis,
,..,,
>
.,
sAiA
/^^r4
fls
rtrt
2
ioh*-uqny ta*
kuan ljln p'ur-sa 1
Grave, the,
huany^h'uen
Happiness, extreme,
chih?-1oh*
$t
|J|
Hell,
fi
-/i^ 4
ffi
ti
of the oil cauldron,
hi'
is praver there
be a response,
Avill
.,
|j|
'
-ko l
iir
(ffi) ;
Hell of the "poiuted-kiiife hill," c/i/c/iMoJ

If there
-s/^///
41
*/ 4
1pt/i in'/
.,
,.
c/^nr
haa^-fir
Incantations, recite,
ii!(']i
Idol,
8hao -hsiangl
Incense, burn,
m
nfe
//
see
;/
y '
?/v'^
no blood.
301
ffi
&
^ H, j% %
^
^'
v
>j&
f^ f^
coP-htsicuiy
jfJL
-u
(lj
5E,
nr-tî
1
Image,
-?
fa fc
jfj;
-che<r*
p<u*-*a>
/P
J^ III
i^ 7J
Incantations, draw,
/L,
/Ei
^ I ^ *S
|| "H ^ H
^
(rod of medicine,
Goddess of Mercy,
Hell
5R ?^ ft
ti'
c t*P
f M
I<>
'
tv'./"
u mi-
MANDAKIN PKIMEK.
Mass
fur a soul, to say,
Meditation,
sit
fang
-ien4 -k ( eo 3
2
cross-legged
tso
ta*-p'an
in,
~ffc
iT S
Merit,
kong^teh
Nun,
nP-ku 1 ; JfewMw 8
JJg jfc, jfa
Nunnery,
an l -t'any 2
fig
ch iuan2-chiaii
j^
}jg
Paradise, the western,
hs^-t'ien 1
|f
Jj-
Prayers, to
nien*-chiny
fe
fe
$fc
Ordination,
summon
to an,
$j |g
recite,
2
Prayers to Buddha, to chant, nien^-fuh
%^
hcP-shany*
Priest,
Priest, to
become
ch'uhl-ebia*
a,
|fj
Propagate Buddhism,
ohuan*-fah*-luen?
fi $&
imn*-ha& _p'wMw 4
hshi l -hsing*
^^
u-tu, island of,
Reform,
Release
work
living animals
of merit,
j/V^V
1
tso^-kong^-fii
Rosary,
su*-chu l
Shausi, sacred resort
u^-t'ar-
in,
S/echuan, sacred resort in,

Save from trouble and sor-
*4
Religious exercises, perform,
o -mei
shan 1
shan 1
X^
^ gc
ffi
5. -^
|lj
Jm
til
ffi
ehiu*-kfy*-cMM4-wan*
Suffering, release souls from,
ch { ao l -iu*
^|
Suffering, sea of,
k'u?-haP
=g
Temple,
>niao*-u z
row
a title of the
God-
dess of Mercy,
>
jjft
2
2
Iong -uang miao*
l
l
Temple of a Buddha who saves, tfi-tsang -an
2
2
4
Temple of city god,
ch'eng -huang miao
2
t'u*-ti* U
Temple of god of earth,
of
of
ho^-shen 2 tfttcto*
fire,
god
Temple
2
ts'ai?-8hen miao*
Temple of god of wealth,
2
1
of
the
iron
Temple
Buddha, t'ietf-fuh an
Three Precious Ones the
(
To
take vows as a priest,
mn -P ao
sheo^-chiai*
Transmigration,
Vegetarianism, practise,
oh < 'ih 1 -chai 1 -pa 3 -su i
near Hangchow, /is^-hu 2
302
$j
^
^
f|
Ji&
i^
g^
Jf^
Iuen 2-huei 2
West Lake
Temple, dragon,
Buddhist Trinity,
^1
fj%
^
j||
]fa f,g
jp^ J!^
^
^ $,
_
-^
jji^
fjfc
jjjj
Jfe
^ jg
^
^
D|?
jj^
ffi
TAOISM.
fair-men 2
Altar,
Attend
seventh
the
to
funeral
day
, .
'
,
t
^Vf
?'
ft
rites,
l
Celestial excellency,
t'ien -tsuen
Chaos,
1
ching
Classic, Taoist,
Cleanse a house from
evil,
Die and not perish,
s'i*-ri
-puh -uang'
Elysium,
lib*
Fairies,
shen^-hsien
Feast in middle of 7th month,
tso
Festival in
honour of ancestors
i*
ch'ih 1 iieh4
/so
in 10th
pa
fiii
flt-fc
shih 1 iieh* chao 1
month,
2
First man,
p'an -ki<?
7.1
gold, wood,
4
chin 1 muh
Five elements
'
lire,
-sis
shuir ho*
fv
water,
>
earth,
3
Five senses,
kuan
?t
/fc 7J<
tastes,
H8 tsang 1
viscera,
Get
rid of life
and death,
Gem Emperor,
Gem Kingdom,
God
t'oti*
seng
u 4 -hnang 2
Capital
of Fire,
s'i*
ta 4
ti
of,
7/o
shen*
of Earth,
shen 2-ming'2
Gods,
Head
of the Taoist sect,
chang
1*91
t'ienl-si
hsien l -t l ien l
Heaven, former,
heo 4-t*-ien l
latter,
Heavenly worth,
Heretical doctrines,
In and lang, study
p'ai
of,
in 1 iang 2 hsioh2
Intelligent worth,
cY cryMi^r
303
over
//i^
rat
false compassion,
MANDARIN .PRIMER.
Lanterns, procession of,
Lao-tze, founder of Taoism,
Lao-chi'iin the great,
mo 2-c/i</ 4
toncf-ching*
Jixitr-ch'i*
influences,
to drive
Orphan
a.-
spirits,
LP-lao*-ehuin l
t'
Malignant influences,
Motion and rest noise,
Noxious
tseo*-tmg
make
away, t'iu*-*hah*
a
col-
chen*-chi*
lien*-tan l
Priest,
fao 4 -sz4
l
chen -Iing
Spiritual worth,
xlien~-pa<P
Taoism,
tao 4 -chwo*
cheri^-ehuin 1 tien*
superior of
a,
tao*-chang*
circuit of,
Three powers,
#/
fe^.t
ffi
Bg
^5.
Pâu-ku and U-huang
-,
//e?i
4
,
?-e?i
?ffi
2
,
1
sati -
U-châng, procession in honour of
^,.
304
-,-,$.
>
..
wwi 1 ch'inq 1
Shang-ti,
$fc
^
^
%$ ^
^^
M ^ ^J
JH ^
+^
^ ^^
the Taoist
Trinity, consisting of Lao-De

i
i
fr i,
tsi,
8^'i/i
heaven, earth, t'ien
man,
Three pure Ones
4.
jjj^
JJJ.
of Hsii-chen,
temples,
Sf|$
Jf
Real intelligence,
make
gj
747-4
fee
Pill of immortality,
Ten
jg %%
lection for,
Temple
j*|
gjj
ft*
DIALOGUE WITH AN ENQUIRER.
Jf
Mb
IE
Mb
a &
t-
ft ft ^r
ft
-IE-
6V$
ft
0: ft
ffi
SB
m
a w
Z ^
-t
it
ft
ft
ti.w
BfcBfi
ft
as
-^ me?l are n0 ^ informed they do

not bored it is not pierced through.
^/P^8l>/fv/P^^
not know, if
wood
is
305
MANDARIN PRIMER.
&
tt
*,-
ft
IB,
ffc
A
^
* ^
S ^
K W,T
E A
M W ^
ij
ft
"ft-
P4
l,Ji
<
R>
k
iH 14
*.
1BT
it
m. m.
ffi
ill
Jt
ffi
til
if
n.
&#&
a* g
S0^ #S 7^
K
'fe ft
35
3c
*
^n
fc 55
oJS
Jt iS
Ji
tft
JS
T ^
Mil
sfc
^ Kl 4 ^
HB
*.
'%
flB'
*
^H
w 1 Hi .^
*#^
S.jg
t.
Mil
1*
-*!
1*1
|JI6
ii
11
fi,
P4-
St
w w
T- m
.
A-
m,
ft
-is
306
= -
DIALOGUE WITH AN
*l 3$ 5.
tft
#'
ft.
fl
ib ft, ^J if
,ifc
IS
it is
or
Vf
Ji
ft
ft
Jt
jfi
JS
:
06 S8 IE
>
'
J:
JB
,
tit,
A
A
A
ft
A
307
MANDARIN PRIMER.
A # 3
tt,
m
*
%
w ft
* ^
nf #j *&
- m
:&
tft
T- JW
î
\ m
fr
315
49 IE
A
A
i.
tt Jt
A
-^
^
IL
A ^fc
T>
Wm-
T>
I* ft
ifc
*olft
it
n
Hi
^..A
"f
-h
308
lifU'tfc
C^
Sfc
$J PS
wVlfe

ft-:
fft
tt
1$ ft
If-
A ^
ft A
is
*A
A
A.
ft
J|
*jj
4*
IB
ft b
if f&
ftil
ft {&
i'&
.W
W W
J: S
fe'
A
ift
-tfc
,T^
^K-f-.ft, W
m
^
n A
ft
m T> # +
^pf W ^
ft
m * @ ss
^^ s ^
& fi. a w
&*
ffi
-b tt
ft
ft
J:
ft
7'
iffii
&
>P Jr
ft
W 1R
ft ft.iS ^j f^
HI
ft ft
t&
UII
_t
m
ft
M.
ft J^
9.
ff-
ft
fifi-.M
ft
at
-**
ra
tr v
ft fa ft,ft,
309
MANDARIN PRIMER.
*o* * &
ift
Jilt
Ml.
t,
ft
*S
Jt Mllfe
8S,#
ft
S
m
-to.
ft
ft J1* 7- ft It 31
fl ff'fB-tft 81
1ft
_t
ft
T A;ti T
^ M ^ ^P
^ 7- n m & m
^ ft If 4 =W
r^-.
tfn
H.ft
ft
A, 7
ft- =i
fc
|fi
ft
A t:
fJU-t
$ ft
ft -h
Ri.ii
ôifi
m $
m
ffi
Mb ft
JG fe
ffl
ft ft 38.
Jt,
t-
at
?@
SB
310
ft
ffio^
ia
pg
&
ft
a^-mm
iJB
ffi
ft
ifl
ft J*
A A#
$
^
K m
&m
15
at
J:
7
^j H4
is
fS,Ê
ffl
A A
#
T
c
n w
'
<J
-v
v p v
ft t*
SB 4i f^fe
IM
&
SB
ue
m
fl'l
-t
-f .:
fc
J:
ft
ft Rg
A
A
ft it ft
311
it
W * A
%
MAKDAKIN PKIMEE.
-*
A S,A
.
tt
$c>
B $ && ^
$ ^ ft ft It
ftii
^,
=fr
H/u
to
HJ
T
*!>
*
A
3*
SB
11
ifc
SB
it
iff
jLl
A
i%
l
BX,
^r
TT
^ A A ?e S
^
m ^
^
^ -AA ^
ir'jtt
UK!" jB*i
ofr
HE
J^L
*^
ftH-|6
ffi
J:
tirr
^Px
'J?C
N
il^v
*u^
^1
*&*
g o
//
H
K
ift
13 1 f
Hi'
fe
tjr^
<S>
SIS
jg
A
R/u\/v
'S'u
V\lt
jiS>
flc
îE A W
^fc
J^
*4*-^T
IP
pS^
7Ts\
1> Mb
WL
/^tf
yi"j
v_^4
fill
Jg
II
A, A
..
ft t<
Itf
312
Sis
ft
jg
w0
DIALOGUE WITH AN ENQUIRED.
*m
ttt-JU
**A
A~f
j&
78 J|
UK it
_t
A
1P1
He
1fi
ft ft ti ft
il if
-A
Ht
J: i4
ffl
W A
1
n
at
A--ffl
j)
ft ft
Â
um
f@
it
tfto
n^H*A
it ii
ft
a,
m
m
ft
ft.il IH 3U ^c
g
fif
313
ft
MANDAEIN PEIMEE.
to
tfr
_t
WJt
I>tt
S/p
GX.
-dfe
<fC
6l
frJ
f$
D4r
P^f
A
'
wl
M m
nv
irf?
M ^
ALL.
>\JC
Jft
tl
K^VO ^H.
iS |I^ #j\
^
erfi
A.
pffii
3IJ
m $
sa
-t
ll
4Vu aSr
^v
tiL
81
^
^
A
ii in
iPI
II
F i
~P
î-^^%
-^
^ ^
-^
'
1^
-^.fc*
|^
-t
Si )S
r^x"v
$1
S SB
i/
$t &
m
g^
m-*
A
fflj
**^
in
^-^ *^
JB
J,
4 * M
t->
-" J^
A
fe'T
P^
^7
314
ifc
i!fc
Ife
jj| Jf| |
,, 69 Ji ft
4>
# tt x *
IS B A W ft * a
MvW US * Tofc H ft
-ft: ft
flj
*
J8V^ ft
#A m 3*
A ,#>
ffl
ift
ffl.ft
A ^,^
1B A
A ^
î
ffg
(PI
ffl
mmn*
$C&
*
A
5s\iM:
ft *S
ffe
ft IS
s m
ffi
ft Jg
"4
tt
i,f&
A-
ft
>iro
f-M
*t-tf
.
m
tfe
sfe
^^
$
# tfc.jg iu m ê
i ^ BR m ft
is,
is it
m^.H:
315
ft
ii
ffl
MANDARIN PRIMER.
ft ft
fflf
-
-x
-'
fl ft
ft*
i*
ft
'
ft
#R
ifc
"
-*-~:
4A
H
ffi
^**M
*^^*
^^
35 ty
V ft- 4 ft M'f&.^
*.
ft'ftfr|Tft.(KIK-a4
n*^c/
lAl>
>^-^
^lii\
ft
IT
rv* f
A
W
^*
ft
'I'-*-.
A A
lft >
?fl
UJ
-tfc
PS
nn.
'It
if
it
PS
Û
*fe
Jl tt
5P
BH
*
'I
SR *c\
lh
ffi
316
41
iP1
t^r-ti
W
A
tft
Jj| JjL
5E
n s ^
tttt *
^-o^
is
HI
J:
A EK
A ^ m
US
315
A
ft
m M
*n
R^ M
m m
w to
fi Mb
ft
ic
IS
W W
ttl
^
^ ft
*.*
* &
^ î,
-1
.ft
)S
lt
@t ftu
^c
ib
IE
*,fft
M
^
A ft
s
^
ifc
Mb
317
MANDARIN PRIMER.
JT
.
m A n
H ft ft
is t, m SM
^ ^ NI if ^
ft
El
*.
...*
M-
1ft
:
,tt
ft A, it
it
A ^m,S
ft
.ff -ft-
ft
,
.A
it,
ft
.3H
W.
15
7Jl
ft
&
ft
*i-A
iPI
ft
^B
ft >t
j&
It
ft
Bf
ft
m
ft
^ 7 S ^ ^
^
^ W
f fl ^ $
SB A * #
1i
* ft m M ft ffioiS
Bg A f& ^ * A M
ft
tr
SI ft H
m ^ *
n ^
jg
A
S
^&
(1
ft
-tfc
^
tit
ftii
-f-
ffl
Ji it
^ ff
^ A ^
ifc
IsJ
318
RI| O
ft
EDUCATION,
Attainment
mm
degree,
su? Jutioh?
Arithmetic,
Analects, Confucian,
Abacus,
HII
nm
it
uen
Astronomy,
Adjective,
Adverb,
okuangf
c/iia
Addition,
/*?
fah
4
;
Algebra,
Astronomers,
Book
Book
Book
of
i/i
Changes,
of History,
of Poetry,
chin<j
-s7m
sht
chiny
Books, the Four, i.e., the^)

Confucian Analects, ( Treat
Learning, Doctrine of the
Mean, Mencius,
J
shit
Bookshelf,
Blackboard,
fen* pan*
cm
* ~
Botany, science
Class,
of,
uh *
Moh
'
MANDARIN PRIMER.
the Five, i.e., the^j
of Poetry, Book of
1
Changes, Book of History, J> u* ohing
Record of Rites, Spring
Classics,
Book
and Autumn,
)
2
Chalk,
peh fen
Crayon,
fen* pili*
keh 2-ts'i*
Copy slip,
Cap for Chinese
pencil,
mao 4; pih*
pih*
4
Chemistry,
hua hsioh
Certificate
ueri2 p'ing
diploma,
Copy, from copy
certificate,
of
chong long
chin
Law,
kong -ming
fah
/Oj>
t& ao
J,
-I
en/
ti
a,
ch'u
Division,
Drill ground,
m
i
s'i
Disturbance, to create
Sft
Degree, an honorary,
4
4
chong* chin -s'i
2
2
uen -p'ing'
1
Doctrine of the Mean,
Doctor
of,
ong
fang*
Hen 2 -hoh 4 ts'i 4
Doctor of Law, obtain degree
Diploma
hsie*
slip,
Conjunction,
ang"
n ao* hsioh2
Drill,
chiao 4 -u4
Education,
Education, Ministry of,

Educational Department,
Examination, metropolitan,
Examination, palace,
Essay
newspaper
article,
Educational world,
Erase (with rubber),
hsioh
pu
chiao 4
2
t'ong ueri kuan*
hmi4
tien
sh'i
sh'i
luen 4
hsioh 2 kiai 4
ts'ah 1 ch'ii 4
*,
Examine,
Examinations, day
for,
Explain the meaning,

Explain
to teacher,
Essay, to write,
k'o 4 rih 4
chiang* shu
huei 2 shu 1
tso
luen4
4
4
tien
Football
ch'iu 2 ch'ang 2
2
1
t'ih ch'iu
Football, game of,

Fel lo w-st udents,
hsioh2
Electricity, science of,
field,
^
B
t'ong
320
ch'uan 1
mm
KIMTATION.
Geography,
MANDARIN PRIMER.
M.A.
4
chong ehv?
tfi
4
suan fah 2 ;suan 4 hsioh 2 jj
degree, to obtain,
Mathematics,
Master of Arts,
chv? ren 2
Meucius,
meng
fez
Map,
^ *'u*
Multiplication,
ch'eng
Morals, science
of;
moral
j$l
<ifv
3
-jjg*
J4
fah
tao 4 hsioh 2
*g
philosophy,
Naval
ha&chuin 1 hsioht-Vany 2
school,
Natural science,
keh? uh*
Noun,
1
2
feng ch'in
Organ harmonium,
;
Proficient,
hsioh 2 huei*
by study,
ch'in 2
Piano,
Piano, to practise the,
ch'in 2
Piano, to play,
2
fu* ch'in
Physics,
Poetry, different kinds

Pencil ; pen,
of,
ch'ien 2 pih*
Pencil, lead,
Pencil, to sharpen,
Paper weight, Chinese,

Pencil, ordinary Chinese,
Physiology,
2
Punished,
(
pel* fah
hsien 1 ming 2 -
Preposition,
kiaP-ts'P
tai
Pronoun,
Review a
Reader,
Record
lesson,
a,
of Rites, the
Regulations, school,
Rub
4
ts'i
-ming
ts'i*
uen l -lisi 2
tuh* pen^
3
li
chi4
hsioh 2 kuei 1
ts'ah 1 liao* ch'u4
out,
Revise lessons,
uen 1 shu 1
Reward,
Reward,
chiang^ shang
to obtain,
teh
shang*
School term,
hsioh 2 ch'i 2
School, primary,
hsiao* hsioh 2-t'ang 2
322
jQ-
EDUCATION.
jL
Jfc,
hsioh2 f.'any 2 ; /isioh 2
School,
School, intermediate,
vhong hsioh fang
School, advanced,
ta 4 hsioh2
Scli oo 1 for
deaf mutes,
ia
hsioh -t'ang 2
re
Sage,
Sentences, order
Study,
Vang
of,
chu4 fah2
fa)
hsioh 2-hsi 2 ; nien* shu 1
to,
jjjL
Slates,
2
Slate pencil,
sh'ih
Subtraction,
chien*
School, to open,
School, to break up,
pih?
(ii
fah
4
2
ang hsioh
Studies,
hsioh 2 k'o 4
Satchel,
shu 1
Study, by lamp light,

Subject, to announce the,
mm
hsioh 2
tai
nien fang1 shu 1

ch'uh 1 t'i 2
shuh 4 -hsm l
Salary,
chin
shuh 4-
keh 4 -chi* chia 1
Scientists,
2
shang hsioh
Studies, to commence,
4
2
School, to discontinue going to, hsia hsioh
Student, travelling,
who
Student,
goes abroad to
in? hsioh 2
liu
Thousand-character Classic,
Teacher tutor,
;
shen 2 tao 4 hsioh2 -t'ang 2

4
san 1
ching
4
1
ts'i
chiao hsi
2
hsioh 2
hsioh
Throwing the hammer,

Teaching what is taught,
p'ao
Verb,
hoh 4
huah 2
t'ieh* ch'iu
chiao 4 k'o 4
4
ts'i
of,
Write from a copy,

Writing exercise, to correct,
Wrangler, senior,
Writing, style
uen 2
ta* ch'iu
Tennis,
ts'i
ch'ien
t'ao
Truant, to play,
hsioh 2 seng 1
study,
Theological school,
Three-character Classic,
till
p' an fang*
323
^
^ ^j |^
mM
Iff
SOME EXPRESSIONS USED IN CHINESE COMPOSITION.
to the
Arranged according
f
*
Abstract terms
number
of characters.
particles.
Substantives.
Grammar.
3
j$
tityle
literary style.
Preceding context.
Following context.
to what precedes.
Belonging
J^
]
The
^K
Two ^yk 8
original text.
<>r sentiments.
"f Belonging to what follows.
Repetition of thought ; tautology.

Literary talk book expressions.
To interrupt the HONV of a sentence
SH
û
!^
Commentary.
A word rarely
3ft
Iff
jjljl
UP
jjj|j;
^
|
^
fa\
^
^p]
( '^
asa
()
Nvonls
forced
'
'
turn
Arrangement
an hiatus.
used.
To broach the theme.

To finish up; to round
and meaning.
off
a sentence.
to a sentence.
of sentences.
a paragraph.
;
same sentiment or regimen.
section
The
clause which
'
turns
'
the thought ot the sentence.
lieiterated statements!
balanced sentence.
-^
^ A
sentence standing alone.
SI Capable of being taken in two ways.

T
The text as opposed to the commentary.
0JJ
To
set forth clearly.
^p Both even
of
"~|*
meaning and words.

It
ice
everything,
324
Kxi-RKssioNs
SOMI-:
III
Ut
Words unwarranted by
2| Comma.
^k
Semicolon
<<H
'
J>
HI
~$L
Repetitions, tautological.
Dead words
1
iS
gj
1
3fe fft
jgf
J^
]f[
ig|
/fjH-
jj^
period.
end of paragraph.
circle
Large
usage.
colon.
'^'iwll circle
/C [gj
^
g
^
^
^
Diving
To
To
CIHNKSK COMPOSITION.
k direct to the point.
s l )OJl
IN
rsi-:i>
nouns.
words
verbs.
write in line with
preceding context.
write in parallel columns.

discourse of more than one subject.
discourse in a diffusive manner.
To
To coimect
To make a
To connect
To adduce
Used
with what goes before.

direct connection.
in
an adversative sense.
as a quotation.
an accommodated
in
Conclusion
to gather
up
sense.
at the end.
%jji
jffc
IK -Loose, as style or construction.
^^
^
^ j^
')
j}
jj[^
JlJ
1jft
change of sentiment or
Natural
simple.
Exactly suitable
apt.
Order; arrangement.
Placed on the same footing or
Turned and broken
/P
A\'ill
ffl
Difficult to explain.
ZJi
5JL
oroler.
same category
not connect.
In the same category of equal

J^ Connected with the foregoing.
3S 0*
in the
involved, confused.
^( || The original draft.

Unidiomatic in wroug
sfc J'H
JJL
style.
force.
forced connection.
"p Connected
Jj^
.with the following.

Defective construction.
Abbreviated forms of exj>ression.
|^*
Reiteration
^
jjjL
verbosity.
Aêrbose.
Confused
To
mixed up.
connect with no particles
325
(c.y.,
g|
^)
between.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
J5
The
opposite
terse
$fj
jjt:
fe
4j
flS
fi Jl
in opposition.
Difficult to pronounce.
To
To
too abbreviated.
begin to compose.
finish
a composition.
up
to the original.
3C According
Head from the preceding
fi
f0
/P Jl Will not refer
al
l^ eatl
on
context.
to the following context.
an antecedent.
to
Jl ?SC Derived from preceding context.

2J
5C Connected with what follows.
4S
fife
H?
Jif
S'J
?
I
character or characters short.
Governs
to the
end
of sentence.
j^j
Jl ^C follows on from preceding context.

A. corresponding character in the same category.
f^
.V corresponding character in a different category.
p^j
}p
S |&
^|
Regarded
IS JS
J5L
^ ne
$jc
^s;
^
^
Defers to
saying ....
it
as running into one
sentiment fully expressed
two sentences.
words enough to express
as
;
the sense.
J
P
P
direct statement or sentimemt.
IS
statement or sentiment in opposition.

use a set phrase.
$J $L IP
To
^ ^ t&
^ TT IS
Exceedingly abrupt.
^îe sentiment or rhythm fully expressed.
t$
&
/P JK
t5 US
?!C
^ Contrary to the original.
Unidiomatic.
eouve y no nieaning.
reac^ an(^
S ôre vivid
less stilted.
Is not the theme

^; .g g|
es no ^ make
T)
'P]
/J>
irrelevant.
sentence
either
through
construction or insufficient characters.
fi
TS
/P
/P ft fS
/P Sc
(The words) look to the following context.

Unnatural forced.
;
-^"* vivid
lifeless.
Interrupted connection.
^j
^ |g A change in the construction.
^B 3^
&
2fc
Ixuii into
one
Suspended
as
two
sentences.
of sense or ^vords.
defective
SO.MF.
KXl'KKSMoNs [J8ED
IN ril
M-XK TOM
I'<
)SITION.
as a
draft.
rough
^ annot
st
ig
P
on
To
pass
^|
Hf
ft /F
to the
owing
meaning being incomplete.
another stage
to
progression or development
of a subject.
ffi
(Joverns t\vo clauses.
^ A close connection
^^
3
in
as
thought or expression.
Expressed by running two sentences

|
MB -^ ^* ^V smooth connection.
J5k
/l>\ '^
cfa
'fa
J^ \Vill not
connect
of
an
into one.
awkward
construction
or
misplaced clause.
jr
|g To mark
witli italics
fi "F
Closely connected.
uu ^ ou ^ nto tne
$ ^
to a close
^
sf>
B
ffi
5|t
fi
S5
"P]
^ 4.
^ 4.
&
IS
/f
i:
MT
^^
c^C
ijjf
4flL
^f $3
ff f@
^
&
ffi
JJt
|^J
Brought
Not enough
to italicize.
^^ owm g
;
Context.
conclusion.
make
to
near a worc ^
a sentence, or to complete the sense.

a sense unwarranted by usage.
Used in an unwarranted sense.

Words that do not fit the connection.
To
or formal-
stiff
Having regular order or arrangement.
An introductory particle.
Xo antecedent nothing to
^ niake a caret.
;
which a word can
refer.
J& Governs both places.

^ne opening, amplification, re-statement and conclusion
of a theme.
H&
R IE 9
If Adversative
and
direct statements,
supposition
sequence.
I
?!
?!t
SS
J? ^ %
^ ot
r
^W ^
W01*ds enough
^ uce
ac
to express the sense or
Classical allusions.
IP*
Carries the explanation with it.

S? >!? 3t I 11 exact correspondence with the original.
tt "T S^ Conies down in the same regimen.
)$*
'iff
Ready-made expressions.
;B ^h 46 SH ^ o make a new beginning.
64 IS
Jl
(j|
'
&
J|
T*
W
^
J2 64 l&
Hypothesis above and sequence below.

one side only.
To emphasize
statement in general terms.
327
rhythm.
and
M A N DA RIX PR M ER.
I
'fif
)IB 'ff ffff

JfT
jFj
>fc
Sfy
J5
&
Jfl3
i!?
_,
J:fe
fj
*yl
?f $
and
conclusion
its
jiff
ft^f
IS
2f
^ .i
Too fragmentary; desultory
3fc
Si?
Having no antecedent.
niatoh above and below.
To
decided utterance
A.
I
>in 'ti<-les
a positive statement.
denoting supposition.
6^ Balanced
as sentences.
tS:
Insufficiency of grammatical forms.
lift
&
64
Ma tolled
2fc
IS /P 5& S^
Jt SB
/
p] ;g:
fjr
1j]
Sf[
AA
not
ill
as diameters.
f
turn
Read
Read
as one sentence.
it
as
4j
^
^
^
IK Relating
Juf
/Jili.
H ^ f^
^^
pjj
IS"
ft
Hi
j^
J'J
""*
]fc
J- "p
fi Jl {S
Xo
still
incomplete.
apl>osite.
agree.
oliaraoter to represent the sound.
ie
K ^ ne
and answer.
to (juestion
expression
is
a little
more
natural.
leading thought throughout.
The turn of the sentence is here.

The same sentiment throughout.
S!f
Strengthens the preceding context.
^
Jl ^ T
^ BH S S^
18 ^ ^ ft
gg
2Jfc
made without
two sentences.
Used as a particle.
The * wo words exactly
a connection cannot be
it
vei
fIS!
|M=I
altering the structure of the sentence.

general summary of the preceding verses.
sentiment
1i?
KJ
and
[peroration.
talk.
ft /P
exordium
opposite,
'pJ
IS
separate paragraph.
f@ Bf M" a ke a n ew beginning.
^J !H To explain the obvious meaning.
M
^
W&
and
prelude
direct statement
~ g .To make a
Sf
To have
'
'
Beginning and conclusion.

Connected with what precedes and what follows.
^ ew
expressions.
Accoi-ding to rules of composition.
If 64 >fc SI The turn (of sentence) is too strained.
_^
A different sentiment or style in every sentence.
'
'
/Jjj
18
jg ^f
^
^
iJJ
64
f?t
/[
4 ^&
/P fi
StJ
Words
capable of a double meaning.

to a proper conclusion.
Not brought
Barbarous phraseology.
Will not finish up e.g., when such an auxiliary as
;
is
omitted.
328
SOME EXPRESSIONS USED IN CHINESE COMPOSITION.

$|i
JH
;fc ilt
Htl
>TV
~F
~fr fS,
-^* Ô
J^ ~f Jf jj
Too
fS ~k 3>
in
hand.
What
^
not connected with what follows.
is
precedes
Etched
^ al>
too involved.
/ft
8S JS I>th above and below in correspondence.

Nothing clear about it.
$S fit
I s uot j ouie( l to preceding context.
5fi Jl 3t
1^
R^
JL.
$fc
fill
BH
r?J
I
iS
*"
3? iC 5S
SA
|a
**rf -î^
Extremely natural.
Noted in the margin, or by the
^ 00
slight hiatus.
^ne
JfJ
Words
Wt 65
>fc
^Pken
&
side of a character.
Amoved.
far
65 Hi
^^
~fc
Confuted with what follows.

r
it?
removed from the subject
far
cnarac ter
c/i
that finish
'
is
satisfactory
up and round
too literally
of
off
in its use.
a sentence.
words that express figurative
or abstract ideas.
fie
^ J&
"^ ^C
|5
S5
Tfc
2f
â y ê connected
of suitable phraseology.
sentiment
The same
throughout.
Spoken from the opposite point of view.
""
wor( ^ s ? n
fi
ffi
fi'J
*
>jjj
fit
_t
T*
"^
'fiJ
f@ 11 (He) wrote an introduction

The sentence is drawn out
g-J .g
Bj|
S^f
65
1*]
Two
suspended too long.
styles of composition.
fi Same
construction.
^n
~"
opening remarks.
IS I n correspondence with the words above.
IB tH $J ^t fi
~^
the thought is repeated.

conies
expression
naturally.
Tîe em P nas i s ^ s ou * ne lower sentence.
t
advance in the thought.

JS
-W
5f|
The
two characters may be used interchangeably.
pjj fg i^ jj
He
all the life out of the expression.
took
ftl IS l& ?E
ust be explained as two.
1? f ffi fflc HI
To
write in keeping with the subject.
g
J[p{
^
T
^^
&S g9
To P reach
^ ne
'/ro?/l
'
the text
7
^
& ^ H ^ S Emphasize when you read.
too
^C S ^ ne statement
IS
~
^
k
a es a slightly better ending.
US
64 if
IP]
1^1
lift
words are
alike, but the meaning
is
different.
s/i'z
Ift
is
fr!f
diffuse.
fir
ft
*? S& JB ^ n correspondence or grammatical relation with the

word huan.
%T
ffiS
SI II
$3f
iK
"P!
The
>?>
last sentence.
meaning that may be taken two ways.
329
MANDARIN PRIMER.
^fe ffl
$u
St $J
>fc
B
j
1 First
â ^ s
~F 15 %* Sf
set forth a
summary
milcn
of the essay.
statements that go beyond the

or
exceed
the original.
mark,
Does not make a good connection with the fol*
2f
fivf
lowing verse.
Derived from the above.
ffl
ffy
t&
Both used exactly
$j* [U flL
$|
[if;
^$ To
EH 3i Jl 3t
ffi
ft
7JC
fiS
#h
^ ft
28
^f
HF
Iffi
translate the
<
right.
inwardness
Impossible to avoid
of a passage.
some wanderings from the text.
B^ It does not do to explain according to the face

value.
75
Tfc
ft
ffi
Jft ffi
]^ J^ The word nai doubtless makes a smooth connection.
75 *?
SW
to
To make no distinctions.
The
word ?ia-i is a character
f9
that
'
turns
sentence.
^ "f ^ Make run down as one sentence.

^ S >S To forth an additional
gathers up the whole.
8S ^ }G i& H fi ^ Tlie word
f^
5J 18
it
fa]
"~"
idea.
set
<M
330
'
the
THE ESSENTIALS OF ETIQUETTE.

NOTK. This Dialogue is intended to furnish material for conversation
with a teacher the best means of acquiring further information.
4*
ft at
The
&
tt
fifteenth of the month ts'u-ih shih-u ^7J

-f* 3. are
observed as special days for worship, etc. But what is done on these occasions
is largely regulated by refere'nce to the Calendar, hnang-lih
jf[ published
yearly by the Imperial Board of Astronomy ch'ing-t'ien chien $fc Jt $.
2. Cards are not used when
making an informal visit. A missionary's
card should have his nationality and occupation stamped upon it, a little to
the right above his name, e.g., The English Missionary Hua Kueh-hiang
It is usual to have the
ta-ing chiao-si,
IE
fjfe
kuch-hsiang ^t
following sentence stamped on the back: "To be used as a visiting card
f
This
j|H IjlJ ffl.
&,
only ;" pai-k'eh liu-ming, piih tsoh pieh long f^
is to prevent any
person using it in order to obtain money under false preSome foreigners notify the local official that no card is from
tences, etc.
them unless both name and date are written in English. This serves as a
check on unscrupulous rascals.
1.
first
and
Hua
& $
For
Here
respect for the person to whom it is addressed. \Vhen it is not covenient to
receive a visitor, the phrase, 'To stop the chariot tang-chia
Jg is ustd to
indicate this.
or tsuen ^. are not always used in asking another's
4. The words kiiel
name. The Chinese regulate the use of these words according to the status of
the person in question, but it is better for foreigners to err on the side of overThe proverb says No
politeness than to run the risk of being thought rude.
one blames you for being too polite '; li to ren pith kuai
^P *&.^
5. Chinese surnames are contained in a book called The Family Names,
in
of
in
a
four
are
jfc.
puh-chia-hsing f
line, and as
They
groups
arranged
many of them are of the same sound, though differing in form and meaning, it
is customary
as here to quote the line in which the one in question is found.
To be able to do this raises a foreigner at once in the estimation of a Chinese.
6. Chinese have three names, called respectively Small _or__Milk_Nanie,
Book or Student Name, shu ihing, or
/?si(W, rff, or nai ming /J, ^L, #)
/isio/i ming
^, Jfi ^ and Official Name, kuan-ming, or kâo-ming ff
3*- &.
Besides these they generally have a Title, hao g, and sometimes a
Nickname, uai hao ft #. The first of these is given in childhood, the second
on beginning school life, the third at the age of 15 or 16, and the last on
coming to manhood. The third is the one stamped on a visiting card.
'
'
IS Th e refined expressions of social intercourse.
331
MANDARIN PRIMER.
1. A wife is spoken of as (The Oue) in the Home, chia-li 3fcilt, or The

Small Houie, chia-hsiao ^C <l. A vulgar term is Old Woman,' lao-p o ^? ^'.
is often used.
In asking after the wife of another, tsnen fu-ren
-J^
2. In saying how many children he has, a Chinese gives the number
of sons only if he has any daughters they are only referred to in answer to a
question about them.
term for a son-in-law, based on a story of
3. Cfreng-long is an affected
two sisters who got husbands like dragons. The usual name is nu-hsilh it $$.
a family is expressed by p'ai hang
ff, meaning
4. The order of sons in
'Arranged in a series.' Hence the question is asked to ascertain whether a
the position in
person is the eldest, or second, etc. The name, followed by
of a visiting
regard to the order of birth, is often stamped on the back
is
card; e.g., fu-k ueh, hang san $jft [i, ff H. Colloquially the word lao
lao-ri
H. Third, lao-sau
prefixed as follows Eldest, lao-ta ^ fa Second,
etc.
3
Note that chia
5. Care should be taken to use polite prefixes correctly.
before
% stands before members of the family older than the speaker shcc
those younger than he. In addition to those given in this Dialogue, the following conventional prefixes are common the student should get examples
han 'M, lao
from his teacher showing how and where they should be used
l
'
3?, hsien
R.
conventional expressions are not so forcible to Chinese ears as

suggest, even as many expressions used in polite
conversation in the West, will not bear too close an analysis.
To use ko
7. Note use of uci ft in speaking of a person in his presence.
6.
Many
their literal
flij
in
meaning would
such a case
is
disrespectful.
332
THE ESSENTIALS OF ETIQUETTE,
1. The usual thing at New Year is to send a card on the morning of New
Women do not visit
Year's Day, and pay a call two or three days afterwards.
for the first four or five days after New Year.
2. Visits on the holidays in the fifth and eighth months, are largely
confined to officials.
3. It is a good thing to acquire a stock of such expressions, and to use them
freely to do so adds much to the pleasantness of intercourse with the Chinese.
4. To raise the hands, ta-kong, or kong-sheo f]~ "$?, J* f- is not so
The degree of respect shewn is indicated in the
respectful as to tsoh-ih \fc Jjf
one case by the height to which the hands are raised, and in the other by the
time taken, and the depth to which the body is bent.
5. This is a point much insisted on in Chinese society.
Foreigners often
lose ground with the Chinese by setting such rules at defiance, but it is better
"
to fall in with native usages in this respect.
A general levelling up " is not
a thing to be greatly desired.
6. The Chinese in social
intercourse regard the pipe as a necessary
of tea.
Hence the proverb, " Tobacco and tea prevent a
accompaniment
"
breach
ien ch a puh fcti chia ]$ ^>
S. But they will not misunderstand
a missionary neither offering nor accepting a pipe, as abstinence from both
tobacco and wine is looked on as an evidence of a good life.
;
^^
333
MANDARIN PRIMER.
The
rule is to hang four scrolls on each side of the room.

Those on
hand looking outward are covered with poetry or extracts from some
well-known author, those on the right hand with flowers. The written ones
1.
the
left
are in the place of honour. A set of the painted ones is called ih-t'ang si-sh'itih hua-huei
RCJ B$ tfj fc #.
2. Tables are placed with the seams of the top pointing north and south.
The positions taken by visitors are regulated by this.
3. Presents are given at births, marriages and deaths, on attaining a
New Year, and on the holidays ill the fifth and eighth
card is always sent with them. The degree of intimacy and
respect is indicated by the amount of the present accepted the more accepted
the greater the respect shewn. As local usages vary, it will be well for the
student to ascertain what custom obtains in his district.
In many cases the
4. It is the custom to give gratuities to servants.
amount of wages given is regulated by the number of opportunities the
servant has of making money in the way here indicated. The wise use of a
few cash on these and similar occasions, is often of great value. About 10 per
cent, is the usual amount to give.
5. It ds of great importance to show due respect to those in authority.
Not being subjects of the Emperor, foreigners are not obliged to show respect
in the manner here mentioned, but anything of a disrespectful bearing should
be avoided.
6. Such a person should have a card to accredit his message, and should
be furnished with a card to take back as evidence that he has fulfilled his
literary degree, at the
months.
commission.
334
TIIK ESSENTIALS OF ETIQUETTE.
ittL
ft
ffc
flL
4? ft,
Visits to the magistrate's office should be made either in a chair or in

The card should be carried in a native card case, hu-shn f$ H, and
handed in by a servant. A courteous conciliatory manner in dealing with
either the men-fang |"j ^-, or the Secretary, si-ie frfl ffj ma}' materially expedite
1.
a cart.
the business in hand.

2. Care is needed in turning the body to keep the face toward the one
turned from to turn the back is considered a great insult. Official etiquette,
i-chn,
f needs special study, and as most foreigners are, in the nature of
the case, ignorant of it, they should be careful not to expose themselves to
insult by displaying their ignorance.
3. The room where a magistrate sees his guest is arranged in the same
manner as the guest hall, k'eh-f'aiig t& ^, in an ordinary house the same
relative order in the matter of seats should therefore be observed.
4. The subject in hand should be introduced with a few polite opening
The bluntness and abruptness of Western intercourse is often
phrases.
mistaken for rudeness by the Chinese. They say that we speak " all in a
" shoh
hua ih ta tui
~X ig.
&
heap
5. The lifting of the cup by the official is to intimate that the visit is at
an end. At times it has the same significance in ordinary intercourse, but
this depends on circumstances. A good deal is hinted a\. in the actions of the
Chinese, and foreigners will do well to ascertain what such hints mean.
6. Nearly all such invitations are mere conventionalities, and mean
nothing.
jf
335
GOVERNMENT.
shut*
Admiral,
Ambassador
si
*m&
t'i--tuh*
mm
Imperial
Commissoner,
Ditto, to send,
fang* ch'it^-ch'ui
h(in
Army,
chain
chuin
Ballot,
Ballot, to open the,
k'di 1 p'iao*
Ballot
t'co -2)'iao
office,
.so
Ballot, officer in charge of,
Ballot ticket,
Ballot box,
Board
t'eo -p'i((o
knei 4
K3I
of Ceremonies,
IPpu*
Commerce,
nong' kong shangl
Punishments,
Reorganisation,
,,
I'
Civil Office,
Works,
Boards, members
fah pn
xlutn
iStt
heo 4
kong pi
cJnih'
of,
pit* t'tniff
Brigade General,
Captain,
4
,,
second,
Circuit, Intendant of,
Colonel,
Com ma nder-in- Chief,
Commissary
of the Seal,
'
-t 'a'r
i'
chao 4 -mo 2
Corporal,
eh 4 -ueP
Court, the; the Emperor,
ch
C Constitutional
Government,
ao 2 -t inge
//A
hxien*
Conservative Party,
xheo* ku*
Commissioner of Customs,
8hui4-u*-9i
favourable; when
the government is good, heaven /.v

are
incorruptible, the people arc in peace.
officials
336
(JOVERNMENT.
Commissioner
I
of
Customs,
art
!'"
U'puty,
Consul,
I:
nan
ft
m*
Concession, territorial,
hsin 1
Customs Custom House,

;
2
1
vh'any kiian
Customs, native,
ch'^-cheo 1
Department, magistrate,
Department,
magistrate
of
Department,
S(m 4_ cA eo .
,
dependent,
magistrate
of
c/t
independent,
^4_
e/(60
>
District Magistrate,
ch'i
-hsien4
4
Ii#ien -eh ( eny
assistant,
Discussion, to open,
frai
Discussion, to stop,
Deputy,
finy* i
ueis -uen2
Despatch,
chao 4 huei4
Dynasty,
ch'ao 2
u a ng 2
Emperor,
sha ng 4 ;
!h
Jiuang -ti
2
4
huang -heo
Empress,
Empress Dowager,
Examiners (of ballot),
t'ai
huang4
-heo 4
Election, an invalid,
a Hen 2
h#&en*-chu3 u 2 hsiao 4
1
1
2
(puh kuei kueli
Extraterritoriality,
<
tiao -ch
hsiah 2
fah
ch'i
ch'tien
4
shany -u
ual 4
Edict, Imperial,
Foreign
Office,
Foreign Bureau
(local),
Finance, Ministry
Financial Board,
of,
toh
-u 4
-cJii
chilli
pu
ts'ai -clieng
4
4
chilli
l
l
chiatig -chuin
2
2
{
Grain transport, Intendant of, t8'ao -l ai
uoi 4 -kuan l
Officials,
General, Tartar,
Government,
the,
kueJr-chia 1
4
Government, administration o^kuehr-cheny
337
ft
a.\
MANDARIN PRIMER.
4
4
Government office,
cheng -u ch'u*
0$;
Governor General of Province, tsong^-tuh 4 ; chi 4 -t'ai2 |g ^,
hsuin 2 -Ju z ; fu?-t ai 2
Governor of Province,
j^ |^,
Jjjjr
Hall of audience, where high

officials meet to confer with
members
of
Assembly,
Cabinet
Imperial
Grand
\
>
t'ing
gg
)
>
Secretariat,
huei 4
net
Kofi
-,
IAI
Ha
fgi
^^
Intendant of Provincial Police, hsuin ching tao

uan 4 kueh 2 kong 1 fah 4
International law,
huei 4
Investigation, Court of,
Asm 4 kong
JJJ
^*
|j^
t'cuig
.,
4
(it),
chin 4 -
tien*-shi*
Jail-warden,
J udge,
s'^-iuh
,,,..,
I
nêA 4
an 4
- t'ai 2 :
rovmcial,
ch'ien l -tsong*
Lieutenant,
^f-
Colonel,
Local Government Board,

uei 2
Liberal Party,
IMagistrate,
Deputy
Asm
|(|
^
^
Assistant,
clufi-pu
2
Sub-district Deputy, hsuin -cliien^

/^--cA/A 1
,,
Major,
Member
of
Assembly,
Metropolitan Assembly,
Munitions of War, govern-
ment
Com-
uen 2
fez
4
4
cheng uen
yj
|^
$|
gg
jjfc
^î^^ ,^ ^ ^
9.ii.4~f.n. lii.n.<n*
factory,
Ministry
J of Posts and
$f
<>
pu*
municatioiis,
Ministry of the Interior,

Ministry of
War,
mm
cheng
hih -chain l
2
Mint, the,
Munitions of War,
uen 2 chah 2
?'?i
cAmV-Ao 3
pu
4
pu
JJ
j|^
g^
gg ^
^ >^
National Assembly,
kueh 2 huei 4
@H
Navy,
Aai3 chain 1
jj[
JP
jj^f
Prefect,
cJii
-fu*
Passport,
hu -chao 4
338
^ J8
COVERNMENT.
4
Prince Regent,
sheht-cheng
1 'resident of the United
States, tedng^-Vomf
4
ts'i -i
c/uiA 2
Provincial Assembly,
uang
$JJ fl&
|g
3i
|jjj
President of Assembly
J
;
'
the
7
ohancr
Speaker,
President of a Board,
Provincial Assembly Hall,
Privy Council,
4
1
shang shu
4
/
-sz
Ving
chuin l -ehi l ch'u*
Plenipotentiary, Minister,
4
Prime Minister,
tsaP-hsiang
Qualifications, e.g., for voting,
tsi -kefi
hsuen*
Re-elected,
/w/t
Revolutionary Party,
kehP-ming* tang*
Revenue, Imperial,
A;it6A
^ô 4
shu 1 chi4
Secretary of Assembly,
4
Secretary, Chief of Assembly, shut-ehi chang*
2
4
Session, to close,
t'ing huei
chlen l -ch ( ali 2
'
Supervisors (of ballot),
Salt Bureau, government,
kuan
Sergeant,
pa*-tsong*
uaP-uei*
Second,
ilin
Salt Commissioner,
ien2 uin4-si l
Salt Department,
i'ew
Examiner,
Inspector,
Salt monopoly,
^^
officials
ta
t'P-chu*
ien
sh'i*
in
charge
of,
l
4
ching -lih
Secretary,
Grand,
hsieh 4 -pan l ta^hsioh^si 4
ch'en 2 -tsai*
Statesmen,
Sub-prefect,
r'i*-fu*
assistant,
Treasurer, Provincial,
8an l -fu*
pu
-cheng
/o/j,
Treaty,
4
/it
Vote
hsiien*-chu B
voting,
Vote, the power to,
;
ballot,
Vice-President of Board,
-si t
Vice-President of Assembly,
Vote by
tieri*
chiih
to/t
-chang*
iu? hsueifi-chiiP ch'uen 2

t
eo 2 p'iao 4 hsiien^-chifi
s/tz
339
$5, ft
g|J
jH
^
^
COMMERCE.
Account book,
Account, enter to my,
chang* pu*
l
shang* o*-Uh chang*
ffi
frfj
Account
chang* tstf-liao*
Hit
$H
jft
Hg
|g
ttg
is
wrong,
Account, to dun
t'acP
for,
Account, to enter
chi*
in,
gg
chang*
chang*
3
Accounts,
all settled,
j
Accountant
ch'm^chang^liang
kuan* chang*
hoh 2 Vong 2
manager,
Agreement; contract,
Agreement, to make,
to? (or
lih*)
Assistant,
ho*-chi*
^^^
hoh 2 -t ong 2
l
^'J^!
i'u -li*
Apprenticeship, to serve an,
hsioh 2 t<u 2
Balance for weighing

Balance for weighing
silver,
case for,
p'iao
Bankrupt,
<j
RS
chuang ; in
in 2 hang 2
Jg j|
iao 4-hao 2
Bank,
jfc)
B^ ^^ "T
^T
-s
iah*-tsai*
f
ft
^ (or
^ ff
gg
^ ^2
Ballast,
f^j
^ |^
^^
teng*-tsi*
silver,
||g
fe
ft
Apprentice,
4j
cA ' aO< -
Auction, to sell by,
tih
4-
-hao*;
me?i 2 ; tso 4 Jmang 2 liao*;
>
ffi
^ "T?
Bet, to,
and
lose,
and win,
,s
the ?
Ziao 3
flT
^..^^ ^,
^T
)
Jg
-
^ fl T
^^T
J^
-WW
Jj |
l
;
pacP-chieh*
guarantee,
Business, foreign house
Bushel
l
ching -chi*
Broker,
SM
s/ii^
ing liao?
chc^-hsie 1 tong l -hsi l
tcfi-tu*
i
i
Best ofc these, winch
Bond
-ht 3
of,
bushel measure,
"~*
iang hang
teo
pao*-tan
ffi
^g
fjj^
||
g|
^ ^J
^
B ? ^ ^ altogether pleasant in commercial intercourse.

U
340
COMMERCE.
Business, to start,
Iff
Buyer, the,
map-map
Business, to discuss,
chiany*
Capital,
pen*-ch'ien
Capital, to advance,
Capital, to seek interest on,
tien
BH El ll
fa
fa
}(^
fa
pen*
1
chiany pen* ch'iu

Uen 2 pen* tap IP
Capital and interest,
li
fa
fa $
yjj.
2
pen*-ch'ien
Capital in trade,
3
4
2
l
2
Cash, between ten and twenty, 8fiih -la (c/ii ) ô ch'ien
4
4
2
Cash what cash do yon ( tsai -chcv -li
iony* )
shen*-mo* ch'ien 2 ? J
use here?
Jfl
ch ( uan4 -ch'ien 2
Cash, to string,
Cash
JJ
ffi
ch ien--p<iao*
(
notes,
chiu?-u* ch'ien 2
Cash at 95 to the 100,

Cent per cent,
fcu
AoA2
fo'A
JL
li*-chi'en
Cheap, very,
chien*
puh
Cheap,
tration,
huei 4 -shui*
Compradore,
ma'fi-pan*
(
Cost of carriage,
ch'ien*;
kioh*-ch'ien 2
tsao* ch'ien 2
s'i
illicitly,
Customs declaration,
Contraband goods,
to smuggle,
to pay,
kioh*-Uh*
Customs dues,
1
pao* tan
ho
81'
taP
s'i
ho 4
4
1
4
4
pao kuan shany shui
Circular,
ch'uan 2 tan 1
Credit, to give,
shce
chany
^
^
Company, a commercial,
konyi-si
Counter,
kueP-t'ai2
Customs, to pass
4
tien -
Chong -kueh
2
pao* chuh
Commission,
Coin, to
* & tt
hsin* pu4
Chit book,
Chinese Telegraph Adminis-
g]
the,
Customer,
chu*-ku 4
Discount,
cheh 2-t'eo 2 ; cheh 2 -k'eo 4
two per
n4
cent.
4
4
/.n /:ô
pah
341
k'eo 4
c/im 8
>
fff
Hi, fc
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Divide equally,
chain 1 fen 1
Distribute, equally,
chiiin 1
j^
fan 1
s
Dollars, Mexican, Spanish,
Draft,
huei -p iao
Drawer,
ch'ect-fi*
Duties, to receive Customs,
sheo 1 shui 4
Duty
mien 3 shui4
free,
pen -iang
4
Each, a little of,
ang ao
2
1
foh
ren pan 4
Entrust others with business,
Export duty,
Fair dealing,
j^j |||
2
'j^,
'
HI
fjflf
st
ch'uh 1 k'eo* shui4
IB
2
1
4
l
kong -p ing chiao ^
(
Figures,
I/arge style of writing adopted
to avoid fraud, ta-hsie
;.
One,
Two,
Ordinary style where no need exists

for
1,
ih
2,
ri
3,
san
4,
ma
hua
f^ $|.
I
1|
B|
5,
6,
luh
7,
c/i^'/i
8,
ptt/t
9,
cAat
10,
sJiih
13,
/on
special caution,
JJ!
shih-san
22,
ri-sh'ih-r'i
24,
r'i-sh'ih-si
[H
||
J|X
|Q-
r'i
102,
ih-peh ling
115,
1 360,
ih-peh ih-sh'ih-u
ih-ch ( ien san-peh luh
4642,
s'i-ch'ien
luh-peh
|-g
3 If
COMMKIICK.
How
heavy
is
sheet
hmn4
c.W-ffto*
chw 4 -
a&eoM4 ;
Handicraft; workmanship,
puh
l
/-i_
o fo
-wo
mo83
cAên2
cA'en
/.,,il
this ?
'V
Income not 'equal
to
expen-
diture,
so
ruh puh fu
cAw4
Income,
.
Income, barely
cA/?i
hsiang
0f
Sr
/f
$
Jg Jg
chin 3
^ .^
knifing*
, ;/(
ft)
^.^
snffioieut,
3J|
S
-
</)
/$
A^f
T^ K
.^
^
huenfriH'arpuh
/h ^v w
2^^mmf/ ch'iong ren
\
/ts/fi
Inferior goods,
eii
not
will
Ill-gotten gains
enrich the man latea to be
.11
oA'wA 1
V
[
^. |j, ^.
Jp 5f *j
'**
fc (or
f*
jg
ho 4
tih 1
êw(/
..>
7 1
...-*
6^f
4 )
fu* f
/.
ftr
%$
poor,
Letter,
ih -feng l -hsin4
Letter, carry a,
sAao 1
hsin4
Letter, foreign,
Letter, receive a,
Asm4; toi4 Asm4

uai*-kueh? Imn4
chieh Asm 4
Letter, send a,
cArWism 4 / /aA 1 Asin 4
Letter, take a,
song* hsin*
2
l
Ii -chin
'
Locally made or imported?
state
of the
market,
to
above regu-
lar allowance,
sAz
pass
(g
^g
f|^
g| fg
fg"
fg , |f fg
3jH
JJQ
fe
^*^-
uai 4 -kueh2
Jjjj*
hang
-8hi*;
;1
tCfe
^,
JS
2-
cA'-m/
ft
^
*T
^
pn
3
/ J/(t'
through a
person's hands,
)
>
8hang -chia
1
chong teng*
Merchants,
Middle-class goods,
hang
Make up
n
Notice
^
^
knan^-s^-tih 1
rate;
^/A
<
Manager,
Negotiate
%\*
Likin tax,
Market
JJ
fjj fg;,
tih 1
ho 4
tj*
chirwr-shecr
notification,
Night permit,
ie*
Office,
change-fang
Ounce,
Hang*
p'iao*
2
Payable at three to
five
days'
îght,
Payable to bearer only,
ohien4 - p'iao* ch't 2

san 1 i^ 3 to'm 1
i
retfp'iao'
343
puh
ren*ren?J%
^ /P ES A
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Partnership, to enter into,
tah ho*
Partnership, to dissolve,
ts'eh 4 ho*
Pounds (English),
pang*
Pence
pieh
Per cent; to make two,

Per cent how much did you
chnan 4
make ^
Percentage, to take a,
Permit to land goods, a,
uncertain whether
Prices,
they will
Price,
Jg
Ilk
chuan
c/j/eo
ri*
,
fen
cM fen
.
li
.
~
ft
4 ,
& ft
4
chang* loh naPpuh
ting
M?*-*Men*pu
4
2
Price, to lose on,
ting p'atf-ri
p'eP pen* ; k'ueP pen* gg
â -ko
4
what
glj
/en
c/^ 3 Ao 4 ^cm l
this,
rise or fall,
no fixed market,
Price of
jfj;
is
the?
Price, cannot afford to sell

for the,
Price, I cannot afford to
pay
the,
mcd4 shen 4 -
wio 3 chia 4 -ch<ien2 ?
^
/
chce -ko 4 chia 4 ch'ien 2
mai4 puh l ch'uh l ch'u4
{fj
chcv -ko 4 chia 4 -ch'ieri*

4
map puh
hsia 4 lap
Profit,
P-prietor,
Pint
pint measure,
heng
Pound,
hsien 4
Ready money
business,
ch'ien 2
.
mar mat
8
Receipt,
sheo^t'iao 2
Receipt book (native),
sheo*-cheh 2
Received,
sheo l -tao*-liao*
in 2 -ts'i*
Remit money,
Salary
Z/ao 3
to be,
7*
; s/iu/i
stipend,
i
ien
Scales,
Scale, difference of,
hswwP-p'ing
what
scale
As/w 1
do you
use here?
Scale (we) use the fe'ao,
(
/
chce*-li?
44
long shen
moPp'ing
4
long
ts'ao 2 -p ( ing
Seller, the,
c 2
-p mg'
Scale
Recommend,
chifi-chien
Robbed,
tih
ma-i -chu*
344
7]^,
COMMKIM'JK.
t#
Ship's manifest,
'
Show
ftj^
jg
4
p*j
"jgjj
J|
Shut up shop,
J^ f^
1
2
chii^-pah in
cent, alloy,
per
depredation
JL /\ %k
mao2 -seh4
of,
in 2-ts'i 2 tieh l -chia 4
Silver, fall in,
Silver, full quality
"
;
2
4
touch," ch'eng -seh
in 2 -ts'P okang*-chia4
sui4 in2-ts'i*
Silver, rise in price of,
broken,
Shillings,
hsi l -lin 2
Silver, a fall in,
Silver, a rise in,
in 2-te'i* chang*
Superior goods,
shang teng*
-fei
fa
%k
jfa
fa
jjbj
|g
$%
f$.
IR -p ft
fl?
uen 2-in 2
Silver, pure,
Silver,
men mien ho
2
shang men
goods,
Silver at 2
l
(
<iny -k coP f<tn
'
Silver,
y$ ^C
ô/i
^ ^ ^ (or)
or ^'eA 1
IR "P ft
tih
ho 4
Jl ^?
^^
85 ^
g j|
4
Superintend the weighing of goods, chang* ch'eng
4
4
Stocks ; shares,
ku?-fen p'iao
Stock, to take,
1
4
p'ari ho
Shop,
pu-
Speculate,
7/iai
Steelyard,
ch'eng
ffi
Tael, Imperial,
ft^
31
k'u p'ing 2
fjj[
g|
jjfc
,,
Customs,
kuan 1 p'ing 2
,,
Shanghai,
kuei 1 p'ing 2
tien
Telegram,
-pao
to
Telegram
send
chieh 1
a,
Shanghai,
to
a,
shang piao
fan
Trader, dealer,
-t8i*;
l
business,
Uniform
AYeigh
and,
seng
it,
'
;
-i
i/i
ffi
4
4
fan hu
^ iS?
^ ^
mafi-mai4
1
rz
jjti/i
jjg[
|g ^p, |
$*
lufch'engHai^li'eng
1
ch'eng
2
4
fah ma
4
Weight, on steelyard,
ch'eng
Work,
tso
to,
Jjfc
1
(
Weights,
$
|J ^g
chan4 fang 2
godown/
bring steelyard
/w
prices,
Warehouse
/
\
ehuan* pao 4
a,
Trade mark,
Trade
tao 4
tien -pao*
g ^g
^ ^ fK
pao
Shang*-haP
Telegram, transmit
^g
4
chi4
Zfi.
^ fg
4
4
Telegram, expense of sending, pao fei
Telegram, receive
2p
?K
t'o
j?
J|
ing -seng
345
ffi $fc
l
tso 4
hoh 4 ffa
ffi
fg
THE STUDY,
under Education.)
.(See also
ch'ufc-ch'i*
Aspirated,
puh
not,
Book,
si'*,
stitch
Book,
me up
PHh
'ch'uhfc
shu 1
ch'ute-ch'i*
Ck
not ?
"
-D
g ^
"
ih l -pen* shu 1
chih 4 o 3 tino 4 t R $& 3$ T

*
s
q
?S
A: ??
VlL -4r
r.
Clll rns>rv\& fatd
ch'inq*
747
/'O
a,
flS
case,
i/
Character,
how do you
write chcu^-ko 4
this?
,,
tsen*-mo* Jg f@
o3
ji
puh 1
3$
^^
this,
~/f\
.?
** '
C/
this?
is
**!
I cannot find this ;

please look it up,
Clear copy, to
make
i.
.,
,*
me
a,
%j* ffi
/t0
t^ i^
f[)
Diligent, to be,
zon^ kong
ch'a 2 ts'i 4-tien*
ch'i*
the,
in pen*
ch'ing^
up
,^
; x
;
4
Correct me, please,
Dictionary, look
t'eng ch'ing
4
3
4
cfaincP chih o As/c
a,
please write
|J5
'
2
..
slip,
t
l
^^^^^
,
o*-tih
feô ||| Jjf
fft
this character,
Emphasize
this
word, do not,
SVITV.JV
1
cktwxp kiafi-shoh
Explain
this, please,
%S^
offing
There
is
346
$)
^ *f
a,
Emphasize
^
^g
^
f*
^
JJ
" fg ?^
m *& *
"^
"f
f
slieng-in f
wh ich stroke do you chcu* - ko* fezH ts'ong 2
write first in this ?
naMi3 hsiet-ch'i? ?
what tone
\>
Draft,
7 |J
4
reri^-teh* chcc -
what is this please ?c/ice 4 s/w 4 s/iew4-wio 8 fez 3 JJ -g

Jg
what radical does chcv*-ko* fez 4 ts'ong 2 JJ f@ ?p
this come from?
shen*-mo* p'ang 2 ?
Jjg
Copy
LJ
hsitf-fah*?
T i
J^T
i do not know
//
fez
wealth in books.
j}(5
TIIK STUDY.
Explain the meaning of
this
Jg
oh'enêhiarUjpGhc^-k'ctflf
////' /'-N/' r/////;
lesson, please,
fj|l
:!
/>///y'
Foreigners do not distinguish uai^-kU'C/r-rcirpn/^'cn

tones,
make
tell
is
your ?
>>
t.
fu?-shang^
a mistake, please roh
-sh'i
//o 3
me,
Sfs
meJP*
Ink,
mo" (ten 8 )
ih l -k ( ua
rub down,
block of,
to
please
me a ,!i
block
buy
'
ehtyncp
of,
t'i
4
4
7 ,
fc'wat
cP mat 6 ih l - ti
74
4
?/i6/i,
Yiien 4 -tiai 2 y
meJfi hoh*-ts'fi
Ink-slab,
Ink-pot,
I wish to read this book,
Know,
meh^
y
meht-sKui?
fluid,
iao 4
o8
nieu 4
4
chce -
1
peifi shu
o B hsiao*-teh4;
I,
do you
Lesson, which
not
3 -
lisiao
?
teh
hsiao*-teh4
o3
I do not,
*
^m A
JP'wflft
Home, where
If I
puh
hsiao^-teli 4
puh
this,
sJu 4 elicv 4 -ih l k'o 4
Learn,
hsioh*
Learn thoroughly,
hsioh 2 huei 4 liao 3
Learn, unable
hsioh 2
Literary style
Mandarin
to,
;
nuh 1 huei 4
style,
dialect,
Name, your honourable ?

Name, my unworthy is Li,
hian 1 hua*
4
4
hsing Li*
ffii
M^
Paper,
buy a few
sheets of,
coarse yellow writing,

sheet of,
map
chP-chauy
ch'i*
ih l -chang l
tough white,
white writing,
yellow writing,
Pen
eJiuh 4 -ch'i 3
s
rest,
Pencil; pen,
pih
-chia*-t#i*
;
i/^-chi 1
pih
g^
/jg
>
MANDARIN PRIMES.
2
Point protector,
what is the price
Price
this thing ?
pih?-t'ong' -tsfi
k'eo^-in 1
Pronunciation,
"
Pronunciation correct
Radical,
Read the
? is
my,
4
first lesson,
r>
i *
Read
from
v,
I want
want
here, I
to, o
to,
V Read after me,
f=j
^f-
Jj (g
j|f
)}p
|f
-||
ts'i
~jjJ
mi
4
of ehcv -ko tong^hsi 1
l
4
2
to -shao ch'ien ?
4
-mu*
iao 4
men4 ti 4-ih
2
o 3 iao 4 ts'onq
y
7 .o
li<>
miam^4
nen
k'o 4
chw 4 -
ken o 3 nien 4
1
Revise lessons,
Right or wrong
ts'o
puh
Right,
Roua-h draft, I only want
o3
ts'o
ch'i
$$
/
iao 4 ta? ts'ao* 3$
**
t\(1f)
f^\J
please,
o3
t'ing^-puJ^-eh'uh
Seat, please take a,
Study,
ts'o
a,
again, please ; I did

not catch it,
Speak more slowly,
ch'inc/'* t#ai
Say that once again,

,,
puh
ffi
too
fit
please,
to,
shu -fany~
{
Study
library,
Study,
h&iohP-h&i?
to,
2
hsioh' hsie*
Study writing,
Teacher,
l
l
sheng -in ^
/Tone,
"I
Translate,
Translate, unable
to,
lar
fan
1
fan
Understand,
2 -
Understand, do you
Understand
this,
ming
peh
2
2
ming -peh ?
I do not,
tong^
Well, are
Wise
you
hsien l -seng l hao z
2
;
ts'ong^-ming
clever,
hsie*-tsfi
Write,
I
want
Written,
how
to learn to,
is
this ?
Wrong,
348
puh
THE KITCHEN,
To boil.
To fry.
To roast.
To soak.
To wash.
k'ao 9
p'ao
3
7i,s'i
(niu')if
ha 2
ts'ai
jig
To chop
To slice.
To
cut in slices.
p
shuah To brush wash up.
shaan 4 To rinse; to scour.
ch'eo 4
To stink stinking.
oh'ieh1
Q)
ien*
JglJ
JjlJ
Tender.
}$lj
Burnt.
Jf|
Vegetables.
jt||
Tender.
Ian*
2
IjB
" IS*
-kcP
\'inq
**
Apples,
to mince.
'
?R
Apricots,
o
Arrowroot,
Baked
(or
ecr-fen
roasted)
over-
ko 4 ho 3
much,
Bean-curd,
Bean-powder,
a ^
teo -ia-
Bean-sprouts,
s^
MS
Beans,
broad,
iu~-ruh* (ro)
Beef,
Biscuits
cakes,
Bitter, this
is
very,
hen 9 k'u*
t'eo
Bread,
V
2
;
mo 2-mo
foreign,
Brush
for
washing
mm
utensils,
iao* cliu
the eggs; softer,

Boiled overmuch,
oKu*-lan
Buckwheat,
ch ' ia o'2-meh*-mien4
Boil
Butter,
19i
Burnt,
Cabbage,
Cake, baked,
4
peJi -ts'ai
2
shad-ping*
'
'' !
but each one's handiwork differs
349
ce
and flour are
the same,
in cooking them.
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Cake, crisp,
Candied peel,
ts'uP-pmg*
)Jt
ff
ehuhr-ping
Capsicum,
Cheese,
Chestnuts,
Cinnamon,
ruh4-kuei4
Cloves,
ting -hsiang
Coffee,
kic^fei
Confectionery,
tierfi-hsin
Corn
pjp
1
Uanf-fen*
flour,
Crab-apples,
lma l -hong 2
Cucumber,
2
1
huang (uang) kua
Cooking-pan, medium,
l
l
chong -ko
hsiao^-ko 1
small,
Cooking-pan cover,
Cooking-range,
Candle,
laW-chuh 2
Candlestick,
'lah*-ch-uh
Carpet
rug,
Chopping-board,
k'uai*-tsi*
Chop-sticks,
Chop-stick basket,
Cooking-pan, large,
Cook,
a,
Cooked,
this is not
muli 2 iu
thoroughly,
Dirt; refuse,
huep-t'u*
Dirty
oh 4 -ch'oh l ; tsang 1
filthy,
all
Dish,
Dough
2
p an -ts'fi
'ang
strips,
hung,
kica -mien 4
4
Duck,
tan4
; c7ii
Eggs, hen's,
l
Eggs, duck's,
iah -tan
Fish,
huei -mien 4
l
Flour,
Fowls,
chi
350
-tsr
THE KITCHEN.
Do
-hme chi -tan4p \ih l Jg

iao c/w 3 &o 4 (ro 3 ) //a
c/nr
not boil the eggs hard,
Dust,
if
l
tan*-hiu'i,
to,
g
(-g)
fa
Eggs, boil two,

chien 1 chfi-ko 4 tan4
fry a few,
you must
ffi g|
c/m 3 lao* ft ?g
l
boil the, hard, chi -tan4 iao4
seng -hcP; hs'mg
Fire, light the,
^
Food
left over
1
c,
where
-u.0
is it ?
shencf-tih
7
Froth
Fruit,
Iong -fan
kill a,
mince
Food, prepare,
Fowl,
tsafi-chi
-licP
ts'ai
,.
tj^
4
)
fo
W^
B'&
frfr
Jg
shafc-ehi 1
chi 1
pa*
the,
ft
scum,
buy
***
ma
fresh,
Garlic,
l
Ginger,
seng -cliiang
Grapes,
Green
peas,
Greens,
Ham,
n*
l
4
feng -mih
Honey,
slian -cha -kao
Jam, haw,
Jam,
Jar,
J^g,
cli'u
Kitchen,
fang
Kitchen knife,
ts'ai -tao
Knife,
ih l -pa* tao l -ts'i*
Knife, the,
is
blunt, take
away and sharpen
it,
eh
it (
j
Ketchup,
(
ft* -***
SS ft 7J T^
'
I'
**
tao l -tsfi
4
chiang -iu
4
chiang
Ladle, iron,
water,
Lard,
-ftTJ^F
a*
^ ^1^
f-P
mo 2
Knives, to -clean,
chu l -iu 2
351
ch'ing
r.
iff
ff
l[ii
*&
MANDARIN PRIMER.
jr
1C
l
ton0 -h8?
ruh* (ro)
fs
Meat,
Meatballs,
ma
Marketing, to go,
ruh*-pi0*-4&;ruh*-
Meat dumplings,
Meat shreds, fried,
Melon seeds,
pao
ft
-kiao l -tsfi
kuat-tsi*
hua -seng l ; ch'ang 2l
Monkey-nuts ground-nuts
;
fi
peanuts,
hua 1 seng
Mustard,
Meal, bring in the,

is on the table,
,,
is it
ready
serve
Meals
up
kiai^meh^-fcn^-ts'i
pai?-fan*
hacP-liac?
muh?
a,
at regular hours, to
have,
Meat, this
is
too
fat,
2
Meat-safe,
Iiang -long'
Milk,
wa
Milk, cows',
Milk cannot be bought,

Mince
fine, to,
Mincemeat,
to
make,
Mutton,
Oatmeal,
2
4
iang -ruh
;uai
4-
kueh 2 meh* fen^-ts'fi

ih^-meW-mien*
/
\
Onions,
ts'ong
m ?, it
Oranges,
->Pastry, to make,
tso
tienP-hsin
Peaches,
Pears,
Peel
potatoes,
Pepper,
hu 2-chiao
Persimmons,
Pickles,
Plate,
r^^
p'ant-tsP
352
|-*x
T-
THE KITCHEN.
Plums,
Pork,
[If
Potatoes,
Potatoes, sweet,
Pomelo,
Pungent,
this is very,
//r/
Raisins,
Haw
only half cooked,

Ready not yet,
hai
muh
-j)uh -shuh
in* hao*
(*
Rice; food,
jan*
Rice-cake, three-cornered,
tsong
fan
Rice-bucket,
-tsi*
4
(
-p en
mm
Rice-steamer,
not very well
is
Rice, this,
chce
fan
puh
ta 4
9 shuh 2
)
cooked,
JJ
(a)ss
(hen
Roll dough,
to,
kan* mien4
Rolling-pin,
kan*-mien4 kuen4 -ts'i*
Salt,
ien*
the flavour,
Salt
hsien 2
tieh?-t#i*
Saucer,
Scum, skim
off the,
4
pa* moh p'ieh* Hao*
ig|
ffi
f^
HT
Seaweed,
Scones,
Short-bread,
Shovel, used in cooking,
ko l
Soak,
p'ao
to,
Soda, use a
Soup
Sour
little,
4
iong tien* chien*
1
gravy,
as vinegar,
Vang
suan 1
ta 4
Vang
/*a
mm
Spinach,
kao 1
Sponge cake,
Sugar, brown,
hong -Vang
white,
Slice a plate of cold meat,
Soup, the,
Soup,
is
rich,
this is insipid,
^Jtsie
-hsie
353
fang nong
1
4
Vang tan
Jj|}
JJ
g
g
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Suet,
2
2
i -tsi*
fei -tsacP;
Soap,
t'iao
Spoon,
-keng
Stove,
ho*-lu 2 -ts'i*
Strong, of liquids,
ien 4
j|,
nong
Sweet,
fa
2fe.
ao*-ch'a 2; ch'i 1 ch<a 2 fg
^,
2
2
hong -ch'a
Tea, black,
2
2
(
ch'ing -ch a
2
4
ch'a -ieh
green,
in leaf,
Tea, infuse,
"
Toast a few
slices of bread,
**
WLCf '11
r PCI
ho*-ch'ien
Tongs,
^ 3g
-^
f
\
-ts'i*
^^
^
tfe
**
Jy*i
^1
^t
ffi
"?
pg
f@
?fc
5^
li
^5t
Treacle,
Turnips,
Vegetables,
Vegetables, what have you ?
iu?-shen*-mc?-ts ( ai*
Walnuts,
Wash and starch
Wash up
Water,
ts'u*
Vinegar,
heh2 -t<ao 2
chiang
clothes,
shuafi
the things,
to
pour
tacP-shuP
out,
bring a bucket of hot,

bring four cash worth
of boiling,
Weak,
Wine,
Yeast,
of fluids,
1
(
eh'ong
s'i*-ko*
ch'ien 2
k'ai 1 shui* lai 2
?rjj
\
tan4
gg
chiv?
}g
fah
4
2
(
-mien*; ehiao -t eo
354
5S
ffi
BEDROOM AND NURSERY,

Awake,
jf
shui 4 hsing 1 liao^
to,
Bathe,
h*i*-tsao*
Bath,
JisP-tsao*
Bed,
ih l ~chang l ch'uang 2
Ili;
61 TT
gfc
g|
p'en
BE SI
.
jjg
S
J^
brick,
k'ang
of coir netting,
tsong -peng
i^jr
-tsfi
|J|
|^ ^p
p'l^-ch'uang
J^
Bedroom,
o 4-fang 2
g\
Bed
4
l
pei -o
make
Bed, to
the,
coverlet,
mien2-pei4
2
t'an*-ts'i*
Blanket,
rong
Bracelet,
s/ieo
Broom,
sao*-cheo*
Book-stand,
shut-chi 1
Candle,
Iah4 -chuh2
Candlestick,
Iah4 -chuli 2 t'aP-tst*
Cane-bed,
ên^ ch'uang
(mao
c/ioA
'en^
Cane-chair,
$fc
^ |g
^
^ JL
^ jQ
^ JQ ^ ^
W ft "?
ih l -pa* P-ts'i*
Commode,
ma 4-t'ong z
JC ft -p
j,5
take the child for an />a 3 hsiao* hair-tsfi pao* JG

too 4 uai4 -t'eo 2 ch'il4
airing,
Child
bring
it
3
ô- hai
inside,
J^ j^
3-
Chair,
Child
ffi
^^
^ ^ ^p
yfc gj,
-ts'fitai
chin4 -lai 2
fg
>J>
^f Jg
^
^ ^ "F'Sfift^K
Jij $[> JjH
Curtains,
Comb,
large tooth,
small
the hair,
moh4
Duster,
(mail)
pu
Dust-pan,
pol-chi
Earrings,
r'P-huari2
Floor
sweep a boarded,
Foot-warmer,
sao 3 tfi-pavP
Glass, to look in the,
câo4 ching 4 -ts'i*
TI K.
to
45
JT,
chioh^-lu 2
tK To rise betimes, mean* full illumination;

means nought
but perturbation.
*
355
rise too late,
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Hair-pins,
Handkerchief,
sheo^-chin 1
Hand-stove,
sheo^-lu 2
Hook
chang^keo
Lie
for
down
mosquito netting,
;
recline,
t'ang^-hsia
Looking-glass,
<2
Matches,
iang -ho*
Pins,
tingpchen
1
;
Pillow-case,
chen 1 ; kuan*
Safety pin,
k'eo*
Sheet,
pei*(o*) tan
shui4 chiao 4
Sleep,
Sleep, unable
shn-i
to,
Hang
Sleeping-mat,
pith choir
2
|g
Mh?
1
6
tsang shui
Slops, to empty,
f Jp
'
Soap,
Staircase,
Sponge,
ihl-ohangl uhoh-tsfi
Table,
used on brick beds,

Tidy,
make
it
4
l
k'ang -choh
'
thoroughly,
ih l (shifr-toh 4
)
Tidy the room,
'ao* c/w 3
Toilet paper,
Tooth-brush,
Tooth-powder,
sheoP-chin 1
Towel,
Wash-hand-ba sin,
hsi*-lien*-chia4-tsi 3
Washstand,
Wean,
tuan*-nafi
to,
Wet-nurse, engage
AVater bottle,
a,
bucket,
Warm
slmP-t'oncf
shui^-hu 2
water,
Windows, made
))
?ao 4 ch'ing 4 ko 4 na
?)
of paper,
*^
))
Woman-servant, call the,

Worship, we must liave daily
morning,
cliino*
}
t'ien -t ( ioi
iao 4 tso 4
356
-ma
"jg
isao^-shaJng^j^
li
-pai
RECEPTION ROOM.
After you,
Best thanks, please retrace
steps,
jgg-
2p
ch'tncr huei- pa*
>
your
2
l
p<ing -an
ih l -lu*
peaceful journey,
]a\
Chair cushion,
i&
%h
MJ
.=ri
fi-tien*
Clock, striking,
ts'fi-ming
Congratulations,
kong
Door
ehang*-lien
chong
Escort a guest out,

Excuse me not escorting you
further, etc., etc.,
8onff* k'eh
(
shu*
son#
men 2 -lieri2 |g
iieri*
ît^
j^, f
^^
_.
^^
.
?c*'
4
J
chehr-shan*
Fan, folding,
P,| fjj
^W
-hsfi
z
;
screen, hanging,
ffi
pat-chiao
chfi-mao 2
j)ahn-leaf,
Feather duster,
"g
tan*-tei
ill
hua -p'eri
Flower-pot,
Fortunate in both years and \ fuh 2 sheo 4 shuang 1
ch'uen 2
happiness (of elderly people), (
l
feai
Good-bye,
Guest hall,
long have you
here?
been
with you ?
of
being
opportunity
favoured with your in-
ii(?
chP
(pao*-uhuen*
chce*-lP
mo*
4
tsai -
\
(
cAce
iit
c/w'
3
^/en 1
mtt/j,
2
(
ting*-ohiao
struction,
ffi
huei 1
tsai*
tsai*-chcv -li*
I have not recently had the
$H
rn'^n
Is your honourable family
Men*;
~~~
k i eW-fan<f;k<eh*-Vany-
How
â
ifl
2*
sf>
those superior to yourself ;
Friendships should be formed with

better none than with those like
yourself.
4n
357
MANDARIN PRIMER.
I have been slack in enquir-
And
<
ing after your health.
I likewise,
I will come another time to

receive
ifc-haiang*
1
ch'ing* an ; pp-
your
instructions,
thanks
for
te'fi,
W Jfc
pp-ts'fi
ling^-chiao-
kind
nm
mm
enquiries, etc.,
Map,
New Year
Pipe
ift jfc
ko
2
pai* nien
calls,
light,
-mm
ih l -fuh 2
Picture,
ch'a -ch'uari
Saucer, metal,
1
fen shecP
to,
Separate,
Scroll, a centre,
Scrolls, a pair,
gij
st
t'iao -e/ioh 1 ;t > iao'2 -c-/n l
Sideboard,
Stool
form
bench,
7io
fire-place,
vh'aP-chi
>jk
pao^-chong
na* chin* puhl-kan*1

tang liao*
Vase, large,
ta* cli'ahl-p'iny-
Visitor
k'eh*
We
guest,
shall
Welcome
k ( eh 4-ren 2
meet again,
heo 4 huei* iu s ch ci 2
a guest,
chieW-tai 4 k'eh4
358
M&
HI*
eh'P katf
(
That
lu*-tt&
ih*-ch <tehl
Tea-table, small,
Thanks, you are too kind,
too kind,
iien^-choh 1
square,
care of your health,
is
j* J^
ff
Table, round,
Take
^,
tt*
Stool, square,
Stove
|i|?
4
-fj)
^ JL
g
Jj
iT>K
HOUSEHOLD EXPRESSIONS.
Hit JB
Axe,
ta 4
Basin, large,
uan*
4
fan nan*
rice,
ts'ai
vegetable,
nan*
Basket,
Bell, to ring the,
iao 2 -ling 2
Clear away the things,
sheo^tong^hsi
Clean
Clean
ta -ling
kan
;
very clean,
lean -
ching
l
l
ching -tih
ts'ah 1 po l -li2
glass, to,
7
Q
/*/V1/"
O/C/tv
Clothes, to boil,
*1
/*
Til
1*-
7 O
h^
1
/ Iv/lf
to brush,
$.
dry in the sun,
to
to iron,
fang*
-shang
i
chiang
to
hsfi i -fuh
to starch,
wash,
xm
shai* fi-shang 2
-fuh
Clothes-iron,
Cupboard,
ch ( u 2 -kuei4
larg e >
k ( ail-men 2
Door, open the,

shut the (on entering),
shut the (on leaving),
kuan l -men 2
4
2
tai -men
Drawer,
ch'eo l -t ( i4
mm
File,
Flowers, water the,
chiaol-hua
Fork,
mao 4
Hat-stand,
Hair,
comb
su
the,
Let
chia 4 -tefi
-t'eo
eating
and
one's means.
359
mm
dressing
be
regulated by
MANDARIN PRIMER.
fang*
Iron, to,
Lamp, bring
a,
chao 4 ko 4 teng 1
ts'ah
teng
^m
light the,
tien* teng 1
SHI
Lamp- wick,
teng chao
ih l -t'iao 2
Lampstand,
teng
Lantern,
teng -long
ih l -pa? so 3
Lamp-shade,
Lock,
lai
clean the,
-mm
mm
mm
-t'ai'
a,
ms.?
-ts'i^
Matting,
Needlework, you must do,
iao 4 tso 4 chen^hsien 4
Oil,
iu 2
Paraffine
kerosene,
make
Paste,
chiang -hu
or chiang4
to? tien*
little,
ts'i*
2-
ff
Saw,
Scissors, bring a pair of,
Shake, give
it
chiang
clean,
Table, lay the,
wipe
Table
chien*-tsfi lai 2
it a,
Starch, to,
Sweep
no 2 pa?
the,
|g
ta?-sao*
kan^ching
l
pai* choli -tsfi
moli*
ff
^||
(mail) choW-tsfi
cloth,
Table cover,
felt,
choW-chan 1
ffi
Tea, pour out,
tao*-eh'a 2
Tea cup,
ch'a 2 pei l -tsfi

eh'a 2-hu 2
P<>t,
case,
jgj
ch'a 2-hu 2 t'ong*
Tobacco-pipe,
ien l -tai4
Up-stairs, to go,
shang
4
'JH
-leo
Up-stairs,
tsai -leo -sh ang
Water-butt,
shufi-kang
Wine
cup,
chiifi-chong
P ot
chiu*-hu2
>
^
^
^
360
HOUSES AND BUILDING.

(
ao 4 -fang 2
Ante-room,
Arti/an,
ta*-kon.g
JS
hsiacP-kong
>]%
T.
Ian2-kan l
;ffj|
|f
Arti/an's labourer,
Balustrade,
Beam,
Hang
lit
Boarded
ceiling,
2
|Sj|
tug*- pan
iang*-) &L
1
pdn*jt*len -hua pcM*
Build a house, to,

Build and repair,
to,
p'ei
^$
|i^
ij
/-'VV
HM
hsiu l -tsao^
f^ Jg
ien l -t ( ong
Chimney,
Corner,
t'i<?
sun-dried,
$,
5c ?E
chuani-t'eo 2
Bricks,
fifc
^J
jt@
-f|J
^8.
a,
Courtyard,
Cross beam,
t<ien
hueng -liang
-ching
Door, back,
bar,
vien 2 -shuan l
frame,
men
front,
second,
ii
side,
single-leaved,
made of stone,
sill
used as screen, large,

2
shuang shan^-men
1
Doors, folding,
Drain,
shuP-keo
Eaves,
uh
-it')i
Floor boards,
Foundation,
Framework
up
of house, to put
the,
i_ lian
sh
i
po -lr
an 1 po l -li 2
Glass,
Glaze,
to,
chiao 1
Glue,
t'hiao
Hinges,
House
shut 3 chiao 1
lien
2
;
hoh 2
ieh
i
;
fang~-aJi
houses,
7/'
^/^
upper beam
one will be awry.
361
is
not upright, the lower
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Inner angle of house,
uh^-kioh 1
Lime,
sliili
men
Lintel,
Lock
-huei l
-mei 2-ts'fi
to look,
so
to
3
shang* so
put on,
Nails,
ir
tih^-slmfi
Overhanging tiles,
Partition low wall,
pih*-tsft
tsecP-lan
a?
K
Pillars,
foundations
for,
sang^-teng*
tt
Plaster, to,
Rafters,
uJi*-chih
Eidge,
Roof
of house,
fang
2
2
fang k
2
fang -ts'i*
-ting*
principal,
~^
k'eh*-t'ang ;k'eh*-fang
^
g
cheng -uh
reception,
shang*-fang
ih -chien
Room,
guest,
$j
Screw
side,
hsiang -fang
nail,
Io -sz
J%
2
ffe
St
ting
Stairs,
2
Steps,
teng*-ts'i*
ih -ts i eng 2 -leo 1

l
Storey, an upper,
Terrace
verandah,
2
2
Iiang -t'ai
Threshold,
Tiles,
Tile, to,
Timber
lumber,
Venetian windows,
Wall,
feng^-ch'uang
ih l -tao* eh'iang*
a,
ch'i* a,
ch'iang ;
2
ch'iang
hollow,
'iang
build
lih4
outside front door,

partition,
2
plaster, a,
whitewash
Well,
fen^-ch'iang
shuah 4 -ch iang 2
(
a,
ih l -k'eo* ching*
a,
Windows,
Window
sill,
uh'uang^Va'r-tsfi
362
.A
%
^
CLOTHING AND COLOURS.

pa
Alter this garment for me,
chaf-chien*
2
shang
chili
few 3 /wo3
*'-
o3
11
) ft"
Ian 2 -seh*
Boots,
hsue l -ts'i*
Boots, nailed,
ting
T:
m?
Braid,
Button,
!!?, lO^f
k'eo*-ts?
&<eo4 niu*-ts'fi
to,
niu*-k<eo
Button-loops,
JO
A;ô
4 -
2
p'an*; k'eo*-men
kua l -p ( ? wao 4
Cap, ordinary Chinese,
ffl
/CL
Cloth, broad,
fflf
}JC
Cloth, foreign,
iang pu*
j^
flj
2
iang tuan*
ffi.
2
iang -hsien* pu*
Clothes,
Clothes, suit of,
ih l -t'ao*
-fuh^;
-shang
"$
-fuh
f^
>S ^B
pen* pu*
2
~F
$U, JH
Cloth, Chinese,
Cloth, Italian,
Cloth, cotton twilled,
gj;
m:*
hsue 1
&
#^
f
g&
Blue,
Button,
$ ft
H
&
Black,
ifft
^
^^
3g ^
SI
Jg,
fljf
Collar,
Colour,
4
Colour of
it
this
come out
garment, will
in the
wash
-shang
putfloWyiao^seh
Dye,
ran*
to,
iang rong
Flannel,
hua
Flowered,
-tih
Girdle,
Gown,
Gown, lined,
Gown, wadded,
chiah 2 -p ao 2
(
mien -p ao 2
2
Gray,
huefi-seh*
Green,
luh* (lii^ seh*
Hat,
ma* kua*
Jacket, short outer,
in 1 ; pei l -taJi l -
Jacket, sleeveless,
ft
?|
1$k
IVithout
a needle you cannot guide

363
the thread.
*n
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Lapel of gown, large,
Lapel of gown, small,
Leggings,
Leggings, a pair
Lined,
ta^-chin 1
hsiacP-chin
of,
iJ^-shuang
chiahP-tih
ao 4 -k'i
Lining,
Needle- work, to do,
made
Order,
chen^hsien*
l
to,
Pocket, Chinese waist,
ting*-tso*-tih
2
1
1
teo - pao - ts'i
teo
fit
3-
1
;
ts'fi-seh*
Purple,
Queue
tso
of false hair,
Queue, braid
for,
2
hsien*-cli l eng -tih
Heady-made,
Ked,
2
ts'ong -teo*
lie-make,
Satin,
chieifi-tsfi
Scissors, pair of,
ili
Seam, a
Sew, to,
ih -t'iao 2-feng*
feng
Shoe-horn,
hsiai 2 -pah
-pa?
2
2
-ts'
Shoe-soles,
Shoe-uppers,
hsiai2-pang l -tsfi
Single,
tan l -tih l
eo 2
Silk, embroidered,
hua l -ch
Silk, plain,
su^-ch'eo 2
m*
mm*
mm?
Skirt,
Sleeves,
Socks,
2
Tailor,
ts'ai
Tape,
Thimble,
Thread, cotton,
Thread, silk,
ting^-chen ; ting^-ch'r*
-hsien*
s'i
-feng
taP-ts?
-fu*
me
Trimming,
Trimming
ribbon,
latf-kan 1
Trousers,
Trousers, pair
Turn,
of,
iW-t'iao 2 k<u*-t&
ff
to,
Wadded,
Wadding, cotton,
Waste material, to,
tcfi-fan
mietf-tih 1
ft
mienP-hua 1
White,
Itft
Yellow,
364
TRAVELLING.
IS
mao~
Anchor,
let
go
the,
raise the,
Awning
over the horse,

an*
Bank,
Bend,
Blow,
ch'uan 2
Boat,
Bit,
4
2
p'ei -t'eo
Bridle,
Bridle reins,
chiang^sheng
Baggage,
fixings-IP
Barrowman,
t<ui -ch<a}
Bed-bag, Chinese,
vei*-o l t'ao 4 -tvj*
-Wi l
Bedding,
to
do up,
to undo,
Box, bamboo,
1
skin,
p'P-hsiang
wood,
muh*-fisiang
Boat, small row-,

uan*-tfii*
Boat-hook,
Boat
office,
Boat-pole,
Bundle, a traveller's,
Business centre
wharf
|gf
;
jetty,
ma?-t'eo 2
7/t
Cart,
fiE
*j
eh'enff*
a,
(Hang
a passenger,
ch'uari2 -chu* ; ch'uan 2 -
Captain,
lacP-pan*
1
Carrying pole,
p-i&rfi-tan
ch'ien 2 -tah l -ts'i* ; tah 1
Cash bag,
lien
SS
_
; */" f ?ro
365
?7
leaks.
"
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Check
p'ai
label,
-ts'P
Chain,
lien*-tsP
Collect your things together,
sheo l -sJiiJi l tong l -hsi l
Coolie,
Coolies, settle with,
1
2
k'afl-fah kiotf-ch'ien
Cord, a length
so/i ;
of,
Count the goods,

Cover over,
Crew
sheng
-tsfi
l
tong -hsi
l
tien?
15 ft
assistants,
mm
kuan 1
Customs, to pass,
ko*
Deep,
shen 1
Discharge cargo,
liP-ts'i*
Donkey,
Fair winds accompany you,
may,
Feed animals,
shuen l feng l hsiang 1 4

song
ue
tt
Ferry,
Fodder,
Flag,
c/W-fet 8
Forecastle,
t'ecP-te'ang
|g
ta 4-
k'uang -feng
1
l
feng ; pao -feng
2
4
shang ch'uan
;
4
Gale,
Go
abroad,
ashore,
down the stream,
up the stream,
shang p'o
J^
4
4
shang an p
f*
J^ *
hsia 4 -shufi
8hang
-shui*
Girth,
Good luck
Halt
to you,
for dinner,
1
l
kong -h#P fah
-t'eo
Iong
Hat
mao4 hoh 2 -ts'i z
Helm, port
the,
starboard the,
Hoist a flag,
li*-to
uai
-lo
ch'izP-ch'i
t'i -tei?
Hoof,
ma 3
Horse,
Hold,
Hatter,
box,
ts'ai
taP-chien 1
2
the,
Inn,
Inn stop
at an,
chu 4 -tien*
366
hsiefr-tien
TRAVELLING.
.Lantern,
(
Landlord j proprietor,
j
Lead the horse here,

Lead the horse away,
Load pack mules,
Load,
IB
tertf-lowf
chanq* - kuei*
- tih 1
;
fatf-pan*
a 8 ma 3
s/iaA
ch'ien 1 ko^-lai
4
l
chuang -ho
to,
wî 2
Mast,
lower the,
mien^-uei 2
step the,
shu*-uei2
Mop,
4
Motor-car,
ch'i -ch'ce
Mule-litter,
t'o*-chiao*
Oar,
chiang*;
Odds and
hi?
Oiled paper,
iu 2 -ch'i*
Passage money,
shui*-kioh?-ch<ien
Passage in a vessel, take a,
tah l -ch'uan 2
Passengers, take on,
taW-k'eh 2
Passenger boat,
min 2 -ch'uan2
Passport,
ftfa
hu^-chao*
sui 2 shen 1
a,
Personal belongings,
tong
tai
uetf-J'ai?
Pickpocket,
Provision basket,
p'a?-sheo*
ho*-shth2 Iari2 -tsi?
7j< JJJ
c/*/t'
g|
ho*-luen 2 ch'ce 1
Railway,
Ride a horse,
|g
tih
i_ hsi i
Platform, railway,
Road
* * <*^
^& _^
hsing
ends,
II
ma 3
hanf-lu 4
'
journey,
Rapid,
a,
shoot
a,
faruf-t'an
Row,
Rudder,
Saddle the horse and fasten
the belly-band,
pel* shang*
arf-ts'fi,
chi* shang* tu?-tai*

2
p'eng
Sail,
lower,
haul up,
loh*-p'eny
2
ch'ce -p'en(/
Saloon,
kuan l -ts ang
Screw
an*-luen 2
(of a steamer),
367
~f>
__
J:
Jit
MANDARIN PRIMER.
ho*-luen2 -ch ( uan 2
Steamer,
Scull a, or sweep,
lu?
an*-tsi 9
a,
an animal,
off and lead
take
Saddle,
Saddle
^
^
iao~-hi?
to,
Saddle,
to,
jfc
/f||
j|J
chick 1 hxia 4
(the horse) about,
Sharper, a,
Shoe a horse,
tiny
Stables,
ma^-kao 4
Stirrups, place in position,
pel xhiuiy teny
chany*-tx'i*
Jl
Stirrup,
Tickets,
Tie up a horse,
Ticket
office,
Tickets, to collect,
ma
nun
ch u(
8hco
Tide,
ch ao(
ebb,
2
(ckany' ) ck'ao
2
2
j>'iny' -ch'ao
lai
flood,
Tobacco
Travel,
pipe,
l
ien -t<u
to,
by
stages,
Travelling expenses,
Trough,
Tow
or track,
Towing,
cease,
/.'.rope,
or tracking yoke,
Umbrella,
ch'ient-gan?
ifi-mn*
close an,
open an,
*r
Wind,
skuen 4 -feny l
fair,
Jim
,,
head,
e)iy
AVork a
boat,
Wadded
coverlet,
II
ck'uuri2
Sfc
Waterproof
Water
cloth,
Kfc*
animals,
AVheel -barrow,
Whip,
Wine money,
ehivP-ch'ie'n?
368
%,
RANK AND RELATIONSHIPS.

Ancestors,
/i<'h
If
iff
-JNii*
7p][
'
Baron,
Brother, elder,
R%
younger,
hsiongi-ti
father's elder,
,,
father's younger,
*//
--*// t <h'
// //
chiu -chiu
mother's,
wife's elder,
wife's younger,
,,
Clan,
ctnn
Clansman, near,
Clansman,
-t#<iih
distant,
(tiuh?)
Cousin, maternal,
Daughter,
Duke,
Earl,
pelr
h uany'2 -shany 4 ; uan 4
Emperor,
8iti -ie* ;
hiunif/
-ti
fa
Empress,
/ni<tng--heo
4
Dowager,
/nt<nif/--t'<ti
-heo 4
Father,
^c it,
Father-in-law of husband,
A,
a^
**
of wife,
Family, one's own,

Friend,
p'engp-iu*
Grandfather,
great,
,,
-great,
2
Grandmother,
Grandson,
ch&al-p'o
l
XU('ll -ti'fi
great,
ch'ongp-suen*
-great,
Grand daughter,
IE
WK
W ^ J^
fittim/ly
iixtil,
"'/'<'
titles
are
mil/thing inn
o/^rk
if
Jitiiiu/ty
be
r/irett
t-<-f>nii>/i*lie<l.
tnnl
,/,
MA XD A R IX PRTM ETJ.
Heir Apparent,
l
Husband,
chang*-fu
of elder sister,
younger
,,
ehi<'*-ful
4
sister,
met' -fu
father's sister,
knl-fii
mother's
t2-fu
sister,
Marquis,
hecr
Mother,
Mother-in-law of husband,
m tr'-ch 'in
n id wj-
of wife,
Princes,
Princess Imperial,
u<{ny--t*i*
Relatives,
Sister, elder,
younger,
4
Sisters,
txfi-mei
Sister's son,
u-aP-seng
Jj^j
j&
ffa $j%
uaP-senyi-nifi-rr
Sister, father's married,
kiil-nm*
-fa -g:
Sister, mother's,
P-)rin(/
daughter,
Jg
^C iW HP
wife's elder,
fa* r-fez'
younger,
,,
Sister-in-law, wife's elder,
younger,
Son,
Uncles,
Viscount,
ts'f*
ch'i 1
Wife, principal,
ch'ich
secondary,
of elder brother,
sao*-ts'fi
younger brother,
,,
ti*-fu*
father's elder broth er,t-a*-niang
mother's brothers,
grandson
nephew,
son,
or
(
hsiJr-fu
younger brother-inlaw,
, ,
wife's elder brother-
in-law,
370
gj
fa
Some Expressions used
(Arranged according
|g Deed
.rift,
0fi
'i
and
in Legal
Official
number
to the
Documents,
of characters.)
bond.
" A
legal mortgage can only be creatMortgage, Chinese.
out-and-out
ed by an
transfer, with possession, subject to a
Giles.
reconveyance on repayment of the mortgage debt."
or
To redeem.
To examine.
Whereas .... Often denotes what, in English,

would be expressed by a new paragraph.
"
"
used by the writer of
term of modesty
my humble self
a document in addressing a superior.
A
The
the respective ; that ; the.

Introducing the tenor of a document quoted
" to the effect that."
To
said
calculate from
communication from an
To
explain
yameii
To
pronoun
inferior to a superior
of the person
to petition.
one of the Boards of Government.
Distinction
.V
rank.
This, as in "thi# office;" the possessive

speaking or writing.
Class
to state, stating
wait
to state to a superior.
unlike
very.
to act for another.
till
when.
.... ^f or |p or
and then.
H as soon as
then
wait
till
despatch ; to address equals in a despatch.

Circumstances details sometimes denotes the doer of an action.
;
To put forward
to
quote by way of analogy
to claim
ileges granted to others.
To
write in reply to a petition
$4
T draw
jff
Agreement,
to endorse a petition.
up an agreement.
officially sealed.
Agreement signed but not

Boundar stone.
officially sealed.
person
an
official fo
371
///.s
as priv-
MAM>AKIN
M
?V
-- Contrary statement.
d
jj
BJj
To
endorse, as a certificate
j|i
money.
ffi Deposit
gj Earnest money.
St Evidence proof.
Landlord of house.
T|[
'Mi
ffl
^
?!S
PKIiMEK.
is
endorsed by an
official.
Landlord of property.
^t
ft
^\
tj*
^
^
tî
jgl
|3
*
n)ei "ty
at one's pleasure.
>
middleman.
of
Expenses
middleman.
Official fee.
An
old agreement.
11J
fM
^ r ^' e
period.
U1 dolkin*-
dr Purchaser.
^^ -J-.
jg JJ llefund.
ffi
ALent, to.
Jg -f Kent pass-book.
ffl fiK,
ft
g
^
Seller.
ffl
Situate.
W H To
Sub-mortgage.
^f4
affix one's signature
J^
Sell
^0
To
Cental.
to sign.
without reserve.
Tenant.
take
official notice
for official information.
SS
f^'i
ft?>
^P
ortun g to rule; not contrary to regulations.

inform in a despatch.
'g'
An
official
fft
or
'
<
'
flj3
SS
fj
2J
|ff
It
<
"Jif
S
|jl|
communication
a despatch.
re pl.v in a despatch.
Testimony evidence.
To undertake the management
;
of.
II To issue.
to wit (before an enumeration of things).
J5U Namely
Erom
the
time that since .... lias, etc.,
$M
To pay an amount in full.
jf|
To have come forward to have come to hand (as a
2j
;
etc.)
of a
JP fl&
ftJ
despatch,
These two words frequently follow the mention

document received, or its tenor.
To
iufonii.
372
soMK KXriIKSSlONS
"
DC it
tj{
Si l&
$
l'
ne d>ove
;
have
'I'
'
)e
SKI) IN LK<
is
L A Nl>
" u
Imperial
>FK1<
<
Such
'1
is liis
I-
JM
)<
VM KM'S.
Majesty's pleasure."
just received.
stationed
at.
Deducting
#|*
;.\
"
besides ....
Passages of some length
are often included between these characters, the literal

meaning of which is besides (doing all that is said
rh'u,
lj[
jjfc
jjjlj
fj
|g[
/k
jjjfc.
and uai)."
lirth.
specially write this note (a concluding phrase in letters).

To transmit in a despatch a communication received.
To give instructions for transmission to subordinates.

To adopt an exceptional course owing to special circumstances.
ijj|
.... ^jf All .... who (or which).
ft To act in compliance with instructions to receive orders from
gjj
a superior.
gj
^
^
fe
tig
|g|
p$f
$v
fljt
^
H
It
my humble
is
To
opinion that ....
state in a letter.
Promptly with dispatch.

For general information to inform by proclamation.
wish you) merit and peace (a concluding phrase in
(I
|P|
To meet
^? or oS
together
letters).
conjointly.
" You are

hereby
^f ^ n opening phrase in letters
informed that " " I beg to inform you."
jg
The
reason, generally,
is
....
stipulation in writing ; a written uiKlerstanding.

or
ft iR
19 I* is stated therein in which it is stated.
that ; so that I may ; so as to.
So
j^jL
0JJ
"/
HJi
;j
Tf
^
ijj
Not by any means.
petition
Xot
a statement.
the same.
concluding phrase
ing that the letter

-*fl
is
in letters,
finished.
Official designation of the President of a
Board
a Governor-General.)
to
a superior.
report
^ e delivered into the hands of ....
title of
&
|E
To
^
r
JJ* ^fl
jjt i^P
To
To
inform by proclamation, to make known.

issue a proclamation with a view to ....
give instructions in reply to an application.
jj;
|J
y
jff-
$L Affairs ; matters business.

g! To act for another officiating, acting.
$jf
Often
is
merely shew-
the equivalent of "the."
373
(as such the
MA^DAlilN
$5
lit
'onsidering the origin of a matter, I find that
"
>j|
EB*
&
Your Honour's
jj|
BJJ
j||
used in closing a quotation.

"
"It is on record ;"
As records shew; " a concluding phrase
showing that the facts stated are on official record.
r
arguments
Throne.
state ni a Petition to the
or
/fc
memorial
#B In obedience to
*H ft
/
'
of
JJ
....
7
used in petitions.
superior intellect
fj
I
have
or
with
reference
thereto.
thereupon,
$M
Such arguments "etc.," after the enumeration of a number
To
to the
in
Throne.
compliance with.
comply with orders.

k ee P ou rec orc ^
^- In conformity with just the same.

JJ Jp To notify to inform through another.
;
[^J
55.
^[ To traffic foreign trade.

ff To address in a despatch
;
ffg
3?jj[
"This
is
a public notice;"
" This
is
what
phrase in
jy Thereby
HE Must
bound
"1 beg
to address
inform you of this."

"
a concluding
you with
to
letters.
by which means
it
is
intended
to.
....
In the matter of ....
..^l
Despatches
ij
An
wished
to addi'ess
to
documents.
official letter.
respectfully ask.
v proclamation.
^^
"Etc.; etc."
used where the tenor of a document
is
or wholly omitted.
r
&> $1 S9 l^ enn agreed upon, before the completion of the.
Written with one's own hand.
^l Ijt:
Si
fifc
^f
p^
f^ Si
^%@
Si
|^
[P!
E9
I respectfully inform you.

! be ^ to re plv
-
inform y u
*??
I oe o
>
See tcntj in.

H.
To make uniform
1ft
5h
U1 I'^ply to a letter received.
()r
"'I'
to obtain uniformity.
tne >same
ft'ect
as the former."
From ....
?fl
Boundaries clearly deiined.
after.
partially
SOMK KX1MM-:SSK>NS
'
!R /P
jl
$J
Jg
PI s^
/A>
jft,
flp
?JL
3fe
4fl
H
1j[
^fi
|p
st
Agreed
Wl
?^
U KS
>
>FFI<
'I
I.
1><
M 11NTS.
I'
)(
made.
to in the presence of
middlemen.
per cent., seller
>
j!
per cent., to the
to have precedence of mortgagee.

fj Purchaser
r
a
^
H^
enan t not
precedence of mortirao-ee.
Nothing taken away or kept hack.
1^ *' iere snou ^ ^ )e au v ol(^ ( ^ ee( ^
l"
J?
to liave
>
T() art
r
$ 31
shall he obliged
('l^
fi]
?E
by your communicating the contents

....
letter to
my
Nvrite this in re P 1 y-
5ft
awo^^l.v
he severely dealt with.
l"<>
of
jfc
be payable on deposit money.
t <(
ll()1
HI Purchaser pays
middlemen.
R?> ytt
DiHiculties not to be
^
&
i
^S
% ^ $5
/f
'
|ll(M
!l
If "i
I'SKD IN U-'XJAI- A N
Tremble and obey
be careful to obey these in-
junctions.
^ ne provincial authorities
Viceroy, Governor, TreasSalt
Commissioner
and Grain Colurer, Judge,
lector.
51 US
&
^C
JS
ft IS
Ifc
Hi
P The
jfc
SS
?S $f tt
fir
9)
tip
A $$
^
$fc
81 $5 $*
IS
JtU
^'J 5fi
flg
>S
J
l?
^-
Treat y Ports
î m ^ter Superintendent of Trade.

wishes;" "With kind regards."
"îtn best
^" s ^ esPa t cn
^ sj)ecial order
^ iS
^~
written or addressed to
not to be offended against.

r>f those concerned.
^ ers ^ or tne
ve
orc
guidance
^^
^ )e sanctioned
by the Emperor.
According to precedent.
^
uo ^ e ( a ^ a t) as a precedent so as
l
to so
$$ $* Boundary
]jg ff| Jj|
and
to constitute a rule.
so.
Jg Redeemable at original price.
^ " A necessary despatch."

a^
and military
14 ^ W ^ ne
^C
S ff V ^C E A Minister Plenipotentiary.
IS 8 ^ ou w *^ ^ guided kv tnese instructions.
IP
^ Without any circumstances of compulsion
JS Uf ii ft
^1
ffi 'fr
tft
ot
'
civil
officials.
ffi
ffP
3fe
Ife 1ft
itt S?>
1$
1ft
*|f
ff
i?l
or roguery.
materially interfere with the business
interests of
370
Chinese merchants.
THE PERSON.
Abdomen,
Adam's apple,
A n Ivies,
f|
mm
Jieo~-ehteJr
Arm,
upper part
1-eV-poW ; panrf-tfiP
keh2-pancp
; pancp-J&P
1
,7
of,
j.
jj$ JJf ,
H
riff
Us?
fijji
J^
ik
fffi
wms
Armpit,
Bare-footed,
Back-bone,
Belly,
ttlP
Blood-vessels,
Body,
Body, members
Bone,
of,
ra
a,
ffi
-ta
IK
Brains,
Calf,
t<U?-tu*-t8i*
Cheeks,
Iia-)i0*-8(ti
JJg
Cheek-bones,
Chin
jaw bone,
Ear,
lobe
51
of,
root of,
Elbow,
Eyes,
Eye, inner corner

outer
of,
brows,
ie ) 1
upper,
shany*
lid,
under,
hsia 4 ien*-n'i
pupil
lid,
-y>
2
of,
/p
it-hole
^
body
-(/"
in
o?i^
member
is
uncomfortable.
uncomfortable, the
TIIK
I'KIISON.
;
/,V/,
Face,
JJg
xW-r//z
Fingers,
:!
-/<fo-
JjJ
jjfj
Finger-joints,
x/,,o
nails,
;:
-r/,r-rAm/r
Foot,
Forearm,
li/r-rM*
Forefinger,
r'i*
0MA*
e/iz
Forehead,
top
Foot, sole
ehP-kioh*
of,
lower part
of,
,m
of,
tan 3
Gall,
Gums,
Gum-boil,
ia?-kan l
Hair
of head,
t'eo -fah*
on body,
hao 2 -mao 2
Hand,
back
of,
shecP-mien*
front of,
palm
,,
Head;
of,
naoP-tai4
skull,
Heart,
kioh*-heo 4 -ken l
Heel,
under
,,
the,
kioh^-pei*
Instep,
Intestine, large ;
small,
,,
Kidneys,
Knee-pan,
ien^-heo
Larynx,
kan
Liver,
fjf
Lip, lower,
(
upper,
shatiy*
tsuP-shuen
2
(c/i'teen )
Lungs,
877
X
,
MANDARIN PRIMER.
moh 4
Membrane,
Moustaches,
Naked
to the waist,
Navel,
chi/r
**
li<
tu*-ch<i?
cJi i ) i
Neck,
f/*-tx'i
ch i
i >
(/*-
Nose,
pp-chien
tij) of,
bridge
of,
Shoulder,
1
Skin,
between the
toes,
p'P-fu
Moh*-ial-to&
Spleen,
Stomach,
we
Teat,
naP-ter*
Teeth,
Temples,
Tendon
muscle,
a,
Thigh,
k'ua -kuhl
-bone,
.svn<r/ -f.s7
Throat,
Thumb
great toe,
t(i
3
;
hccr-lonf/
-ni uP-chfi-tfed*
Toe,
-nails,
kioh*-chP-kiah*
Tongue,
root of,
sheW-ken1
sheo* - chiny
Wrist,
-joint,
378
3-
ts'i*
MATERIA MEDIC A.
The
j'olfoirinf/
iciiit/f
Acvtmn
//.s7
ro//i/>/'/.sr.s
/Af
///o.sV
Chinese
substances obtainable in
common
dmy
and
rr/ialt/c
.s7o/r.s:
(vinegar),
l
tH<<to*u, -t<c(r;<'/,<ttn
Alcohol (corn
spirit),
k<n> -li<in<f
,%
flff,
(.-Inn
Almonds,
Aloes,
Alum,
A inber,
Ammonia hy dwell lorate,*
A my him,
cwP-fen*
fen*-&uan
1
il\
fc
hueP-hsiang
Aniseed,
Areca nut,
Arsenic,
Asafoetida,
kco*-chW
Barberry,
mm
Belladonna,*
an l -hsih2
Benzoin,
Borax,
Calomel,
Camphor,
Ca nth a rides,
Capsicum,
*t
Cardamom,
Cassia bark,
Castor
ta
oil,
ma 2 hr
Catechu,
Centaury,
Those marked* are of uncertain
&ft
Ptt
ft,**
By
(IS
identity.
He
sold bdft
379
gave a
</<,,,<t
but
MANDAK1N PBIMEK.
k ( u*-chuh2 ku<i
Chamomile,
fan
Charcoal,
China
$$j
4
jjfe
root,
/VC17
x.
(-itron,
tut-/!/
iv iv
ui<t-</
....
ft,
^@
Cinnamon,
ruh*-kuei4
Cloves,
tiuy -hsi<tn(/
Coriander,
hxido^-luier hxiauy
\fy
"J*
/ma
Coltsfoot,
k'udn^-toiu/
Copperas,
Corrosive sublimate,
Croton oil,
cli'inf/
peh?-ehianff*-tan
Cubebs,
1
pthP-eh'en* ch'ie
Dandelion,
l
2
l
p u -kong -ing
-f<ur
>]>
^ ^- ?
^^
pa
-tco
^| |^ fl"
in~
Si
2J.
root,
4
:]
Galls,
u*-pe't -txi
Gamboge,
t'engp-huang*
Garlic,
Gentian,
]
Ginger,
'
-(<li i<t
x<'H(/
Ginseng,
/r/r-.sr//
Hellebore,
IP-lir
'
>
/> > jy
4
-m
n<j
4
///,
2
-ianf/ hn
Hyoseyamus,
nao
Iêad carbonate,
Lead oxide (red),
ch (ien2-fen*
ch ( ien*-tanl
Leeches,
Lemon
peel,
^^
Linseed,
hu2-ina?
Liquorice,
feaw1-fe*ao8
Litharge,
inilr-t'o^-seuy
Lobelia,
8hanl-keng*
ts'i*
"U
\[\
jy
Logwood,
Lycopodium,
su l Kink
Mercury,
x/ntr-iii
Musk,
ts'ai
ua)i -nieir sony 1
.s7<
380
j
4
-
Jjfc
-fa
^1
7]^
Itoncf
jjjf
^
S@S
}j|f
]
lco'
hMaft-h&iang
needs,
Honey,
j.
ft
chul-8ha l
Galangal
,.
ft|
Cinnabar,
Fennel
j, (nil
ATKUIA MK1H<
/;/<//';
Mustard,
A.
$fe
//"/'-/////-
Myrrh,
Nitre (saltpetre),
/>W/.'
Nutmeg,
rt</i
Nux
nia*-ch'ien--t8i*
Oak
vomica,
A.s
l
-lc< t -k.'<-<j
bark,
fllf
Iwkiny^-shu* p'i
tat-kueP-hsiang* in1
teo* iu
beans,
camellia seeds,
ch'a- iur
cloves,
ting
cinnamon,
kim
peppermint,
pine wood,
sandal wood,
-Jwang
2
-p'i
iu 2
iir
1
potf-hd nr
1
2
sony iu
jtelr in-
ftff
2
1
t'avP-h&ang hi
fjjf
Olibannm,
ruP-hsiang
Opium,
2
1
iauy -icn
hur-chiao 1
Pepper,
poh*-ho-
Peppermint,
Pomegranate
peel,
*<h'ih--liu
p*i-
B^
1
Oil of anise,
Pop
)y heads,
Potash,
iny -8u,*-k<oh
huei l -hsie)r
Powder of ciiiiianio
a
Purging powder
shufi-ku* sari*
7jC
*
hi
Rhubarb,
(tal
1
)
Huang'
2
1
fan -lwng haa
l
Saffron,
Slippery elm,
iP-shu* p'i2
SmOax,
Soda,
g?
lllj
Sulphur,
7
" Tonic
powder/
Uur-huaiHJ
pu
-uei* san*
2
Turmeric,
chiang^huang
AVax,
hiMiuf-lah
Wormseed,
Wormwood,
4
<u -t*'a(y'
381
f|||
GEOGRAPHICAL NOTES.
Jit
Boundaries and Divisions of China Proper.

North
East
Gulf
South
West
into
Mongolia.
Yellow Sea and the Pacific Ocean.

The China Sea, Gulf of Tonquin, Tonquin and Siani.
Upper Burmah, Thibet and Kokonor.
of Pehchihli, the
Wells Williams divides China Proper by its physical features

Three Portions viz., the Mountainous, the Hilly, and the Level
;
Country.
1. The Mountainous portion is more than half of the whole, and lies W.
of a line passing N. and S. through Wn-ch'aiig, in Hupeh.
2. The Hilly portion lies E. of this meridian and S. of the Yang-tsi.
3. The Great Plain is the remaining North Eastern portion, and is said
by him to be the richest part of the Empire.
Boundaries of the Eighteen Provinces.

CIIIIILI.*CHI.N. InnerMongolia,Liaotung.E. Gulf of Pehchihli.
S.
Houau
Shantung,
SHANSI. SHA. X. Mongolia

...
S. Honan, Yellow River
SHANTUNG.
N. Gulf
SUNG.
S.
of Pehchihli
Kiaugsu
...
...
W.
...
E. Chihli.
...
W.
...
E. Yellow Sea.
...
AV.
HONAN. Ho. N. Shansi, Chihli, Shantung.

S.
S.
Chehkiang
AXHWEI. AN. N. Honau

S.
KIANGSI. Ki.
-N.
S.
*The
Kiangsi
3}ft
$&
Chihli.
Honan,
Shensi.
...
...
E. Yellow Sea.
...
...
W. Anhwei.
...
...
E. Kiaugsu, Chehkiang.
...
...
W. Hupeh, Honan.
Hupeh, Anhwei
...
E. Euhkieu.
...
W. Hunan.
...
abbreviations that follow the
JH, Jt
Yellow River.
Kwangtung
adopted by the Imperial Post
Shensi,
E. Kiaugsu, Anhwei.
W.
Hupeh
KJANGSU. Ku. N. Shantung
Shansi.
Th c
'
name
of
each province are those
Office.
i*
without bound.*, the river
ir it/tout
bottom.
GEOGRAPHICAL NOTKS.
CHEKIANG,
Chief Cities of China,

The Capitals
of
g,
$g
the different Provinces (Seng ft)
head the
lists,
and are
printed in larger type.
i?
CHIHLI.
1
Containing n Fu, 6 Chih-li Cheo,

Cheo and 123 Hsien cities. Total 157.
litg"
qp r$
JHR S\>
Shuent'icn
Pchchinn.
Fa
the
P'inytiny Cheo.
(or
Metro-
Chiang
jj^f
Kuanyp'iny Fu.
Rial
IE
Ch'engteh
Hsuenhi
Hsuenhua
Hochien
Tdtniny
Tsuoihiia Cheo,
SHANTONG.
Containing 10 Fu,
8
Cheo and 96 Hsien
2 Chih-li
cities.
Chinan Fa.
fff
Tonych'any Fa.
Ch'inycheo
8HAN8I.
7
Containing 9 Fu, 10 Chih-li Cheo,

T'ing, 6 Cheo and 85 Hsien cities.
Total 117.
Lawheo
lencheo
T'aian
P'inyiang Fu.
Ch
Clnninf/
,y uneo.
Isiwch iny
CMao
)>
Cheo,
Total
16.
rlUFF riTIFs OF rlllXA.
g,
HI
ON AN.
ANHUEI.
Containing 9 Fu, 5 Chih-li Clu-o, 5
Containing 8 Fu, 5 Chih-li Cheo, 4

Cheo,
Totil
T'inx and 79 Hsien
i
1 1
cities.
6.
Fu,
>if/
!<.
li
Xliif/L'tic/i
JSP
)>
)>
C/K'O.
1)
}M
Cheo.
11
))
))
KIANGSI.
ft
Containing 13 Fu,
KIANGSU.
T'ing,
Containing 8 Fu, 3 T'ing, 3 Chih-li

Cheo, 3 Cheo and 62 Hsien cities,
Cheo and
Chih-li Cheo, 2
75
Hsien
Fn.
Total 79.
NanoJiing
( -h
ench la n<j
Fa
Chieiich'ang Fa.
or
Chiangning
ffi
cities.
Total 92.
Nank'any
Kuanghsin
^L
Chiuvhiang
Lhu'hittng
fanf/cheo
Kancheo
ft
)>
Cheo.
j'H
Uencheo
^,
MANDARIN PRIMER,
CHEHKIANG.
Containing
2 T'ing,
Total 90.
Jj^f
Fu,
HUPEH.
Chih-li T'ing,
75 Hsieji cities,
Cheo and
Containing 10 Fu, i Chih-li Cheo, 7

Shaohsiny Fu.
Ofiiahsing
jf
rch'avg Fu.
Huanycheo Fu.
Hsianyiany
Hdniany
Ueniang
Hucheo
mm
ft
Chinhua
leneheo
li&
^f
}ft|
P^ 'W
))
*.**!
Chinmen Cheo.
FUHKIEN.
Containing 9 Fu,
T'ing and 58 Hsien
Chih-li Cheo, 4
Total 73.
cities.
HUNAN.
Containing 9 Fu, 3 Chih-li T'ing, 4
Cheo, 3 Cheo and 64 Hsien
Ch'ueneheo Fu.
Chih-li
CJtanc/cheo
cities.
Total 83.
flsinyhua
GMenning
rr
lenp'ing
Tinycheo
lohcheo
longeh'u&n Cheo.
Henycheo
Fu.
Paoeh'inf/
longcheo
Uencheo
FORMOSA. (T'AIUAN).*
Containing 3 Fu, 3 T'ing,
ii Hsien.
Total 18.
^
X
IF>
Jg nu
it
\fe
Kueiiany Cheo.
Cheo,
Fainan
IE JS fi
M\
Ifr
Now
^'^
#6
/1T
ceded to the Japanese.
386
Fenyhumiy
Ch'iencheo
T'iny.
UTIKs OF (NINA.
CIIIKF
Under Kansnh
chiang
si
i/'Ji
is
or the
Hsin-
included
New Dominion,
Kausuh or Turkunder an Administrator,

who is also Governor of Kansuh and
who resides at Tihhua iih fc. It con-
known
also
ANSI (silENSr.)
Containing
estan.
Fu, 5 Chih-li Cheo, 8

73 Hsien cities.
Cheo and
T'iiig, 5
%ft
Total 98.
three Prefectures
tains
?&
/fr
hua
as outer
It is
ii^
viz.,
I-li
$*
Sui-ching '$ $$ Iff and TihIt has also the followffc fl^p.
4 Chih-li Cheo, 4 Chih-li T'ing,

ing
4 Cheo. i T'ing and 9 Hsien cities.
Total 25.
:
Ft'M/hxMMJ
)\\
r/in
ft
S,iit<>/,
sYciI'L'AN.
Chen.
Containing 12 Fu, 8 Chih-li Cheo,
Cheo aiid
3 Chih-li T'iug, 6 T'ing,
112 Hsien cities.
Total 152.
Fu,
))
tf
"))
KAXSUH.
Containing 8 Fu,
9 T'ing, 7
Total 80.
Cheo and
5 Chih-li
51
Hsien
Cheo,
cities.
fl
i? Mi
Zfi
/ff
,,
Kongeh'ang Fu.
fc ft
P'ingliang
CMwjwnj
)>
>9
ft
l\<nieheo
tt
T'ing.
>
DO
Htfoheo
M AND AKIN PRIM EH.
KUANGTONG.
^B PT
Containing 9 Fu, 2 Chili-li T'ing, 4

Chih-li Cheo, 2 T'ing, 7 Cheo and 78
Hsien cities Total 102
h<'o
IK
fl?
fc
cien Fu.
Anshncn
ti]ri]icli
Iff
y*ongren
ii
Fu.
Ch'ionycluo Fu.
it ft
C/i<aocheo
ft ii
fg ft
ft M
ft
ffi
SI
tihaocheo
>
Hmk-hco
Liencheo
>)]\
Kaocheo
'ft
Luicheo
Tmenl
Cfeeo.
ft
ft
P'inyiie.h Cheo.
ffi
Pnfichnl 'Piny.
'
Nanhsiomg
a
f$}
K$
Fulikany T'ing.
3/5
UINNAN.
Containing 14 Fu, 4 Chih-li T'ing,
3 Chih-li Cheo, 9 T'ing, 27 Cheo and
39 Hsien cities. Total 96.
KUANGH8I.
Containing
T'ing, 16
Total 80.
1 1
Fu,
/ft
Chih-li Cheo. 5
Cheo and 47
Hsi.?n citits.
Ch'awhiany
?1
Kueilin Fu.
Hlnieiininy
,H
ft
jfi
'1$
iH'i
$fl
j||
ffi
ft
ii
ii
ii
Oi'mgiien
Nanniny
Hmincheo
Liueheo
Ucheo
|f|
Kuangnan
[}jj
ig
l&uhehing
US
jfi
i?
Chdot'ong
4fc
ii
K'ailuui.
ft fl
.11
a
w
Sich'eny
Kuatiyhsl
r
t e licit
k
ft
KUEICHEO.
Containing 12 Fu, 3 Chih-li T'ing,
Chih-li Cheo,
33 Hsien cities.
T'ing, 13
Total 73.
Cheo and
Menyhuu
Chenuen
(
388
i<()iy
'hingtong
Fu..
CIIIKF riTIKS OF CHINA.
%H
The Manchurian Provinces.
n
rimiMN
(Kirin.)
Containing i Fu, 5 Ting,
and i Hsien city. Total 8.
sm;N<;riiiN<; (Shingking.)
Also culled Liao-tong
Containing 3 Fn.
J).
5
Cheo,
r/,/A//y,
5 T'ing.
HEHLONGCHIANG.
(Motikden.)
Ch
Hil
<tn(/t''it
Also called Tsi-lsi-ha-ri
Fu.
Still
Chingcheo
under military govemnieut.
Acrording- to (files, the cities of China number 1,<SS4.

are divided as follows
Fu 185, T'ing 134, Cheo 248,
:
1,317.
To
this
according- to the
15 Hsien.
Ch*o.
Total 27.
Hsien.
14
\$f ]\(
orKuan-
They
Hsien
must be added the Manchurian Provinces, which

same authority contain 4 Fu, 10 T'ing,
Cheo and
Total 35.
This gives
a total of
Chief Rivers of China.
1,910
in all.
x g
4*
China has four principal rivers, viz., the Yellow Kiver in the
North, the Yangtze in the Centre, the West Kiver in the South
There
and the Han Kiver running from the X. W. to the centre.
are also three smaller rivers, viz., the Pei Ho in the North, the Huai
Ho north of the Yangtze, and the river Min, which flows through
the province of Fnhkien.
KIVEK. Huang Ho
Rising in Kokonor,
jpf.
N. and Long. 93 E., it enters Kansuh and passes
Lam-how, 800 miles from its source. It is then Hanked by the
It re-enters
great wall for 430 miles, and passes out into Mongolia.
China between Shansi and Sheusi, forming their boundary, then
strikes eastward through Honan and Shantung, and passing the
i'alis in"
the A >llow Sea
walls of K'aifeng and Tsinan in its cour
about Lat. 37 N. and Long. 118 K.
Formeriy, aher leaving
about Lat. 35
'
>
K'aifeng the river flowed eastward into Kiangsu, falling into the
Yellow Sea about 100 miles north of Chinkiang. Its direct length
ll
-iff
35
!lia>
above 9
Sticli on-
below.
389
Hanyt'how
and
PB1MER.
The
1/21)0 miles, but as the course winds, it is nearly 2,">00.
of its basin is 475,000 square miles.
It is comparatively
shallow, and of little use for purposes of navigation.
is
area
" Ta
lang-tsi Chiang
-f J, also called
"
Chiang" ft J and
Ch'ang Chiang" J| j. Rises in Thibet.
After flowing for more than 1,000 miles in thinly populated country
it
Here it is
passes into China Proper near Batang in Szechwan.
known as the Chin-sha
Then flowing
^J?, or Golden Sand River.
southward and eastward, it for some distance forms the boundary
between S/echwan and Yunnan.
YANGTZE RIVKH.
Passing northward and eastward through S/echwan, and under

the walls of Ch'ungking, where it receives a
Kialing Chiang, from the North, it enters
large tributary, the
Hupeh, and rushes
At Yohchow, it receives the waters

through the gorges to Ich'ang.
and
Lake,
passes AVuch'ang, with Hanyang and
of the Tongt'ing
Hankow opposite to it, at the junction of the Han river.

the northern extremity of Kiangsi, at Kiukiang near the
Skirting
mouth
of
through Anhwei, and passing

Ank'ing and Wului, enters Kiangsu near Nanking.
the P'oyang Lake,
it
strikes
X.
K.
After intersecting the Grand (/anal at Chiukiang, it falls into

two magnificent mouths about Lat. ',>'2 X., Shanghai
which joins the southern
Jjj|
Hwangpu river
the Pacific by
being on the
mouth
length, as the bird flies, is 1,S.">0 miles;

It drains an area of
as the course winds, about 3,000.
548,000
miles.
square
at
Its
Woosung.
Tin: WEST RIVKJJ |f fa, rises in Yunnan, and flowing in a

south-westerly direction separates Kweichow from Kwangsi for a
It then flows S. E. through the centre of
distance of 100 miles.
Kwangsi and Kwangtung, emptying itself through the Delta into

number of mouths in latitude 28 X.,
the South China Sea by a
Longitude
1 1
In
E.
its
course
it
receives several tributaries, the
Red River {s ?K flC? the Kwei River

principal of which are the
Li which joins it at the Treaty Port of Wuchow |g >J>||, and
)|ji
Its total
the North River
j, which enters it at Samshui
7]^.
length
is
about 1,250 miles.
THE PEI RIVER

Mountains [^
[1],
enters the Plain of

in
rises in Mongolia among the In

running parallel to the Great A Vail,
Chihli to the north of Peking ;|t ify, and flowing
and
Jpf
after
a south-easterly direction passes the cities of T'ongchow JJ

and einj)ties itself into the Gulf of IVhchiJi at
JfJ J^
>)>|>|
and Tientsin
Taku
^ ^
twenty-eight
miles
from
from Tongchow to the sea only.
390
Tientsin.
It
is
navigable
<'H
IFF IJIVFIJS OF CHINA.
TIIF 1I.\\ IJivKU

borders of S/cchwan.
Hanchong
jj|
jj| Jpf
Plowing
tfi
(P^
(or fjfj rises in

\V. by S. \V. it
Shensi dose
passes
Hankow) and Hsingan

west of Yuenyang \>\\ \^>
south-westerly course and empties

pursues
point
the Yangt/e at Hankow
p, the mouth of the Han.
this
it
Laohokow
the
t<
cities
tlic
miles from
(IKK)
Shensi, entering Ilupeli to the
in
Jpf
Jft
of
From
itself into
On
its
P, a busy mart :>.")()

from
miles
Hankow; Siangyangfu j| |& JfJ, and the important
the
business centre of Fancheng |j| jjfc, o(K) miles from its mouth
an
market
Anlu
and
of
j,
place
important
Shayang ty
city
g?,
From Hankow to Laohokow the
on the right bank of the river.
Han is shallow and full of sand banks; above that full of rapids,
way through Hupeh
it
passes
-jpf
which make navigation
and dangerous.
difficult
THK HWAI RIVER
-/f|
Jpf
rises in the
south of
Honan and
flows
east past Sinyangchow ff; |>^

;
entering Anhwei to the South-west
of Yingchowfu fj^ >)]] JjJ, it flows in a north-easterly direction, empty-
ing itself into the
Hungt/e Lake
fit
j^.
It is
navigable from
Sinyangchow.
THE Mix, on SNAKK RIVER
[^
principal tributaries which unite near to
formed by
is
Yenpingfu
JiE
flows 8. E. past Shnikow ?]")
J^,
it
China Sea by two mouths.
It is
about 350 miles
2p
ffi.
three
From
Foochow Jg
itself
*||-|
into the
in length.
THE GRAND CANAL.

This canal was made in separate sections, between the 7th and
14th centuries, both Chinese and Mongols being engaged in its
It commences in
the province of Chihli, near the
construction.
of
Tientsin
and entering the province of
treaty port
jff ;
Shantung, near Tehcheo fjg j^, flows in a south-westerly direction
^ ^
until it reaches L/inch'ing Hsien JJfr -j^ |^.

flows south-east for a considerable distance.
From
To the
this point
it
south of the
Yellow River, near Tongp'ing Cheo jg Zp j^, it passes through a

country, where its flow is regulated by locks, and its
These locks give it
banks in many places are faced with stone.
the local name of " Chah Ho/' from the Chinese character c-hah ftp],
" a water
In other parts of its course its usual name is the
gate."
low-lying
"
Yuin
Ho "
5J|
-jpf
or Transit River.
Flowing
on,
it
enters the
and passing
Kiangsu, close to P'ei Cheo 3i|$ >)]]
Huaian Fu ffg
ffj}
successively by Ts'ingkiang P'u
ffi,
Paoing Hsien j|
fg j^ and Yangchow
Jg, the Kaoyu Lake
province
of
^ ^
at length empties itself into the i*iver

Yangt/e at
ffl JrJ?
Kuaclieo JJ^
having ti-aversed about ninety miles from the
Yellow River to this point.
Jft
>J>j.|,
391
MAM) A KIN PRIMER.

Its course, south of the Yangtze, begins at Chiiikiang fa
$f,
one of the Treaty Ports, where it has two separate entrances.
Its
flows on through a fertile, populous country past Tanvang Hsien
Ul an eas terlv direction to Ch'angchow
then on to
PJl III
the
Wusili 4k Ig and Suchow Fu
commercial
capital of
Jj^,
Thence it proceeds almost due south into the province
the province.
of Chehkiang, which it enters close to Kiahsing Fu *JL ffl
and
Jff
its course at the
provincial capital Hangchow
finally completes
*
TJie totaj lentn is nhout 650 miles.
>J>|'|,
>)'||
The Lakes
of China.
jj|g
-g
$*
The
principal lakes of China are found in the central provinces.

In addition there are a number of small ones, the chief of these
being in the provinces of
Hupeh and Kiangsu.
There are a few
Yunnan, the principal of which are the T'ien Lake >jc

south of Yunnanfu, and the Krh Hai ffi $$ to the east
The former
feet
above sea
THE
in
lies at
an elevation of (>,oOO
in
to the
of Talifu.
the latter about
(>,.">()()
level.
(TREAT
Kiangsu.
feet,
jgj
It is
LAKH
lies
jJB,
about the same
THE HONUTSEH LAKE
Soochow
Poyang Lake.
to the west of
size as the
ji|
*}\\
lies partly in Kiangsu and

gt
jjg
The
River
into it on the W. and
Anhwei.
Hwai
runs
partly
To the
channels on the N. K. connect it with the drrand Canal.
south of it lies the Kaoyu Lake Jftf |5 JUJ.
in
THE CHÂO LAKE

in
Auhwei
rivers,
and
about
l"2f>
jj|
lies
fflfr
to the 8. of
Liichowfu jj
>}\\
ffi
of the Yangtze. It is fed by a number of small

empties itself into the Yangtze not far from \Vuhu. It is
miles in circumference.
to the
X.
TONGT'ING LAKE
This lake is the largest in China,

}|g) J| JJ|J.
miles long and oO broad.
It lies in the north-east of
the province of Hunan *j$J j^f on the south-western border of Hupeh
It receives the waters of the Yuen Kiang
% on the
jjj ^.
and
of
the
on
the
south-west,
Siang Kiang $[J ^C
south, and pours
them into the river Yangtze at Yohchow Fu -gj- ^-j Jff.
being about
(50
P'OYANG-
LAKE
fg |^
JS8-
This beautiful lake
is
situated in
90 miles long
it from the south and southand its waters are
west the largest being the Kan River jH J
discharged into the Yangtze a few miles below the city of Kiukiang
^ tae
Its trades and fisheries are
Olie
Treaty Ports.
~/L tt J$>
more important than those of the Tongt'ing lake, which is com-
the north of the province of Kiangsi.

and 20 broad. Several rivers How into
It is nearly
paratively shallow.
~S JL
/f
(R!
JH Customs wri/
in crcri/
Names
of
Some
(The orthography used
is
that
<>f
the
'hinese Imperial Postal Service.)
A moy
Hoihow
Antung
Hanoi
Amur
China and the East.
of the Principal Places in
Kiver
Arabia
W)
Haiphong
I
IN
$$
[akodate
iset
Hiroshima
tJR.
lâtang
Bombay
1
Borneo
anton
\vangpu Kiver
Harbin
Burmah
1
ft ID
J|
'Jfl
ffitt
Hwangpao
Bhaino
Hainan
Changsha
Hi
fj*
Inner Mongolia
Chefoo
Indus
Chinkiang
ft
Hongkong
ft 31
"jjf
jg
fpf
-g
f[)
Indo China
Chiuwaiigtao
Chungking
Kiaochow
Corea or Chosen
Jg j^
Ceylon
Kiukiano-
Chusan
Kwangcliengtze (Changchun)
it
Kelung
Kalgan
Kokonor
Kowloon
Changchun
Chemulpo
Cochin China
Dalny or Dairen
or
Foochow
Fusan
mm
Fujiyama
Ganges
w.
^L jj
Kioto
iii
Kobe
fir
Lassa
ff*
-
Kiachta
iii
|-A
Jp
>
Great Wall
Gobi
Mengtsz
Moukden
IB
or Shengching
Hangchow
Meikong
Hankow
or
Cambodia Kiver
il
393
rfr
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Manchuria
]R
"1
^f
Shameen
ANALYSIS OF LESSONS.
Adverbs, position
of,
Adjectives, position
)>.
and
use,
Adverbs and Prepositions,
.>.
"21.
Comparison of, 49.

expressed by tti %$ and louy-ttsony
Adjectives,
All,
Jf|
$J, 01.
Assent, liow emphasized, 232.
Adverbs, compound, 15.

Abstract Nouns of Quality, 1 15.
Alternatives expressed by Inic/i ^, 240.
Adversative Conjunction tao $j, 147.
Approximation, 55.
Additional words for exercise in composition, 274.
1
Beginning and end of an action,

Beginning or Origin,
C/i'f<
^ and
how
indicated,
t>9.
24-").
Uses, 170.
various uses of, 201.
j^
its
and
its
uses,
201.
as applied to Time, 35.

fgj
Chin jg joined to other words to indicate Promptitude, 20!).
Chih $l as Sign of Indirect Object, 42.
Chicii
Copper Currency, 5S.

Cine fg and its Uses,
Chin
xh'i
%fc
.")!).
^ Defining power
j '^ as an Auxiliary
Comparison, degree of, 81.
Gh'i-lai
of,
")*>.
Verb, 05.
Comparison denoted by chce-mo Jg J| and na-mo
JjJ
^,
83.
Double, how
formed, 83.
Comparative,
Choh jl its use and force, 84.
Capacity to contain, how expressed, 93.
Ch'u ]jjL as indicating Place and Circumstances, 10S.
Combination, 110.
Concurrence,
expressed, 136.
and *ni-r<in g| ^, 147.
Chi-ran |
Chiany
\F
in
how
Compulsion expressed by
148.
pi/t >^J,
Completion, as expressed by u-an
^ ch'eny j^ and
31)5
^'//r/
^,
153,
MANDARIN PKIMEK.
Certainty and Uncertainty, 154.
Ch'i 3t in combination, 161.
Gh'i j=,
use and force, 1(31.
its
^ as a principal and an auxiliary Verb,
C/i'u
21.
114.
Compound Adverbs,
Direction, how indicated, DO.

Distance, terms relating to, 01.
'
'
'
Each/
Each/
every/ as applied to time, 28.
<
every/
how
expressed, 64.
Electricity, expressions relating thereto, 100.
Either ... or
^ and
Fci
MID jL
Fall fj|
ts
its
its
I
Neither
1
uses,
nor, 14(3.
To.
'option and Use, 2*24.
Force and Usage, 107.
Fah gj as a
Fci H, how
Four
Suffix indicating
used, 130.
Manner, 115.
Seasons, 35.
Final Particles, 233.
H.<< if
as Sign of Plural, 2.
Jldo-lldo
Ho
22.
jft *~j*, indicating .completion,
various uses of, 224.
fjij
Jfnan
$j?
Haci-lai
jjh
and
||.
jfc
and
/utci-ch'ti
[o|
Infinitive
I/i
ie
twti
;f||
I-chhu/
I j^
[u|
as Auxiliary Verbs, 51.
Mood formed by Verb and Noun,
indicating Totality
lony $j added to verb,
lany
marking something additional, 43.
3.
and Uniformity, 193.
8.
as indicating
g,
its
Manner, (3(3.
Use and Force, 120.
Combination, 155.
Inference, phrases used to express, 253.
In,
in
in Interrogative statements, 14.
Imperative, modified by use of k'o-i

lony J$ uses of, 51.
K'o
Kan
Ken
Keh
"pj
as an Interrogative
and a
Idiomatic use
|Jg
how
of,
jy, 28.
Suffix, 103.
J| as indicating Time, 02.

Jj|
pj"
130.
used, 1()1.
306
ANALYSIS OF
Liao ~f as
Li< in
"J*
jjjjf
Lai
J/o
and chhi |j, distinction between, 10S.

ti
principal and an auxiliary verb, 21.
as
2j
as Interrogative, 2.
J|g
J/H/
Verb, 1S1.
a Principal
as sign of Past Tense, l/>.

as indicating Quantity or Measure, 100.
as Sign of Plural, 3.
{[")
Months, names
of,
36.
Monetary System, f>(>.

Mo yjgi and iii ty^ uses
of,
66.
Measurement and weight, 91).

Money and Exchange, 27.
Name
and age, 44.
Negative forms of Sentences, 106.

Numerals used as Adverbs, 107.
Nei
and
j*j
tiai
130.
%\*
and
its
Correlatives, 261.
Xiny-k'o
5|
Numeral
Adjectives, 20.
N itinerary
pj"
Adjuncts,
6.
Numeration, 8; 12.
NOTES
M 3& $, 5-
Ches-chang chl
Chong-loh r|J J
^,
CA'/;/^
Chiao
C//iE
how
used,
16.
28.
V[, 28.
jg, 33-
Chi &,
C//?V
37-
|J, 38.
at end of sentence, 59.

takes no N. A., 67.
CA'/w li omitted, 72.
C// / J taking the place of kuah g|, 93.
Chiu-shi
Chan
fjfc
$fc
Chiang-shit
fang
fg
^-, 109.
Ch'eng /^c, 156.

C/fl0 t^, 162.
C/M,
188.
?g, 188.
Chang
Ch'ao-naoty?
f^, 213.
Chi en 5jf, 228.

written
C7
Chien-tao
^[, 217.
77, 228.
^,256.
,
156.
156.
397
N PKIMEH.
ffsia ~F replacing chit
Huen-ling $
fa],
Huang-shang Ji Jt, 124.

/
7 as a verb, 124.
Huan-hsi jfc ^ reversed,
Ho Jt 156.
/<? ill
-<te
148.
joined to 10" JU &'o-i, 45.

$g BJ used iii the West, 59.
lu-p'iao HH
w,
Kong-fit
Afej|,i88.
Kong-tao
101.
52.
5fc,
&
Lai
38.
ft, 124.
jt, 213.
and used
fa read /
for
Jgj,
16.
M Â /o lien ^ 55 k, 33Li-pai Vang |g ^ ^;, 109.

---- ^f H ---- #, 148.
/.*>
188.
used alone,
Ni
15.
excessive use
|Jjt
Pith shl ~%
^,
of, 28.
3.
^ replacing /'^ |g,

/*-^ H ^ asPien
22.
Pith-tong
/*A /mo
^ |&, 37^ before a
verb, 59.
P'ien-i fg ft, 213.
^ with ;/m^-, ft/ W
/'rtw^-
Peh-hsing
h-ch'&
or
tsit
$,
213.
213
@" ft,
$,
Jj
196.
sha-ts'i, 3.
Sha-shi-heo, 38.
Shen-tsi
compared with shen-t'i
&^
^,
5(f^5c7
{g, 67.
140.
pjj,
Sheng-hsia
57/i'A
123.
and
188.
>',
jjf
sh'ih-fen
-f-, -f- 3J-,
240.
'This' or 'that' following a Possessive Pronoun,

omitted from
TJKM
^t, 16.
Teh-loh
7 used of, 16.
^^
Tsao-shang ^L
7V00
Hfe,
28.
28.
75i np omitted after
^,
33.
^f>w ^, 33.
Tih
omitted with double possessive,
Tst =
added
to
To % replacing
rih, 38.
/t<?,
45.
used alone, 52.

Tsen-mo fa % used before verbs,
Ttf/J
7s6>
tft
i;//^//
hsien
^fc
^f
H,
67.
72.
398
37.
9.
ANALYSIS
<>F
I.F.ssoNS.
Tsi $z omitted, 124.
91 changed
Tsi
to
Tsi 3- added to
Tong-iang
Tong-iang
f,
ch'a-
r'i J^J,
3g,
fl$,
124.
ffi,
179.
196.
$,
}fc
196.
^21.
7V//
67/ jg aiid /<*. j^, 85.

f \i-fsi jg ^y 256.
Order
of time,
f>.
Origin, j)hrases
13.
of,
Personal Pronouns,
Pah
1.
as Interrogative, 2.
Prepositional Verbs, 9.
Potential Mood indicated by teh ||, 22.
Potential Mood formed by huei ^, 51.
Paper Currency, 58.

Plen
idiomatic use
Place;
how
of,
to ask the
66.
way
91.
to,
Particles, final, 27.
Pen
-fa its
Use and Force,
Passive Voice,
Pa
how
Jg position and
116.
expressed, 128.
use, 20.
Phrases of Origin, 99.
Pa
-If
r|b
How
and where used,

J
29.
Probability, 154.
Review, Lessons, L-V. 33: VI.-X. 75: XI.-XV. 121

170: XXI.-XXV. 221
XXVI.-XXX. 273.
:
lie a
J^ as a Suffix, 107.
llesult of Actions,
how
indicated, 137.
Relation and lack of Relation, 137.

Reflexive Pronoun ts'i-chl fa g,, 145.
Repetition of Verbs, 162.
Ri 5J added
to nouns, 15.
HEADING LESSONS
Sundry Sentences, 4.
Odds and Ends, 10.
Desultory Talk, 17.
in the Making,
Speech
visit
from a Friend,
Small Talk, 39.

A Confidence Trick,
23.
29.
46.
399
XVI.-XX,
MANDARIN PRIMER.
A
Visit to the city, 53.
More Money than Sense,
60.
Seeing the Sights, 68.

Current Chat, 72.
Ancient and Modern, 86.
Some
Travelling Experiences, 94.
Newspaper and Telegraphs, 102.

The Land we live in, no.
Pure Romance, 117.
An Awakening and a Journey, 124.
London, 132.
The Unwary Youth
I, 141.
II, 149-
HI, 157-
City
Ramble
I,
,/
,,
III, 180.
,,
,,
,,
IV, 189.
,,

,,
163.
II, 167.
I,
197.
II, 206.
Bookselling Trip, 214.
The Horrors of Famine, 218.

The Development of Japan, 229.
The Younger Brother 1,241.
II, 249-
111,257.
IV, 265.
V, 269.
Shen-mo jff Jjg as an Interrogative,

Shi -JH; where omitted, 14.
Shany J^
2.
as an auxiliary, 22.
Seasons, the four, 35.

Silver Currency, 57.
Superlative Degree, forms used for, 83.

Shang J; hsia ~f and ko jg used as Auxiliaries, 115.
Wi
80
How
ffi
used, 130.
as a Relative Pronoun, 138.
Supposition,
how
expressed, 146.
Sequence, as expressed by ahen-clii $*

Sixty Years Cycle $> tip ^p, 226.
8ui-ran
and
ch'i-ii
jj^,
147.
Successive Action, 17(>.
^5 as a Descriptive Particle, 2.
T'co Bfl as a Suffix, and as the Equivalent of
Tilt
T#'i -?*,
Tiao J
tl
%*, 18:>.
5i added to Nouns, 15.

as a Principal and Auxiliary Verb, 192.
400
202.
ANALYSIS OF
I.F.ssoNS.
Time, 20.
Time, order
of,
Time, past and
20.
future, 27.
Time, as indicated
by watches and clocks, 36.
and other phrases indicating Conclusion, 210.

Ji] Jg
T-ch 1$ and other words indicating Purpose, 224.
Tno-ti
Tih ($ forming Defining Clauses, 37.

To-shao
/}? contrasted with chi $|, 43.
T'ai
jfc
as indicating Kxcess, 50.
Ts'o-liao |g 7*
Tih
fttj
added
to verbs, 51.
indicating an Agent, 65.
Travel by rail and steamer, 92.

Tih frff as indicating material, 98.
Tang ^, some uses of, 138.
Tao
Teh
JiJ
as an auxiliary, 22.
joined to verbs to form the Passive Participle, 50.
Ten Heavenly Stems, 226.

Twelve Earthly Branches, 226.
Uan-liao
Vocabulary
~f indicating completion, 22.

I,
32.
H,
71.
III, 123.
IV, 166.
V,
217.
VI, 268.
Week, days
of the, 36,
401
SYLLABIC INDEX TO CHARACTERS AND PHRASES,
CHAN
263
281
03
217; 254
108
94
251
241
95
134
275
279
232
220
263
97
263
CHAE
;
CHAP
177
56
245
CH'AN
ft
66
207
277
66
276
268
251
CHANG
203
278
112
CHAH
56
209
132
19
209
253
182;
253
4; 281
98
111
245
252
258
166
206 <fcA
276
CHEH
235
74
61
123
r267
166
219; 235
268
254
206
268
49
222
274
CH'AE
CHEN
71
87 tt
198
/z
185
St
CH'AO
232
AO
ffi
92
CH'ANG
ttS
250
134
228
183
152
90
71
158
276
250
32
CH'AI
403
106!
ft
260
MANDARIN PRIMER.
CHEO "
CH'EN
E-T
106
220
112
274
259
109
278
iEW
161
245
34; 211
98
Ifc
95
CH'EO
CHENG
JE
241
217 JH
123 iW
211
203
279
161
226
fi
m?
250
254
128
274
JE
211
276
JEtt
280
257
EJi
135
CHI
208
EH
JEffi
161
242
164
De
270
211
CH'I
142
CH'ENG
247 Jh
160 tt
35
160
153
98
*
m
282
71
$*%
276
185
235
276
259
AMR
m&
CHI
193
$ft
132
98
281
1
234
123
210
166
225
81
183
245
275
93
245
248
63
154
48
133
281
245
109
109
279
160
161
220
161
109
90
161
246
279
200
234
203
258
189
161
404
SYLLABIC IXDEX TO CIIAIJACTKHS AND PHRASES.
275
136
253
245
109
56
68
260 Iff*
192
168
256
226
262
88
200
ttB
274
97
275
197
278
fflf
256
49; 226; 233
234
268
s*
258
253
261
WWW
CH'IAO
276
276
209
CHIEH
CH'IANG
183
279
280
201
25
230
103; 185
114
CHIH
90
235
CHIAH
280
251
its*
225; 226
227
220
CH'if
8?
279
183
268
268
It
CH'IA
279
fa
216
203
197
252
276
189
CH'IAH
CHIANG
201
CH'IEH
202
90
179
ffl
208
32
192
183
189
CHIEN
201
206
CHIA
175
49
t|9
263
if
209
222
277
222
278
278
201
232
73; 215
257
19; 194
281
405
MAN-DARIN PRIMER.
406
svi.LAnir
IM>I;.\
i<
A KA< TI:I;>
AND
J9ES.
CHUH
CHU "
261
256
\'1
245
Ife
jg
183
ft
12; 281
204
m
ft?
279
IRf-
261
IRft
255
-Wisa^8
CHUH
278!ffiff
39
6
134Jffi
136
125
CH'UANG
*
65
19
279
65
CH'ONG
282
276
217
275
166
276
ffliit
252
CHUE^
"
219
153
CHU'EN"
217
CHUAN
CHU
234
278
CH UEN
f
48
253
235
234
271
34
204
279
CH'UEN"
225
CHUI
259
160
226
120
267
CH'PAN
267
277
19
CHUIN
90
134
270
407
231
253
274
277
274
276
MAKDARIN PRIMES.
276
40S
SYLLABIC INDEX TO CHARACTERS AM)
ffft
72
61
114
275
169
222
183
244
223
127
277
42
-1
244
fnfin
270
223
125
HEN
217
204
89
gft-
206
226
274
223
223
223
217
95
32
175
223
266
49
Sin
166
I'*
223
232
215
95
HU
223
42
175
tifi
153
47 II
254
HEH
HAN
275
53
276
#*#*
1M IK ASKS.
for
223
209
278
254
HUH
92
183
ft*
HENG
94
214
Ib
201
274
74
236
220
201
&SK
280
92
275
191
ft
H0A
277
275
92
277
209
13
93
244
217
93
135
BOH
HANG
274
97
141
153
166
63
117
166
206
49
184
227
135
206
276
62
248
275
106
HONG
tt
409
HUAI
19
108
135
277
MAKDARIN
HUAN
I'UJMKK.
HSIAH
410
SYLLABIC INDEX TO CHARACTERS AND PHRASES.

114
HSING
171)
279
204
204
203
118
204
199
192
201
153
245
153
280
269
219
90
278
277
278
158
159
203 ft si
271
204
104
95
aa
HSU
262
207
124
96
192
278
159
103
279
tt?
114
jfjj
119
ftK
HSCJH
226
>Jfr
192
278
26
277
278
201
175
>J'tt
109 fr^Pft
271
164
123
95
274
278
179
ttt
184
&
m
n
238
255
207
63
J&
if
105
232
240
276
232
226
95
Dts
81
fti
14
as
279
261
145
98
248
98
128
103
123
156
245
87
128
207
123
112
61
106
150
232
199
HSIEN
m
63
201; 211
266 ; 268
201
HStJIN
HSIN
277
HSIEH
220
HSIOH
118
12
250
39
142
HSUEH
90
218
222,
123
HSIU
114; 247
208
411
141
156
156
MANDARIN PRIMER.
198; 201
279
112
412

42
224
217
154
262
244
mm
160
162
155
ING
155
IEH
117
IEN
m
IONG
192
JS
49
166
108
166
245
192
249
413
MANDARIN
414
PfllMER.
SYLLABIC INDEX TO
I'll
AHACTI .Its AM)
IMIIIASKS.
193
193
pits
193
168
232
151
K'OH
K'ONG
71
at
153
153
its
KU
ft
11
224
90
166
209
ft
276
232
ft*
224
241
415
MANDAlilN PRIMES.
LA
tt
217
233
253
#i
275
LAH
LING
LAN
"123
192
12
217
128
114
30; 128;
277 ; 282
217
225
274
277
LANG
123
123
278
142
^
m
LAO
209
42
232
212
ffifo
225
225
225
128
200
233
275
144
150
241
69
274
416
SYLLABIC INDEX TO CHARACTERS AND mil ASKS.
B
MEI
LIOH
123
BP
247
276
340
209
247
*/&
112
119
MEN
1
19
232
pm
63
130
250
MEN6
166
128
MEO
53
253
2;
270
MI
166
201
201
MIH
274
MIAO
128
MIEH
274
417
MANDARIN PRIME&.
MIEN
NAN
103; 277
262
280
262
280
418
241
SYLLABIC INDEX TO
ril
AI!A<TKHS
AM) PHRASES.
PANG
PAI
NIANG
166
B
209
ff
213
233
213
213
NIAO
110
274
276
NIEH
P'ANG
250
145
51
148
NIEN
103
25
PAO
202
279
42
184
183
169
180
184
NING
261
NIU
71
fit*
226
207
280
NON6
177
279
NUAN
280
P'AO
{ft
222
81
136
IMP
230
277
419
MANDARIN
PEH
420
PRIMEft.
SYLLABIC INDEX TO CHAEACTERS AND PHRASES.

61
P'U
155
90
214
233
POH
P'O
192
fifi
* a*
32
97
90
72
232
185
159
256
254
242
P'UH
HA
267
267
RAE
198
152
142
PUH
M^HMMM
114
mm
169
73
262
246
268
&
232
280
203
231
243
276
RANG
^^M
_MW
214
256
152
256
RAO
153
71
262
112; 247
124
103; 269
263
176
305
145
169
181
RAN
69
63
233
128
30
266
153
;trtn
<t^ PU
'
270
265
219
86
REH
MB
176
130
tt
35
RI'H
155
187
159
35
H
B
104
187
70
135
98
198
142
192
73
155
421
MANDARIN PRIMER.
ROH
209
14
16
;27
151
26
70
23
19
RU
ffi
18
226
SANG
27
20
274
19
232
SAO
26
in*
SONG
81
22
ton
277
106
24
25
274
183
276
214
88
165
m?
SEE
RUH
ft
232
54
244
ft*
232
27
240
a*
277
278
152
A*
276
277
278
183
RUAN
SENG
253
280
124
RUEN
165
106
-it
;
178
HIS A*
'277
223
4*
SUAN
208
56
192
201
371
251
SAH
183
114
276
279
SUE
244
252
123
SA
123
276
217
192
192
216
133
56
269
141
86
150
5t%
201
SUEN
73
SAI
279
261
243
43
SUI
IBStT
183
136
*
153
422
42
232
SYLLABIC INDEX TO CHARACTERS AND PHRASKS.

SHAI
217
SHAN
185
167
202
111
233
255
249
189
203
28
SHENG
175
82
159
132
42
183
183
27
28
157
188
12
145
45
277
mm
tt*&ffi
189
390
mA
SHAO
SHEO
35
261
232; 279
169
ft
SHEH
216; 268
102
278
ft*)
MANDARIN PRIMES.
424
SYLLABIC LN1>EX To LilAKACTEiiS AND
1'HltASEti.
282
425
MANDARIN PRIMER.
T'EH
279
201
277
70; 46
276
279
114
56
TIEH
160
183
268
141
86
214
275
275
279
279
266
259
m
TIEN
103
271
64
32
/s
35
TING
98
247
277
100
49; 234; 281

226
100
153; 181
101
101
232
200
56
100
101
ffi^5c
101
;fl
SUP*
157
im
8ffi*
167
T'lEN
IB
426
155; 258
268
251
T'ING
175
22
25
201
SYLLABIC INDEX TO CHARACTERS AM)
1'IIUASES.
TSA
177
TSAH
209
244
46
TS'AH
55
194
42
175
245
&ft
tt
130
130
Mft
75; 111
187
g?*B
245
BH
151
lJi
66
*r4
187
ffiH
187
ffia
187
19
19
136
125
231
88
12
fii5ji
66
ffiUMR
187
145
19
187
133; 136
427
MANDARIN PRIMER.
TS'f
428
IJ
UEI
429
MANDARIN PRIMER.
245
135
63
J!
225
245
88
81
166
202
265
276
253
217
204
HI*
gj
142; 253
230
It*
192
94
25
UEN
56
123
201
192
114
90
430
urn
201
192
202
217
246
143
275
246
INDEX TO TRANSLATION OF ENGLISH SENTENCES,
lfc
A W
SB t- IS
31
m.m s
life
431
^
&6
MAKDABtN PKIMEK.
IE
'
m
n
-f-
& ^
M Jb
mm
^ ^
f^
as
fT-
iff
x a? ^
is E PS
S P It
PM S ^
K9
%&
.
W
^
Sis
^^
1H
3L
m*
P2
ft jlfc
HI ?E p^
$a
7
jffi,
If
JE
flfi,
i^ IE
Ji
I.VDKX TO TRANSLATION
m^ mW
^ n %k J
O
-ft
K\<;Us|| SENTENCES,
<>F
ffl*
-7-
5i$
n n
flfi,
-k
S,
fit
W
A
flt;tt
'M
d^
ii
Ife
ffi
IS-
fi
A
If
tr
m
A
ft
.
ti
^
JIB
f5
433
&
MANDARIN PRIMER.
-A
$fc
Wt
is
if ff
*fr
3fe
ft 'M II _t
^ ^
>J\^
tf,m =
>\
%!
;*
f
#
H'
if $?o
7
fl
Ifc
*^
9-
A
,
Tfpl
434
7,
1NDKX TO TRANSLATION
<>K
I-;N<;L1SII
SKNTKN<
10
ri
*
*,a ^
i* m til
Ks.
fi
Ife.ft
<
^-
if
ifc
ft
in
*
M m*
J:
1f
ft
i
f,
^fta
|fr
SB
&
ff
ffi
ft Ji -b
mm
ft IB 7-
435
TK1MEK.
IK
12
mm
&#
m
n
T
it
ii
A
A
If
fa
*&
HI
)IUA
-a
flt
^ *
$o^ El A
fc A A
f
JHo5i W
m * P,
fl!
Ift
iPI
>-fffi
SS
3t
IK
* ft
#
nm
-^ w
_t
*-
?a,
li
436
9 H^F
/^
To_t
IM>i;X
10
TKANM,. \TloN Of KMiLlSll SKNTKNrKS.
14
7-
-fc
-to^
mm
tft
It *g ft Ri
^ ^
3L
to to
\M A
*&
$f it
to
is
437
MAKJ3AH1N PRIMER*.
m m A
A
ft
fll
Jg ft
&
it
t,
tf
^ A m
^^^
A ito
35
jft
fft^ffl
vi
ffi
PI
%.
5j
1ft
ISL
^
W
S
s
4
ii
POA
vi ii it
A S
f
ft * SI
Jt Hf
A
Pj
nm
A ^
.lff
ffe
IE
A
w
1P1
ffi
*,
Ê
T^
10
Aj
438
-f-
* A
Hi
i\Di;.\
..
.fr
17
KNCM
\TION or
AJtH
n
**
US ^
ii
8f
itfc
tit
IB
ffl
*
,
^ m
ft '&
fl
wt
J:
*r
t-
m
P
T
ft it
7
ffi
To-
11
* ^
-tfc
m
A
439
JJ
16
MANDARIN PRIMER.
Wt
1 H i
it
^ ^
^t
*
^*
f-
tft
ô
S>*o^
tt{
ft
^^^^
A
ft ft
*
is tr, ut ta
nm m
*
^
ft
it
440
ft
1M>KX Tn TRANSLATION OF
KN<
,IM
SENTENCES,
ft
AJt&
tir
fit
ft
ft
ft
,*
is
11 IP
ifc
,A T,
Ife
A B
AA
m
A
7
it
ft
ft
A K
it * A
^
ft.iU
w m iR ^
IS ^
l
H-.
a
P
JM
tfc
T&o1i it
*& jg
441
^
*
M ft
Pi *
& -a
MANDARIN PB1MEE.
m a
^n
T
7**.
^ it
^ ^
A
* #
M ng
*r * "U *
A.* tt'tt 7 H :*
it ^ m + WoW ^ *
ft
& & m
m.A
7
m
it 0,!^
;#.
^
* T **
tr * .*
i
>|5,
3t
*'
ffl
ft-
tfA
.
R--JBE
22
-i
- t
^
^
Â
;* nr * a r
JB, 9
^ ^ >5 tf - ^
^
IR
7
* 7 ft' SB
21
A
ft
^
j6
It
ft f'
ft
W ft It
T m n m
* * *.f
f5
5iJ
ffl
H-
-ft
ffl
JN. Ji.
ft
ftA W
tfe
INDKX TO TRANSLATION
<
KX<J|.lsn
>K
SKNTKNrl-X
$fc
Jg
IB ft
.
A
23
+
m
BK
^'J
if
EoH
-fa
mx
&
Tog
HS 4
*o* A
f?^
9
M
tt.
il
f| fl
%
n
^ jg
bt^tw E-miT
Ifc *
>
SH
ASmm
?^ tr
1 ^ ^>
A il f^
ff; .Ht.
m k
*
^K
WL
^fl-y
*?Xr
tl
..
*B
g^
^>fl Hl^ To it
ft tS,^ ^
fi
flfc
sW
443
ft
mm
T T
fft
MANDARIN PRIMER.
A
ft Ji.
<fr
IE
A
ffl
A
tt.-
^
ffl
tr
.A
:
25
ft
fl
IJ
T>
ffl
T-
ft
fli
In
S-i.
7J
^ w
Iftil
24 jg
-fcr-
^r
5t
Sffl
,^
M m^
ft
444
.t
INDEX TO TRANSLATION OF
F.N(JI,ISTT
,SENTEN<
'Ks.
*r
T 7,
15
M^
5B
26
If
ffc
fl
^ ^
27
tfc
^
*#
A
ft
AH
BJ
m
445
MANDARIN PRIMER.
T
Mb -?\
m
A
# & A
-f-
_t
W H A
n.
J:
A m,W
A ^ A
m
A
U
28
A
A
!B
a *,
tr
446
I.\J)KX
TO TKANSLATION OF KN<;US|| SKNTKNrKs.
$fc
Jg
it
ft
ft
ffi
A
fli,
14
at
Ho^
3*
%> at
SL ^c lei BB
&
tEL
ft
fl
ffi
tfy
m n
$ ^
30
1$
_t
ft
Jg ft
ffi
r
ft
JB*
= g
fit
15
IB]
f.
i
HA
3^
Jp
BR _t
M
tt
^C^
it
Jt
|Ej
#-&ft'1i.it-ll''ik(KT^
J
flfi,
a,
A
m
jg ft
*"
is-
m
u
r* *
i|oA.* k
447
it
ft -b
'* *
ft
ft
to
A
lit
fi
8*
A
ft,
fifi,
Ife
448
CHINA INLAND MISSION PUBLICATIONS.
CHINESE-ENGLISH :Western Mandarin, Grainger
...
...
...
...
$5.00
CHINESE:China Inland Mission
Hymn
Book, paper
p(
J?
ijfc
o. 16
0.22
cloth
foreign paper
...
0.75
music
...
0.60
Course of Study for Chinese Evangelists, fifJUÎf.IfSU
0.12
Enduement
0.06
,,
,,
,,
A God
of
,,
,,
Power,
of Deliverances,
...
fib 3fr
^=f ]
jffc
jg
for...
...
0.06
f(l
ENGLISH:Islam
in
China
...
Thousand Miles
One
...
...
...
3.50
Glover...
...
...
2.80
paper covers...
...
...
0.75
...
...
...
0.75
...
...
...
1.50
of Miracle,
of China's Scholars,
Pastor Hsi, paper covers...
...
Life of Pastor Hsi, 2 vols. in one
Martyred Missionaries of the China Inland Mission
Annual Report
of
China Inland Mission
Retrospect, by Rev.
Pioneer
Marches
Work
in
of the
Hunan, Dorward
Day
Map
China, folding
on
Do.
Do.
Atlas of
China, one page
C.
I.
...
0.75
...
...
...
0.50
...
...
...
0.85
...
0.65
Mangtze, Edgar
Conditions in China
Present
of
J.
H. Taylor
1.25
...
...
...
...
rollers...
M. Telegraph Code
to a
0.70
12.00
...
...
...
province
...
...
12.00
...
...
6.00
5.00
ALSO BY THE SAME AUTHOR.
CHINESE-ENGLISH :Analytical Chiuese-Knglish Dictionary, 637 pages

Analytical Vocabulary of the
New
Testament, 418 pages
Sacred Edict with notes, 216 pages
The Fortunate Union,

Notes on
Book
St.
2.50
...
...
2.50
with copious notes
...
...
T.OO
...
0.25
...
0.12
...
0.06
...
0.50
...
...
...
VII
II to
...
...
Primer for teaching Chinese the Romanized system
ENGLISH
$8.00
...
Matthew's Gospel. Chapters
of Radicals
...
:-
Letters from an old Missionary to his
Nephew
CHINESE:Life of Rev.
J.
Hudson Taylor,
j|c
Life of Rev. C. H. Spurgeon, f]

Life of
George
Enlightenment
Miiller, ff
ft
ffi
for Preachers,
Children's
Hymn-book.
Do.
Do.
Lif e of Pastor Hsi,
flj
JL
Jg |J
To
be
Offerings,
35.
had direct from
the
0.12
0.17
>fg.
Jj|
jj;
fj
fjjfc
...
,,
...
Metrical Version of the Psalms, f$ J| $f
The Five
...
^ f$
Foreign
USE
...
fji
Chinese paper,
$f Jt
0.12
S- fr SE
CHINA INLAND MISSION, Shanghai,
PRESBYTERIAN MISSION PRESS,
...
0.20
...
0.50
...
0.12
^
BUSINESS
12
o.io
DEPARTMENT,
or
from
Shanghai.
the
~\\S^4*AA-A^t
&^*jJu^<
"~- v-û-^-^-o
O**
b^Cxr>vAx.
'"
<
V/O-T-OU
V
_^c^cxt^c_A*o
PLEASE
CARDS OR
SLIPS
UNIVERSITY
JL
1111
B3
1911
DO NOT REMOVE
FROM
THIS
OF TORONTO
POCKET
LIBRARY
Bailer, Frederick William

A Mandarin primer
8th ed. R*v. and enl.

A Mandarin Primer (1911)

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

A Mandarin Primer (1911)

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

A

Revised and Enlarged

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

THE CHINA INLAND MISSION

LONDON, PHILADELPHIA, TORONTO, MELBOURNE, SHANGHAI

MORGAN & SCOTT,

PATERNOSTER BUILDINGS, LONDON,

PREFACE TO EIGHTH EDITION.

book was printed

changes have taken place in China.

This has brought a

expressions into existence and has

who study Chinese

necessary for foreigners

meet these fresh requirements the book has been

Full details are given in the

Introduction, to which the reader

idioms- are dealt

of each Lesson, the

The Lesson thus

Elementary, AdIll Part I.

III. these are

words " See Lesson

referred to contains further illustra-

many words and phrases already given.

Reading Lessons follow every Exercise and Vocabulary.

arc intended to help to a good style in speaking and to make the

wide range, and

cases have been treated in a light vein

order to create and sustain interest.

the sense complete, or to secure a better sentence.

words are followed

large vocabulary of useful words ha,wider range of

only acquire a good idiom, but be also helped to judge

he has finished Part III.

the end of every five Lessons.

will be a great benefit to

Chinese as well as to read

Such should read " Writing with

R. following a character indicates

American PresAnalytical Chinese-English Dictionary (Shanghai

'h' in the spelling, and the Peking

of the New Literature, names of persons

Following the usage

with a double one.

III. are also printed as a separate

Chinese paper and published as a companion volume.

The Lessons have been

headings for convenience of reference

under subIndex added at the

means any idiom or construction may be

referred to with ease.

Exercises for Translation, and Key to them, are intended

him correct it by the Key then reverse the

This will give

words and idioms

and develop the power

imaginary Dialogue with a visitor 011 Christianity

In this and in all other parts of the

the words in the

corresponding Xnmerary Adjuncts, of

arrangement enables the student

to see the meaning of any given